BAC Product & Application Handbook Vol 1 - 2005

Product & Application Handbook
VOLUME I - 2005
Welcome...
.to the first edition of the BAC Product & Application
Handbook. We are excited about providing you with a vehicle that
combines industry critical knowledge with product application
details. This handbook reflects our commitment to facilitate your
application of our products, services, and technical resources to
meet project needs in a timely, efficient manner.
BAC has a rich history in the design and development of the
worlds largest array of evaporative cooling and ice thermal
storage products. I hope you find this publication to be a valuable
resource, and a service to the industry we live.
Sincerely,
Steve Duerwachter
President, Baltimore Aircoil Company
Contents
Baltimore Aircoil Company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B1
Introduction to Evaporative Cooling Products . . . . . . . . . . . . .C1
Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D1
Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D8
Series 1500 Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D34
FXT Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D52
Series V Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D64
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D85
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E1
Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . .E7
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E10
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E32
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . .E56
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E76
Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F1
Series V Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F7
CXV Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F35
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F58
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G1

Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G21
Remote Sump Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H1
Technical Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J1
Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J2
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J4
Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J6
Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) Certification . . . . . . . .J8
The Value of Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J10
Remote Tank Selection - Open Cooling Tower . . . . . . . . .J12
Remote Tank Selection - Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
or Evaporative Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J16
Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J20
Piping Considerations Maximum Fluid Velocity . . . . . .J55
Cooling Tower Pumping and Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J56
Friction Loss Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J101
Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J102
Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J113
Formulas and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J114
Psychrometric Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J115
Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J118
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J119
Water Quality Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J120
Maintenance Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J122
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J125
T
a
b
l
e

o
f

C
o
n
t
e
n
t
s
Table of Contents
A1
Handbook Resources
Color Coded Sections
Vertical Identification Bars
Sectional Icons
Open Cooling Towers
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Evaporative Consensers
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Products

Complete Product Brochures featuring
Product Introductions
Benefits
Construction Details
Custom Features & Options
Accessories
Engineering Data
Structural Support
Engineering Specifications
Technical Resources
Fold-Out Psychrometric Chart
B1
For nearly seven decades Baltimore Aircoil Company has been dedicated
to the development of innovative, cost effective heat transfer solutions for
its customers. This has established BAC as the global leader of factory
assembled evaporative heat rejection and thermal storage equipment.
Design
Ongoing investment in research and development, combined with sophisticated R&D
laboratory facilities enables BAC to consistently offer technology and products in advance
of new industry demands.
Selection
BAC offers the widest array of factory assembled evaporative heat rejection and
thermal storage equipment in the industry. Breadth of product enables BAC to provide its
customers optimized solutions with regard to their specific needs. Whether an application
calls for open or closed cooling circuits, axial or centrifugal fans, special materials of
construction or unique dimensional considerations, BAC has the solution.
Performance
All BAC products are engineered to minimize lifecycle costs through a combination of
low energy consumption and low maintenance. An extensive array of options addresses
such issues as low sound or low water consumption requirements.
Certification
All BAC cooling towers are independently certified by the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI)
in accordance with standard STD-201. This ensures published thermal capacities for BAC
cooling towers accurately reflect actual thermal performance, hence eliminating the need
for customers to conduct costly individual cooling tower testing.
B2
How can we help?
From employees to partners every action at BAC
centers on you, the customer. Our service philosophy
extends beyond customer service to embody a
total service approach. So from application to
installation to aftermarket needs, whether you
are working with our representatives, the
Product & Application Handbook or using
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com, BAC has a tool to help.
BAC Sales Channel
BAC employs the most extensive and
experienced network of manufacturers
representatives to provide you unrivalled
local support for your specific application
needs. Integrated globally, the BAC
network of representatives facilitates
design support for projects coordinated
on a local, national, or international scale.
BAC Product & Application
Handbook
A revolutionary tool for assisting with
equipment application and selection
requirements, it is the only place to find
critical industry technical and product
information together in one
convenient format.
www. BaltimoreAircoil.com
A proprietary online tool that allows access
to resources and education to assist product
evaluation, comparison and selection.
Product Information
BAC Selection Software
Equipment Specifications
Technical Articles
Rigging and Installation Manuals

E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
C1
Baltimore Aircoil Company Baltimore Aircoil Company
Evaporative cooling products minimize the energy consumption of the entire system by providing lower
operating temperatures than possible with comparably sized air-cooled equipment. BAC has a large selection
of evaporative cooling products to offer, each of which falls into one of these three main categories:
Open Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages D1 - D88
Open cooling towers are a proven and cost-effective method of cooling condenser water loops and industrial
processes. In operation, the condenser water (or process water) flows directly over the heat transfer surface
of the open cooling tower. As air is introduced into the tower, a fraction of this water is evaporated, cooling the
remaining water. BAC offers four distinct open cooling tower product lines.
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages E1 - E81
Closed circuit cooling towers keep the process fluid clean and contaminant free in a closed loop. This creates
two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with
the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the process fluid to be cooled circulates inside the coil.
During operation, heat is transferred from the warm fluid in the coil to the spray water, and then to the
atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates. In addition to chiller applications and industrial process
cooling, closed circuit cooling towers are often used in heat pump loops, where closed loop cooling is
preferred. BAC offers three distinct closed circuit cooling tower product lines,
Evaporative Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages F1 - F63
When applied to HVAC and light industrial systems, evaporative condensers provide lower condensing
temperatures and compressor horsepower savings of up to 15 percent compared with traditional systems. In
an evaporative condenser, refrigerant vapor is condensed in a coil, which is continually wetted on the outside
by a recirculating water system. Air is circulated over the coil, causing a small portion of the recirculating water
to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in the coil, causing it to condense. BAC offers two
distinct evaporative condenser product lines.
Evaporative Cooling Products
Need help deciding which
product to use?
Contact your local BAC
Representative for assistance.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
C2
...because temperature matters
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
D1
Baltimore Aircoil Company
Open cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the specific application will
largely determine which BAC Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The table on page D5 is intended as
a general guide. Specialized assistance is available through your local BAC Representative.
Principle of Operation
Open cooling towers reject heat from water-cooled systems to the atmosphere. Hot water from the system
enters the cooling tower and is distributed over the wet deck (heat transfer surface). Air is pulled or pushed
through the wet deck, causing a small portion of the water to evaporate. Evaporation removes heat from the
remaining water, which is collected in the cold water basin and returned to the system to absorb more heat.
Each open cooling tower line, although operating under the same basic principle of operation, is arranged a
little differently. See the schematics on page D5 for product specific details.
Configuration
There are two main configurations of factory assembled open cooling towers: crossflow and counterflow. In
crossflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the wet deck as air flows horizontally across it.
In counterflow cooling towers, the water flows vertically down the wet deck as air flows vertically up it.
Open Cooling Towers
Crossflow Configuration
Water Down
Air Across
Counterflow Configuration
Water Down
Air Up
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D2
Water Distribution System
Open cooling towers employ either
gravity distribution or pressurized spray
systems to distribute water over the wet
deck surface. Gravity distribution
systems, employed on BACs crossflow
cooling towers, feature hot water basins
mounted on top of the tower above the
wet deck. A series of metering orifices in
the floor of each hot water basin
distribute the water as a function of the
depth of the water in the basin. Gravity
distribution systems generally require
minimal pump head, can be inspected
while the unit is in operation and are
easy to access for routine maintenance
and service.
Spray distribution systems, employed on counterflow cooling towers, feature a series of pipes fitted with
spray nozzles mounted inside the tower above the wet deck. These systems typically require 2-7 psi of water
pressure at the water inlet and require the unit to be out of service for inspection and maintenance.
Gravity Distribution Basin
Spray Distribution
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
D3
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled cooling towers is provided by one or more mechanically
driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor horsepower of comparably sized centrifugal fan
units, offering significant lifecycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure ( 0.5),
making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter
than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of
optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units.
Induced Draft
The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the unit,
minimizing the impact of fan noise on nearby neighbors and providing maximum protection from fan icing with
units operating in sub-freezing conditions. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures long life and
minimizes maintenance requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft towers,
facilitating easy access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the
dry entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated discharge air.
Centrifugal Fan Axial Fan
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D4
Capacity Range
In the following table, product capacities are called out in terms of nominal tons and a flow range at
95F/85F/78F. A nominal cooling tower ton is defined as the capability to cool 3 gpm of water from a 95F
(35.0C) entering water temperature to an 85F (29.4C) leaving water temperature at a 78F (25.6C)
entering wet-bulb temperature. Nominal conditions are typical of conventional HVAC designs in most parts of
the country, but will not apply to all projects. BAC offers selection software to evaluate the performance of a
tower at any conditions; see page J6 for details.
All capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Maximum Entering Water Temperature
As previously stated, typical HVAC conditions call for an entering water temperature of approximately 95F
(35C). All BAC Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding temperatures of at least 120F (49C) with
standard fill materials. For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds 120F (49C), check
the following table to determine whether alternate fill materials are available for your project.
Typical Applications
A list of typical applications is provided on page D5 for your reference.
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
D5
Open Circuit Cooling Towers
Product Lines
Principle of
Operation
Configuration Crossflow Crossflow Crossflow
Water
Distribution
Gravity Gravity Gravity
Fan System Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Forced Draft
220 1,350 Nominal Tons 128 425 Nominal Tons 6 268 Nominal Tons
660 4,050 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 384 1,275 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 18 - 804 gpm at 95F/85F/78F
130F (54.4C) Std Fill; 120F (48.9C) Std Fill; 125F (51.7C) Std Fill;
135F (57.2C) w/Alternate Fill Material 135F (57.2C) w/Alternate Fill Material 140F (60.0C) w/Alternate Fill Material
Medium to large HVAC & industrial
applications
Medium HVAC & industrial applications Small HVAC & industrial applications
Replacement of field erected towers
w/basinless units
Counterflow unit replacements
Crossflow unit replacements
Tight enclosures & installations
requiring a single air inlet
Capacity Range
(Single Cell)
Maximum
Entering Water
Temperature
Typical
Applications
Series 3000 Series 1500 FXT
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D6
VTL VTO VT1
Counterflow Counterflow Counterflow
Pressurized Pressurized Pressurized
Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft
16 272 Nominal Tons 12 176 Nominal Tons 134 1,335 Nominal Tons
48 - 816 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 36 528 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 402 4,005 gpm at 95F/85F/78F
130F (54.4C) Std Fill; 130F (54.4C) Std Fill; 130F (54.4C) Std Fill;
170F (76.7C) w/Alternate Fill Materials 170F (76.7C) w/Alternate Fill Materials 170F (76.7C) w/Alternate Fill Materials
Small to medium HVAC & industrial
applications
Small HVAC & industrial applications
Medium to large HVAC & industrial
applications
Installations w/extremely low height
requirements
Indoor installations Indoor installations
Indoor installations High temperature industrial applications High temperature industrial applications
High temperature industrial applications
Tight enclosures & installations requiring a
single air inlet
single air inlet
single air inlet
Series V
Terrapins Play it
COOL in the New
Comcast Center!
November 24, 2002 marked the
beginning of a new era for the University
of Marylands mens basketball team.
With a National Championship under their
belts from the previous year, the Terps were eager to repeat history, but there were a few details they
wouldnt miss this time around. Gone were the wooden seats and balmy temperatures, recalls Chris
Stuchko, former Athletic Media Relations Associate for Maryland. Even with the record-setting crowd of
17,950 Terp basketball fans, the players ran out onto a cool and comfortable court, unlike what they
were used to in the past at Cole Fieldhouse. The team would now enjoy playing in an air-conditioned
arena, thanks to the construction of the Comcast Center located in the northeast edge of the College
Park campus. Baltimore Aircoil Company is proud to have installed four of their Series 3000 Cooling
Towers as part of the system cooling this innovative center.
The BAC Cooling Towers were shipped to the Comcast Center on September 24, 2001 and installed by
the Poole & Kent Company, a contracting firm located in Baltimore, MD. Each of the four Cooling
Towers are capable of producing 758 nominal tons of cooling, which is used in the enormous arena, an
academic support and career center, locker rooms, administrative offices, a University of Maryland
team shop, eateries, a gym used by 19 sports teams, weight rooms, and a wrestling room.
The BAC Series 3000 Cooling Towers are constructed from galvanized steel and FRP (fiberglass
reinforced polyester) casing panels for increased life expectancy. Each tower is gear driven. In
addition, all towers contain electric immersion heater elements to ensure that the basin water does not
freeze, as well as heater controls, bottom equalizers, and one 50 hp motor each.
The EASY CONNECT
Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN
Chamber design incorporates a

single bottom water inlet with a balancing chamber, ensuring that the water is evenly distributed to the
nozzles and strainer. This arrangement allows for all maintenance of the hot water distribution system
to be performed from the interior of the tower, rather than from the fan deck. Furthermore, this
innovative option reduces installation and field maintenance costs, through the elimination of overhead
piping.
All four Cooling Towers are CTI certified, as are all Series 3000 towers manufactured by BAC. The
Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) is a nonprofit, self-governing, technical association dedicated to
improving and standardizing measurements of evaporative cooling equipment. Simply stated, CTI
certification assures the customer they get what they pay for.
P
r
o
j
e
c
t

R
e
p
o
r
t
University of Maryland
D7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
Series3000
Open Cooling Towers
D8
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D9
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D11
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D13
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D15
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D18
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D21
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D29
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D31
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D85
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D9
Single Cell Capacity:
219 1,350 Nominal Tons
660 4,050 gpm at 95
F/85
F/78
F
Series 3000 Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide
range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental
concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance
requirements.
Series 3000 Cooling Towers
Low energy consumption
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Reliable year-round operation
Long service life
ASHRAE Standard 90.1 compliant
Five-year warranty on mechanical equipment
Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D10
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D11
Low Energy Consumption
Evaporative cooling equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it
provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving
natural resources and reducing environmental impact.
The Series 3000 provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:
High efficiency, low horsepower axial fans
High efficiency BACross
Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at

low air pressure drops
Variable Frequency Drives
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System available (see page D16 for details)

All units meet or exceed ASHRAE Standard 90.1 energy efficiency requirements.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and
drives factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Models 3728A through 31056A and 31132A through 31301A ship in two sections
to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Piping - The optional EASY CONNECT
Chamber
further reduces installation costs by eliminating overhead piping and piping support requirements
(see page D17 for details).
Easy Maintenance
Easy Cleaning The wet deck surface is elevated
above the sloped cold water basin floor to facilitate
flushing of dirt and debris from this critical area.
Hinged Access Doors Provide easy access to the
unit interior to adjust the make-up float valve,
clean the cold water basin and strainer, and service
the fan drive system.
Easy Maintenance -The optional EASY CONNECT
Chamber simplifies maintenance by allowing all routine maintenance of the water distribution system
to be performed from the unit interior. This option includes an integral strainer that collects dirt and
debris before reaching the hot water basins, keeping nozzles clean (see page D17 for details).
Benefits
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D12
Reliable Year-Round Operation
Drive System Backed by a
five-year fan drive and motor warranty, the
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train utilizes special

corrosion-resistant materials of construction
and state-of-the-art technology to ensure
ease of maintenance and reliable year-round
performance.
Separate Air Inlet Louvers Reduce the potential for scale build-up and damaging ice formations
at the air/water interface by providing a line of sight from the outside of the unit into the wet deck.
Long Service Life
Frame Construction Enables casing panels, critical links for long service life, to be constructed of
corrosion-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance, unit
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page D15 for construction options).
Series 3000 Cooling Tower (frame construction shown without FRP casing panels)
BALTIDRIVE

Power Train
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D14
Heavy-Duty Construction
Heavy-gauge steel frame
Designed to meet anchorage requirements
of UBC 1997, Importance Factor 1.0,
Seismic Zone 2B conditions and
30 psf wind loads
FRP Casing Panels
Corrosion resistant
Maintenance free
UV resistant finish
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
Premium quality, solid backed, multi-groove belt
Corrosion resistant cast aluminum sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour average life)
Cooling tower duty fan motor
Five-year motor and
drive warranty
Low HP Axial Fan
Quiet operation
Corrosion resistant aluminum
Steel covers in easy to remove sections
Low pump head gravity distribution basins
Large orifice, non-clog nozzles
BACross
Wet Deck Surface

with Integral Drift Eliminators
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
Impervious to rot, decay and biological attack
Flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84-77a
FRP Air Inlet Louvers
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
Cold Water Basin
Sloped cold water basin for easy cleaning
Suction strainer with anti-vortex hood
Adjustable water make-up assembly
Hinged Access Doors
(Not Shown)
Inward swinging door on each end wall
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D15
Construction Options
Standard Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel.
Casing panels and air inlet louvers are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester
(FRP).
Optional BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System:

The BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the cooling tower.
Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A Type 304 stainless steel cold water basin is provided. Seams between panels inside the cold water
basin are welded. The basin is leak tested at the factory and welded seams are provided with a
Five-Year leak-proof warranty.
Optional Stainless Steel Hot and Cold Water Basins:
Type 304 stainless steel hot water basins are provided in addition to the cold water basin
described above.
Optional JE PREMIER SERIES
Construction:
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. Seams between
panels inside the cold water basin are welded. The basin is leak tested at the factory and welded
seams are provided with a Five-Year leak-proof warranty. Casing panels and air inlet louvers are
constructed of corrosion and UV resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP). Each cooling tower
provided with the JE PREMIER SERIES
Construction is backed by a comprehensive

Louver-to-Louver
SM
Five-Year Warranty, which covers ALL components from the fan to the cold
water basin, from louver to louver, including the motor.
See page J4 for more details on the materials described above.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to reject unwanted heat from the system to the
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on the Series 3000 is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE
Power
Train*. This BAC engineered drive system consists of a specially designed powerband and two cast
aluminum sheaves located on minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life. A cooling
tower duty fan motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower
service, is provided and backed by BACs comprehensive Five-Year motor and fan drive warranty.
(*) Note: Model 31301A is provided with a gear fan drive system.
Custom Features and Options
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D16
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER
Fan Systemconsists of two

standard single-speed fan motors and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full
speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the
design horsepower. This configuration allows the
system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but
with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the
event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70%
capacity will be available from the low horsepower
motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and
wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings
are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb
temperatures.
Gear Drive System,
Close-Coupled Motor
A gear drive system is available as a fan drive option
on Series 3000 Cooling Towers. Both the gear drive
and couplings are selected with a 2.0 service factor.
Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft,
casehardened gears, self lubrication, and a single
piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships
completely installed and aligned.
Gear Drive System,
Externally Mounted Motor
A gear drive system with a TEFC motor mounted
outside the airstream is also available on Series 3000
Cooling Towers. A non-corrosive carbon-fiber
composite drive shaft with stainless steel hubs is
selected with a 2.0 service factor. The motor and
drive shaft ship separately for easy field installation.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
Gear Drive System, Close-Coupled Motor
Gear Drive System,
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D17
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by Series 3000 Cooling Towers make
them suitable for installation in most environments. For very sound
sensitive installations, the Series 3000 is available with a low sound fan
option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the
tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. The cooling tower
thermal performance with the low sound fan has been certified in
accordance with CTI Standard STD-201.
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and
rated sound attenuation is available for both the air inlet and discharge of Series 3000 Cooling Towers.
Basinless Unit Construction
The basinless unit construction option enables Series
3000 Cooling Towers to be directly applied to new or
existing concrete cold water basins. This custom
feature, available exclusively on BAC Series 3000 Cooling
Towers, reduces maintenance costs by eliminating the
integral basin from traditional units. It simplifies piping and
pumping requirements of multi-cell installations and
provides a cost-effective solution for many field-erected
cooling tower replacement projects.
EASY CONNECT
Piping Arrangement with

BALANCE CLEAN
Chamber
This exclusive BAC option reduces routine maintenance and simplifies
water inlet piping on the Series 3000. The BALANCE CLEAN
Chamber
features an integral strainer which prevents large debris from reaching the
hot water distribution basins. The BALANCE CLEAN
Chamber auto-
matically balances flow within each cell, eliminating the need for flow
balancing valves. The unique design of the water distribution system
enables all routine maintenance to be performed from the unit interior,
thereby eliminating the need to use the cooling tower fan deck as a
working surface to perform routine maintenance of the water distribution
system. A single water inlet connection, located on the side or bottom of
each unit, eliminates the need for overhead piping and piping supports.
Unit with intake and discharge
sound attenuation
Basinless Series 3000 Cooling Tower
on a concrete basin
Integral strainer, BALANCE
CLEAN
Chamber option
Optional EASY CONNECT
Piping Arrangement with

BALANCE CLEAN
Chamber
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D18
Ladder, Safety Cage, Gate and Handrails
In the event the owner requires easy access to the cooling
tower fan deck, the Series 3000 can be furnished with ladders
extending from the top of the unit to the base, as well as safety
cages, safety gates, and handrail packages. All components are
designed to meet OSHA requirements. All access to the top of
the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable
governmental occupational safety standards.
External Service Platforms
For external service, louver face platforms, access door
platforms and fan deck extensions can be added to the cooling
tower when the unit is purchased or as an aftermarket item.
Safety cages and safety gates are also available. All
components are designed to meet OSHA requirements.
Internal Walkway and
Service Platform
A galvanized steel internal walkway is
available to provide a permanent working
surface for easy access to the strainer,
outlet, and make-up water assembly. For
access to the motor and drive assemblies
on two-piece units, an internal ladder and
upper service platform with handrails is
available. Safety gates are available for
all handrail openings. All components are
designed to meet OSHA requirements.
Vibration Cutout Switch
A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to effectively protect against equipment failure due
to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide either a mechanical or
solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Additional contacts can be provided to either switch type to activate an alarm.
Accessories
Internal ladder and
service platform
Internal walkway
External platform at louver face
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D19
Basin Heaters
Cooling towers exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing
of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which maintain
+40F (4.4C) water temperature, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data
Electric Water Level Control Package
The electric water level control replaces the standard
mechanical makeup valve when a more precise
water level control is required. This package consists
of a conductance-actuated level control mounted in
the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Extended Lubrication Lines
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
Fittings are located inside the plenum area next to the access door.
High Temperature Wet Deck
If operation above 130F (54.4C) is anticipated, an optional high temperature wet deck material is
available which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 135F (57.2C).
Accessories
No. of Heaters kW per Heater No. of Heaters kW per Heater
3240A thru 3379A 2 6 2 9
3412A thru 3527A 2 8 2 12
3473A thru 3672A 2 10 2 14
3728A thru 31056A 2 12 2 15
3583A thru 3725A 2 14 2 18
31132A thru 31301A 2 14 2 20
0F (-17.8C) Ambient Heaters
MODEL NUMBERS
-20F (-28.9C) Ambient Heaters
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D20
Factory Mutual Approval
All multi-cell Series 3000 Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM)
Approved construction as an option.
Air Inlet Screens
Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over the
inlet louvers to prevent debris from entering the tower.
Basin Sweeper Piping
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of
preventing sediment from collecting in the cold water
basin of the tower. A complete piping system, including
nozzles, is provided in the tower basin for connection to
side stream filtration equipment (by others).
Side Outlet Depressed Sump
A side outlet depressed sump box is available for field installation below the base of the tower to
facilitate jobsite piping. The outlet connection is designed to mate with an ASME Class 150 flat face
flange. See the Connection Guide (page J2) for more information on standard and optional unit
connection types.
Velocity Recovery Stacks
Velocity recovery stacks are available on
the Series 3000 for incremental thermal
performance increases. This accessory can
be used to gain extra capacity in tight
layouts, while maintaining the same
footprint and unit horsepower, as well as
maintaining CTI certification. Field assembly
is required.
Velocity Recovery Stacks
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D21
Do not use for construction. Refer to factory certified dimensions. This brochure includes data current
at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. Up-to-date engineering data,
free product selection software, and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for tower with the water level in the
cold water basin at overflow. If a lower operating weight is
needed to meet design requirements, your local BAC
Sales Representative can provide additional assistance.
2. 31301A is supplied with a gear fan drive system as
standard.
3. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound
fan may have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.
4. Refer to page D24 for dimensional reference drawings.
5. Nominal tons of cooling respresents 3 gpm of water from a
95F entering water temperature to an 85F leaving water
temperature at a 78F entering wet-bulb temperature.
Engineering Data
Single Cell Unit
3240A 240 10 62,790 14,770 6,790 6,790
3272A 272 15 71,340 14,900 6,920 6,920 8'-5 3/4" 18'-0 1/2" 9'-3 5/8" 8'-7 3/4"
3299A 299 20 78,110 14,960 6,980 6,980
3333A 333 20 85,720 15,750 7,260 7,260
3358A 358 25 91,960 15,780 7,290 7,290 8'-5 3/4" 18'-0 1/2" 10'-7 5/8" 9'-11 3/4"
3379A 379 30 97,400 15,830 7,340 7,340
3412A 412 25 103,700 18,580 8,420 8,420
3436A 436 30 109,830 18,630 8,470 8,470
3455A 455 25 112,250 19,480 8,740 8,740
3482A 482 30 118,880 19,530 8,790 8,790 9'-9 1/4" 20'-0 1/2" 12'-1 1/8" 11'-3 3/4"
3527A 527 40 130,160 19,690 8,950 8,950
3473A 473 25 118,870 23,090 10,190 10,190
3501A 501 30 125,900 23,140 10,240 10,240
3552A 552 30 136,170 25,690 10,800 10,800
3604A 604 40 149,090 25,850 10,960 10,960
3648A 648 50 159,950 25,860 10,970 10,970
3672A 672 60 166,020 27,060 12,180 12,180
3728A 728 40 178,860 32,060 13,770 8,720
3781A 781 50 191,890 32,070 13,780 8,730 11'-9 3/4" 21'-6 1/2" 16'-4 7/8" 15'-5 1/2"
3828A 828 60 203,230 32,290 13,990 8,940
3872A 872 50 206,630 35,030 14,500 8,800
3923A 923 60 218,840 35,250 14,710 9,010 11'-9 3/4" 21'-6 1/2" 19'-0 7/8" 18'-1 1/2"
3970A 970 75 230,080 36,530 16,000 10,300
3985A 985 60 229,950 40,240 15,560 9,460
31056A 1056 75 246,700 40,330 15,650 9,550
3583A 583 25 143,950 30,300 12,070 12,070
3618A 618 30 152,460 30,350 12,120 12,120
3676A 676 40 166,920 30,510 12,280 12,280
3725A 725 50 179,080 30,520 12,290 12,290
31132A 1132 75 267,880 41,290 16,610 10,230 13'-11 1/8" 24'-0 1/2" 19'-2 7/8" 18'-1 1/2"
31213A 1213 75 282,010 44,300 17,550 10,720
31301A
2
1301 100 302,580 46,590 19,840 13,010
DIMENSIONS
4
L W H
3
A OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
WEIGHTS (lbs)
MODEL
NUMBER
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
5
MOTOR
HP
FAN
(CFM)
11'-9 3/4" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-2 1/8" 11'-3 3/4"
9'-11 3/4" 10'-9 1/8" 20'-0 1/2" 9'-9 1/4"
11'-9 3/4" 21'-6 1/2" 10'-10 1/8" 9'-11 3/4"
13'-11 1/8" 24'-0 1/2" 21'-10 7/8" 20'-9 1/2"
13'-11 1/8" 24'-0 1/2' 12'-3 1/8" 11'-3 3/4"
11'-9 3/4" 21'-6 1/2" 21'-8 7/8" 20'-9 1/2"
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D22
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for tower with the water level in the
cold water basin at overflow. If a lower operating weight is
needed to meet design requirements, your local BAC
Sales Representative can provide additional assistance.
2. 31301A-2 is supplied with a gear fan drive system
as standard.
3. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound
fan may have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.
4. Refer to page D24 for dimensional reference drawings.
Double Cell Unit
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
3240A-2 480 (2) 10 125,580 29,540 13,580 6,790
3272A-2 544 (2) 15 142,680 29,800 13,840 6,920 17'-2" 18'-0 1/2" 9'-3 5/8" 8'-7 3/4"
3299A-2 598 (2) 20 156,220 29,920 13,960 6,980
3333A-2 666 (2) 20 171,440 31,500 14,520 7,260
3358A-2 716 (2) 25 183,920 31,560 14,580 7,290 17'-2" 18'-0 1/2" 10'-7 5/8" 9'-11 3/4"
3379A-2 758 (2) 30 194,800 31,660 14,680 7,340
3412A-2 824 (2) 25 207,400 37,160 16,840 8,420
3436A-2 872 (2) 30 219,660 37,260 16,940 8,470
3455A-2 910 (2) 25 224,500 38,960 17,480 8,740
3482A-2 964 (2) 30 237,760 39,060 17,580 8,790 19'-9" 20'-0 1/2" 12'-1 1/8" 11'-3 3/4"
3527A-2 1,054 (2) 40 260,320 39,380 17,900 8,950
3473A-2 946 (2) 25 237,740 46,180 20,380 10,190
3501A-2 1,002 (2) 30 251,800 46,280 20,480 10,240
3552A-2 1,104 (2) 30 272,340 51,380 21,600 10,800
3604A-2 1,208 (2) 40 298,180 51,700 21,920 10,960
3648A-2 1,296 (2) 50 319,900 51,720 21,940 10,970
3672A-2 1,344 (2) 60 332,040 54,120 24,360 12,180
3728A-2 1,456 (2) 40 357,720 64,120 27,540 8,720
3781A-2 1,562 (2) 50 383,780 64,140 27,560 8,730 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 16'-4 7/8" 15'-5 1/2"
3828A-2 1,656 (2) 60 406,460 64,580 27,980 8,940
3872A-2 1,744 (2) 50 413,260 70,060 29,000 8,800
3923A-2 1,846 (2) 60 437,680 70,500 29,420 9,010 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 19'-0 7/8" 18'-1 1/2"
3970A-2 1,940 (2) 75 460,160 73,060 32,000 10,300
3985A-2 1,970 (2) 60 459,900 80,480 31,120 9,460
31056A-2 2,112 (2) 75 493,400 80,660 31,300 9,550
3583A-2 1,166 (2) 25 287,900 60,600 24,140 12,070
3618A-2 1,236 (2) 30 304,920 60,700 24,240 12,120
3676A-2 1,352 (2) 40 333,840 61,020 24,560 12,280
3725A-2 1,450 (2) 50 358,160 61,040 24,580 12,290
31132A-2 2,264 (2) 75 535,760 82,580 33,220 10,230 28'-0 3/4" 24'-0 1/2" 19'-2 7/8" 18'-1 1/2"
31213A-2 2,426 (2) 75 564,020 88,600 35,100 10,720
31301A-2
2
2,602 (2) 100 605,160 93,180 39,680 13,010
DIMENSIONS
4
L W H
3
A OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
WEIGHTS (lbs)
MODEL
NUMBER
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
5
MOTOR
HP
FAN
(CFM)
23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-2 1/8" 11'-3 3/4"
9'-11 3/4" 10'-9 1/8" 20'-0 1/2" 19'-9"
23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 10'-10 1/8" 9'-11 3/4"
28'-0 3/4" 24'-0 1/2" 21'-10 7/8" 20'-9 1/2"
28'-0 3/4" 24'-0 1/2' 12'-3 1/8" 11'-3 3/4"
23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 21'-8 7/8" 20'-9 1/2"
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D23
Engineering Data
Notes:
1. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary with the design flow rate.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 3 and smaller are MPT, and connections 4 and larger are beveled for
welding and grooved to suit a mechanical coupling.
3. On double cell units, connections are the same size but are located on both ends of the unit.
B C D E F G J
3240A
3272A 8 1/16" 5'-8 1/4" 10'-4 1/2" 7'-1 1/4" 1/4" 4'-2 7/8" 8'-8 1/4" 1-0" (2) 6" 8" 8"
3299A
3333A
3358A 8 1/16" 6'-1 1/4" 10'-4 1/2" 7'-1 1/4" 1/4" 4'-2 7/8" 8'-8 1/4" 1-0" (2) 6" 8" 8"
3379A
3412A
3436A
3455A
3482A 9 1/8" 6'-6 3/4" 11'-4 1/2" 8'-1 1/4" 1-1/4" 4'-10 5/8" 9'-11 3/4" 1-1/2" (2)6" 10" 10"
3527A
3473A
3501A
3552A
3604A
3648A
3672A
3728A
3781A 9 1/8" 10'-4 1/2" 12'-1 1/2" 8'-10 1/4" 5'-10 7/8" 12'-0 1/4" 1-1/2" (2) 8" 12" 12"
3828A
3872A
3923A 9 1/8" 13-0 1/2" 12'-1 1/2" 8'-10 1/4" 5'-10 7/8" 12'-0 1/4" 1-1/2" (2) 8" 12" 12"
3970A
3985A
31056A
3583A
3618A
3676A
3725A
31132A 9 5/8" 13'-0 1/2" 13'-4 1/2" 10'-1 1/4" 5/8" 6'-11 5/16" 14'-1 5/8" 2" (2) 10" 14" 14"
31213A
31301A
5'-10 7/8" 1-1/2" 1-1/4"
6'-11 9/16" 14'-1 5/8"
5'-10 7/8" 12'-0 1/4"
1-1/4" 5'-10 7/8"
5/8"
12'-0 1/4"
9 1/8"
CONNECTION SIZES
1,3
2" (2) 10" 14" 14"
1-1/2" (2) 8" 12" 12" 9 1/8" 15'-8 1/2" 12'-1 1/2" 8'-10 1/4"
9 5/8" 15'-8 1/2" 13'-4 1/2" 10'-1 1/4"
6'-6 3/4" 12'-1 1/2" 8'-10 1/4"
8"
(2) 8" 10" 10"
1-1/2" (2) 6" 8"
9 1/8" 6'-6 3/4" 12'-1 1/2" 8'-10 1/4"
10" 9 1/8" 6'-6 3/4" 13'-4 1/2" 10'-1 1/4" 5/8" 6'-11 5/16" 14'-1 5/8" 1-1/2" (2) 8" 10"
1-1/2" (2) 8" 10"
8 1/16" 6'-1 1/4" 11'-4 1/2" 8'-1 1/4"
SINGLE
INLET OUTLET
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4" 4'-10 5/8" 9'-11 3/4"
10"
12'-0 1/4"
MODEL
NUMBER
DIMENSIONS
MAKE-UP
WATER
TOP
INLET
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D24
Note:
3728A thru 31056A and 31132A thru 31301A ship in two sections per cell.
The top section is the heaviest and tallest.
Top section heights are:
3728A thru 3970A: 10' 3-18"
31132A: 10' 11-18"
3985A thru 31056A: 11' 7-18"
31213A: 12' 3-18"
31301A: 12' 6-12"
Double Cell Unit Single Cell Unit
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D25
Concrete Basin Engineering Data
for Optional Basinless Units
Note:
1. Purchaser to design, construct and furnish basin
(including anchor bolts) in accordance with requirements
given. Purchaser must also supply sump, overflow, drain,
cleanout and water make-up to suit requirements.
2. All anchor bolts shall be 3/4 diameter, 1-1/2 projection (+/- 1/4),
fully threaded. Bolt to have one nut and washer. Anchor bolt and
column bearing point locations and elevations must be
maintained +/- 1/8.
3. Pier dimensions shown are minimum bearing surfaces required
for the tower structure and do not include corner chamfers on the
concrete piers.
4. Wet deck to be located below the operating water level.
(see section A-A, next page)
5. Maximum operating weight does not include concrete basin or
water retained in the basin.
Single Cell Unit
MODEL
NUMBER
OPERATING
LOAD
VERTICAL
MAXIMUM
OPERATING
WEIGHT (lbs)
A B C D
3240A 2,420 9,690
3272A 2,460 9,820
3299A 2,470 9,880
3333A 2,670 10,670
3358A 2,680 10,700
3379A 2,690 10,750
3412A 3,130 12,510
3436A 3,140 12,560
3455A 3,350 13,410
3482A 3,370 13,460
3527A 3,410 13,620
3473A 3,770 15,070
3501A 3,780 15,120
3552A 4,100 16,140
3604A 4,140 16,570
3648A 4,150 16,580
3672A 4,450 17,780
3728A 5,640 22,570
3781A 5,650 22,580
3828A 5,700 22,800
3872A 6,390 25,540
3923A 6,440 25,760
3970A 6,760 27,040
3985A 7,690 30,750
31056A 7,710 30,840
3583A 3,100 18,630
3618A 3,110 18,680
3676A 3,140 18,840
3725A 3,140 18,850
31132A 4,940 29,620 14'-7 1/8" 24'-4 1/2" 7'-8 1/4" 9'-0"
31213A 5,440 32,630
31301A 5,820 34,920
9'-1 3/4" 18'-4 1/2" 9'-2 1/4" N/A
9'-2 1/4" N/A
10'-5 1/4" 20'-4 1/2" 10'-2 1/4" N/A
9'-1 3/4" 18'-4 1/2"
10'-5 1/4" 20'-4 1/2" 10'-2 1/4" N/A
12'-5 3/4" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
12'-5 3/4" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
12'-5 3/4" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
12'-5 3/4" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
12'-5 3/4" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
14'-7 1/8" 24'-4 1/2" 7'-8 1/4" 9'-0"
14'-7 1/8" 24'-4 1/2" 7'-8 1/4" 9'-0"
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D26
Models 3240A thru Models 31056A
Models 3583A thru Models 31301A
All Models
AIR IN AIR IN
6" MIN.
7

5
/
8
"
1
0

5
/
8
"

M
I
N
.
3" MIN.
(TYP)
3
"

M
I
N
.
(
T
Y
P
)
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
7

5
/
8
"
1
0

5
/
8
"

M
I
N
.
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
C
(6) 3/4" DIA.
ANCHOR BOLTS
B

A
A A
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
8

1
/
4
"
1
1

1
/
4
"

M
I
N
.
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
C
B

A
6"
MIN.
C
6"
MIN.
8

1
/
4
"
1
1

1
/
4
"

M
I
N
.
3" MIN.
(TYP)
3
"

M
I
N
.
(
T
Y
P
)
D
A A
AIR IN AIR IN
(8) 3/4" DIA.
ANCHOR BOLTS
1
'-
6
"
SECTION A-A
1
'-
3
"
TOP OF PIERS
AND BASE OF
COOLING TOWER
OPERATING
WATER LEVEL
BASIN
DEPTH
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1
"
CONCRETE BASIN WALL SLOPE
BASIN
DEPTH
TOP OF PIERS AND
BASE OF COOLING
TOWER
OPERATING
WATER LEVEL
SEE DETAIL A
1
'-
6
"
SECTION A-A
1
'-
3
"
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D27
Concrete Basin Engineering
Data for Basinless Units
Double Cell Unit
MODEL
NUMBER
OPERATING
LOAD
VERTICAL
MAXIMUM
OPERATING
WEIGHT (lbs)
A B C D E
3240A-2 2,420 19,380
3272A-2 2,460 19,640
3299A-2 2,470 19,760
3333A-2 2,670 21,340
3358A-2 2,680 21,400
3379A-2 2,690 21,500
3412A-2 3,130 25,020
3436A-2 3,140 25,120
3455A-2 3,350 26,820
3482A-2 3,370 26,920
3527A-2 3,410 27,240
3473A-2 3,770 30,140
3501A-2 3,780 30,240
3552A-2 4,100 32,820
3604A-2 4,140 33,140
3648A-2 4,150 33,160
3672A-2 4,450 35,560
3728A-2 5,640 45,140
3781A-2 5,650 45,160
3828A-2 5,700 45,600
3872A-2 6,390 51,080
3923A-2 6,440 51,520
3970A-2 6,760 54,080
3985A-2 7,690 61,500
31056A-2 7,710 61,680
3583A-2 3,100 37,260
3618A-2 3,110 37,360
3676A-2 3,140 37,680
3725A-2 3,140 37,700
31132A-2 4,940 59,240 28'-8 3/4" 24'-4 1/2" 7'-8 1/4" 9'-0" 13'-2 5/8"
31213A-2 5,440 65,260
31301A-2 5,820 69,840
N/A
28'-8 3/4" 24'-4 1/2" 7'-8 1/4" 9'-0"
7'-10 1/2"
17'-10" 18'-4 1/2" 9'-2 1/4" N/A 7'-10 1/2"
17'-10" 18'-4 1/2" 9'-2 1/4" N/A
9'-2"
20'-5" 20'-4 1/2" 10'-2 1/4" N/A 9'-2"
20'-5" 20'-4 1/2" 10'-2 1/4" N/A
11'-2 1/2"
24'-6" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A 11'-2 1/2"
24'-6" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
11'-2 1/2"
24'-6" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A 11'-2 1/2"
24'-6" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4" N/A
13'-2 5/8"
11'-2 1/2"
28'-8 3/4" 24'-4 1/2" 7'-8 1/4" 9'-0" 13'-2 5/8"
24'-6" 21'-10 1/2" 10'-11 1/4"
Note:
1. Purchaser to design, construct and furnish basin
(including anchor bolts) in accordance with requirements
given. Purchaser must also supply sump, overflow, drain,
cleanout and water make-up to suit requirements.
2. All anchor bolts shall be 3/4 diameter, 1 1-1/2 projection
(+/- 1/4), fully threaded. Bolt to have one nut and washer.
Anchor bolt and column bearing point locations and elevations
must be maintained +/- 1/8.
3. Pier dimensions shown are minimum bearing surfaces required
for the tower structure and do not include corner chamfers on the
concrete piers.
4. Base of the cooling tower to be located below the water.
5. Maximum operating weight does not include concrete basin or
water retained in the basin.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D28
Models 3240A-2 thru Models 31056A-2
Models 3583A-2 thru Models 31301A-2
All Models
6" MIN.
7

5
/
8
"
1
0

5
/
8
"

M
I
N
.
3" MIN.
(TYP)
3
"

M
I
N
.
(
T
Y
P
)
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
7

5
/
8
"
1
0

5
/
8
"

M
I
N
.
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
C
(12) 3/4" DIA.
ANCHOR BOLTS
B

A
A A
9

3
/
4
"

E

E
AIR IN AIR IN
AIR IN AIR IN
6"
MIN.
8

1
/
4
"
1
1

1
/
4
"

M
I
N
.
3" MIN.
(TYP)
3
"

M
I
N
.
(
T
Y
P
)
PLAN VIEW OF BASIN
8

1
/
4
"
1
1

1
/
4
"

M
I
N
.
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
1'-5 7/8" MIN.
1'-2 7/8"
C
B

A
6"
MIN.
C D
A A
AIR IN
(16) 3/4" DIA.
ANCHOR BOLTS
AIR IN

E
1
1
"

E
AIR IN AIR IN
1
'-
6
"
SECTION A-A
1
'-
3
"
TOP OF PIERS
AND BASE OF
COOLING TOWER
OPERATING
WATER LEVEL
BASIN
DEPTH
SEE DETAIL A
DETAIL A
1
"
CONCRETE BASIN WALL SLOPE
BASIN
DEPTH
TOP OF PIERS AND
BASE OF COOLING
TOWER
OPERATING
WATER LEVEL
SEE DETAIL A
1
'-
6
"
SECTION A-A
1
'-
3
"
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D29
The recommended support arrangement for the Series 3000 Cooling Tower consists of parallel I-beams
positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to
raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower. The Series 3000
may also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations shown in Plan A or Plan C. A minimum
bearing surface of twelve (12) square inches must be provided under each of the concentrated load
points (See Note 7, next page). To support a Series 3000 Cooling Tower on columns, or in an alternate
steel support arrangement, consult your BAC Representative.
See notes, next page.
Structural Support
L1 L2 W A B C D E
3240A 6,790 14,770 3,693
3272A 6,920 14,900 3,725 8'-5 3/4" 17'-2" 18'-0 1/2" 9'-4" 16'-4 1/2" 1 1/8" 8'-3 1/2" 4 3/4"
3299A 6,980 14,960 3,740
3333A 7,260 15,750 3,938
3358A 7,290 15,780 3,945 8'-5 3/4" 17'-2" 18'-0 1/2" 9'-4" 16'-4 1/2" 1 1/8" 8'-3 1/2" 4 3/4"
3379A 7,340 15,830 3,958
3412A 8,420 18,580 4,645
3436A 8,470 18,630 4,658
3455A 8,740 19,480 4,870
3482A 8,790 19,530 4,883 9'-9 1/4" 19'-9" 20'-0 1/2" 11'-4" 18'-4 1/2" 1 1/8" 9'-7" 4 3/4"
3527A 8,950 19,690 4,923
3473A 10,190 23,090 5,773
3501A 10,240 23,140 5,785
3552A 10,800 25,690 6,423
3604A 10,960 25,850 6,463 11'-9 3/4" 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-10" 19'-10 1/2" 1 1/8" 11'-7 1/2" 4 3/4"
3648A 10,970 25,860 6,465
3672A 12,180 27,060 6,765
3728A 13,770 32,060 8,015
3781A 13,780 32,070 8,018 11'-9 3/4" 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-10" 19'-10 1/2" 1 1/8" 11'-7 1/2" 4 3/4"
3828A 13,990 32,290 8,073
3872A 14,500 35,030 8,758
3923A 14,710 35,250 8,813 11'-9 3/4" 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-10" 19'-10 1/2" 1 1/8" 11'-7 1/2" 4 3/4"
3970A 16,000 36,530 9,133
3985A 15,560 40,240 10,060
31056A 15,650 40,330 10,083
3583A 12,070 30,300 7,575
3618A 12,120 30,350 7,588
3676A 12,280 30,510 7,628 13'-11 1/8" 28'-0 3/4" 24'-0 1/2" 15'-4" 22'-4 1/2" 1 7/16" 13'-8 1/4" 5 3/8"
3725A 12,290 30,520 7,630
31132A 16,610 41,290 10,323 13'-11 1/8" 28'-0 3/4" 24'-0 1/2" 15'-4" 22'-4 1/2" 1 7/16" 13'-8 1/4" 5 3/8"
31213A 17,550 44,300 11,075
31301A 19,840 46,590 11,648
22'-4 1/2" 1 7/16" 13'-8 1/4" 5 3/8" 13'-11 1/8" 28'-0 3/4" 24'-0 1/2" 15'-4"
19'-10 1/2" 1 1/8" 11'-7 1/2" 4 3/4" 11'-9 3/4" 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-10"
19'-10 1/2" 1 1/8" 11'-7 1/2" 4 3/4" 11'-9 3/4" 23'-10" 21'-6 1/2" 12'-10"
4 3/4" 11'-4"
WT. AT BOLT
HOLE
LOCATIONS
18'-4 1/2" 1 1/8" 9'-7"
WEIGHTS (LBS.)
9'-9 1/4" 19'-9" 20'-0 1/2"
SHIPPING
1
OPERATING
1,2
MODEL
NUMBER
DIMENSIONS
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D30
Notes:
1. Weights are for a single cell. To obtain weights
for multi-cell units, multiply by the number
of cells.
2. Operating weight and weight loading are for a
single cell tower with water at overflow level in
the cold water basin.
3. Support beams and anchor bolts to be selected
and installed by parties other than BAC.
4. All support steel must be level at the top.
5. Beams must be selected in accordance with
accepted structural practice. Maximum
deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of
span, not to exceed 1/2 inch.
6. All single and double cell units can be furnished
with optional vibration isolation rail packages,
when required, to be installed between the tower
and supporting steel. The BAC standard
vibration isolation rail package is designed for
support Plan A for single cell units and support
Plan C for double cell units. Plan B rails are
available upon request. When determining the
length of the supporting steel, allow for the
length of the vibration rails, as they are
sometimes longer than the cooling tower
dimensions shown.
7. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell
towers, the isolators must be located under the
support steel, not between the support steel and
the cooling towers.
Double Cell Unit
Plan A Plan B
Plan C
Single Cell Unit
3/4" DIA. MOUNTING HOLES
(4 REQUIRED MODELS 324OA THRU 3725A)
(16 REQUIRED MODELS 3728A THRU 31301A)
INLET

L2
ADDITIONAL
ANCHOR BOLT
MODELS 3728A
THRU 31301A
3
C
D
B0LTS
UNIT OVERALL
W
AIR
INLET
AIR
INLET
AIR
UNIT OUTLINE
INLET
AIR
C
D
BOLTS
C
L
C
L
B0LTS
C
L
A
E
ADDITIONAL
ANCHOR BOLT
MODELS 3728A
THRU 31301A
UNIT OUTLINE
C
AIR
INLET
BOLTS
UNIT OVERALL
W
BOLTS
AIR
INLET
C
3
A
D
C
L
C
L
L1
INLET
AIR
INLET
5'2 5/8"
AIR
C
C
C
L
C
L
B
W
D
BOLTS
REQUIRED ON MODELS
3728A THRU 31301A
BOLTS
UNIT OUTLINE
UNIT OVERALL
WEIGHT GIVEN ON
PAGE D29 IS AT
MIDPOINT BETWEEN
TWO LOCATIONS
S
e
r
i
e
s

3
0
0
0
D31
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install _____ factory-assembled,
induced draft, crossflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications,
schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall
not exceed approximately _____ ft (mm) long X ______ ft (mm)
wide X _____ ft (mm) high. The total connected fan horsepower
shall not exceed _____ HP (kW). The cooling tower(s) shall be
Baltimore Aircoil Model ______.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted
by the manufacturer to cool _____ US gpm (lps) of water from
______ F(C) to _____ F(C) at _____ F(C) entering
wet-bulb temperature. Additionally, the thermal performance shall
be certified by the Cooling Technology Institute in accordance
with CTI Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking such
certification, a field acceptance test shall be conducted within the
warranty period in accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code
ATC-105, by the Cooling Technology Institute or other qualified
independent third party testing agency. Manufacturers
performance guarantees or performance bonds without CTI
Certification or independent field thermal performance test shall
not be accepted. The cooling tower(s) shall comply with the
energy efficiency requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless
otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a
protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
(Alternate) 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
structural members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235

(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step
(clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically
sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the
substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and
monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
(Alternate) 1.3 JE PREMIER SERIES
Construction: All steel

panels and structural members, including the structural frame,
hot and cold water basins, distribution covers, fan deck and fan
cylinder shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel and
assembled with Type 304 stainless steel nut and bolt fasteners.
All factory seams in the cold water basin shall be welded to
ensure watertight assembly and welded seams shall be
warranted against leaks for five (5) years.
The entire cooling tower, including fan motor, drive system,
bearings, and structure, shall be backed by a comprehensive
Louver-to-Louver
SM
Five-Year warranty.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The cooling tower manufacturer shall
have a Management System certified by an accredited registrar
as complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services.
1.5 Wind and Seismic Forces: The cooling tower shall be
suitable for applications requiring equipment anchorage to resist
wind loads of up to 30 psf and seismic forces of Seismic Zone
2B, Importance Factor 1.0, per the 1997 Uniform Building Code.
2.0 Construction Details
2.1 Structure: The cooling tower shall be constructed with a
sturdy structural frame designed to transmit all wind, seismic and
mechanical loads to the equipment anchorage. The frame shall
be constructed of heavy-gauge steel angles and channels.
2.2 Casing Panels: Casing panels shall be constructed of
corrosion and UV-resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP)
to minimize maintenance requirements and prolong equipment
life.
(Alternate) 2.2 FM approval (Multi-cell): The cooling towers shall
be constructed with galvanized steel casing panels and louvers
that shall meet the requirements of FM.
(Alternate) 2.2 FM Approval (Multi-cell): The cooling towers shall
be constructed with Type 304 stainless steel casing panels and
louvers that shall meet the requirements of FM.
2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be constructed
of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural members. Basin shall
include a depressed center section with drain/clean-out
connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be
sloped toward the depressed center section to facilitate cleaning.
Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve
with large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment of the
operating water level.
(Alternate) 2.3 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge Type 304 stainless steel panels and
structural members. All factory seams shall be welded to ensure
watertight construction, and welded seams shall be warranted
against leaks for a period of five (5) years from date of shipment.
Basin shall include a depressed center section with drain/
clean-out connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface
shall be sloped toward the depressed center section to facilitate
cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a brass
make-up valve with large diameter plastic float for easy
adjustment of the operating water level.
2.4 Water Outlet: The water outlet connection shall be beveled
for welding and grooved for mechanical coupling or bolt hole
circle designed to accept an ASME Class 150 flat face flange.
The outlet shall be provided with large-area lift out strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution
nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment.
The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same
materials as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal
corrosion.
See our website at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com for an electronic copy of product engineering specifications.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D32
2.5 Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basins shall
be the open gravity type and constructed of heavy-gauge, G-235
hot-dip galvanized steel. Basin weirs and plastic metering orifices
shall be provided to assure even distribution of the water over the
wet deck surface. Lift-off distribution covers shall be constructed
of heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel and designed to
withstand a 50 psf live load or 200 pound concentrated load.
2.6 EASY CONNECT
Piping Arrangement with BALANCE

CLEAN
Chamber (optional): Each tower cell shall be furnished

with a single water inlet connection complete with the means to
automatically balance flow rates to the hot water basins. Internal
piping shall include an integral pre-strainer such that routine
maintenance of the hot water distribution system can be per-
formed from the unit interior.
3.0 Mechanical Equipment
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow with aluminum
alloy blades selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal
performance with minimal sound levels. Air shall discharge
through a fan cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and
minimum tip clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the
fan cylinder shall be equipped with a conical, non-sagging
removable fan guard.
3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported by
heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with
moisture proof seals and integral slinger collars, designed for a
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by a one-piece,
multi-groove, solid back V-type powerband with taper lock
sheaves designed for 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower.
The powerband shall be constructed of neoprene reinforced
polyester cord and be specifically designed for cooling tower
service.
3.4 Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials to minimize maintenance and
ensure maximum drive and powerband operating life.
3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air over
(TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on winding, shafts and
bearings.
(Alternate) 3.5 Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
air over (TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type
designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on winding, shafts and
bearings. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed per
NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
3.6 Mechanical Equipment Warranty: The fan(s), fan shaft(s),
sheaves, bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan motor
shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of five (5) years from date of shipment.
3.7 ENERGY-MISER
Fan System (optional): Two-single speed

fan motors, one sized for full speed and load, the other sized for
2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 the full load horsepower shall
be provided in each cell for capacity control and stand-by
protection from drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not
an acceptable alternative.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface
and Drift Eliminators
4.1 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface
and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from self-
extinguishing (per ASTM D-568) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having
a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be impervious
to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The wet deck shall be
suitable for entering water temperatures up to 130F. The wet
deck surface shall be manufactured, tested and rated by the
cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated above the cold
water floor to facilitate cleaning.
5.0 Air Inlet Louvers
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air Inlet louvers shall be separate from the
wet deck surface and removable to provide easy access for
inspection of the air/water interface at the louver face. Louvers
shall prevent water splash out during fan cycling and be
constructed of maintenance free, corrosion and UV resistant,
fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
6.0 Access
6.1 Plenum Access: Two hinged access doors shall be provided
for access into the plenum section.
7.0 Sound
7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local environment,
the maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50 ft from
the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the
sound levels detailed below.
(Alternate) 7.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local
environment, the cooling tower shall be furnished with a low
sound fan. The thermal performance of the cooling tower when
furnished with the low sound fan shall be certified by the Cooling
Technology Institute in accordance with paragraph 1.2 of this
specification. Maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50
ft from the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not
exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
L
a
y
o
u
t

G
u
i
d
e
l
i
n
e
s
D33
Layout Guidelines Available on the Web!
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
Open cooling towers, closed circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers all depend upon an
adequate supply of fresh, ambient air to provide design capacity. The layout guidelines available at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com provide minimum spacing requirements for each BAC evaporative cooling
product. Additional guidance is available through your local BAC Representative.
Layout guidelines include easy to read tables, formulas, and examples for the most common layout
configurations. If you have questions or encounter a layout not covered in these guidelines, please contact
your local BAC Representative for assistance.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
Series1500
Open Cooling Towers
D34
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D35
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D37
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D43
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D35
128 425 Nominal Tons
384 1,284 gpm at 95
F/85
F/78
F
Series 1500 Cooling Towers minimize the operating, installation, and maintenance costs associated with
both new and replacement cooling tower projects. The Series 1500 delivers independently verified, fully
rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design
features minimize the costs associated with enclosures, support requirements, electrical service, piping,
and rigging.
Series 1500 Cooling Towers
Ideal replacement unit
Single side air inlet
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
Series 1500 Open Cooling Towers
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D36
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D37
Ideal Replacement Unit
Support Steel Units are designed to mount
directly on existing support steel of many cooling
towers (both crossflow and counterflow).
Electrical Service Fan motor configurations
can be supplied to match existing wiring.
Enclosures Units fit in most existing
enclosures with little or no modifications due to
the single air inlet design.
provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural resources
and reducing environmental impact.
The Series 1500 provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:

ENERGY-MISER
Fan System available (see page D42 for details)

Benefits
Counterflow Cooling Tower Replacement
Single air inlet provides installation
flexibility in tight layouts
Before After
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D38
Low Installed Cost
Single Side Air Inlet Units can be placed close
to solid walls, reducing the size of enclosures and
allowing for more profitable use of premium space.
Modular Design The modular design minimizes
the size and weight of the heaviest lift, allowing for
the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Easy Cleaning The wet deck surface is elevated above the
sloped cold water basin floor to facilitate flushing of dirt and
debris from this critical area.
Hinged Access Doors and Standard Internal Walkway
Provide easy entry to the spacious plenum for routine
drive maintenance.
Accessibility Make-up, drain, overflow and optional basin
accessories are accessible from outside the unit.
Inlet Strainer Dirt and debris are collected by an integral
strainer before reaching the hot water basins, keeping
nozzles clean.
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train Backed by a five-year fan drive

and motor warranty, the BALTIDRIVE
Power Train utilizes

special corrosion-resistant materials of construction and
state-of-the-art technology to ensure ease of maintenance and
reliable year-round performance.
Separate Air Inlet Louvers Reduce the potential for
excessive scale build-up and damaging ice formations at the
air/water interface by providing a line of sight from the outside
of the unit into the fill.
Long Service Life
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page D41 for construction options).
The unit shown ships in two pieces to
minimize shipping and rigging costs
Series 1500 with optional
external service platform
Standard inlet strainer
Access to strainer, make-up and
basin accessories from outside
the tower
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D39
1
4
6
7
8
2
3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D40
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized
steel panels
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
Premium quality, solid-backed, multi-groove belt
Five-year motor and
drive warranty
Low HP Axial Fan
Quiet operation
Steel covers in easy to remove sections
Low pump head gravity distribution basin
Integral strainer
BACross
Wet Deck Surface

with Integral Drift Eliminators
(Not Shown)
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
Cold Water Basin
Integral internal walkway as standard
Hinged Access Doors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D41
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

A Type 304 stainless steel cold water basin is available. Seams between panels inside the cold water
five-year leak-proof warranty.
Optional Stainless Steel Hot and Cold Water Basins:
Type 304 stainless steel hot water basins are provided in addition to the cold water basin
described above.
Optional Stainless Steel Construction:
seams are provided with a five-year leak-proof warranty.
All multi-cell Series 1500 Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM) approved
construction as an option.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air
necessary to reject unwanted heat from the system
to the atmosphere. The standard fan drive system
on the Series 1500 is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE
Power Train. This BAC engineered drive system

consists of a specially designed powerband and
two cast aluminum sheaves located on minimum
shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life. A
cooling tower duty fan motor, custom engineered
for BAC to provide maximum performance for
cooling tower service, is provided and backed by
BACs comprehensive five-year motor and fan
drive warranty.
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train System

O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D42
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER
Fan Systemconsists of two

standard single-speed fan motor and drive
speed and load, and the other is sized approximately
2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the design
horsepower. This configuration allows the system to
be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the
reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of
failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity
will be available from the low horsepower motor, even
on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the
same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved
when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Independent Fan Operation
Models 15296 through 15425 are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as standard. The
Independent Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow independent
operation, adding an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.
Low Sound Alternatives
The low sound levels generated by Series 1500 Cooling Towers make them suitable for installation in
most environments. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. The Series 1500 is
also available with a low sound fan option that significantly reduces the sound levels generated from the
tower with minimal impact on thermal performance. The cooling tower thermal performance with the
low sound fan has been certified in accordance with CTI Standard STD-201.
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is
available for both the air inlet and discharge.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D43
Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on Models
15296 through 15425, an internal ladder with or without
upper service platform with handrails is available. For
external service, louver face platforms and access door
platforms are options that can be added to the cooling tower
either when the unit is purchased or as an aftermarket item.
Safety gates are available for all handrail openings supplied
by BAC. All components are designed to meet OSHA
requirements.
A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to effectively protect against equipment failure
due to excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment system. BAC can provide either a mechanical
or solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection.
Basin Heaters
Heater Sizing Data
Accessories
Internal ladder and service platform Standard internal walkway
MODEL
NUMBER
0F (-17.8C) Ambient -20F (-28.9C) Ambient
15146 to 15282 8 kW 12 kW
15296 to 15425 12 kW 16 kW
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D44
The electric water level control replaces the standard
mechanical make-up valve when a more precise
water level control is required. This package consists
of a conductance-actuated level control mounted in
the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to
minimize water hammer.
Extended lubrication lines are available for lubrication
of the fan shaft bearings. Fittings are located inside
the plenum area next to the access door.
If operation above 120F (48.9C) is anticipated, an
optional high temperature wet deck material is
available which increases the maximum allowable
entering water temperature to 135F (57.2C).
Air Inlet Screens
Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed
over the air inlet louvers to prevent debris from
entering the tower.
Basin sweeper piping is an effective method of
eliminating sediment that may collect in the cold
water basin of the tower. A complete piping system,
including nozzles, is provided for connection in the
tower basin to side stream filtration equipment
(by others).
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box
A side outlet depressed sump box is available for
field installation below the base of the tower to
facilitate jobsite piping. The outlet connection is
designed to mate with an ASME Class 150 flat face
flange. See the Connection Guide (page J2) for more
information on standard and optional unit connection types.
Grease fittings at the access door (inset) & bearings
with the extended lubrication line option
Basin sweeper piping
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D45
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for tower with water level in the cold water
basin at overflow. If a lower operating weight is needed to
meet design requirements, your local BAC sales
representative can provide additional assistance.
2. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary
with the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 3" and smaller are
MPT. Connections 4" and larger are beveled for welding and
mechanically grooved.
4. The heaviest section for all models except 15214 through
15282 is the upper section. Models 15146 to 15219 ship
in one piece.
5. Models 15296 through 15425 2 1/8
6. Models 15296 through 15425 8
7. Models 15146 through 15219 and 15296 through
15425 2 3/4
8. Models 15296 through 15425 1 1/2
Engineering Data
Single Cell Unit
8" WATER OUTLET
2
5

8
6 MAKE UP
WATER INLET AIR OUT
AIR IN
AIR IN
ACCESS DOOR
OVERFLOW
DRAIN
7
6
L H A C
15146 146 7.5 N/A 40,320 7,920 3,940 3,940
15160 160 10 N/A 44,190 7,940 3,960 3,960
15176 176 15 N/A 48,160 7,990 4,010 4,010
15162 162 7.5 N/A 43,080 8,610 4,200 4,200
15177 177 10 N/A 47,070 8,630 4,220 4,220
15201 201 15 N/A 53,450 8,690 4,280 4,280
15219 219 20 N/A 58,240 8,710 4,300 4,300
15200 200 10 N/A 52,320 11,430 5,350 2,770
15227 227 15 N/A 59,380 11,490 5,410 2,780
15250 250 20 N/A 65,400 11,510 5,430 2,800
15214 214 10 N/A 56,610 12,450 5,640 2,920
15245 245 15 N/A 64,810 12,510 5,700 2,920
15270 270 20 N/A 71,420 12,530 5,720 2,920
15282 282 25 N/A 74,600 12,610 5,800 2,920
15296 296 15 (2) 7.5 77,440 15,540 6,750 3,540
15325 325 20 (2) 10 85,030 15,590 6,800 3,590
15350 350 25 (2) 15 91,560 15,640 6,850 3,640
15368 368 30 (2) 15 96,280 15,660 6,870 3,660
15310 310 15 (2) 7.5 82,000 17,050 7,070 3,540
15340 340 20 (2) 10 89,940 17,100 7,120 3,590
15365 365 25 (2) 15 96,550 17,150 7,170 3,640
15385 385 30 (2) 15 101,840 17,180 7,200 3,670
15425 425 40 (2) 20 112,430 17,450 7,470 3,940
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
DIMENSIONS WEIGHTS (lbs)
MODEL
NUMBER
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
9
MOTOR HP
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
15'-1"
11'-1"
9'-9"
8'-6" 14'-3" 7'-5" 13'-9"
OPERATING
1
IND. FAN
MOTOR
OPTION
8'-6" 15'-7" 8'-9"
8'-6" 11'-7" N/A
N/A 10'-3" 8'-6"
INLET
CONN.
2
6"
12'-1" 15'-7" 8'-9" 15'-1"
12'-1" 14'-3" 7'-5" 13'-9"
8"
6"
8"
6"
6"
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D46
Notes:
basin at overflow. If a lower operating weight is needed to
meet design requirements, your local BAC sales
representative can provide additional assistance.
2. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary
with the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions.
mechanically grooved.
4. The heaviest section for all models except 15214 through
15282 is the upper section. Models 15146 to 15219 ship
in one piece.
5. Models 15296 through 15425 2 1/8
6. Models 15296 through 15425 8
7. Models 15146 through 15219 and 15296 through
15425 2 3/4
8. Models 15296 through 15425 1 1/2
Multi-Cell Units
8" WATER OUTLET
5
8
WATER INLET
MAKE UP
AIR IN
AIR IN
AIR OUT
ACCESS DOORS
(BOTH ENDS)
OVERFLOW
DRAIN
CONNECTIONS SAME BOTH ENDS
6
7
5
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
L H A C D
15146-2 292 (2) 7.5 N/A 80,640 15,840 7,880 3,940
15160-2 320 (2) 10 N/A 88,380 15,880 7,920 3,960
15176-2 352 (2) 15 N/A 96,320 15,980 8,020 4,010
15162-2 324 (2) 7.5 N/A 86,160 17,220 8,400 4,200
15177-2 354 (2) 10 N/A 94,140 17,260 8,440 4,220
15201-2 402 (2) 15 N/A 106,900 17,380 8,560 4,280
15219-2 438 (2) 20 N/A 116,480 17,420 8,600 4,300
15200-2 400 (2) 10 N/A 104,640 22,860 10,700 2,770
15227-2 454 (2) 15 N/A 118,760 22,980 10,820 2,780
15250-2 500 (2) 20 N/A 130,800 23,020 10,860 2,800
15214-2 428 (2) 10 N/A 113,220 24,900 11,280 2,920
15245-2 490 (2) 15 N/A 129,620 25,020 11,400 2,920
15270-2 540 (2) 20 N/A 142,840 25,060 11,440 2,920
15282-2 564 (2) 25 N/A 149,200 25,220 11,600 2,920
15296-2 592 (2) 15 (4) 7.5 154,880 31,080 13,500 3,540
15325-2 650 (2) 20 (4) 10 170,060 31,180 13,600 3,590
15350-2 700 (2) 25 (4) 15 183,120 31,280 13,700 3,640
15368-2 736 (2) 30 (4) 15 192,560 31,320 13,740 3,660
15310-2 620 (2) 15 (4) 7.5 164,000 34,100 14,140 3,540
15340-2 680 (2) 20 (4) 10 179,880 34,200 14,240 3,590
15365-2 730 (2) 25 (4) 15 193,100 34,300 14,340 3,640
15385-2 770 (2) 30 (4) 15 203,680 34,360 14,400 3,670
15425-2 850 (2) 40 (4) 20 224,860 34,900 14,940 3,940
13'-9" 6'-5/8" (2) 8"
24'-5" 15'-7" 8'-9" 15'-1" 6'-5/8" (2) 8"
13'-9" 4'-3" (2) 6"
17'-2" 15'-7" 8'-9" 15'-1" 4'-3" (2) 6"
9'-9" 4'-3" (2) 6"
17'-2" 11'-7" N/A 11'-1" 4'-3" (2) 6"
24'-5" 14'-3" 7'-5"
17'-2" 14'-3" 7'-5"
17'-2" 10'-3" N/A
INLET
CONN.
2
MODEL
NUMBER
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
9
MOTOR HP
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
IND. FAN
MOTOR
OPTION SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
DIMENSIONS WEIGHTS (lbs)
OPERATING
1
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D47
The recommended support arrangement for the Series 1500 Cooling Tower consists of parallel I-beams
positioned as shown in the following drawing. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to
raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the bottom of the tower. The Series 1500 may
also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations shown in Plan A or Plan C. A minimum 12x12
bearing surface must be provided under each of the concentrated load points (See Note 5). To support a
Series 1500 Cooling Tower on columns or in an alternate steel support arrangement, consult your local
BAC Representative.
Structural Support
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed
by others.
2. All supporting steel must be level at the top.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of
4. All units can be furnished with an optional vibration isolation
package, if required, to be installed between the tower and
supporting steel. The BAC vibration isolation package is designed
for units on support plan A/C. When determining the length of
steel beams, allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they
may be longer than the tower length shown above.
5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell towers, the
isolators must be located under the supporting steel, not between
the support steel and the cooling towers.
6. If existing vibration isolator rails are being reused on a
replacement project, springs/elastomers must be resized to match
the new cooling tower weight distribution. Consult your local BAC
Representative for details.
7. When using Alternative Plan A support arrangements with optional
bottom water outlet, size and location restrictions will apply to
water outlet piping. Consider the Cantilevered Plan support
arrangement or consult your local BAC Representative for details.
Plan A/C: Single-Cell and Multi-Cell Units
Plan A/C
Plan B
Plan B: Single-Cell Units Only
MODEL NUMBER A L1 L
15146 to 15282 6 9-3/4 8 5-3/4 -
15296 to 15425 10 5-1/4 12 1-1/4 -
15146-2 to 15282-2 6 9-3/4 8 5-3/4 17 2
15296-2 to 15425-2 10 5-1/4 12 1-1/4 24 5
MODEL NUMBER A L
15146 to 15282 8 3-1/2 8 5-3/4
15296 to 15425 11 11 12 1-1/4
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D48
See Notes on previous page.
For replacement installations, the Series 1500 Cooling Tower has been designed to match the supporting
steel of most existing counterflow and crossflow cooling towers without modifications. Shown below are the
most common steel support arrangements which can be accommodated by the Series 1500. If individual
point support is required, or if steel arrangement is not as shown below, consult your local BAC
Representative for assistance.
Structural Support Alternatives
Alternative Plan A: Typical Dimensions for Single-Cell, Two-Cell Units
Cantilevered Plan A: Typical Dimensions for Single-Cell, Two-Cell Units
Alternative Plan A
Cantilevered Plan A
MODEL NUMBER UNIT REPLACED A B C L1
15146 to 15282 VLT/VST 8 9-1/8 1 6-7/16 8 3-1/2 8 5-3/4
VLT/VST/VXT 8 11-1/4 1 5-3/8 11 11 12 1-1/4
VXT/VXMT 9 7-1/2 1 1-1/4 11 11 12 1-1/4
CFT 8 0 1 11 8 3-1/2 8 5-3/4
Series 3000 8 3-1/4 1 9-3/8 8 3-1/2 8 5-3/4
CFT 8 0 1 11 11 11 12 1-1/4
Series 3000 9 6 1 2 11 11 12 1-1/4
15296 to 15425
15146 to 15282
15296 to 15425
MODEL NUMBER UNIT REPLACED A B C1 C2 L1
15146 to 15282 VLT/VST 8 9-1/8 2 11-3/4 8 3-1/2 6 9-3/4 8 5-3/4
VLT/VST/VXT 8 11-1/4 2 9-5/8 11 11 10 5-1/4 12 1-1/4
VXT/VXMT 9 7-1/2 2 1-3/8 11 11 10 5-1/4 12 1-1/4
CFT 8 0 3 8-7/8 8 3-1/2 6 9-3/4 8 5-3/4
Series 3000 8 3-1/4 3 5-5/8 8 3-1/2 6 9-3/4 8 5-3/4
CFT 8 0 3 8-7/8 11 11 10 5-1/4 12 1-1/4
Series 3000 9 6 2 2-7/8 11 11 10 5-1/4 12 1-1/4
15146 to 15282
15296 to 15425
15296 to 15425
S
e
r
i
e
s

1
5
0
0
D49
1.0 Cooling Tower
induced draft, crossflow cooling tower(s) with vertical air
discharge conforming in all aspects to the specifications,
schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall
not exceed approximately _____ft (mm) long x _____ ft (mm)
wide x _____ ft (mm) high. The total connected fan horsepower
shall not exceed _____ HP(kW). The cooling tower(s) shall be
Baltimore Aircoil Model
__________ .
___ F(C) to ___ F(C) at ___ F(C) entering wet-bulb
temperature. Additionally, the thermal performance shall be
certified by the Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with
CTI Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking such certification, a
field acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty
period in accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105,
by the Cooling Technology Institute or other qualified
independent third party testing agency. A manufacturers
performance guarantee or performance bond without CTI
Certification or independent field thermal performance test shall
not be accepted. The cooling tower shall comply with the energy
efficiency requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
(Z700 metric) galvanized steel with all edges given a protective
coating of zinc-rich compound.
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless
structural members must be protected with the BALTIBOND

(clean, pretreat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically
sprayed, thermosetting hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the
(Alternate 1.3) Type 304 Stainless Steel Construction: All steel
panels and structural members, including the casing panels, hot
and cold water basins, distribution covers, fan deck and fan
cylinder shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel and
All factory seams in the cold water basin shall be welded to
ensure watertight assembly and shall be unconditionally
warranted against leaks for five (5) years from date of shipment.
consistent quality of products and services. Cooling tower
manufacturers that are not ISO-9001:2000 certified shall provide
an additional year of warranty to the customer at no additional
cost.
of heavy-gauge steel panels and structural members. The basin
shall include a depressed section with drain/clean-out
connection. The basin area under the wet deck surface shall be
sloped toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning.
Standard basin accessories shall include a brass make-up valve
with a large diameter plastic float for easy adjustment of
(Alternate 2.1) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
structural members. The basin shall include a depressed section
with drain/clean-out connection. The basin area under the wet
deck surface shall be sloped toward the depressed section to
facilitate cleaning. Standard basin accessories shall include a
brass make-up valve with large diameter plastic float for easy
adjustment of the operating water level. All factory seams in the
cold water basin shall be welded to ensure water-tight assembly
and be unconditionally warranted against leaks for five (5) years
from date of shipment.
2.2 Water Outlet: The cooling tower basin outlet shall be beveled
for welding and grooved for mechanical coupling or a bolt hole
circle to accept an ASME Class 150 flat face flange. The outlet
shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with perforated
openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzles and
an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer
and vortex device shall be constructed of the same materials as
the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion.
2.3 Water Distribution System: The distribution system shall be
furnished with a single water inlet. The pipe stub connection shall
be beveled for welding and grooved for mechanical coupling.
The hot water distribution basin shall be open gravity type and
constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
galvanized steel. Plastic metering devices shall be provided to
ensure the uniform distribution of water over the wet deck
surface. Lift-off distribution covers shall be constructed of
heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel.
(Alternate 2.3): Water Distribution System: The distribution
system shall be furnished with a single water inlet. The pipe
stub connection shall be beveled for welding and grooved for
mechanical coupling. The hot water distribution system shall
consist of an integral strainer that feeds to an open gravity type
basin constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
galvanized steel. Plastic metering devices shall be provided to
ensure uniform distribution over the wet deck surface. Lift off
distribution covers shall be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235
(Z700) hot-dip galvanized steel.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D50
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be axial flow with aluminum alloy blades
selected to provide optimum cooling tower thermal performance
with minimal sound levels. Air shall discharge through a fan
cylinder designed for streamlined air entry and minimum tip
clearance for maximum fan efficiency. The top of the fan cylinder
shall be equipped with a conical, non-sagging removable fan
guard.
heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease packed ball bearings with
moisture proof seals and integral slinger collars, designed for a
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours (280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by a one-piece,
multi-groove, solid back V-type powerband with taper lock
sheaves designed for 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower.
The powerband shall be constructed of neoprene reinforced
polyester cord and be specifically designed for cooling tower
service.
3.4 Sheaves: Fan and motor sheave(s) shall be fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials to minimize maintenance and
ensure maximum drive and powerband operating life.
(TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type designed
specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on winding, shafts,
and bearings.
(Alternate 3.5) Fan Motor: Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed
designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on winding, shafts, and
bearings. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed per
NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV Part 31.
bearings, mechanical equipment support, and fan motor shall be
warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of five (5) years from date of shipment.
3.7 ENERGY-MISER
Fan System (optional): Two single-speed

2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 the full load horsepower, shall
be provided for capacity control and stand-by protection from
drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an acceptable
alternative.
4.1 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet deck surface
and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from self-extinguish-
ing (per UL94 HB and UL94 V-0 testing) polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
having a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84 and shall be
impervious to rot, decay, fungus and biological attack. The wet
deck surface shall be manufactured, tested, and rated by the
cooling tower manufacturer and shall be elevated above the cold
water basin to facilitate cleaning.
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be separate from the
wet deck surface and be removable to provide easy access for
inspection of the air/water interface at the louver surface. Louvers
shall prevent water splash-out during fan cycling and be
constructed of maintenance free, corrosion resistant, UV
protected, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
6.0 Access
6.1 Plenum Access: Hinged access doors shall be provided on
two sides of the tower for access into plenum section.
7.0 Sound
environment, the cooling tower shall be furnished with a low
sound fan. The thermal performance of the cooling tower when
furnished with the low sound fan shall be certified by the Cooling
Technology Institute in accordance with paragraph 1.2 of this
specification. Maximum sound pressure levels (dB) measured 50
ft from the cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not
exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
Blank Off
L
a
y
o
u
t

G
u
i
d
e
l
i
n
e
s
D51
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
FXT
Open Cooling Towers
D52
Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D55
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D59
F
X
T
D53
6 268 Nominal Tons
18 804 gpm at 95
F/85
F/78
F
FXT Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow
and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize
installation costs, maximize operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
FXT Cooling Towers
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
FXT
Cooling Towers
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D54
F
X
T
D55
The FXT provides the heat rejection required at the lowest possible energy input via:

Variable frequency drives
Low Installed Cost
All single cell FXT Cooling Towers ship
completely assembled, minimizing
installation time and cost:
No motors to mount
No sheaves to align
No belts to install
No make-up system to assemble
Benefits
This single cell unit is placed with one lift
and ships fully assembled
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D56
Easy Maintenance
The interior of the unit is accessible
through circular access doors for adjusting
the float valve, cleaning the strainer or
flushing the basin
The fan motor is located on the exterior of
the unit for easy maintenance and belt
adjustment. On most models, a single
threaded bolt and nut assembly further
simplifies belt adjustment. Extended
lubrication fittings are located on the
exterior of the unit for bearing lubrication.
Long Service Life
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page J4 for construction options).
Circular access door
The fan motor is easily accessible at the base of the units exterior
F
X
T
D57
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D58
steel panels
Fan Drive System
Direct drive: Models FXT-6 through FXT-20
V-belt drive: Models FXT-26 and above
Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour
average life) Extended lubrication lines
Five-year motor and drive
warranty
Low HP Axial Fan(s)
Quiet operation
Low pump head gravity distribution basin
Steel distribution covers
BACross

Wet Deck Surface with
Integral Drift Eliminators
Air Inlet Cylinder
Streamlines air entry for maximum efficiency
Inlet Screens
Protection from moving parts
Easily removed for access to fans, bearings,
motor and drives
Water Make-up Valve Assembly
Bronze float valve
Large diameter plastic float
Strainer
Anti-vortexing design to prevent
air entrainment
Access Door
All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip
galvanized steel.
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

A Type 304 stainless steel cold water basin is provided.
All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.
See page J4 for more details on the materials described above
Factory Mutual Approval: FXT Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved
construction as an option.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
X
T
D59
Basin Heaters
Heater Sizing Data
The electric water level control replaces the standard mechanical
makeup valve when a more precise water level control is required.
This package consists of a conductance-actuated level control
mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the make-up
water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
If operation above 125F (51.7C) is anticipated, an optional high temperature wet deck material is
available which increases the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 140F (60.0C).
Discharge Screens
Wire mesh screens are available to cover the discharge of the tower to prevent debris from entering
the eliminators and cold water basin.
Discharge Air Turning Vanes
Discharge air turning vanes are available to direct the discharge air up and away from the unit. The
turning vanes are installed at the factory on the discharge of the tower and require no increase in fan
motor horsepower.
Accessories
No. of Heaters kW per Heater No. of Heaters kW per Heater
FXT-6, 7.5 1 2 1 2
FXT-11 thru 20 1 2 1 3
FXT-26 thru 68 1 3 1 5
FXT-74 thru 99 1 4 1 6
FXT-115 thru 142 2 3 2 5
FXT-160 thru 268 2 4 2 6
0F (-17.8C) Ambient Heaters
MODEL NUMBERS
-20F (-28.9C) Ambient Heaters
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D60
The recommended support arrangement for FXT Cooling Towers is two I beams running either the
length or width of the unit as shown below. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves
to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower.
FXT towers may also be supported on columns at the anchor bolt locations shown, if required. A
minimum bearing surface of six inches square must be provided under each of the concentrated
load points.
Structural Support
Plan B (Alternate-Single Cell Only) Plan A (Recommended)
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and
installed by others.
3. The BAC standard vibration isolation rail package is designed
for support Plan A.
4. When determining the length of the supporting steel, allow for the
length of the vibration isolation rails as they are sometimes longer
than the cooling tower dimensions shown.
5. Operating weight is for water level in basin at overflow height.
SHIPPING OPERATING
FXT-6 370 980 1' 3" 5' 1" 264 226
FXT-7.5 370 980 1' 3" 5' 1" 264 226
FXT-11 470 1,420 2' 5' 1" 369 341
FXT-16 570 1,330 2' 5' 1" 372 293
FXT-20 590 1,350 2' 5' 1" 378 297
FXT-26 940 2,080 3' 6" 5' 1" 624 416
FXT-30 950 2,090 3' 6" 5' 1" 627 418
FXT-33 950 2,090 3' 6" 5' 1" 627 418
FXT-38 1,000 2,420 3' 6" 5' 1" 726 484
FXT-42 1,000 2,420 3' 6" 5' 1" 726 484
FXT-47 1,020 2,440 3' 6" 5' 1" 732 488
FXT-58 1,220 3,140 5' 5' 1" 989 581
FXT-68 1,230 2,150 5' 5' 1" 992 583
FXT-74 1,720 4,230 5' 7' 1-7/8" 1,163 952
FXT-87 1,730 4,240 5' 7' 1-7/8" 1,166 954
FXT-99 1,770 4,280 5' 7' 1-7/8" 1,178 962
FXT-115 2,220 6,080 8' 7' 1-7/8" 1,672 1,368
FXT-130 2,260 6,120 8' 7' 1-7/8" 1,683 1,377
FXT-142 2,300 6,160 8' 7' 1-7/8" 1,695 1,385
FXT-160 2,880 8,030 11' 7' 1-7/8" 2,208 1,807
FXT-175 2,920 8,070 11' 7' 1-7/8" 2,219 1,816
FXT-200 2,970 8,120 11' 7' 1-7/8" 2,234 1,826
FXT-216 3,560 9,420 11' 7' 1-7/8" 2,543 2,167
FXT-250 3,610 9,470 11' 7' 1-7/8" 2,557 2,178
FXT-268 3,630 9,490 11' 7' 1-7/8" 2,563 2,182
P2
WEIGHT (LBS)
MODEL
NUMBER
L W P1
F
X
T
D61
Engineering Data
Models FXT-6 to 68
Inlet piping must rest on the flow
divider located 7/8 below the top of the
water distribution box. The inlet piping
to the distribution box must be the
correct size, as indicated below.
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6 and smaller are MPT and connections 8 and larger are beveled for welding.
2. Operating weight is for tower with water level in the cold water basin at overflow.
3. Nominal tons of cooling respresents 3 gpm of water from a 95F entering water temperature to an 85F leaving water
L W H A B C
OPERATING
2
SHIPPING INLET
OUTLET
FXT-6 6 1/3 2,400 2' 1/8" 6' 9-3/8" 4' 7-7/8" 22 5/8" 7" 1' 8-1/2" 980 370 3" 3"
FXT-7.5 7.5 1/2 3,000 2' 1/8" 6' 9-3/8" 4' 7-7/8" 22 5/8" 7" 1' 8-1/2" 980 370 3" 3"
FXT-11 11 1/2 4,400 3' 1/8" 6' 9-7/8" 4' 7-7/8" 22 5/8" 7" 1' 8-1/2" 1,420 470 3" 3"
FXT-16 16 1/2 5,700 3' 1/8" 6' 10-7/8" 5' 11-7/8" 19 3/4" 7 1/2" 1' 8-1/2" 1,330 570 4" 4"
FXT-20 20 1 7,100 3' 1/8" 6' 10-7/8" 5' 11-7/8" 19 3/4" 7 1/2" 1' 8-1/2" 1,350 590 4" 4"
FXT-26 26 1 9,200 4' 6-1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 5' 11-7/8" 19 3/4" 6 7/8" 1' 8" 2,080 940 4" 4"
FXT-30 30 1 1/2 10,600 4' 6-1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 5' 11-7/8" 19 3/4" 6 7/8" 1' 8" 2,090 950 4" 4"
FXT-33 33 2 11,700 4' 6-1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 5' 11-7/8" 19 3/4" 7 7/8" 1' 8" 2,090 950 4" 4"
FXT-38 38 1 1/2 12,100 4' 6-1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 7' 3-1/4" 16 7/8" 7 7/8" 1' 10-1/2" 2,420 1,000 6" 6"
FXT-42 42 2 13,400 4' 6-1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 7' 3-1/4" 16 7/8" 7 7/8" 1' 10-1/2" 2,420 1,000 6" 6"
FXT-47 47 3 15,000 4' 6-1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 7' 3-1/4" 16 7/8" 7 7/8" 1' 10-1/2" 2,440 1,020 6" 6"
FXT-58 58 3 18,500 6' 1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 7' 3-1/4" 16 7/8" 7 7/8" 1' 10-1/2" 3,140 1,220 6" 6"
FXT-68 68 5 21,700 6' 1/8" 7' 7-7/8" 7' 3-1/4" 16 7/8" 7 7/8" 1' 10-1/2" 3,150 1,230 6" 6"
WEIGHTS (LBS) CONNECTION SIZES
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
DIMENSIONS
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
3
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D62
Models FXT-74 to 268
7' - 3 3/8"
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6 and smaller are MPT and connections 8 and larger are beveled for welding.
Inlet piping must rest on the flow
divider located 7/8 below the top of the
water distribution box. The inlet piping
to the distribution box must be the
correct size, as indicated below.
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
L H A B C
OPERATING
2
SHIPPING INLET
OUTLET
FXT-74 74 3 21,800 6' 1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 4,230 1,720 8" 8"
FXT-87 87 5 25,600 6' 1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 4,240 1,730 8" 8"
FXT-99 99 7 1/2 29,100 6' 1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 4,280 1,770 8" 8"
FXT-115 115 5 33,900 9' 1-1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 6,080 2,220 8" 8"
FXT-130 130 7 1/2 38,300 9' 1-1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 6,120 2,260 8" 8"
FXT-142 142 10 41,800 9' 1-1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 6,160 2,300 8" 8"
FXT-160 160 7 1/2 47,100 12' 1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 8,030 2,880 8" 8"
FXT-175 175 10 51,500 12' 1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 8,070 2,920 8" 8"
FXT-200 200 15 58,900 12' 1/8" 8' 4" 4' 1-3/8" 8 1/2" 2' 1-1/8" 8,120 2,970 8" 8"
FXT-216 216 10 56,400 12' 1/8" 11' 3' 7-3/4" 8 1/2" 2' 3-1/8" 9,420 3,560 8" 8"
FXT-250 250 15 65,300 12' 1/8" 11' 3' 7-3/4" 8 1/2" 2' 3-1/8" 9,470 3,610 8" 8"
FXT-268 268 20 70,000 12' 1/8" 11' 3' 7-3/4" 8 1/2" 2' 3-1/8" 9,490 3,630 8" 8"
WEIGHTS (LBS) CONNECTION SIZES
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
DIMENSIONS
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
3
F
X
T
D63
1.0 Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install ___ factory-assembled,
forced-draft, crossflow cooling tower(s). The tower(s) shall have
air entry on one side only. The tower(s) shall have the fan and
all moving parts located in the dry entering airstream to provide
greater reliability and long life. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____ft (mm) long x ____ft (mm) wide, with
an overall height not exceeding ____ft (mm). The total
connected fan horsepower shall not exceed ___ HP (kW). The
cooling tower shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model FXT _____.
___F (C) to ___F (C) at ___F (C) entering wet-bulb
temperature. Additionally, the performance shall be certified by
the Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI
Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking such certification, a field
acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty period in
accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the
Cooling Technology Institute or other CTI-accredited independent
testing agency. The cooling tower(s) shall comply with the
energy efficiency requirements of ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2001.
structural members shall be constructed of heavy-gauge, G-235
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all cut edges given a
(Alternate) 1.3 BALTIBOND

Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and
structural members shall be constructed with the BALTIBOND

hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat,
rinse, dry) process, with an electrostatically sprayed,
thermosetting hybrid polymer, fuse-bonded to the substrate
during a thermally-activated curing stage, and monitored by a
23-step quality assurance program.
(Alternate) 1.3 Stainless Steel Construction: Unless otherwise
noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel and
of heavy-gauge, hot-dip galvanized steel. Standard accessories
shall include circular access doors, large-area, lift-out hot-dip
galvanized steel strainers with perforated openings sized smaller
than water distribution nozzle orifices, an integral anti-vortexing
hood to prevent air entrainment, and a brass make-up valve with
large diameter plastic float, arranged for easy adjustment.
(Alternate) 2.1 Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: All steel
components in the cold water basin below the overflow level and
in contact with the basin water shall be made of Type 304
stainless steel. All other steel panels and structural elements
shall be made from heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel,
with cut edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich compound.
2.2 Water Distribution System: Hot water distribution basin shall
be open gravity type and constructed of heavy-gauge, G-235
hot-dip galvanized steel. Basin weirs and plastic metering
orifices shall be provided to assure even distribution of water
over the wet deck surface. Lift-off distribution cover shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge, G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel.
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow type. Air shall
be drawn into the tower through a fan cylinder designed for
streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for
maximum fan efficiency.
3.2 Bearings: Fan(s) shall be mounted directly on the motor shaft
or mounted on a horizontal solid steel shaft supported by two
heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable ball bearings with cast
iron housings and designed for minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours
(280,000 Hr. Avg. Life). Extended lubrication lines are provided
for ease of maintenance.
3.3 Fan Drive: Fan(s) shall be direct drive or driven by V-belts
designed for not less than 150% of motor nameplate
horsepower. Drives and all moving parts shall be protected by
removable steel screens that shall ship installed on the unit.
3.4 Fan Motor(s): Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan
cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type,
designed specifically for cooling tower service. The motor shall
be furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts
and bearings.
(Alternate) 3.4 Fan Motor(s): Fan motor(s) shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC), reversible, squirrel cage, ball
bearing type, designed specifically for cooling tower service. The
motor shall be furnished with special moisture protection on
windings, shafts and bearings. Fan motors shall be inverter duty
type designed per NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan motor shall be
4.1 Wet Deck Surface and Drift Eliminators: The wet deck
surface and integral drift eliminators shall be formed from
self-extinguishing (per UL94 HB and UL94 V-0 testing) polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM E84
and shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or biological
attack. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured and
performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to provide
single source responsibility and assure control of the final
product.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
Series V
Open Cooling Towers
D64
Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D67
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D73
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D65
12 1,335 Nominal Tons
36 4,005 gpm at 95
F/85
F/78
F
Series V Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of
flow and temperature requirements. The Series V can be installed indoors and is available in a low profile
version to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. It is also suitable for high temperature applica-
tions with entering water temperatures of up to 170F. The Series V minimizes sound levels and installation
costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance requirements.
Series V Cooling Towers
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
Low profile models available
Suitable for high temperature applications
Low sound
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
Series V Cooling Towers
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D66
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D67
Installation and Application Flexibility
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can overcome the static pressure imposed by external
ductwork, allowing the Series V to be installed indoors.
Low Profile Models - Motors and drives of low
profile units are adjacent to the casing section to
yield models suitable for use in height sensitive
installations. Low profile models are available in
capacities from 16 to 272 nominal tons, which
correspond to heights of 5 1-1/4 and
8 1-13/16, respectively.
High Temperature Applications A range of wet
deck and construction options are available to
accommodate entering water temperatures of up
to 170F.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan - Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet
blank-off panel to the sound-sensitive direction.
Evaporative Cooling Equipment - Minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures. The owner saves money while conserving natural
resources and reducing environmental impact.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on two parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors
and drives factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Benefits
Low profile unit shown in contrast
to a standard unit
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D68
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily
accessible for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the
strainer or flushing the basin.
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are located outside of the moist
discharge airstream, protecting them from moisture, condensation and icing.
Backed by a five-year fan drive and motor warranty, these units are suitable for
year-round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet the corrosion resistance,
unit operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page D71 for construction options).
The water level control is easily
reached from the access door
External V-Belt Drive System (shown here with panel removed)
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D69
Upper Section:
VT0 & VT1 Models
Lower Section:
VT0 & VT1 Models
VT0 and VT1 Models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D70
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel
panels
Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings (280,000 hour
average life)
Five-year motor and drive
warranty
Low Sound Centrifugal Fan(s)
Quiet operation
Schedule 40 PVC spray header and branches
Grommetted for easy maintenance
BACount
Wet Deck Surface

Strainer
Anti-vortexing design to prevent
air entrainment
Access Door
VTL Models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D71
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

A Type 304 stainless steel cold water basin is provided. This option is available on VT0 and VT1
models only. See the Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin for VTL models.
Steel panels and structural elements are constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin:
A cost effective alternative to an all stainless steel cold water basin, critical components in the cold
water basin are provided in Type 304 stainless steel. The remaining components are constructed of
the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection
System).
Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Construction:
A cost effective alternative to all stainless steel construction, only components in the cooling tower
that are exposed to the recirculating water are provided in Type 304 stainless steel. The remaining
components are constructed of the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the
BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System).

Series V Cooling Towers are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved construction as an option.
Fan Drive System
atmosphere. Dynamically balanced, forwardly curved, centrifugal fans driven by matched V-belts with
taper lock sheaves designed for not less than 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower are standard
on the Series V. Cooling tower duty fan motors, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum
performance for cooling tower service, are provided and backed by BACs comprehensive five-year
motor and fan drive warranty.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D72
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System consists of two

speed and load, and the other is sized approximately
2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the design
horsepower. This configuration allows the system to
be operated like a two-speed motor, but with the
reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of
failure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity
will be available from the low horsepower motor, even
on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the
same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved
when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
The low sound levels generated by Series V Cooling Towers make them suitable for most installations.
For situations when one direction is particularly sound-sensitive, the unit can be oriented so that the side
opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. The Series V is also available with factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air inlet and discharge.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
Unit with intake and discharge sound attenuation
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D73
Accessories
External Access Options
(VT0 and VT1 Models Only)
VT0 and VT1 models can be furnished with platforms,
ladders extending from the top of the unit to the base, as
well as safety cages, safety gates and handrail packages
to meet OSHA requirements. All access to the top of the
equipment must be made in accordance with applicable
NOTE: When these access options are employed, the
tower must be equipped with steel drift eliminators.
Basin Heaters
of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory installed heaters, which maintain
Optional External Platform
No. of HEATERS kW per HEATER No. of HEATERS kW per HEATER
VTL-016 thru 039 1 2 1 2
VTL-045 thru 079 1 3 1 4
VTL-082 thru 095 1 4 1 5
VTL-103 thru 137 1 5 1 7
VTL-152 thru 227 1 7 1 9
VTL-245 thru 272 1 9 1 12
VT0-12 thru 57 1 2 1 2
VT0-65 thru 88 1 2 1 3
VT0-102 thru 176 1 3 1 5
VT1-N209 thru N255 1 5 1 7.5
VT1-N301 thru N395 1 7 1 10
VT1-N418 thru N510 2 5 2 7.5
VT1-275 thru 415 1 8 1 10
VT1-416 thru 600 1 12 2 7.5
VT1-550 thru 830 2 8 2 10
VT1-825 thru 1335 3 8 3 10
MODEL NUMBER
0F (-17.8C) AMBIENT HEATERS -20F (-29.8C) AMBIENT HEATERS
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D74
makeup valve when a more precise water level control is
required. This package consists of a conductance-actuated level
control mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in
the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings located outside the
fan section are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings.
If operation above 130F (54.4C) is anticipated, optional high temperature wet deck materials are
available to increase the maximum allowable entering water temperature to 170F (76.7C).
Bottom Screens (VT0 and VT1 Models Only)
Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed over the bottom openings to prevent unauthorized
access.
Basin sweeper piping is an effective method of eliminating sediment that may collect in the cold water
basin of the tower. A piping system is provided for connection to side stream filtration equipment
(by others) with a supply pressure of 10-20 psig.
Capacity Control Dampers
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water temperature control
than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. A standard electrical control package for dampers is
available.
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required when intake air is ducted to the unit.
Discharge Hoods
Discharge hoods reduce the risk of recirculation in tight enclosures by increasing discharge air velocity,
and can be used to elevate the tower discharge above adjacent walls to comply with layout guidelines.
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D75
VTL Engineering Data
INLET
1" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
SUCTION OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
H
A
40
20
211-5/16
2-1/4
4-9/16
2 3-3/4
411-7/8
7 0-3/4
2-1/4
2-5/8
11-5/8
18
7-5/8
41-1/4
7-3/4
1" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
H
511-5/8
3
3 26-5/8
38-5/8
51-3/4
510-5/8
1011-3/4
2-5/8
11-5/8
18
1" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
H
811-7/16
4-1/8
56-7/16
68-7/16
73-5/8
510-5/8
1411-9/16
2-5/8
11-5/8
18
41/8
1" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
H
1111-5/8
4-1/8
86-5/8
98-5/8
103-11/16
510-5/8
1711-3/4
2-5/8
11-5/8
18
41/8
VTL Models
Models
VTL-016-E to 137-M
Models VTL-082-K to 095-K
Models VTL-103-K to 137-M
Models
VTL-016-E to 039-H
Models
VTL-045-H to 079-K
OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
A H
INLET OUTLET OVERFLOW
VTL-016-E 16 1.5 7,680 1,620 1,100 4' 0-3/4" 5' 1-1/4" 3" 3" 2"
VTL-021-F 21 2 8,150 1,660 1,140 4' 0-3/4" 5' 1-1/4" 3" 3" 2"
VTL-027-F 27 2 7,370 1,740 1,220 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 3" 3" 2"
VTL-030-G 30 3 8,270 1,770 1,250 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 3" 3" 2"
VTL-034-H 34 5 9,420 1,810 1,290 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 3" 3" 2"
VTL-039-H 39 5 8,680 1,910 1,390 7' 1-5/16" 8' 1-13/16" 3" 3" 2"
VTL-045-H 45 5 16,910 2,710 1,650 4' 0-3/4" 5' 1-1/4" 4" 4" 2"
VTL-051-G 51 3 13,350 2,810 1,750 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 4" 4" 2"
VTL-059-H 59 5 15,490 2,830 1,770 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 4" 4" 2"
VTL-066-J 66 7.5 17,210 2,900 1,840 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 4" 4" 2"
VTL-072-K 72 10 18,690 2,930 1,870 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 4" 4" 2"
VTL-079-K 79 10 17,500 3,100 2,040 7' 1-5/16" 8' 1-13/16" 4" 4" 2"
VTL-082-K 82 10 22,400 3,810 2,260 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 6" 6" 2"
VTL-092-L 92 15 24,980 3,940 2,390 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 6" 6" 2"
VTL-095-K 95 10 21,150 4,070 2,510 7' 1-5/16" 8' 1-11/16" 6" 6" 3"
VTL-103-K 103 10 24,990 4,740 2,680 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTL-116-L 116 15 28,200 4,800 2,740 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTL-126-M 126 20 30,700 4,810 2,750 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTL-137-M 137 20 29,560 5,120 3,060 7' 1-5/16" 8' 1-13/16" 6" 6" 3"
WEIGHTS (LBS) DIMENSIONS CONNECTIONS
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
3
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
4
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D76
Notes:
2. Unless otherwise indicated, all connections 6" and smaller are MPT. Connections 8" and larger are beveled for welding.
3. Fan horsepower is at 0 external static pressure.
2" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
H
1111-5/8
5
86-5/8
98-5/8
103-11/16
510-7/8
1711-3/4
2-5/8
11-5/8
18
5
2" MAKE-UP
ACCESS
OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
H
811-7/16
5
56-7/16
68-7/16
73-5/8
510-5/8
1411-9/16
2-5/8
11-5/8
18
5
INLET
A
79-1/4
310-5/8
6-1/8
710-1/2
311-1/4
Models
VTL-152-M to 272-P
Models VTL-152-M to 227-O
Models VTL-245-P to 272-P
See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
A H
INLET OUTLET OVERFLOW
VTL-152-M 152 20 45,870 6,580 3,440 4' 0-3/4" 5' 1-1/4" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-171-L 171 15 39,940 6,820 3,680 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-185-M 185 20 43,150 6,960 3,820 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-198-N 198 25 46,090 7,000 3,860 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-209-O 209 30 48,630 7,040 3,900 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-227-O 227 30 46,550 7,470 4,300 7' 1-5/16" 8' 1-13/16" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-245-P 245 40 58,820 8,970 4,790 5' 7" 6' 6-1/4" 8" 8" 3"
VTL-272-P 272 40 56,760 9,490 5,310 7' 1-5/16" 8' 1-13/16" 8" 8" 3"
WEIGHTS (LBS) DIMENSIONS CONNECTIONS
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
3
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
4
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D77
VT0 Engineering Data
1" MAKE-UP
OVERFLOW
WATER OUT
WATER IN
2" DRAIN
H
B
A
38-1/8
33
36-1/4
26-1/8
30
311-1/2
8-3/8
4-1/8
17-1/4
21-1/8
2-1/4
ACCESS
1" MAKE-UP
OVERFLOW
WATER OUT
WATER IN
2" DRAIN
H
B
A
54-1/2
41-1/2
49-7/8 3-1/4
3-1
30-1/2
48-5/8
15-3/4
5-5/8
18-1/4
2-1/2
36 4-1/2
4 2-1/4 3-1/4
M
60 4-1/2
4 2-1/4 60
M
811-3/4 4-1/2
4 2-1/4 811-3/4
M
1111-1/2 5-1/2
1111-3/4
511-7/8
M
120 4-1/2
4 2-1/4 1111-3/4
M
Models
VTO-12 to 116
Models
VTO-12 to 28
Models
VTO-32 to 57
Models
VTO-65 to 88
Models VTO-132 to 176 Models VTO-102 to 116
Models
VTO-132 to 176
Notes:
basin at overflow.
grooved for mechanical coupling.
4. Nominal tons of cooling respresents 3 gpm of water from a 95F
entering water temperature to an 85F leaving water
VT0 Models
OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION H A B INLET OUTLET OVERFLOW
VTO-12-E 12 1 1/2 4,970 960 790 790 7' 6-1/8" 6' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-14-F 14 2 5,460 970 800 800 7' 6-1/8" 6' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-19-G 19 3 6,190 990 820 820 7' 6-1/8" 6' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-24-G 24 3 5,945 1,050 950 630 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-28-H 28 5 6,960 1,170 970 650 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-32-H 32 5 11,820 1,590 1,230 1,230 7' 6-1/8" 6' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-41-J 41 7 1/2 13,435 1,650 1,290 1,290 7' 6-1/8" 6' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-52-J 52 7 1/2 12,960 1,780 1,540 870 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-57-K 57 10 14,180 1,790 1,550 880 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 3" 3" 2"
VTO-65-J 65 7 1/2 16,860 2,580 2,000 1,070 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-75-K 75 10 18,435 2,590 2,010 1,080 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-78-K 78 10 17,990 2,710 2,130 1,080 10' 6-1/8" 9' 7-1/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-88-L 88 15 20,420 2,770 2,190 1,140 10' 6-1/8" 9' 7-1/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-102-L 102 15 25,060 3,310 2,500 1,330 9' 0-1/8" 8' 1-7/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-107-L 107 15 24,460 3,680 2,870 1,540 10' 6-1/8" 9' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-116-M 116 20 26,760 3,740 2,930 1,600 10' 6-1/8" 9' 7-7/8" 12 7/8" 4" 4" 2"
VTO-132-L 132 15 30,600 5,190 3,820 2,000 11' 9-1/8" 10' 9-7/8" 23 1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTO-145-M 145 20 33,670 5,200 3,830 2,010 11' 9-1/8" 10' 9-7/8" 23 1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTO-155-N 155 25 36,240 5,250 3,880 2,060 11' 9-1/8" 10' 9-7/8" 23 1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTO-166-N 166 25 35,265 5,650 4,280 2,220 13' 3-1/8" 12' 3-7/8" 23 1/4" 6" 6" 3"
VTO-176-O 176 30 37,330 5,680 4,310 2,250 13' 3-1/8" 12' 3-7/8" 23 1/4" 6" 6" 3"
DIMENSIONS CONNECTIONS WEIGHTS (LBS)
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
3
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
4
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D78
ACCESS
2" MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
WATER OUT
2" DRAIN
H
B
A
68-3/4
42
79-1/4 7/8
33-1/2
375-8
710-3/8
6-5/8
8-3/4
4-3/4
238-1/2 4
511-7/8
INLET
M
240-1/2
511-7/8
INLET
M
117-3/4 4
1111-3/4
511-7/8
INLET
M
178-1/8 4
180-1/8
90-1/16
INLET
M
Models
VT1-N209 to N540
Models VT1-N301 to N395 Models VT1-N418 to N510
Models VT1-N209 to N255
Notes:
basin at overflow.
MPT. Connections 8" and larger are beveled for welding.
Models VT1-N209-P to VT1-N510-P
OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION H A B INLET OUTLET
VT1-N209-P 209 40 66,300 9,180 5,350 3,300 11' 3-3/8" 10' 7-5/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N220-O 220 30 53,100 9,490 5,660 3,110 13' 2-1/8" 12' 4-5/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N240-P 240 40 57,950 9,680 5,850 3,300 13' 2-1/8" 12' 4-5/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N255-P 255 40 55,900 10,380 6,550 3,300 14' 6-7/8" 13' 9-3/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N301-Q 301 50 86,150 13,380 7,530 4,590 11' 3-3/8" 10' 7-5/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N325-P 325 40 77,450 14,110 8,260 4,550 13' 2-1/8" 12' 4-5/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N346-Q 346 50 83,050 14,150 8,300 4,590 13' 2-1/8" 12' 4-5/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N370-Q 370 50 80,150 15,130 9,280 4,690 14' 6-7/8" 13' 9-3/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N395-R 395 60 84,750 15,250 9,400 4,710 14' 6-7/8" 13' 9-3/8" 12" 8" 8"
VT1-N418-P 418 (2) 40 120,600 18,490 10,680 6,580 11' 3-3/8" 10' 7-5/8" 11" (2) 8" 10"
VT1-N440-O 440 (2) 30 106,200 19,110 11,300 6,200 13' 2-1/8" 12' 4-5/8" 11" (2) 8" 10"
VT1-N480-P 480 (2) 40 115,900 19,490 11,680 6,580 13' 2-1/8" 12' 4-5/8" 11" (2) 8" 10"
VT1-N510-P 510 (2) 40 111,800 20,890 13,080 6,580 14' 6-7/8" 13' 9-3/8" 11" (2) 8" 10"
DIMENSIONS CONNECTIONS
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
3
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
WEIGHTS (LBS)
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
4
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D79
ACCESS
MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
WATER OUT
2" DRAIN
H
B
A
84
3 4-7/16
11 8-3/4 7/8
2 9-1/16
5 5-1/4
11 10
6-5/8
27-1/8
4-3/4
3-3/8
M
180-1/8
178-1/8 4
90-1/16
INLET
M
M
1111-3/4
117-3/4 4
511-7/8
INLET
Models
VT1-275 to 600
Models VT1-416 to 600
Models VT1-550-P to VT1-1335-S
OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
H A B
INLET OUTLET MAKE-UP
VT1-275-P 275 40 82,530 15,190 8,040 5,140 12' 10-5/8" 12' 2-7/8" 14 1/2" 8" 8" 2"
VT1-307-O 307 30 74,350 15,780 8,630 4,950 14' 9-3/8" 13' 11-7/8" 14 1/2" 8" 8" 2"
VT1-340-P 340 40 81,550 15,970 8,820 5,140 14' 9-3/8" 13' 11-7/8" 14 1/2" 8" 8" 2"
VT1-375-P 375 40 79,300 16,940 9,790 5,140 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 14 1/2" 8" 8" 2"
VT1-400-Q 400 50 85,150 16,980 9,830 5,180 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 14 1/2" 8" 8" 2"
VT1-415-R 415 60 90,250 17,100 9,950 5,300 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 14 1/2" 8" 8" 2"
VT1-416-O4 416 (2) 30 125,046 22,430 11,530 7,280 12' 10-5/8" 12' 1-7/8" 13 1/2" 10" 10" 2"
VT1-478-N4 478 (2) 25 116,150 23,600 12,700 7,240 14' 9-3/8" 13' 10-7/8" 13 1/2" 10" 10" 2"
VT1-507-O4 507 (2) 30 123,150 23,640 12,740 7,280 14' 9-3/8" 13' 10-7/8" 13 1/2" 10" 10" 2"
VT1-560-O4 560 (2) 30 119,750 25,080 14,180 7,280 16' 2-1/8" 15' 3-5/8" 13 1/2" 10" 10" 2"
VT1-600-P4 600 (2) 40 131,250 25,460 14,560 7,660 16' 2-1/8" 15' 3-5/8" 13 1/2" 10" 10" 2"
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
3
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
WEIGHTS (LBS)
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
5
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D80
ACCESS
MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
WATER OUT
2" DRAIN
H
B
A
84
3 4-7/16
11 8-3/4 7/8
2 9-1/16
5 5-1/4
11 10
6-5/8
27-1/8
4-3/4
3-3/8
M
180-5/8
INLET
M
4
511-7/8
INLET
361-1/4
359-1/4 4
511-7/8
INLET
M
M
4
5 11-7/8
INLET
M
24 0-1/2
23 8-1/2
5 11-7/8
INLET
Models
VT1-550 to 1355
Notes:
basin at overflow.
MPT. Connections 8" and larger are beveled for welding.
4. Fans on models VT1-416 through 600 must be cycled
simultaneously for capacity control. For additional steps of control
beyond on/off operation, a variable frequency drive, the ENERGY-
MISER
Fan System, or two-speed motors are recommended.

See page D85
for Engineering
Considerations.
OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
H A B
INLET OUTLET MAKE-UP
VT1-550-P 550 (2) 40 165,060 30,590 16,020 10,220 12' 10-5/8" 12' 2-7/8" 12 1/2" (2) 8" 12" 2"
VT1-680-P 680 (2) 40 163,100 32,150 17,580 10,220 14' 9-3/8" 13' 11-7/8" 12 1/2" (2) 8" 12" 2"
VT1-750-P 750 (2) 40 158,600 34,090 19,520 10,220 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 12 1/2" (2) 8" 12" 2"
VT1-800-Q 800 (2) 50 170,300 34,170 19,600 10,300 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 12 1/2" (2) 8" 12" 2"
VT1-830-R 830 (2) 60 180,500 34,410 19,840 10,540 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 12 1/2" (2) 8" 12" 2"
VT1-825-P 825 (3) 40 247,590 45,980 24,000 15,300 12' 10-5/8" 12' 2-7/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
VT1-921-O 921 (3) 30 223,050 47,750 25,770 14,730 14' 9-3/8" 13' 11-7/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
VT1-1020-P 1020 (3) 40 244,650 48,320 26,340 15,300 14' 9-3/8" 13' 11-7/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
VT1-1125-P 1125 (3) 40 237,900 51,230 29,250 15,300 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
VT1-1200-Q 1200 (3) 50 255,450 51,350 29,370 15,420 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
VT1-1245-R 1245 (3) 60 270,750 51,710 29,730 15,780 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
VT1-1335-S 1335 (3) 75 290,550 51,770 29,790 15,840 16' 2-1/8" 15' 4-5/8" 13 1/2" (3) 8" (2) 10" 3"
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR
HP
3
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
WEIGHTS (LBS)
NOMINAL
TONNAGE
5
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D81
The recommended support arrangement for the Series V Cooling Tower consists of parallel I-beams
running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawing. Besides providing
adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access
to the bottom of the tower. To support a Series V Cooling Tower in an alternate steel support
arrangement, consult your BAC Representative.
Structural Support
All VTL Models
Models VT1-N301 thru N510 & VT1-416 thru 830
All VT0 Models & VT1-N209 thru N255 & VT1-275 thru 415
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D82
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed by others.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. The maximum allowable deflection of beams
under unit shall be as specified in the table above.
4. All units can be furnished with an optional vibration isolation package, if required, to be installed between the tower and
supporting steel. When determining the length of steel beams, allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they
may be longer than the tower length shown above.
5. If point vibration isolation is used, the isolators must be located under the supporting steel, not between the support
steel and the cooling tower.
Models VT1-825 thru 1335
MODEL NUMBER A B MAXIMUM DEFLECTION
3
VTL-016 thru 039 3 11 4 6 1/4
VTL-045 thru 079 3 11 7 11-1/2 3/8
VTL-082 thru 095 3 11 10 11-1/4 1/2
VTL-103 thru 137 3 11 13 11-1/2 1/2
VTL-152 thru 227 7 8-1/4 10 11-1/4 1/2
VTL-245 thru 272 7 8-1/4 13 11-1/2 1/2
VT0-12 thru 28 45-3/8 29-1/2 3/32
VT0-32 thru 57 45-3/8 65-1/2 3/16
VT0-65 thru 88 45-3/8 101-1/4 5/16
VT0-102 thru 116 45-3/8 137-1/2 3/8
VT0-132 thru 176 54-1/4 137-1/2 3/8
VT1-N209 thru N255 7 7-5/8 10 7-1/2 3/8
VT1-N301 thru N510 7 7-5/8 7 7-5/8 1/2
VT1-275 thru 415 11 7-1/4 10 7-1/2 3/8
VT1-416 thru 1335 11 7-1/4 11 7-1/4 1/2
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
D83
1.0 Cooling Tower
forced-draft, centrifugal fan, counterflow cooling tower(s) with
vertical air discharge conforming in all aspects to the
specifications, schedules and as shown on the plans. Overall
dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ft (mm) long X
______ ft (mm) wide X_____ ft (mm) high. The total connected
fan horsepower shall not exceed _____ HP (kW). The cooling
tower(s) shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model ______.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by
the manufacturer to cool _____US gpm (lps) of water from
_____F (C) to _____F (C) at _____F (C) entering wet-bulb
temperature. Additionally, the thermal performance shall be
certified by the Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with
CTI Certification Standard STD-201. Lacking such certification, a
field acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty
period in accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105,
by the Cooling Technology Institute or other qualified independent
third party testing agency. A manufacturers performance
guarantee or performance bond without CTI Certification or
independent field thermal performance test shall not be
accepted.
(Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):

(clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically
(Alternate 1.3) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional):
structural members shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless
steel and assembled with Type 304 stainless steel nut and bolt
fasteners.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The manufacturer shall have a
Management System certified by an accredited registrar as
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001 to ensure
consistent quality of products and services. Manufacturers that
are not ISO-9001 certified shall not be acceptable.
1.5 Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of not less than one year from date of
startup or eighteen months from date of shipment, whichever
occurs first. In addition, the manufacturer shall warrant the
rotating mechanical equipment, including fans, fan motors, fan
shafts, bearings, sheaves and associated supports for not less
than five (5) years from date of shipment.
2.1 Structure (VT0/1 models): The cooling tower shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges
for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of
watertight joints. The heat transfer section shall be removable
from the pan/fan section to facilitate shipping and handling. The
fan(s) and fan drive system, including the fan motor, shall be
factory mounted and aligned and located in the dry entering
airstream to ensure reliable operation and ease of maintenance.
(Alternate 2.1) Structure (VTL models): The cooling tower shall
be constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake
flanges for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of
watertight joints. The unit shall be of unitary design to minimize
rigging requirements. The fan(s) and fan drive system, including
the fan motor, shall be factory mounted and aligned and located
in the dry entering airstream to ensure reliable operation and
ease of maintenance.
2.2 Heat Transfer Section: The heat transfer section(s) shall
consist of a wet deck surface, spray water distribution system
and drift eliminators arranged for optimal thermal performance
with minimal drift.
2.3 Wet Deck Surface: The wet deck surface shall be formed
from self-extinguishing (per UL94 HB and UL94 V-0 testing)
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) having a flame spread rating of 5 per
ASTM E84 and shall be impervious to rot, decay, and fungus or
biological attack. The wet deck surface shall be manufactured
and performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to
assure single source responsibility and control of the final
product.
2.4 Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly
over the wet deck surface by a water distribution system
consisting of a header and spray branches of Schedule 40 PVC
pipe with large orifice, non-clog plastic distribution nozzles. The
branches and spray nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in
rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or
complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
2.5 Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be provided
with large area lift out strainers with perforated openings sized
smaller than the water distribution system nozzles and an
anti-votexing device to prevent air entrainment. The strainer and
anti-vortexing device shall be constructed of the same material
as the basin to prevent dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin
accessories shall include a brass make-up valve with large
diameter polystyrene filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the
(Alternate 2.5) Cold Water Basin: The cold water basin shall be
structural members up to the heat transfer section/basin joint.
The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution
system nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air
entrainment. The strainer and anti-vortexing device shall be
constructed of the same material as the basin to prevent
dissimilar metal corrosion. Standard basin accessories shall
include a brass make-up valve with large diameter polystyrene
filled plastic float for easy adjustment of the operating water level.
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D84
3.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be dynamically balanced, forwardly
curved, centrifugal type selected to provide optimum thermal
performance with minimal sound levels. Fan housings shall have
curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and four-sided rectangular
discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to increase fan
efficiency and prevent water from splashing into the fans.
heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron
housings, designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours
(280,000 Hr. Avg. Life).
3.3 Fan Drive: The fan(s) shall be driven by matched V-belts with
taper lock sheaves designed for not less than 150% of the motor
nameplate horsepower. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty
motor base, adjustable by a single threaded bolt-and-nut
arrangement. Removable steel screens or panels shall protect
the fan drive and all moving parts.
3.4 Fan Motor: Furnish _____ HP, ______ RPM Totally Enclosed,
Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing type fan motors
suitable for outdoor service with 1.15 service factor. Motor(s) shall
be suitable for _____ volt, ____ hertz, and ___ phase electrical
service.
(Alternate 3.4) Fan Motor: Furnish _____ HP, ______ RPM
Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC), squirrel cage, ball bearing
type fan motors suitable for outdoor service. Fan motor(s) shall
be inverter-duty type designed per NEMA Standard MG1, Section
IV, and Part 31 suitable for _____ volt, ____ hertz, and ___
phase electrical service
bearings, mechanical equipment support and fan motor shall be
3.6 ENERGY-MISER
Fan System (optional): Two-single speed

2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load horsepower shall be
provided in each cell for capacity control and stand-by protection
from drive or motor failure. Two-speed motor(s) are not an
acceptable alternative.
4.0 Drift Eliminators
4.1 Drift Eliminators: Eliminators shall be constructed of specially
formulated PVC and be removable in easily handled sections.
They shall have a minimum of three changes in air direction.
5.0 Access
5.1 Basin Access: Circular access doors shall be provided for
easy access to the make-up water assembly and suction strainer
for routine maintenance.
6.0 Sound
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
Blank Off
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
D85
Location
Units must have an adequate supply of fresh air to the air inlet(s). When units are located adjacent to
building walls or in enclosures, care must be taken to ensure that the warm, saturated discharge air is not
deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
CAUTION:
Each unit should be located and positioned to prevent the introduction of the warm discharge air
and the associated drift, which may contain chemical or biological contaminants including
Legionella, into the ventilation systems of the building on which the unit is located or those of
adjacent buildings.
For detailed recommendations on layout, refer to our web site, www.BaltimoreAircoil.com, or consult
your local BAC Representative.
For Series V products, bottom screens or solid bottom panels may be desirable or necessary for safety,
depending on the location and conditions at the installation site.
Piping and Valves
Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported
by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit. On open systems, in order to prevent basin overflow at
shutdown and to ensure satisfactory pump operation at start-up, all heat exchangers and as much piping as
possible should be installed below the operating level of the cooling tower.
Some units may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the hot water inlets to balance the flow
to individual inlets and cells. External shutoff valves (supplied by others) may also be required if the system
design necessitates the isolation of individual cells.
When multiple cells are used on a common system, equalizing lines should be installed between the cold
water basins to ensure balanced water level in all cells. It is good engineering practice to valve the inlet and
outlet of each tower separately for servicing. The shut-off valves can be used, if necessary, to adjust any
minor unbalanced condition in water flow to or from the units.
Engineering Considerations -
Cooling Towers
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D86
Capacity Control
Variable Frequency Drives (VFD)
Installations which are to be controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) require the use of an inverter
duty motor as designed per NEMA Standard MG.1, Section IV, Part 31, which recognizes the increased
stresses placed on motors by these drive systems. Inverter duty motors must be furnished on VFD
applications in order to maintain the motor warranty.
WARNING:
When the fan speed is to be changed from the factory-set speed, including through the use of a
variable speed control device, steps must be taken to avoid operating at or near fan speeds that
cause a resonance with the unit or its supporting structure. At start-up, the variable frequency drive
should be cycled slowly between zero and full speed and any speeds that cause a noticeable
resonance in the unit should be locked out by the variable speed drive.
Fan Cycling
Fan cycling is the simplest method of capacity control. The number of steps of capacity control can be
increased using the ENERGY-MISER
Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed fan

motors in conjunction with fan cycling (see the Custom Features & Options section of the appropriate
product line to determine whether the ENERGY-MISER
Fan System or the independent fan motor option are

available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide substantial energy
savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
WARNING:
Rapid on-off cycling can cause the fan motor to overheat. It is recommended that controls be set to
allow a maximum of 6 on-off cycles per hour.
Capacity Control Dampers (Series V Models Only)
On Series V models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water
temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. See page C73 or contact your local BAC
Representative for more details.
Vibration Cutout Switches
Vibration cutout switches are recommended on all installations. Vibration cutout switches are designed to
interrupt power to the fan motor and can provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration.
BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches on all cooling tower models.
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
D87
Water Treatment
As water evaporates in an evaporative cooling unit, the dissolved solids originally present in the water
remain in the system. The concentration of these dissolved solids increases rapidly and can cause scale
and corrosion. In addition, airborne impurities and biological contaminants, including Legionella, may be
introduced into the circulating water. To control all potential contaminants, a water treatment program must
be employed. In many cases, a simple bleed-off may be adequate for control of scale and corrosion.
Note: Bleed lines are to be provided and installed by others. However, biological contamination, including
Legionella, can be controlled only through the use of biocides. Such treatment should be initiated at system
startup, after periods of equipment shutdown, and continued regularly thereafter. Accordingly, it is strongly
recommended a biocide treatment be initiated when the unit is first filled with water and continued regularly
thereafter. For more information, consult the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Manual.
When a water treatment program is employed, it must be compatible with construction materials. The pH of
the circulating water must be maintained between 6.5 and 9.0. Units having galvanized steel construction
and a circulating water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanized steel to prevent
the accumulation of white, waxy, nonprotective zinc corrosion called white rust. Batch feeding of chemicals
into the unit is not recommended. If units are constructed with optional corrosion resistant materials, acid
treatment may be considered; however, the water quality must be maintained within the guidelines set forth
in the Operating and Maintenance Instructions.
For complete Water Quality Guidelines, see the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction
Manual, available at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
For specific recommendations on water treatment, contact a competent water treatment
supplier.
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility
BACs standard wet deck is constructed of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and has a flame spread rating of 5 per
ASTM Standard E84. The PVC wet deck surface is compatible with the water found in most evaporative
cooling applications. The maximum allowable water temperature for each product is as shown in the
following table
Maximum Allowable Water Temperature by Wet Deck Material
For applications where the entering water temperature exceeds the limits shown above, contact your local
BAC Representative for assistance.
PRODUCT LINE STANDARD PVC HIGH TEMPERATURE PVC GALVANIZED or STAINLESS STEEL
Series 3000 130F (54.4C) 135F (57.2C) N/A
Series 1500 120F (48.9C) 135F (57.2C) N/A
FXT 125F (51.7C) 140F (60.0C) N/A
Series V 130F (54.4C) 140F (60.0C) for BALTIBOND
Corrosion
Protection System Units; 150F (65.6C) for
Galvanized & Stainless Steel Units
170F (76.7C)
O
p
e
n

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
D88
Sound Levels
Sound rating data is available for all BAC Cooling Towers. When calculating the sound levels generated by a
unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as the distance and
direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Low sound fans and intake and discharge sound attenuation
can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the Custom Features and
Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System, two-speed

motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during periods of non-peak thermal
loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling equipment, see page J20. For
detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Representative.
Protection Against Basin Water Freezing
When a unit is shut down in freezing weather, the basin water must be protected by draining to an indoor
auxiliary remote sump tank (see page H5 for remote sump engineering data; page J12 for sizing guidelines)
or by providing supplementary heat to the cold water basin. Supplementary heat can be provided by electric
immersion heaters or in some cases, hot water or steam coils, or steam injectors. All exposed water piping,
make-up lines, and spray pumps (if applicable) that do not drain at shutdown should be traced with electric
heater tape and insulated.
Indoor Installations (Applicable to Series V Models Only)
Many indoor installations require the use of inlet and/or discharge ductwork. Units installed with inlet
ductwork must be ordered with solid bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used only on smaller
units while the equipment room is used as a plenum for larger units. Discharge ductwork will normally be
required to carry the saturated discharge air from the building.
Both intake and discharge ductwork must have access doors to allow servicing of the fan assembly, drift
eliminators, and water distribution system. All ductwork should be symmetrical and designed to provide even
air distribution across the face of air intakes and discharge openings.
WARNING:
The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh
air intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Note: Axial fan units are not suitable for indoor installations.
Safety
Adequate precautions, appropriate for the installation and location of these products, should be taken to
safeguard the public from possible injury and the equipment and the premises from damage. Operation,
maintenance and repair of this equipment should be undertaken only by personnel qualified to do so. Proper
care, procedures and tools must be used in handling, lifting, installing, operating, maintaining, and repairing
this equipment to prevent personal injury and/or property damage.
Warranties
Please refer to the Limitation of Warranties applicable to and in effect at the time of the sale/purchase of
these products.
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
E1
Closed circuit cooling towers provide evaporative cooling for many types of systems, and the specific
application will largely determine which BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Tower is best suited for a project. The
table on page E5 is intended as a general guide. Specialized assistance is available through your local BAC
Representative.
See page E7 for an article on the advantages of closed circuit cooling towers.
Closed circuit cooling towers operate in a manner similar to open cooling towers, except that the heat load
to be rejected is transferred from the process fluid (the fluid being cooled) to the ambient air through a heat
exchange coil. The coil serves to isolate the process fluid from the outside air, keeping it clean and
contaminate free in a closed loop. This creates two separate fluid circuits: (1) an external circuit, in which
spray water circulates over the coil and mixes with the outside air, and (2) an internal circuit, in which the
process fluid circulates inside the coil. During operation, heat is transferred from the internal circuit, through
the coil to the spray water, and then to the atmosphere as a portion of the water evaporates.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of closed circuit cooling towers: combined flow and counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a heat exchange coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a
closed circuit cooling tower. The addition of wet deck surface to the traditional closed circuit cooling
tower design reduces evaporation in the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling.
BACs combined flow closed circuit cooling towers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the
coil, and crossflow air/water flow through the wet deck surface.
In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. The process fluid travels from the
bottom to the top of the coil, increasing efficiency by bringing the coldest spray water and air in contact
with the process fluid at its coldest temperature.
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E2
In the wet deck section of BACs combined flow closed circuit cooling towers, air and water interact in a
crossflow configuration: water flows vertically down the wet deck as air flows horizontally across it.
Counterflow
In a counterflow closed circuit cooling tower design, the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the spray
water. In BACs counterflow closed circuit cooling towers, air travels vertically up through the unit while the
spray water travels vertically down over the coil. The process fluid flows from top to bottom through the coil
and is in thermal counterflow to the air.
Combined Flow: Crossflow
configuration over the wet deck
Water Down
Air Across
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of air
and water over the coil
Water Down
Air Up
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
E3
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled closed circuit cooling towers is provided by one or more
mechanically driven fans. The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own distinct
advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor horsepower of comparably sized centrifugal fan
units, offering significant lifecycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable amounts of external static pressure ( 0.5),
making them suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans are also inherently quieter
than axial fans, although the difference is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of
optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan units.
Induced Draft
Fans can be applied in an induced draft or a forced draft configuration. The rotating air handling components
of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on
near-by neighbors and providing maximum protection from fan icing with units operating in sub-freezing
conditions. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures long life and minimizes maintenance
requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft towers,
facilitating easy access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these components in the
dry entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive saturated discharge air.
Centrifugal Fan Axial Fan
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E4
Capacity Range
In the following table, product capacities are called out in terms of a flow rate at 95F/85F/78F. This refers to
the flow rate of water that the unit can cool from a 95F (35.0C) entering water temperature to an 85F
(29.4C) leaving water temperature at a 78F (25.6C) entering ambient wet-bulb temperature. BAC offers
selection software to evaluate the performance of a tower at any conditions; see page J6 for details.
All capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
Maximum Entering Water Temperature
All BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers are capable of withstanding entering fluid temperatures as high as
180F (82.2C), and the HXV is capable of withstanding even higher temperatures due to the added dry coil
technology.
A list of typical applications is provided on page E5 for your reference.
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
E5
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
Product Lines
FXV
Single Air Inlet Models Dual Air Inlet Models
Principle of
Operation
Configuration Combined Flow Combined Flow
Fan System Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
26 - 299 Nominal Tons 344 - 624 Nominal Tons
78.7 896 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 1031 1,872 gpm at 95F/85F/78F
Small to medium HVAC & industrial applications
such as water source heat pump loops and air
compressor cooling
Medium to large HVAC & industrial applications
such as electric arc furnaces and pharmaceutical
plants
Tight enclosures & installations requiring a single
air inlet
Unit replacements
Capacity Range
(Single Cell)
Maximum
Entering Water
Temperature
Typical
Applications
180F (82.2C) 180F (82.2C)
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E6
Series V
VF1 VFL (low profile)
Counterflow Counterflow Combined Flow
Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
4.1 - 543 Nominal Tons 3.9 - 108 Nominal Tons 160 - 305 Nominal Tons
12.4 - 1,629 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 11.6 - 324.6 gpm at 95F/85F/78F 480 915 gpm at 95F/85F/78F
applications such as water source heat
pump loops and air compressor cooling
applications
applications such as water source heat
pump loops and air compressor cooling
Indoor installations
Installations with extremely low height
requirements
Installations requiring plume abatement
High temperature applications Indoor installations Installations requiring water conservation
Tight enclosures & installations
requiring a single air inlet
High temperature industrial applications Large range/close approach applications
Extremely sound sensitive applications Extremely sound sensitive applications High temperature industrial applications
HXV
EWT can exceed 180F but is application
specific; contact your local rep for details.
180F (82.2C) 180F (82.2C)
AIR
IN
WARM AIR
OUT
AIR
IN
SPRAY PUMP
WET DECK SURFACE
PRIME SURFACE
COIL
FINNED
COIL
WATER DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
A
IR
W
A
R
M
A
IR
W
A
R
M
COLD WATER
BASIN
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MODULATING FLOW
CONTROL VALVE
WATER
A
d
v
a
n
t
a
g
e
s

o
f

C
C
C
T
E7
Advantages of Closed Circuit
Cooling Towers
Open cooling towers expose process cooling water to the atmosphere, typically as part of a chiller system
loop (see Figure 1). These open towers use an efficient, simple, and economical design. All components in
an open system must be compatible with the oxygen introduced via the cooling tower.
Closed circuit cooling towers completely isolate process cooling fluid from the atmosphere. This is
accomplished by combining heat rejection equipment with a heat exchanger in a closed circuit tower (see
Figure 2). A closed loop system protects the quality of the process fluid, reduces system maintenance, and
provides operational flexibility at a slightly higher initial cost.
When deciding which system is best for an application, several factors should be considered.
Performance
If an application must produce full capacity throughout the year, maintaining a clean, reliable system loop is
critical. Isolating the process fluid in a closed loop system prevents airborne contaminants from entering
and fouling the system. Sustaining optimum performance in an open loop system will require regular
maintenance to assure similar efficiency. High efficiency chillers and heat exchangers rely on clean process
water to function properly and are significantly impacted by even small amounts of fouling.
Expense
The initial equipment cost of an open loop system will be less than a comparably sized closed loop system,
since the open system does not include the intermediate heat exchanger component. However, the higher
first cost of a closed loop system will be paid back during years of operation through the following savings:
Cleaner process fluid results in a cleaner internal surface area, and higher efficiency components in
the system (e.g. chiller)
Reduced system
maintenance costs
Reduced water treatment
costs for evaporative
equipment
Operating in free cooling
mode during the winter to
save energy consumption
Cooling
Tower
Condenser
Water
Circuit
Chiller
Chilled
Water
Circuit
Heat Load
(Building)
Condenser
Evaporator
Refrigerant
Circuit
Figure 1: Chiller Loop w/Open Tower
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E8
Maintenance
Since the process fluid of a closed loop system is completely isolated from the environment, routine
maintenance is only required on the heat rejection equipment itself. The need to shut down the system
periodically to clean the heat exchanger is dramatically reduced, if not entirely eliminated. Providing clean
process fluid to the system will extend the life of other components in the system (condenser bundles,
compressors, etc.).
Water Treatment
Maintaining proper process fluid quality in a system may involve several steps, such as chemical treatment,
filtration equipment and the addition of clean make-up water. A closed circuit cooling tower can provide the
following advantages over an open cooling tower:
Lower volume of recirculating water to treat
Process loop requires minimal treatment
During periods of dry operation, the need for make-up water is eliminated
Operational Flexibility
Closed circuit towers allow for the following modes of operation not possible with open towers:
Free cooling operation without the need for an intermediate heat exchanger: Chiller turned off
Dry operation: Conserve water and treatment chemicals, prevent icing and plume
Variable pumping: Closed condenser water loop allows for variable speed pumping to conserve energy
Chiller
Condenser
Water
Circuit
Chilled
Water
Circuit
Heat Load
(Building)
Closed Circuit
Cooling Tower
Condenser
Evaporator
Refrigerant
Circuit
Figure 2: Chiller Loop w/Closed Circuit Tower
A
d
v
a
n
t
a
g
e
s

o
f

C
C
C
T
E9
Closed Circuit Tower v. Open Tower / Heat Exchanger
Sometimes, an open cooling tower is paired with a heat exchanger (see Figure 3) to capture some of the
benefits of closed loop cooling. Choosing closed circuit cooling towers over this open tower/heat exchanger
combination may still be a better choice for the following reasons:
Total cost: Addition of a heat exchanger (pump, piping, etc.) to the open tower loop brings the initial
cost much closer to that of the closed circuit tower system
Single piece of equipment: Compact design of the closed circuit tower conserves space in a
self-contained package, compared to multiple locations for the tower/heat exchanger arrangement
Maintenance: Narrow spacing in heat exchanger (e.g. plate and frame) may trap solids introduced by
the open tower, requiring frequent, time consuming cleaning to assure optimum performance
Dry operation: Open tower/heat exchanger system cannot be run dry in the winter
These guidelines provide some general information to help decide whether a closed circuit cooling tower is
better suited for a particular application than an open tower, with or without a heat exchanger. For additional
assistance with a project, please contact your local BAC Representative.
Cooling
Tower
Condenser
Water
Circuit
Heat
Exchanger
Chiller
Chilled
Water
Circuit
Heat Load
(Building)
Condenser Evaporator
Refrigerant
Circuit
Figure 3: Chiller Loop w/Open Tower/Heat Exchanger Combination
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
FXV
E10
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E11
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E13
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E14
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E19
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E23
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E26
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E27
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E30
Engineering Condiderations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E76
F
X
V
E11
26 550 Nominal Tons
79 1,650 gpm of water at 95
F/85
F/78
F
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a wide
range of flow and temperature requirements. Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns,
minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Application flexibility
Long service life
ASME B31.5 compliant heat transfer coils
FXV
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E12
F
X
V
E13
Benefits
Evaporative cooled equipment minimizes the energy consumption of the entire system because it
The FXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance
requirements via:
Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling
Patented combined flow technology*, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
minimizing the potential for scaling and fouling
Parallel flow of air and spray water, which eliminates scale-promoting dry spots
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System available (see page E20 for details)

*For more information on combined flow technology, see page E1.
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel
I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives
factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Units ship in multiple sections to
minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Access Hinged access doors on each end wall
and a standard internal walkway provide easy
access to the unit interior.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the
cold water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system
and heat transfer coil.
The unit shown ships in two pieces to
minimize shipping and rigging costs
Oversized, hinged access door
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E14
Access to Spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and spray
water over the coil allows for inspection and access to the top
of the coil during full operation.
Application Flexibility
Difficult thermal duties The combined flow design is ideal for applications requiring a close
approach and/or large range.
Replacement applications Single air inlet models are designed to mount directly on existing
support steel of both crossflow and counterflow units.
Coil configurations Alternate coil configurations and materials available. ASME U Stamp
available (see page E19 for details).
Highest capacity in the industry Dual air inlet models offer the highest single cell capacity of
any closed circuit cooling tower in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer required cells, lower over
all fan horsepower, and fewer piping connections.
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train Backed by a five-year fan drive and

motor warranty, the BALTIDRIVE

corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-the-art
technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable
year-round performance.
Separate Air Inlet Louvers Reduce the potential for scale build-up
and damaging ice formations at the air/water interface by providing a
line of sight from the outside of the unit into the fill.
Long Service Life
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page E19 for construction options).
Spray distribution system
Air Inlet Louvers
F
X
V
E15
Single Air Inlet Models
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E16
G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
galvanized steel panels
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
Premium quality, solid-backed,
multi-groove belt
Heavy-duty bearings
(280,000 hour average life)
Five-year motor and
drive warranty
Low HP Axial Fan(s)
Quiet operation
Visible and accessible during operation
Overlapping spray patterns ensure proper
water coverage
Coil Section (Not Shown)
Continuous serpentine, steel tubing
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF)
Pneumatically tested at 375 psig
Sloped tubes for free drainage of fluid
ASME B31.5 compliant
When required, orders shipping into
Canada are supplied with a CRN
BACross
Wet Deck Surface

with Integral Drift
Eliminators (Not Shown)
Impervious to rot, decay and
biological attack
Flame spread rating of 5 per
ASTM E84-77a
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
Cold Water Basin
accessible from louver face
Integral internal walkway
Recirculating Spray Water
Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted
centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor
Bleed line with metering valve installed
from pump discharge to overflow
Hinged Access Doors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F
X
V
E17
Dual Air Inlet Models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E18
FRP Casing Panels
Corrosion resistant
Maintenance free
UV resistant finish
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
Premium quality, solid backed, multi-groove belt
Five-year motor and drive warranty
Low HP Axial Fan
Quiet operation
water coverage
Coil Sections
When required, orders shipping into Canada
are supplied with a CRN
BACross

Impervious to rot, decay and
biological attack
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
Cold Water Basin
Integral Recirculating Spray
Water Pumps (Not Shown)
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pumps
Totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) motors
Bleed line with metering valve installed from
pump discharge to overflow
Hinged Access Doors
(Not Shown)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
F
X
V
E19
All Models: All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700)
hot-dip galvanized steel. Inlet louvers are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester
(FRP).
Models FXV-288 and 364: Casing panels are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass reinforced
polyester (FRP).
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit cooling tower
(excluding heat transfer coil).
All multi-cell units are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved construction as an option.
Coil Configurations
Standard Serpentine Coil:
The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa)
and is ASME B31.5 compliant.
Optional Cleanable Header Coil:
The cleanable header tube bundle provides removable cover plates on the inlet and outlet header
boxes to permit access to each serpentine tube circuit for solvent or air-pressure cleaning. Tubes are
all prime surface steel tubing formed into a serpentine shape and welded into an assembly. Coil
material options include carbon steel coils (hot-dip galvanized outside surface) or stainless steel
coils. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E20
Optional Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304 stainless steel for specialized applications. The coil is designed for
low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at
375 psig (2586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant.
Optional Straight-Through Mechanically-Cleanable Coil:
A header box with a removable cover plate at each end of the coil allows access to every tube end for
mechanical cleaning or plugging. It is available in carbon steel (hot-dip galvanized inside and out) or
stainless steel. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
Optional ASME U Stamp Coil:
This serpentine coil is manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, and bears the ASME U stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa).
When required, coils shipping into Canada are supplied with a CRN. Other coil configurations are
available for specific applications. Contact your local BAC Representative for details.
Fan Drive System
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on all models is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE
Power Train.
This BAC engineered drive system consists of a specially designed powerband and two cast aluminum
sheaves located on minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life. A cooling tower duty fan
motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower service, is
provided and backed by BACs comprehensive five year motor and fan drive warranty.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER

speed and load, and the other is sized
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the
design horsepower. This configuration allows the
system to be operated like a two-speed motor, but
with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the
event of failure. As a minimum, approximately 70%
capacity will be available from the low horsepower motor, even on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and
wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy savings
are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low wet-bulb
temperatures.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
F
X
V
E21
Models FXV-43X, 44X, Q44X, 64X, and Q64X are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as
standard. Models FXV-66X and Q66X are provided with two fan motors driving three fans as standard.
The Independent Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow
independent operation, adding an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.
Gear Drive System,
Close-Coupled Motor
Models FXV-288 and 364 are available
with a close-coupled gear drive system.
Both the gear drive and couplings are
selected with a 2.0 service factor. Gear
construction includes a nickel-alloy steel
shaft, casehardened gears, self
lubrication, and a single piece, gray iron
housing. This drive system ships
Gear Drive System,
Models FXV-288 and 364 are available
with a gear drive system with external
TEFC motor. A non-corrosive carbon-fiber
composite drive shaft with stainless steel
hubs is selected with a 2.0 service factor.
The motor and drive shaft ship separately
for easy field installation.
Gear Drive System, Close-Coupled Motor
Gear Drive System, Externally Mounted Motor
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E22
(FXV-288 and 364 Models Only)
The basinless unit construction option enables units to be directly
applied to new or existing concrete cold water basins. This custom
feature, reduces maintenance costs by eliminating the integral
basin from traditional units. It simplifies piping and pumping
requirements of multi-cell installations and provides a
cost-effective solution for many field-erected replacement projects.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by FXV
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers make them
suitable for installation in most
environments. For very sound sensitive
installations, a low sound fan option is
available to significantly reduce the sound
levels generated from the tower with
minimal impact on thermal performance.
The FXV thermal performance with the
low sound fan has been certified in
accordance with CTI Standard STD-201.
For extremely sound sensitive installations,
factory designed, tested and rated sound
attenuation is available for both the air
intake and discharge.
Installation on a concrete basin
Unit with intake and discharge sound attenuation
F
X
V
E23
Accessories
For external service, louver face and access door
platforms can be added to the unit when purchased
or as an aftermarket item. Safety cages and safety
gates are also available. All components are
Ladder, Safety Cage, Gate and Handrails (FXV-288 and 364 Models Only)
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to the fan deck, models FXV-288 and 364 can be
furnished with ladders extending from the top of the unit to the base, as well as safety cages, safety
gates, fan deck extensions and handrail packages. All components are designed to meet OSHA
requirements. All access to the top of the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable
Note: Partial or full grating above the coil air intake is recommended with this option.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on single air inlet models, an internal ladder is available.
Internal Service Platforms
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on
single air inlet models FXV-L641 through FXV-Q661
and all dual air inlet models, an internal ladder and
upper service platform with handrails is available.
Safety gates are available for all handrail openings.
All components are designed to meet OSHA
requirements.
Internal ladder and service platform
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E24
Positive Closure Damper (PCD) Hoods
The FXVs innovative design results in a low heat loss when the unit is idle. When additional heat loss
protection is desired, coil air intake hoods with factory mounted PCDs and damper actuators can be
provided. The addition of factory mounted insulation to the hood and casing further reduces the heat
loss by minimizing losses due to conduction. See page E29 for Heat Loss Data on all FXV models.
Basin Heaters
Closed circuit cooling towers exposed to below
freezing ambient temperatures require protection
to prevent freezing of the water in the cold water
basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed
heaters, which maintain +40F (4.4C) water
temperature, are a simple and inexpensive way
of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data
makeup valve when a more precise water level control is required.
This package consists of a conductance-actuated level control
mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in the
make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Electric Water Level
Control Package
Basin Heater
FXV-42X 1 4 1 6
FXV-43X 1 6 1 8
FXV-44X 1 8 1 12
FXV-64X 1 12 1 16
FXV-66X 1 16 1 21
FXV-288 2 12 2 15
FXV-364 2 14 2 20
MODEL NUMBERS
F
X
V
E25
Accessories
Extended lubrication lines are available for
lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. Grease fittings
are located inside the plenum area next to the
access door.
Optional high temperature wet deck material is available for high entering fluid temperatures.
Air Inlet Screens
Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over the inlet
louvers and the spray distribution system to prevent debris
from entering the tower.
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of
preventing debris from collecting in the cold water basin of the
tower. A complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided
in the tower basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment (by others).
Grease fittings at the access door & bearings with the extended lubrication line option
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E26
Notes:
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished
by others.
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360
of span, not to exceed 1/2 inch.
4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and
supporting steel, be certain to allow for the length of the vibration
rails when determining the length of the supporting steel, as
vibration rail length and mounting hole locations may differ from
those of the unit.
5. If point vibration isolation is used with multi-cell units, the isolators
must be located under the support steel, not between the support
steel and the towers.
Single Air Inlet
Dual Air Inlet
The recommended support arrangement for FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers consists of parallel
I-beams positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also
serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower.
Alternate steel support designs include a cantilevered plan as indicated by the optional minimum D
dimension in the table below. When unit is supported with a cantilever plan, the side opposite the air
inlet shall be cantilevered. To support an FXV on columns or in an alternate arrangement not shown
here, consult your local BAC Representative.
Structural Support
MODEL
NUMBER D
OPTIONAL
MINIMUM D
MAX.
DEFLECTION
FXV-42x 8'-3" 5'-9" 3/16"
FXV-43x 8'-3" 5'-9" 5/16"
FXV-44x 8'-3" 5'-9" 3/8"
FXV-64x 11'-7 3/4" 8'-0" 3/8"
FXV-66x 11'-7 3/4" 8'-0" 1/2"
MODEL
NUMBER D
MAX.
DEFLECTION
FXV-288-xxx 23'-9 1/8" 1/2"
FXV-364-xxx 26'- 5/8" 1/2"
F
X
V
E27
Engineering Data
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
Single Air Inlet Models
Notes:
1. Operating weight is for the tower with the water level in the cold
water basin at the overflow.
2. The actual size of the inlet and outlet connection may vary with
the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions.
3. Inlet and outlet connections are beveled for welding.
4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are MPT.
5. Nominal tons of cooling represents 3 gpm of water from 95F to
85F at a 78F entering wet-bulb temperature.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION L W H A P
MAKE-UP
WATER
COIL
FXV-421 33 7,730 5,050 2,900 46
FXV-422 46 8,190 5,370 3,220 60
FXV-423 52 8,680 5,710 3,560 74
FXV-424 59 9,160 6,050 3,900 88
FXV-431 57 11,230 7,160 4,240 69
FXV-432 73 11,930 7,650 4,730 90
FXV-433 81 12,630 8,140 5,220 112
FXV-434 95 13,380 8,680 5,760 133
FXV-441 92 14,220 8,760 5,120 91
FXV-442 111 15,150 9,410 5,770 120
FXV-443 122 16,080 10,060 6,420 149
FXV-444 140 17,070 10,770 7,130 178
FXV-Q440 88 15,150 9,410 5,770 124
FXV-Q441 125 17,070 10,770 7,130 182
FXV-641 144 18,560 10,890 6,730 146
FXV-642 175 20,050 11,930 7,770 192
FXV-643 193 21,550 12,980 8,820 238
FXV-644 215 23,050 14,040 9,880 284
FXV-Q640 134 20,050 11,930 7,770 194
FXV-Q641 186 23,050 14,040 9,880 286
FXV-661 231 27,070 15,510 9,690 218
FXV-662 267 29,290 17,070 11,250 288
FXV-663 295 31,570 18,670 12,850 358
FXV-664 331 33,810 20,280 14,460 429
FXV-Q660 215 29,290 17,070 11,250 299
FXV-Q661 299 33,810 20,280 14,460 439
900
8'-8 3/4"
5 to 15
3 to 10 1.5
2
13'-2 3/4"
6'-3/4" 6'-1 1/4" 8'-5 1/4"
7.5 15 to 45
10 to 30
7.5 to 20 3
5
1'-8 1/4"
1'-8 1/4"
18'-1 1/4" 11'-10" 16'-4 1/4" 9'-2 1/4" 2'-3/8"
12'-1 1/4" 11'-10" 15'-10 3/4"
6'-3/4"
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR HP
12'-1 1/4" 8'-5 1/4"
NOMINAL
TONS
5
13'-2 3/4"
9'-1 1/4" 8'-5 1/4" 13'-2 3/4"
WEIGHTS (LBS) DIMENSIONS
1'-3 3/4"
1'-4 1/4" 6'-3/4"
1/2" 4"
CONNECTION
SIZES
1/2" 4"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1/2"
1/2"
4"
6"
SPRAY
PUMP
(GPM)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(GAL)
4"
8"
4"
6"
190
290
500
715
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E28
6" FLUID OUT
6" FLUID IN
Dual Air Inlet Models
Notes:
the design flow rate. Consult unit print for dimensions.
4. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are located
on the bottom of the unit. Make-up connection is 1-1/2 MPT
standpipe, drain is 2 FPT and overflow is 3 FPT.
5. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound fan
may have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION L W H
5
FXV-288-31x 468 46,470 28,150 8,050 600
FXV-288-41x 502 50,160 30,910 9,430 712
FXV-288-1Qx 439 50,160 30,910 9,430 706
FXV-364-31x 579 54,440 32,170 9,390 696
FXV-364-41x 624 58,800 35,450 11,030 828
FXV-364-1Qx 550 58,800 35,450 11,030 862
1,720
1,720 15
TOTAL MOTOR HP
13'-11 1/8"
DIMENSIONS
26'-3 1/2"
18'-7 7/8"
18'-9 7/8" 25 to 75
11'-11" 24'-1/2" 20 to 60 15
SPRAY
PUMP
(GPM)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(GAL)
MODEL
NUMBER
WEIGHTS (LBS)
NOMINAL TONS
6
F
X
V
E29
Engineering Data:
Cold Weather Operation
Notes:
1 Heat loss based on 50F entering coil water and 10F ambient
with 45 mph wind (fans and pump off).
2. One inch thick PVC nitrile rubber blend thermal insulation on both
the PCD hood and the casing panels surrounding the coil.
Notes:
1. Hood shipping weight
includes shipping skid
weight.
FXV Heat Loss Data (Btu/hr)
Dimensional Data of Positive Closure Damper Hood
MODEL
NUMBER
STANDARD
UNIT
UNIT w/
PCD HOOD
UNIT w/ PCD
HOOD &
INSULATION
FXV-421 68,400 43,500 30,100
FXV-422 87,100 47,100 32,300
FXV-423 105,200 50,500 34,700
FXV-424 122,400 54,000 37,000
FXV-431 102,800 60,800 43,200
FXV-432 131,200 65,600 46,500
FXV-433 158,000 70,600 49,600
FXV-434 183,000 74,900 52,800
FXV-441 135,700 76,700 55,200
FXV-442 172,900 82,100 59,100
FXV-443 208,000 87,600 62,900
FXV-444 241,000 92,900 66,500
FXV-Q440 172,900 82,100 59,100
FXV-Q441 241,000 92,900 66,500
FXV-641 203,400 103,800 75,300
FXV-642 259,800 109,700 79,300
FXV-643 313,100 115,600 83,200
FXV-644 362,900 121,300 86,900
FXV-Q640 259,800 109,700 79,300
FXV-Q641 362,900 121,300 86,900
FXV-661 304,500 158,200 118,000
FXV-662 387,500 165,500 123,000
FXV-663 404,700 172,400 127,600
FXV-664 536,900 179,100 132,200
FXV-Q660 387,500 165,500 123,000
FXV-Q661 536,900 179,100 132,200
FXV-288-31x 760,200 280,700 202,000
FXV-288-41x 881,100 294,500 211,000
FXV-288-1Qx 881,100 294,500 211,000
FXV-364-31x 894,000 330,100 237,600
FXV-364-41x 1,036,200 346,400 248,100
FXV-364-1Qx 1,036,200 346,400 248,100
MODEL
NUMBER
HOOD SHIP.
WEIGHT (lbs.)
Operating
Weight Add
(lbs.) LENGTH (L)
WIDTH
(W)
HOOD
HEIGTH
(X)
UNIT
HEIGTH
(H)
FXV-42x 390 320 5-11 7/8 3'-5 1/4" 2-5 1/8 15-1 3/4
FXV-43x 540 430 8-11 7/8 3'-5 1/4" 2-5 1/8 15-1 3/4
FXV-44x 720 570 11-11 7/8" 3'-5 1/4" 2-5 1/8 15-1 3/4
FXV-64x 1160 920 11-11 7/8" 5'-3 1/2" 2-5 1/8 179 3/4
FXV-66x 1650 1300 17 11 7/8 5'-3 1/2" 2-5 1/8 179 3/4
FXV-288-xxx 1300 1040 13-11 1/8" 6-3 3/8" 2-5 1/8 20'-2 5/8"
FXV-364-xxx 1500 1200 11'-11" 6-3 3/8" 2-5 1/8 20'-2 5/8"
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E30
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, ___
factory-assembled closed circuit cooling tower(s) of induced draft
design with vertical air discharge. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ___ ft (m) x ___ ft (m), with an overall
height not exceeding approximately ___ ft (m). Operating weight
shall not exceed _____ lbs (kg). The closed circuit cooling tower
shall be Baltimore Aircoil Model FXV-___.
1.2 Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The closed
circuit cooling tower shall be warranted by the manufacturer to
have capacity to cool _______ US gpm (lps) of water from
______F (C) to _____F (C) at _____F (C) entering
wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed
________ psi (kPa). The performance shall be certified by the
Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI Certification
Standard STD-201 or, lacking such certification, a field
acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty period in
accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the
Cooling Technology Institute, or other qualified independent third
party testing agency. Manufacturers' performance guarantees or
performance bonds without CTI Certification of water ratings
shall not be accepted.
(Alternate) 1.2 Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as
heat transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be
warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________US gpm (lps) of
_____% by volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from
______F (C) to _____F (C) at _____F (C) entering
wet-bulb temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed
________ psi (kPa). Basis for thermal performance rating shall
be the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) certified rating for
water cooling appropriately adjusted for the thermal properties of
the aqueous glycol solution used. Additionally, the thermal
performance of the Product Line with water as the heat transfer
fluid shall be certified by the CTI in accordance with CTI
Certification Standard STD-201. Manufacturers' performance
guarantees or performance bonds without CTI Certification of
water ratings shall not be accepted.
2.1 G-235 (Z700 metric) Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Structure: All
steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from
heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel, with
cut edges given a protective coat of zinc-rich compound.
(Alternate) 2.1 Optional BALTIBOND
System: All steel panels, support structure, hot and cold water
basins, fan deck and fan cylinder shall be protected with the
BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System, applied by the

closed circuit cooling tower manufacturer in its own
manufacturing plant. The system shall consist of G-235 (Z700
metric) hot-dip galvanized steel, prepared in a four-step (clean,
pretreat, rinse, dry) process, with an electrostatically sprayed,
thermosetting, hybrid polymer, fuse-bonded to the hot-dip
galvanized steel substrate during a thermally-activated curing
stage, and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance program.
(Alternate) 2.1 Optional Stainless Steel Construction: All steel
panels and structural elements shall be constructed from
heavy-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
2.2 Coil Section: The heat transfer section of the closed circuit
cooling tower shall be encased with removable heavy-gauge
galvanized steel panels (or corrosion resistant, fiberglass
reinforced polyester (FRP) on Models FXV-288 to 364). The coil
shall be constructed of continuous serpentine all prime surface
steel, be pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,685 kPa), and be
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. The coil shall be designed
for free drainage of fluid and shall be ASME B31.5 compliant.
Maximum allowable working pressure shall be 300 psig (280
psig for coils supplied with a CRN).
(Alternate) 2.2 Optional Cleanable Header Coil: Coil(s) to be
constructed of continuous serpentine prime surface carbon steel,
with a hot-dip galvanized (after fabrication) outside surface. Inlet
and outlet headers have removable cover plates, and elbowed
fluid inlet and outlet connections to allow removal of the cover
plates without disturbing fluid piping. Coil(s) shall be
pneumatically tested at 125 psig.
(Alternate) 2.2 Optional Cleanable Tube Coil: Coil(s) to be
constructed with straight full-length tubes, pitched in the direction
of fluid flow for free drainage, and pneumatically tested at 125
psig. Full-height box headers and removable cover plates allow
access to all tubes at both ends. The entire assembly is hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, inside and out.
(Alternate) 2.2 Optional ASME Coil: Coil(s) shall be designed
and constructed to meet the requirements of ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, and bear the U
stamp.
(Alternate) 2.2 Optional Stainless Steel Coil: Coil(s) shall be
constructed of Type 304 stainless steel serpentine tube. Tubes
shall be sloped for free drainage and coil assembly shall be
pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2,685 kPa). Coil(s) shall be
ASME B31.5 compliant.
of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. The basin shall include
a depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. Standard
accessories shall include large area, lift-out steel strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle
orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air
entrainment, waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve
with large diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.
F
X
V
E31
2.0 Construction Details - continued
(Alternate) 2.3 Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: The
cold water basin shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel. All
factory seams in the cold water basin shall be welded, leak
tested at the factory to ensure watertight assembly and shall be
warranted against leaks for five years.
2.4 Casing Panels: Models FXV-4xx, 6xx, Lxxx, & Qxxx:
Casing panels shall be constructed of steel matching the
structure defined in section 2.1.
Or, for Models FXV-288 and 364:
Casing panels shall be constructed of corrosion resistant,
fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
3.0 Spray Water System
3.1 Spray Water Pump(s): The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include an appropriate number of close-coupled, bronze-fitted
centrifugal pump and motor assemblies equipped with
mechanical seal, mounted in the basin and piped from the
suction connection to the water distribution system. The pump
motor(s) shall be the totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type
suitable for _____ volts, ___ phase, and ____ hertz electrical
service. The system shall include a metering valve and bleed line
to control the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow
connection.
over the coil at a flow rate sufficient to ensure complete wetting
of the coil at all times. Large diameter, non-clog, 360plastic
distribution nozzles shall utilize a two stage diffusion pattern to
provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create multiple
intersection points with adjacent nozzles. The branches and
spray nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber
grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or
complete branches for cleaning or flushing.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface and Drift
Eliminators
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be impervious to rot, decay,
fungus and biological attack. The surface shall be manufactured
and performance tested by the closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure
control of the final product. A separate set of drift eliminators
shall be removable in easily handled sections for quick access to
the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes in
air direction.
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be wave-formed,
fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP), spaced to minimize air
resistance and prevent water splash-out.
6.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow, with aluminum
alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed
for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for
maximum fan efficiency. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported
by heavy-duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with
moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be driven by a
one-piece, multi-groove neoprene/polyester belt designed
specifically for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor
sheave(s) shall be fabricated from cast aluminum.
(TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type with 1.15
service factor, designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty
on _____ volt/ ___ hertz/ ___ phase electrical service. The motor
shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings,
shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be mounted on an easily
adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty on ____ volt/
___ hertz/ ____ phase electrical service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts,
and bearings. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed
per NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
7.0 Access
7.1 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be
provided on each end wall for access to the coil, drift eliminators,
and fan plenum section. The water make-up valve, float ball, and
suction strainer shall be easily accessible.
8.0 Sound
8.1 Sound Level: To maintain the quality of the local
environment, the maximum sound pressure levels (dB)
measured 50 ft from the closed circuit cooling tower operating at
full fan speed shall not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
environment, the closed circuit cooling tower shall be furnished
with a low sound fan. The thermal performance of the closed
circuit cooling tower shall be certified by the Cooling Technology
Institute in accordance with paragraph 1.2 of this specification
when furnished with the low sound fan. Maximum sound
pressure levels (dB) measured 50 ft from the closed circuit
cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
Series V
E32
Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E35
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E42
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E76
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E33
4 543 Nominal Tons
12 1,629 gpm at 95F/85
F/78
F
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers deliver independently verified, fully rated thermal performance over a
wide range of flow and temperature requirements. The Series V can be installed indoors and is available in a
low profile version to accommodate limited ceiling or enclosure heights. The Series V design minimizes sound
levels and installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies maintenance
requirements.
Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Suitable for indoor or outdoor installations
Low profile models available
Low sound
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
ASME B31.5 compliant heat transfer coil
Series V
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E34
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E35
Benefits
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fans can
overcome the static pressure imposed by
external ductwork, allowing the Series V to
be installed indoors.
Low Profile Models The fan section of low
profile units are adjacent to the casing section to
yield models suitable for use in height sensitive
installations. Low profile models are available in
capacities from 12 to 361 nominal tons, which
correspond to heights of 5 5 and 8 4-3/4,
respectively.
Low Sound
Centrifugal Fan Centrifugal fans have inherently low sound characteristics.
Single Air Inlet - Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet
Low Installed Cost
drives factory-installed and aligned (see sketches on next page).
Modular Design Large models ship in multiple sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Low Profile Series V
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E36
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access The interior of the unit is easily
accessible for adjusting the float valve,
cleaning the strainer or flushing the basin.
V-Belt Drive The fans, motor, and drive system are
located outside of the moist discharge airstream, protecting
them from moisture, condensation and icing. Backed by a
five-year fan drive and motor warranty, these units are
suitable for year-round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to meet
the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary
requirements of any project (see page E39 for construction options).
V-Belt Drive System
The water level control (optional
electric control shown here) is easily
VF1 Models
VFL Models
Steel Supports
Steel Supports
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E37
steel panels
Schedule 40 PVC spray branches
Coil
When required, orders shipping into
Canada are supplied with a CRN
Drift Eliminators
Assembled in easy to handle sections
1
2
2
1
3
3
4
4
Coil section typical for
all models
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E38
Fan Drive System
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings
Quiet operation
Recirculating Spray Pump
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Access Door
Strainer (Not Shown)
Anti-vortexing design to prevent air entrainment
5
5
4
2
3
1
8
7
5
6
6
7
8
9
8
7
VF1 Models
VFL Models
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E39
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit cooling tower
A Type 304 stainless steel cold water basin is provided. This option is available on VF1 models only.
See the Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin for VFL models.
A cost effective alternative to an all stainless steel cold water basin, critical components in the cold
water basin are provided in Type 304 stainless steel. The remaining components are constructed of
the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND
System).
A cost effective alternative to all stainless steel construction, all components that are exposed to the
recirculating water are provided in Type 304 stainless steel. The remaining components are
constructed of the base material of construction (galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND
Corrosion
Protection System).
Coil Configurations
The standard cooling coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa)
and is ASME B31.5 compliant.
Optional Extended Surface Coil:
Coils are available with half or all the rows finned at 5 fins per inch for seasonal wet/dry operation.
The coil is hot-dip galvanized (outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E40
Coils are available in Type 304 stainless steel for specialized applications. The coil is designed for low
pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at
Optional Cleanable Header Coil:
The cleanable header tube bundle provides removable cover plates on the inlet and outlet header
boxes to permit access to each serpentine tube circuit for solvent or air-pressure cleaning. Tubes are
all prime surface steel tubing formed into a serpentine shape and welded into an assembly. Coil
material options include carbon steel coils (hot-dip galvanized outside surface) or stainless steel coils.
Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
Optional Straight-Through Mechanically-Cleanable Coil:
A header box with a removable cover plate at each end of the coil allows access to every tube end for
mechanical cleaning or plugging. It is available in carbon steel (hot-dip galvanized inside and out) or
stainless steel. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 125 psig (860 kPa).
This coil is manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, and bears the ASME U stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized
(outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping
tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa).
When required, orders shipping into Canada are supplied with a CRN. Other coil configurations are
available for specific applications. Contact your local BAC Representative for details.
Cleanable Header Coil Straight-through Mechanically-Cleanable Coil
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E41
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air
necessary to reject unwanted heat from the system
to the atmosphere. Dynamically balanced, forwardly
curved, centrifugal fans driven by matched V-belts
with taper lock sheaves designed for not less than
150% of the motor nameplate horsepower are
standard. Cooling tower duty fan motors, custom
engineered for BAC to provide maximum
performance for cooling tower service, are provided
and backed by BACs comprehensive five-year
motor and fan drive warranty.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER

speed and load, and the other is sized for
approximately 2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3
the design horsepower. This configuration allows
the system to be operated like a two-speed motor,
but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in
the event of failure. As a minimum, approximately
70% capacity will be available from the low
horsepower motor, even on a design wet-bulb day.
Controls and wiring are the same as those required
for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant energy
savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low
wet-bulb temperatures.
The low sound levels generated by Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers make them suitable for
most installations. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be
oriented so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. The Series V is also
available with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air inlet and discharge.
Standard Drive System
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E42
Accessories
External Access Options (VF1 Models Only)
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to
the top of the unit, VF1 models can be furnished
with ladders extending from the base of the unit to
the top, as well as safety cages, safety gates and
handrail packages. All components are designed to
meet OSHA requirements. All access to the top of
the equipment must be made in accordance with
applicable governmental occupational safety
standards.
NOTE: When these access options are employed,
the tower must be equipped with steel drift
eliminators.
A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is
available to effectively protect against equipment
failure due to excessive vibration of the mechanical
equipment system. BAC can provide either a
mechanical or solid-state electronic vibration cutout
switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure to ensure reliable
protection. Additional contacts can be provided to
activate an alarm.
The electric water level control replaces the
standard mechanical makeup valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package
consists of a conductance-actuated level control
mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve
in the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing
to minimize water hammer.
Unit Shown with External Access Platform
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E43
Basin Heaters
Closed circuit cooling towers
exposed to below freezing ambient
temperatures require protection to
prevent freezing of the water in the
cold water basin when the unit is
idle. Factory installed heaters, which
maintain +40F (4.4C) water
temperature, are a simple and
inexpensive way of providing such
protection.
Heater Sizing Data
Basin Heater
VFL-012-X 1 2 1 2
VFL-024-X 1 3 1 4
VFL-036-X 1 4 1 5
VFL-048-X 1 5 1 7
VFL-072-X 1 7 1 9
VFL-096-X 1 9 1 12
VF1-009-X 1 2 1 2
VF1-018-X 1 2 1 2
VF1-027-X 1 2 1 3
VF1-036-X 1 3 1 5
VF1-048-X 1 3 1 5
VF1-072-X 1 5 1 7. 5
VF1-096-X 1 5 1 7. 5
VF1-144N-X 1 7 1 10
VF1-144-X 1 8 1 10
VF1-192-X 2 5 2 7. 5
VF1-216-X 1 12 1 16
VF1-288N-X 2 7 2 10
VF1-288-X 2 8 2 10
VF1-432-X 2 12 2 16
MODEL NUMBERS
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E44
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings located outside the fan section are available for lubrication
of the fan shaft bearings.
Bottom Screens (VF1 Models Only)
Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed over the bottom openings to prevent unauthorized
access.
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required when
intake air is ducted to the unit.
Capacity Control Dampers
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to
provide better leaving water temperature control
than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. A
standard electrical control package for dampers is
available.
Discharge Hoods
BAC offers a full line of standard discharge hoods
with and without positive closure dampers that are
built, tested, and rated specifically for all Series V
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. The tapered hoods
are designed to increase the discharge air
velocity to avoid recirculation in extremely tight
enclosures. Straight or tapered hoods can be used
to elevate the unit discharge above adjacent walls.
A larger fan motor may be necessary when this
option is provided. See page E51 for details of
hoods furnished with positive closure dampers.
Solid Bottom Panels
Tapered Discharge Hood w/ Positive Closure Dampers
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E45
VFL Engineering Data
4' 1-1/4"
1"
2" DRAIN
End Elevation View
Models VFL-012 to 048
Models VFL-072 to 096
Side Elevation View
7' 10-1/2"
2" MAKE-UP
2"
End Elevation View Side Elevation View
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E46
Notes:
1. Nominal tonnage is CTI Certified performance at a 95F entering
water temperature, an 85F leaving water temperature, and a
78F entering wet-bulb temperature. Consult BAC selection
software for all other conditions.
2 Operating weight is for the unit with water level in the cold water
basin at the overflow.
3. Standard coil connections are beveled for welding.
4. If discharge hoods with positive closure dampers are furnished,
see page E51 for added weight and height. Fan motor
horsepower may increase; consult selection software for
verification.
6. The number and location of coil connections will vary with
design flow and coil arrangement.
7. Units ship in one piece.
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
VFL-012-02G 4.5 3 9,220 2,560 1,880 5'- 5" 1'-2 1/4" 45 18
VFL-012-12G 7.4 3 9,010 2,810 2,090 6'-3 3/4" 1'-10 3/4" 45 25
VFL-012-22G 9.4 3 8,870 3,140 2,330 6'-10" 2'-7 1/4" 45 32
VFL-012-32G 12 3 8,760 3,425 2,555 7'-6 1/2" 3'-3 3/4" 45 39
VFL-012-32H 14 5 10,380 3,425 2,555 7'- 6 1/2" 3'-3 3/4" 45 39
VFL-024-12H 17 5 15,430 4,610 3,120 6'-3 3/4" 1'-9 3/4" 94 47
VFL-024-22H 21 5 15,180 5,130 3,510 6'-7 1/4" 2'-6 1/4" 94 61
VFL-024-32H 26 5 14,990 5,750 3,960 7'-3 3/4 3'-2 3/4" 94 75
VFL-024-32J 30 7 1/2 17,160 5,750 4,000 7'-6 1/2" 3'-2 3/4" 94 75
VFL-036-22K 35 10 23,580 7,070 4,690 6'-10 1/4 2'-9 1/4" 142 90
VFL-036-32K 43 10 23,290 7,950 5,330 7'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 142 111
VFL-036-31M 49 20 29,340 7,970 5,350 7'-11 1/2" 3'-6 1/2" 142 111
VFL-048-22L 43 15 29,150 8,905 5,615 6'-10 1/4 3'-6 1/2" 192 119
VFL-048-31L 46 15 28,790 9,920 6,480 7'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 192 148
VFL-048-31M 52 20 31,680 9,920 6,480 7'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 192 148
VFL-048-41M 55 20 31,360 10,950 7,230 8'-4 3/4" 4'-3 3/4" 192 177
VFL-072-22N 69 25 45,390 13,555 8,755 7'-1" 2'-9 1/4" 284 180
VFL-072-22O 75 30 48,240 13,555 8,755 7'-1" 2'-9 1/4" 284 180
VFL-072-31O 81 30 47,640 15,190 9,920 7'-11 1/2" 3'-6 1/2" 284 223
VFL-072-41O 86 30 47,150 16,590 10,950 8'-7 1/2" 4'-3 3/4" 284 265
VFL-072-41P 97 40 51,900 16,590 10,950 8'-7 1/2" 4'-3 3/4" 284 265
VFL-096-41O 94 30 54,110 20,680 12,960 8'-4 3/4" 4'-3 3/4" 384 347
VFL-096-41P 108 40 59,560 20,680 12,960 8'-4 3/4" 4'-3 3/4" 384 347
SPRAY
PUMP
(GPM)
INTERNAL COIL
VOLUME (GAL)
SHIPPING
COIL OVERFLOW
3"
3"
3"
MODEL
NUMBER
NOMINAL
TONS
1
FAN PUMP
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
WEIGHTS (LBS)
OPERATING
2
4"
4"
4"
7'-0 3/4"
10'-11 3/4"
17'-11 3/4"
1 1/2
2
1 1/2
14'-11 9/16"
17'-11 3/4"
MOTOR HP
1/3
1/2
1
2"
2"
2"
L H F
14'-11 9/16"
3"
4"
4"
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E47
VF1 Engineering Data
3' 11-1/2"
1"
2"
2"
End Elevation View
Models VF1-009 to 036
Side Elevation View
1"
3"
2"
4' 8-5/8"
End Elevation View
Models VF1-048
Side Elevation View
2"
7' 10-3/8"
3"
End Elevation View
Models VF1-072
Side Elevation View
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E48
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
Notes:
water temperature, an 85F leaving water temperature, and a 78F
entering wet-bulb temperature. Consult BAC selection software for
all other conditions.
2. Operating weight is for the unit with water level in the cold water
see page E51 for added weight and height. Fan motor horsepower
may increase; consult selection software for verification.
6. The number and location of coil connections will vary with design
flow and coil arrangement.
7. Units marked with an asterisk ship in one piece. The coil section is
the heaviest section.
VF1-009-12G 5.5 3 5,690 1,875 1,625 1,625*
7'-3 3/4"
1'-10 3/4 " 20
VF1-009-22G 6.8 3 5,590 2,075 1,785 1,000
8'-0 1/4"
2'-7 3/4" 26
VF1-009-32G 8.3 3 5,520 2,295 1,965 1,180
8'-8 3/4"
3'-3 3/4" 31
VF1-009-42G 9.2 3 5,470 2,495 2,125 1,340
9'-4 3/4"
3'-11 3/4" 36
VF1-018-02H 9.5 5 11,180 2,635 2,175 2,175*
6'-7 1/4"
1'-1 1/4" 27
VF1-018-12H 14 5 10,930 2,955 2,415 2,415 *
7'-3 3/4"
1'-9 3/4" 38
VF1-018-22J 20 7.5 12,310 3,260 2,640 1,720
8'-0 1/4"
2'-6 1/4" 49
VF1-018-32J 22 7.5 12,150 3,660 2,940 2,010
8'-8 3/4"
3'-2 3/4" 60
VF1-018-42J 24 7.5 12,030 4,010 3,190 2,260
9'-5 1/4"
3'-11 1/4" 71
VF1-027-22H 24 5 14,060 4,940 3,830 2,410
7'-6"
2'-0" 72
VF1-027-22J 28 7 1/2 16,090 4,860 3,750 2,470
8'-3 1/4"
2'-9 1/4" 72
VF1-027-32K 35 10 17,490 5,440 4,108 2,850
9'-0 1/2"
3'-6 1/2" 89
VF1-027-42K 37 10 17,310 5,970 4,570 3,240
9'-9 3/4"
4'-3 3/4" 106
VF1-036-21L 41 15 24,870 6,280 4,760 3,200
8'-3 1/4"
2'-9 1/4" 95
VF1-036-31L 44 15 24,560 7,020 5,310 3,720
9'-0 1/2"
3'-6 1/2" 118
VF1-036-41L 47 15 24,310 7,710 5,810 4,220
9'-9 3/4"
4'-3 3/4" 140
VF1-036-51L 49 15 24,100 8,390 6,310 4,720
10'-7"
5'-1" 163
VF1-048-21M 55 20 35,790 10,230 7,870 4,920
9'-11 5/8"
2'-9 1/4" 137
VF1-048-31N 65 25 38,070 11,390 8,460 5,930
10'-8 7/8"
3'-6 1/2"
5'-4 1/2"
170
VF1-048-41N 70 25 37,690 12,690 9,320 6,600
11'-6 1/8'
4'-3 3/4" 203
VF1-072-21O 75 30 52,650 15,670 10,720 6,580
11'-3 7/8"
2'-9 1/4" 190
VF1-072-31O 81 30 51,990 17,380 12,050 7,950
12'-1 1/8"
3'-6 1/2" 235
VF1-072-41O 86 30 51,460 18,000 12,480 8,410 12'-10 3/8" 4'-3 3/4" 281
COIL
CONNECTION
SIZE
115
150
220
305
1/3
1/2
WEIGHTS (LBS)
35
75
3'-0"
6'-0"
3'-8 1/8"
3'-8 1/8"
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(GAL) OPERATING
2
MODEL
NUMBER NOMINAL TONS
1
SPRAY
PUMP
(GPM) F A
MOTOR HP
FAN PUMP
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
8'-11 3/4"
12'-0"
11'-11 1/2"
11'-7 3/4"
3'-8 1/8"
3'-8 1/8"
6'-8 3/4'
3"
4"
4"
4"
4"
4"
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
7
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
DIMENSIONS
L H
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E49
VF1 Engineering Data
2" MAKE-UP
3" OVERFLOW
7' 10-3/8"
ACCESS
End Elevation View
Models VF1-096N to 288N Models VF1-096 to 144N
Side Elevation View
OVERFLOW
DRAIN 2"
11' 10"
3"
MAKE-UP
End Elevation View
Models VF1-144 to 432 Models VF1-216
Side Elevation View
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E50
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
Notes:
water temperature, an 85F leaving water temperature, and a 78F
entering wet-bulb temperature. Consult BAC selection software for
all other conditions.
2. Operating weight is for the unit with water level in the cold water
see page E51 for added weight and height. Fan motor horsepower
may increase; consult selection software for verification.
6. The number and location of coil connections will vary with design
flow and coil arrangement.
7. Unless marked with a double asterisk (**), the coil section is the
heaviest section.
VF1-096-31O 81 30 53,540 19,385 12,795 8,460 13'-6 3/8" 3'-6 1/2" 296
VF1-096-41P 99 40 58,320 21,345 14,215 9,880 14'-3 5/8" 4'-3 3/4" 8'- 1 5/8" 353
VF1-096-51Q 114 50 62,290 22,255 14,855 10,520 15'-0 7/8" 5'-1" 411
VF1-144N-21Q 127 50 72,700 25,610 16,430 10,390 12'-9 1/8 " 2'-9 1/4" 356
VF1-144N-31R 148 60 76,290 28,480 18,490 12,570 13'-6 3/8" 3'-6 1/2" 443
VF1-144N-41R 157 60 75,510 31,560 20,750 14,750 14'-3 5/8" 4'-3 3/4" 529
VF1-192-31O 163 (2) 30 108,150 38,900 25,570 8,460 13'-6 3/8" 3'-6 1/2" 592
VF1-192-41P 198 (2) 40 115,640 42,780 28,360 9,880 14'-3 5/8" 4'-3 3/4" 706
VF1-192-51Q 228 (2) 50 123,490 44,600 29,780 10,520 15'-0 7/8" 5'-0" 822
VF1-288N-21Q 253 (2) 50 145,510 51,260 32,750 11,970** 12'-9 1/8" 2'-9 1/4" 712
VF1-288N-31R 295 (2) 60 152,700 57,080 36,250 12,570 13'-6 3/8" 3'-6 1/2' 886
VF1-288N-41R 313 (2) 60 151,140 62,280 40,520 14,750 14'-3 5/8" 4'-3 3/4" 1,058
VF1-144-21Q 129 50 87,600 27,090 16,530 10,300 12'-11 1/2" 2'-9 1/4" 365
VF1-144-31Q 140 50 86,500 29,980 18,610 12,370 13'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 453
VF1-144-41R 164 60 90,990 32,840 20,640 14,440 14'-6" 4'-3 3/4" 541
VF1-216-21O 188 (2) 30 125,030 40,190 24,200 15,170 12'-11 1/2" 2'-9 1/4" 545
VF1-216-31P 231 (2) 40 135,890 44,370 27,140 18,290 13'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 677
VF1-216-41P 245 (2) 40 134,510 48,570 30,090 21,410 14'-6" 4'-3 3/4" 809
VF1-288-21Q 259 (2) 50 175,190 54,300 32,930 11,430** 12'-11 1/2" 2'-9 1/4" 730
VF1-288-31Q 281 (2) 50 173,010 60,820 37,020 12,370 13'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 906
VF1-288-41R 325 (2) 60 181,970 65,720 41,050 14,440 14'-6" 4'-3 3/4" 1,082
VF1-432-21O 376 (4) 30 250,060 78,200 45,960 15,620** 12'-11 1/2" 2'-9 1/4" 1,090
VF1-432-31P 462 (4) 40 271,790 87,120 52,400 18,290 13'-8 3/4" 3'-6 1/2" 1,354
VF1-432-41P 490 (4) 40 289,790 96,420 59,200 21,410 14'-6" 4'-3 3/4" 1,618
23'-8 1/2"
35'-9 1/4"
(2) 3
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(GAL) A COIL MAKE-UP
4"
DIMENSIONS CONNECTION SIZES
SPRAY
PUMP
(GPM) OPERATING
2
MODEL
NUMBER
NOMINAL
TONS
1
MOTOR HP
AIRFLOW
(CFM) FAN PUMP
WEIGHTS (LBS)
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
7
L H F
400
5 17'-8 1/3" 8'- 1 5/8" 4" 2" 610
3 11'-7 3/4"
8'- 1 5/8" 4" 2"
2"
8'-4" 4"
800
(2) 5 35'-9 1/4" 8'- 1 5/8" 4" 2" 1,220
23'-8 1/2"
2" 620
7.5 17'-8 1/8" 8'-4" 4" 2" 900
5 11'-7 3/4"
(2) 5 8'-4" 1,240
(2) 7.5 8'-4" 1,800
2" 4"
4" 3"
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E51
Discharge Hoods with Positive Closure Dampers
Both tapered and straight discharge hoods with factory mounted positive closure dampers and damper
actuators are available for all Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. Hoods are designed to minimize
heat loss from convective air flow through an idle unit. The addition of factory installed insulation to the
hood and casing further reduces the heat loss by minimizing losses due to conduction. Heat loss data is
presented on page E52 for units without hood, with hood, and with insulated casing and hood. Damper
actuators and linkage are factory mounted on the hood.
All wiring and actuator controls must be furnished by others. 115 volt single phase power supply is
required. Damper actuators should be interlocked with the temperature control system so that the
dampers are open when the pumps are running and closed when the pumps are off.
The additional external static pressure of the tapered discharge hood with dampers may require the use
of a larger fan motor; consult selection software for verification. Consult your local BAC Representative
for unit drawing with a hood and positive closure dampers.
Engineering Data
Notes (applicable to specific models only):
1. On these models, the discharge hood surrounds the drift
eliminators and is recessed into the drift eliminator frame;
therefore, the overall height of the unit with hood equals H (of unit)
plus H (of hood) minus 4.
2. On these units, the hood sits directly on top of the casing.
3. Includes drift eliminators and skid.
4. Includes skid only. Drift eliminators are included in unit weight.
VFL-012 1 2'-11 1/8" 2'-3 1/2" 2'-6 1/2"
2
220
4
2'-11 1/8" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/4"
2
260
4
VFL-024 1 3'-10 1/4" 2'-3 1/2" 2'-6 1/2"
2
330
4
5'-3" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/4"
2
410
4
VFL-036 1 6'-11" 2'-3 1/2" 2'-6 1/2"
2
470
4
8'-2 1/2" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/4"
2
540
4
VFL-048 1 9'-10" 2'-3 1/2" 2'-6 1/2"
2
590
4
11'-2" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/4"
2
760
4
VFL-072 1 6'-11" 4'-1/2" 4'-0"
2
910
4
8'-2 1/2" 6'-3 3/4" 2'-9 1/4"
2
960
4
VFL-096 1 8'-2 1/2" 4'-1/2" 4'-0"
2
1,100
4
11'-2" 6'-3 3/4" 2'-9 1/4"
2
1,200
4
VF1-009 1 2'-11 1/8" 1'-4 1/4" 2'-10 3/8"
1
280
3
2'-11 1/8" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/8"
1
300
3
VF1-018 1 3'-10 1/4" 1'-4 1/4" 2'-10 3/8"
1
470
3
5'-1/4" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/8"
1
490
3
VF1-027 1 6'-11" 1'-4 1/4" 2'-10 3/8"
1
640
3
8'-2 1/2" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/8"
1
680
3
VF1-036 1 9'-10" 1'-4 1/4" 2'-10 3/8"
1
760
3
11'-2" 3'-3/8" 2'-9 1/8"
1
840
3
VF1-048 1 8'-2 1/2" 2'-3 1/2" 4'-5 1/2"
1
1,240
3
11'-2" 4'-1/2" 3'-6 1/8"
1
1,220
3
VF1-072 1 8'-2 1/2" 3'-3/8" 4'-5 1/2"
1
1,540
3
10'-5 1/8" 5'-10" 3'-6 1/8"
1
1,620
3
VF1-096 1 8'-2 1/2" 4'-1/2" 4'-1 1/2"
2
1,200
4
11'-2" 6'-3 3/4" 3'-6 1/8"
2
1,320
4
VF1-144N 1 14'-1 1/2" 3'-7 1/2" 4'-1 1/2"
2
1,750
4
16'-8" 6'-3 3/4" 3'-6 1/8"
2
1,820
4
VF1-144 1 8'-2 1/2" 6'-3 3/4" 4'-1 1/2"
2
1,550
4
11'-2" 10'-3 7/8" 3'-6 1/8"
2
1,750
4
VF1-192 2 8'-2 1/2" 4'-1/2" 4'-1 1/2"
2
2,400
4
11'-2" 6'-3 3/4" 3'-6 1/8"
2
2,640
4
VF1-216 1 14'-1 1/2" 5'-11" 4'-1 1/2"
2
2,150
4
16'-8" 10'-3 7/8" 3'-6 1/8"
2
2,400
4
VF1-288N 2 14'-1 1/2" 3'-7 1/2" 4'-1 1/2"
2
3,500
4
16'-8" 6'-3 3/4" 3'-6 1/8"
2
3,640
4
VF1-288 2 8'-2 1/2" 6'-3 3/4" 4'-1 1/2"
2
3,100
4
11'-2" 10'-3 7/8" 3'-6 1/8"
2
3,500
4
VF1-432 2 14'-1 1/2" 5'-11" 4'-1 1/2"
2
4,300
4
16'-8" 10'-3 7/8" 3'-6 1/8"
2
4,800
4
TAPERED Straight
MODEL
NUMBER
NUMBER OF
HOODS
REQUIRED
TOTAL
SHIPPING
WEIGHT (lbs)
TOTAL
SHIPPING
WEIGHT (lbs) L W H L W H
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E52
Heat Loss Data
VFL Heat Loss Data (Btu/hr)
1
VF1 Heat Loss Data (Btu/hr)
1
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
Notes:
1. Heat loss is based on 50F coil water and 10F ambient with a 45 mph wind. Fan(s) and pump(s) are off.
2. One inch thick PVC nitrite rubber blend thermal insulation with protective paint.
VFL-012-02G 19,200 16,500 11,000
VFL-012-12G 25,000 17,800 11,900
VFL-012-22G 29,900 19,200 12,800
VFL-012-32G/H 33,800 20,500 13,700
VFL-024-12H 48,200 28,500 19,000
VFL-024-22H 57,700 30,400 20,300
VFL-024-32H/J 65,400 32,300 21,500
VFL-036-22K 87,000 47,100 30,700
VFL-036-32K/M 98,400 49,800 32,500
VFL-048-22L 126,400 66,000 42,600
VFL-048-31L/M 138,800 69,300 44,800
VFL-048-41M 151,200 72,600 47,000
VFL-072-22N/O 210,900 84,400 56200
VFL-072-31O 234,100 87,900 58,600
VFL-072-41O/P 252,900 91,400 60,900
VFL-096-41O/P 311,700 103,600 69,000
MODEL NUMBER
(VFL Models Only)
HEAT LOSS
(Btu/hr)
UNIT w/HOOD
& POSITIVE
CLOSURE
DAMPERS
UNIT w/HOOD,
POSITIVE
CLOSURE
DAMPERS &
INSULATION
2
VF1-009-12G
24,300 17,100 10,300
VF1-009-22G
29,400 18,800 12,000
VF1-009-32G
32,900 20,500 12,000
VF1-009-42G
34,800 22,200 13,700
VF1-018-02H
34,700 25,600 15,400
VF1-018-12H
46,200 27,300 15,400
VF1-018-22J
56,000 29,100 17,100
VF1-018-32J
64,300 30,800 17,100
VF1-018-42J
70,950 32,550 18,800
VF1-027-22H/J
86,100 46,100 27,300
VF1-027-32K
97,700 49,500 29,100
VF1-027-42K
106,300 52,900 29,100
VF1-036-21L
112,600 63,200 39,300
VF1-036-31L
128,900 66,600 39,300
VF1-036-41L
145,200 70,000 43,600
VF1-036-51L
161,500 73,400 43,600
VF1-048-21M
154,900 80,200 52,900
VF1-048-31N
177,200 83,700 52,900
VF1-048-41N
197,000 85,600 54,600
VF1-072-21O 212,400 83,700 51,200
VF1-072-31O 241,100 87,100 51,200
VF1-072-41O 269,800 90,500 56,800
VF1-096-31O 286,700 97,600 60,000
VF1-096-41P 312,100 102,600 60,900
VF1-096-51Q 329,800 107,900 61,700
VF1-144N-21Q 381,400 128,300 81,300
VF1-144N-31R 429,900 134,700 82,800
VF1-144N-41R 464,800 141,400 84,400
VF1-144-21Q 385,000 139,900 88,600
VF1-144-31Q 435,500 146,900 90,200
VF1-144-41R 474,600 154,200 91,900
VF1-192-31O 576,300 228,400 153,600
VF1-192-41P 627,300 240,100 156,700
VF1-192-51Q 662,800 252,500 160,100
VF1-216-21O 579,900 194,000 122,900
VF1-216-31P 653,500 203,700 125,100
VF1-216-41P 707,300 213,800 127,300
VF1-288N-21Q 762,800 256,600 162,600
VF1-288N-31R 859,800 269,400 165,600
VF1-288N-41R 929,600 282,800 168,800
VF1-288-21Q 750,800 260,300 171,900
VF1-288-31Q 849,300 273,300 175,000
VF1-288-41R 925,600 286,800 178,300
VF1-432-21O 1,142,500 390,000 259,400
VF1-432-31P 1,287,400 409,500 264,000
VF1-432-41P 1393500 429,800 268,500
MODEL NUMBER
(VF1 Models Only)
HEAT LOSS
(Btu/hr)
UNIT w/HOOD
& POSITIVE
CLOSURE
DAMPERS
UNIT w/HOOD,
POSITIVE
CLOSURE
DAMPERS &
INSULATION
2
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E53
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Tower consists of parallel
I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawing. Besides providing
adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to the
bottom of the tower. To support a Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Tower in an alternate steel support
arrangement, consult your BAC Representative.
Notes:
practice. The maximum allowable deflection of beams under the
unit shall be as specified in the table above.
package, if required, to be installed between the tower and
supporting steel. When determining the length of steel beams,
allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they may be
longer than the tower length shown above.
5. If point vibration isolation is used, the isolators must be located
under the supporting steel, not between the support steel and the
cooling tower.
MODEL NUMBER A B
MAXIMUM
DEFLECTION
3
VFL-012 3 11 4 6 1/4
VFL-024 3 11 7 11-1/2 3/8
VFL-036 3 11 10 11-1/4 1/2
VFL-048 3 11 13 11-1/2 1/2
VFL-072 7 8-1/4 10 11-1/4 1/2
VFL-096 7 8-1/4 13 11-1/2 1/2
VF1-009 45-3/8 29-1/2 3/32
VF1-018 45-3/8 65-1/2 3/16
VF1-027 45-3/8 101-1/4 5/16
VF1-036 45-3/8 137-1/2 3/8
VF1-048 54-1/4 137-1/2 3/8
VF1-072, 096 91-5/8 127-1/2 3/8
VF1-144N 91-5/8 199-3/4 1/2
VF1-192 91-5/8 272-1/4 1/2
VF1-288N 91-5/8 416-3/4 1/2
VF1-144 139-1/4 127-1/2 3/8
VF1-216 139-1/4 199-3/4 1/2
VF1-288 139-1/4 272-1/4 1/2
VF1-432 139-1/4 416-3/4 1/2
All VFL Models
VF1-009 thru -048, -072, -096, & -144
VF1-288N & -432
VF1-144N, -192, -216 & -288
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E54
1.0 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install ____factory assembled, forced
draft, centrifugal fan, closed circuit cooling tower(s) with vertical
air discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedules as shown on the plans. Overall dimensions shall not
exceed approximately ____ft (m) long x ____ft (m) wide x ____ft
(m) high. The total connected fan horsepower shall not exceed
____HP (kW). The total connected pump horsepower shall not
exceed ____HP (kW). The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be
Baltimore Aircoil Company Model(s) ________________.
1.2 Thermal Capacity (water as heat transfer fluid): The
closed-circuit cooling tower(s) shall be warranted by the
manufacturer to cool ______US gpm (lps) of _______ water from
____F (C) to ____F (C) at ____F (C) entering wet-bulb
temperature. The thermal performance shall be certified by the
Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI Certification
Standard STD-201. A manufacturers performance guarantee or
performance bond without CTI Certification will not be accepted.
(Alternate) 1.2 Thermal Capacity (aqueous glycol solution as
heat transfer fluid): The closed circuit cooling tower(s) shall be
warranted by the manufacturer to cool ________US gpm (lps) of
_____% by volume ethylene/propylene glycol solution from
______F (C) to _____F (C) at _____F (C) entering wet-bulb
temperature. Coil pressure drop shall not exceed ________ psi
(kPa). Basis for thermal performance rating shall be the Cooling
Technology Institute (CTI) certified rating for water cooling
appropriately adjusted for the thermal properties of the aqueous
glycol solution used. Additionally, the thermal performance of the
product line with water as the heat transfer fluid shall be certified
by the CTI in accordance with CTI Certification Standard
STD-201. Manufacturers' performance guarantees or
performance bonds without CTI Certification of water ratings
shall not be accepted.
1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless otherwise noted in
this specification, all steel panels and structural members shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
galvanized steel, with all sheared edges given a protective
(Alternate) 1.3 Corrosion Resistant Construction: Unless

(clean, pre-treat, rinse, and dry) process with an electrostatically
substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored
by a 23-step quality assurance program.
1.4 Quality Assurance: The closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer shall have a management system certified by an
accredited registrar as complying with the requirements of
ISO-9001:2000 to ensure consistent quality of its products and
services. Closed circuit cooling tower manufacturers that are not
ISO-9001:2000 certified shall provide an additional year of
warranty to the customer at no additional cost.
2.1 Tower Structure: The closed circuit cooling tower shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge steel utilizing double-brake flanges
for maximum strength and rigidity and reliable sealing of
water-tight joints. All sheared edges shall be protected with a
2.2 Casing Assembly: The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include a coil casing section consisting of a serpentine coil, spray
water distribution system, and drift eliminators, as indicated by
the manufacturer. PVC drift eliminators shall be removable in
easily handled sections. They shall incorporate a minimum of
three changes in air direction.
2.3 Coil Assembly: The cooling coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the
manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication. The cooling coil shall be pneumatically tested at 375
psig (2865 kPa). The cooling coil shall be designed for low
pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid and
shall be ASME B31.5 compliant. Maximum allowable working
pressure shall be 300 psig (280 psig for coils supplied with a
CRN).
over the coil at a minimum flow rate of 4.5 gpm/ft
2
(3.1 lps/m
2
) to
ensure complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter,
non-clog, plastic 360distribution nozzles spaced across the coil
face area in Schedule 40 PVC spray branches by snap-in rubber
grommets, allowing quick removal of individual nozzles or
complete branches for cleaning or flushing. Nozzles shall utilize a
two-stage diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray
patterns that create multiple intersection points with adjacent
nozzles.
2.5 Spray Pump System: The closed circuit cooling tower shall
include a close-coupled, bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped
with a mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped to the
suction strainer and water distribution system. It shall be installed
so that it can be drained when the basin is drained. The pump
assembly shall include a metering valve and bleed line to control
the bleed rate from the pump discharge to the overflow
connection. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) type suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ______ Hz
electrical service.
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
E55
2.0 Construction Details - continued
(Alternate) 2.5 Spray Pump System-Remote Sump: On
installations requiring a remote sump, the closed circuit cooling
tower shall be modified to accommodate the use of an
independent basin and pump (both by others) for recirculating
water.
2.6 Basin Assembly: The combination basin/fan section shall be
constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) galvanized
steel. The basin shall be provided with large area lift out strainers
with perforated openings sized smaller than the water distribution
nozzles and an anti-vortexing device to prevent air entrainment.
The strainer and vortex device shall be constructed of the same
material as the cold water basin to prevent dissimilar metal
corrosion.
3.1 Fan System: The fans and motors shall be factory installed at
the base of the unit in the dry entering air stream to provide
greater reliability and ease of maintenance. The forwardly curved
centrifugal fans shall be heavy-duty centrifugal flow type,
statically and dynamically balanced prior to shipment. Fan
housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air entry and
rectangular discharge cowls shall extend into the basin to
increase fan efficiency and prevent water from entering the fans.
Fans shall be mounted on a steel fan shaft supported by
heavy-duty self aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron
housings and designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours
(280,000 hrs average life). The fan shaft shall be protected with a
two-part epoxy coating for corrosion protection.
3.2 Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type with a 1.15 service factor,
suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ____ Hz electrical service
and shall be mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor
base. V-belt drives shall be designed for not less than 150% of
motor nameplate horsepower.
(Alternate) 3.2 Fan Motor/Drive System: Fan motor(s) shall be
totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) inverter duty type with a 1.15
service factor, suitable for _____ volts, ____ phase, ____ Hz
electrical service. Motor shall be designed per NEMA Standard
MG1, Section IV, Part 31. V-belt drives shall be designed for not
less than 150% of motor nameplate horsepower.
3.3 Mechanical Warranty: The fan(s), fan shaft(s), bearings,
supports, and fan motor(s) shall be warranted against defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from
date of shipment.
(Alternate) 3.4 ENERGY-MISER
Fan System: Two single speed

2/3 speed and approximately 1/3 of full load horsepower shall be
provided in each cell for capacity control and standby protection
from drive or motor failure. Two speed motor(s) is not an
acceptable alternative.
4.0 Sound
the closed circuit cooling tower operating at full fan speed shall
not exceed the sound levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
HXV
Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers
E56
Product Detail
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E59
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E66
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E76
H
X
V
E57
160 305 Nominal Tons
480 915 gpm at 95
F/85
F/78
F
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of flow
and temperature requirements. Distinct advantages of the HXV include plume abatement, significant water
savings over traditional water-cooled equipment, and its suitability for high temperature cooling (>180F).
Standard design features satisfy todays environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize
year-round operating reliability, and simplify maintenance requirements.
HXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
Plume abatement
Maximum water savings
High temperature cooling (>180F)
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
ASME B31.5 compliant prime surface coil
HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid
Cooling Towers
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E58
H
X
V
E59
Benefits
Plume Abatement
The HXV offers a combination of sensible, adiabatic, and evaporative heat transfer to significantly
reduce any plume that may occur with conventional evaporative cooling equipment. During the
coldest times of the year, when the potential for visible discharge is greatest, the HXV operates
100% dry, completely eliminating plume.
Maximum Water Savings
Water savings are achieved throughout the year with each of three different operating modes of the
HXV. In some areas, the water cost savings alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years!
At peak conditions in the dry/wet operating mode, a significant amount of heat is removed
by sensible heat transfer, providing reduced water consumption versus conventional
evaporative cooling
When the heat load and/or ambient temperatures drop, water consumption is further
reduced in the adiabatic operating mode
Water consumption is totally eliminated in the dry operating mode
See page E71 for details on operating modes.
High Temperature Cooling
The finned dry coil tempers the incoming fluid, allowing higher inlet water temperatures than
traditional closed circuit cooling towers.
The HXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance
requirements via:
Closed loop cooling, which minimizes process fouling
Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System available (see page E65 for details)

C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E60
Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams and ship complete with motors and drives
factory-installed and aligned.
Modular Design Units ship in three pieces to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest lift,
allowing for the use of smaller, less costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Access Hinged access doors on each end wall and a
standard internal walkway provide easy access to the
unit interior.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold
water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system and the
prime surface coil.
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train Backed by a five-year fan drive and

motor warranty, the BALTIDRIVE

corrosion-resistant materials of construction and state-of-the-art
technology to ensure ease of maintenance and reliable year-round
performance.
Separate Air Inlet Louvers Reduce the potential for scale build-up
and damaging ice formations at the air/water interface by providing a
line of sight from the outside of the unit into the fill.
Long Service Life
operating life, and budgetary requirements of any project (see page E63 for construction options).
Drift eliminators can be removed for
access to the prime surface coil
Access door
H
X
V
E61
1
4
6
8
9
11
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E62
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
(Not Shown)
multi-groove belt
Heavy-duty bearings (280,000
hour average life)
Low HP Axial Fan(s)
(Not Shown)
Quiet operation
water coverage
Prime Surface Coil (Not Shown)
When required, orders shipping into Canada
are supplied with a CRN
Dry Finned Coil
Copper tubing with high density aluminum fins
BACross

(Not Shown)
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance fre
Cold Water Basin
(Not Shown)
centrifugal pump
Totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) motor
Hinged Access Doors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
H
X
V
E63
Inlet louvers are constructed of UV resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the closed circuit hybrid cooling tower
(excluding heat transfer coils).
five year leak-proof warranty.
Prime Surface Coil Configurations
The standard cooling coil is constructed of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized (outside surface) after
fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for
low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free
drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically
tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa) and is ASME
B31.5 compliant.
Stainless Steel Coil:
Coils are available in Type 304 stainless steel for specialized applications. The coil is designed for
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E64
This coil is manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division I, and bears the ASME U stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized
(outside surface) after fabrication (HDGAF). The coil is designed for low pressure drop with sloping
tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa).
Other coil configurations are available for specific applications. Contact your local BAC Representative
for details.
Dry Finned Coil Configurations
The standard finned coil on the HXV unit has 6 rows and
is available in 1-1/2 serpentine and triple serpentine
arrangements. The serpentine arrangement indicates the
way in which these rows are circuited internally, and
influences the process fluid velocity (the smaller the
serpentine, the higher the flow velocity) and the total fluid
pressure through the unit (the smaller the serpentine, the
higher the finned coil pressure drop). Hence, the unit flow
and pressure drop allowance must be taken into
account when the finned coil serpentine is selected to obtain the most suitable HXV selection.
Consult your local BAC Representative for selection assistance.
Note: The dry finned coil is available in alternate materials of construction to meet specific
application requirements.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary
to reject unwanted heat from the system to the
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on all models
is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE
Power Train. This BAC

engineered drive system consists of a specially designed
powerband and two cast aluminum sheaves located on
minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life.
A cooling tower duty fan motor, custom engineered for
BAC to provide maximum performance for cooling tower
service, is provided and backed by BACs comprehensive
five-year motor and fan drive warranty.
H
X
V
E65
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System consists of two standard single-speed fan motor and drive
assemblies. One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load, and the other is sized approximately
2/3 speed and consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower. This configuration allows the system to be
operated like a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a standby motor in the event of fail-
ure. As a minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be available from the low horsepower motor, even
on a design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-
winding motor. Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of
reduced load and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Models HXV-64X and Q64X are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as standard. Models
HXV-66X and Q66X are provided with two fan motors driving three fans as standard. The Independent
Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow independent operation,
providing an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers make them suitable for
installation in most environments. For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory designed, tested
and rated sound attenuation is available for both the air intake and discharge.
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E66
Accessories
For external service, louver face and access door platforms can be added to the unit when purchased or
as an aftermarket item. Safety cages and safety gates are also available. All components are designed
to meet OSHA requirements.
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies, an internal ladder is available.
For access to the motor and drive assemblies, an internal ladder and upper service platform with
handrails is available. Safety gates are available for all handrail openings. All components are designed
to meet OSHA requirements.
A factory mounted vibration cutout switch is available to
effectively protect against equipment failure due to
excessive vibration of the mechanical equipment
system. BAC can provide either a mechanical or
solid-state electronic vibration cutout switch in a NEMA
4 enclosure to ensure reliable protection. Additional
contacts can be provided to activate an alarm.
Basin Heaters
Although most HXV units will operate dry in the winter, basin heaters are available for freeze protection
when required. Basin heaters prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle.
Factory-installed heaters, which maintain +40F (4.4C) water temperature, are a simple and
inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data
HXV-64X, Q64X 1 12 1 16
HXV-66X, Q66X 1 16 1 21
MODEL NUMBERS
H
X
V
E67
makeup valve when a more precise water level control is
required. This package consists of a conductance-actuated level
control mounted in the basin and a solenoid activated valve in
the make-up water line. The valve is slow closing to minimize
water hammer.
Flow Control Package
A flow control package is available to provide maximum plume control and water savings. This package
consists of a temperature sensor, a 3-way flow control valve arrangement with actuator, and all
connecting piping. 3-way flow control valve arrangement shown below for single prime surface and
double prime surface coil connections.
Electric Water Level
Control Package
Single Prime
Surface Coil
Connections
Double Prime
Surface Coil
Connections
FLUID IN
FLUID OUT
FLUID IN
FLUID OUT
Accessories
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E68
Extended lubrication lines are available for
lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. Grease fittings
are located inside the plenum area next to the
access door.
Optional high temperature wet deck material is available for high entering fluid temperatures.
Air Inlet Screens
Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over the inlet
louvers to prevent debris from entering the tower.
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of prevent-
ing debris from collecting in the cold water basin of the tower. A
complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the
tower basin for connection to side stream filtration equipment
(by others).
H
X
V
E69
Engineering Data
1" MAKE UP
(4) 4" BFW FLUID OUT
(4) 4" BFW FLUID IN
ACCESS DOOR
(THIS END ONLY)
ACCESS DOORS
THIS SIDE ONLY
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
3'-2 3/8"
HXV Q64x
2'-8 3/8"
A
2
2
'-
3

1
/
8
"
11'-10"
ACCESS DOOR
(THIS END ONLY)
8
'-
8

3
/
4
"
(4) 4" BFW FLUID IN
6" BFW FLUID OUT
6" BFW FLUID IN
F
AIR
INLET
HXV 64x
(2) 4" BFW FLUID IN
INLET
AIR
2
'-
7

1
/
2
"
1'-8 1/4" 6"
12'-1 1/4"
2'-2 1/4"
3
"
1
1

1
/
2
"
2'-7 1/8"
F
2
2
'-
3

1
/
8
"
A
2'-2 3/8"
8
'-
8

3
/
4
"
11'-10"
3'-2 3/8"
2'-8 3/8"
A
2
2
'-
8

5
/
8
"
11'-10"
ACCESS DOOR
(THIS END ONLY)
9
'-
2

1
/
4
"
(4) 4" BFWFLUID IN
8" BFWFLUID OUT
8" BFWFLUID IN
F
(4) 4" BFWFLUID OUT
AIR
INLET
HXV 66x HXV Q66x
(2) 4" BFWFLUID IN
(2) 4" BFWFLUID OUT
INLET
AIR
3
'-
1
"
2'-0 3/8" 6"
18'-1 1/4"
2'-2 1/4"
8

1
/
2
"
1
'-
5
"
2'-7 1/8"
1" MAKE UP
(4) 4" BFWFLUID OUT
(4) 4" BFWFLUID IN
ACCESS DOOR
(THIS END ONLY)
ACCESS DOORS
THIS SIDE ONLY
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
F
2
2
'-
8

5
/
8
"
A
2'-2 3/8"
9
'-
2

1
/
4
"
11'-10"
HXV-64X/Q64X
HXV-66X/Q66X
Notes:
the design flow rate. Consult the unit print for dimensions.
3. Pipe sizes are nominal diameters. Standard connections are
beveled-for-welding (BFW).
4. Dimensional drawings show standard (right hand) arrangements
with the standard finned coil arrangement.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
1
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION A F
HXV-641-OM 160
30 5
24,800 15,800 6,800
14' 2" 2' 0"
HXV-642-OM 180
30 5
26,300 16,900 7,800
14' 2" 2' 9-1/4"
HXV-Q640-OM 164
30 5
26,300 16,900 7,800
14' 1" 2' 7-3/8"
HXV-Q641 191
30 5
29,300 18,900 9,900
14' 1" 4' 1-7/8"
HXV-661-OM 252
30 & 15 7.5
35,700 22,400 9,700
14' 7-1/2" 2' 0"
HXV-662-OM 283
30 & 15 7.5
38,000 23,900 11,300
14' 7-1/2" 2' 9-1/4"
HXV-Q660-OM 268
30 & 15 7.5
38,000 23,900 11,300
14' 5-1/2" 2' 5-3/8"
HXV-Q661 305 30 & 15 7.5 42,400 27,100 14,500 14' 5-1/2" 3' 11-7/8"
MODEL
NUMBER
MOTOR HP WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS
NOMINAL
TONS
5
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E70
Modes of Operation
Notes:
1. During dry mode, two-speed, variable frequency drive (VFD), or ENERGY-MISER
Fan System operation is also possible.

2. For both dry/wet and adiabatic operation modes, the use of an automatic blowdown system is recommended to minimize water consumption.
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
Combined Dry/Wet Operation Mode
In this mode, the fluid to be cooled flows first to the dry finned coil and then to the prime surface
evaporative coil, where the cooled fluid exits the unit. Spray water is drawn from the cold water basin
and pumped to the water distribution system above the prime surface coil. Wetting the prime surface
coil allows evaporative cooling to occur. The spray water falls from the prime surface coil over the wet
deck surface, enhancing the evaporative heat transfer by sub-cooling the spray water. Air is drawn
through both the prime surface coil and through the wet deck surface where it is saturated and picks up
heat. The air is, however, still cold enough to achieve significant cooling within the finned coil, which is
installed at the discharge above the fan(s).
In the dry/wet mode, both sensible and evaporative heat transfer are used. Compared to a conventional
evaporative unit, the potential for plume is substantially reduced and significant water savings can be
obtained, even at peak design conditions. At reduced heat load and/or ambient temperatures, the
evaporative cooling portion, and hence water usage, are further reduced as the flow through the
evaporative coil is gradually decreased. This is accomplished by a modulating flow control valve
arrangement, which controls the outlet fluid temperature. This control arrangement automatically
assures maximum use of sensible cooling in the finned coil and minimum use of evaporative cooling in
the prime surface coil. The heat transfer method and flow control are arranged to achieve maximum
water savings in the dry/wet mode. Plume is minimized by reducing the amount of evaporated water
and the heating of the entire discharge air with the dry finned coil.
OPERATION MODE
DRY FINNED COIL
FLUID FLOW
WET PRIMEB SURFACE
COIL FLUID FLOW SPRAY PUMP FAN(s)
Combined Dry/Wet 100% Modulating On On
Adiabatic 100% 0% On On
Dry 100% 100% Off On
Water Consumption
H
X
V
E71
continued from page E70
Engineering Data
Adiabatic Mode
The adiabatic mode occurs when the fluid to be cooled completely bypasses the evaporative prime
surface coil. No heat is rejected from this coil and the recirculating spray water merely serves to
saturate and adiabatically pre-cool the incoming outside air. In most climates, the ambient air still
has considerable potential for absorbing moisture.
Thus adiabatic cooling of the
incoming air results in significantly lower
air temperatures, which greatly
increases the rate of sensible heat
transfer. Compared to conventional
evaporative cooling equipment,
visible plume and water consumption
are greatly reduced while maintaining
the low fluid design temperatures
required to maximize system efficiency.
Dry Mode
During the dry operation mode the spray water system is turned off, saving on pump energy. The fluid
to be cooled is fed from the finned coil to the prime surface coil. The modulating flow control valve
remains fully open to ensure both coils receive the full fluid flow in series; hence the maximum heat
transfer surface is available. In this
mode no water consumption
occurs, and plume is completely
eliminated. HXV units can be
economically selected for dry bulb
switchover points of 50F (10C) to
60F (15C) or higher, depending
on the specific needs of the project.
When the equipment operates in
the dry mode for prolonged periods,
draining the cold water basin is
recommended, eliminating the need
for freeze protection and water
treatment.
Water
Consumption
Water
Consumption
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E72
Engineering Data
Structural Support
Notes:
1. Heat loss data based on 50F coil water and 10F with a 45 mph wind velocity (fans and pump are off).
2. Electric immersion heaters with thermostat and low level cutout. All components are factory installed in the unit basin. Heaters are selected to
maintain 40F pan water at 0F ambient temperature. In outdoor locations, trace heating and insulation of spray pump(s) (by others) may be
required for freeze protection. See page E79-E80 for more information on winter operation.
Winter Operation
See page E76
for Engineering
Considerations.
A
I
R
I
N
L
E
T
A
I
R
I
N
L
E
T
L L
B B B C C C C
AW
1

1
/
8
"
1

1
/
8
"
HXV 64x HXV 66x
HXV Q66x HXV Q64x
UNIT OUTLINE
U
N
I
T
4"
7/8" MOUNTING HOLES
The recommended support arrangement for HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers consists of
parallel I-beams positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel
also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the tower.
To support an HXV on columns or in an alternate arrangement not shown here, consult your local BAC
Representative.
Notes:
1. Supporting steelwork and anchor bolts are to be designed and
furnished by others.
3. Each beam should be designed, as a minimum, for 65% of the
total unit operating weight applied as a uniformly distributed load.
practice. Maximum deflection of the beam under the unit to be
1/360 of span, not to exceed 1/2 inch.
5. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between the unit and the
those of the unit.
steel and the towers.
HXV-641-OM 904,180 12 163 119 207
HXV-642-OM 962,184 12 218 119 207
HXV-Q640-OM 962,184 12 218 119 207
HXV-Q641 1,074,780 12 326 119 207
HXV-661-OM 1,354,564 16 255 170 314
HXV-662-OM 1,436,452 16 340 170 314
HXV-Q660-OM 1,436,452 16 340 170 314
HXV-Q661 1,596,816 16 510 170 314
PAN VOLUME AT
OPERATING LEVEL
(GALLON)
COIL VOLUMES
HEAT LOSS DATA
(BTU/HR, STANDARD
UNIT)
MODEL
NUMBER
ELECTRIC
IMMERSION
HEATERS (KW)
AT 0F
PRIME SURFACE
COIL (GALLON)
FINNED COIL
(GALLON)
MODEL
NUMBER
MAXIMUM
DEFLECTION (IN)
4
W L A B C
NO. OF STANDARD 7/8"
ANCHOR BOLTS
HXV-64X 12" 11'-10" 12'-1 14" 11'-7 34" 10'-5 14" 10" 4
HXV-Q64X 12" 11'-10" 12'-1 14" 11'-7 34" 10'-5 14" 10" 4
HXV-66X 12" 11'-10" 18'-1 14" 11'-7 34" 8' 10 58" 8
HXV-Q66X 12" 11'-10" 18'-1 14" 11'-7 34" 8' 10 58" 8
H
X
V
E73
1.0 Closed Circuit Hybrid
Cooling Tower
1.1 General: Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, ___
factory-assembled closed circuit hybrid cooling tower(s) of
induced draft design with vertical air discharge. The unit shall be
able to operate in combined dry/wet, adiabatic and dry modes for
plume abatement and minimum water consumption. Overall
dimensions shall not exceed approximately ___ ft (m) x ___ ft
(m), with an overall height not exceeding approximately ___ ft
(m). Operating weight shall not exceed _____ lbs (kg). The
closed circuit hybrid cooling tower shall be Baltimore Aircoil
Model HXV-___.
1.2 Thermal Capacity: The closed circuit hybrid cooling tower
shall be warranted by the manufacturer to have capacity to cool
_______ US gpm (lps) of _____% by volume aqueous
ethylene/propylene glycol solution (water) from ______F (C) to
_____F (C) at _____F (C) entering wet bulb temperature and
from ______F (C) to _____F (C) at _____F (C) entering
dry- bulb temperature. Total coil pressure drop shall not exceed
________ psi (kPa)
1.3 Quality Assurance: The tower manufacturer shall have a
2.1 G-235 (Z700 metric) Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Structure: All
steel panels and structural elements shall be constructed from
heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel, with
cut edges given a protective coat of zinc-rich compound.
(Alternate) 2.1 Optional BALTIBOND
System: All steel panels, support structure, hot and cold water
basins, fan deck and fan cylinder shall be protected with the
BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System, applied by the tower

manufacturer in its own manufacturing plant. The system shall
consist of G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel,
prepared in a four-step (clean, pretreat, rinse, dry) process, with
an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting, hybrid polymer,
fuse-bonded to the hot-dip galvanized steel substrate during a
thermally-activated curing stage, and monitored by a 23-step
quality assurance program.
(Alternate) 2.1 Optional Stainless Steel Construction: All steel
panels and structural elements shall be constructed from
heavy-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel.
2.2 Coil Sections: The dry finned coil shall consist of copper
tubes with rippled edge, aluminum flat plate fins, and headers of
seamless copper tubes installed in a heavy-gauge galvanized
steel casing. Fins shall have full drawn collars to maintain
consistent fin spacing and a continuous surface contact over the
entire tube for maximum heat transfer. The coil shall have a
design pressure of 250 psig (1,725 kPa) and be pneumatically
tested at 320 psig (2,205 kPa). Staggered tube coil arrangement
and fin density shall be optimized for maximum sensible heat
transfer during all operation modes with minimum airside
pressure drop. The coil shall be designed for free drainage of
fluid.
The prime surface coil shall be encased in a heavy-gauge
galvanized steel casing. The coil shall be constructed of
continuous serpentine all prime surface steel, be pneumatically
tested at 375 psig (2,685 kPa), and be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication. The coil shall be designed for free drainage of fluid
and shall be ASME B31.5 compliant. Maximum allowable
working pressure shall be 300 psig (280 psig for coils supplied
with a CRN).
of heavy-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel. The basin shall include
a depressed section with drain/clean-out connection. Standard
accessories shall include large area, lift-out steel strainers with
perforated openings sized smaller than water distribution nozzle
orifices, an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air
entrainment, waste water bleed line, and brass make-up valve
with large diameter plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.
(Alternate) 2.3 Optional Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin: The
cold water basin shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel. All
factory seams in the cold water basin shall be welded, leak
tested at the factory to ensure watertight assembly and shall be
warranted against leaks for five years.
4.0 Wet Deck Surface and
Drift Eliminators
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and shall be impervious to rot, decay,
fungus and biological attack. The surface shall be manufactured
and performance tested by the closed circuit cooling tower
manufacturer to provide single source responsibility and assure
control of the final product. A separate set of drift eliminators
shall be removable in easily handled sections for quick access to
the coil. Eliminators shall have a minimum of three changes in
air direction.
5.1 Air Inlet Louvers: Air inlet louvers shall be wave-formed,
fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP), spaced to minimize air
resistance and prevent water splash-out.
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E74
6.1 Fan(s): Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial flow, with aluminum
alloy blades. Air shall discharge through a fan cylinder designed
for streamlined air entry and minimum fan blade tip clearance for
maximum fan efficiency. Fan(s) and shaft(s) shall be supported
by heavy duty, self-aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with
moisture-proof seals and integral slinger rings, designed for
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours. Fan(s) shall be driven by a
one-piece, multi-groove neoprene/polyester belt designed
specifically for evaporative cooling service. Fan and motor
sheave(s) shall be fabricated from cast aluminum.
(TEAO), reversible, squirrel cage, ball bearing type with 1.15
service factor, designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty
on _____ volt/ ___ hertz/ ___ phase electrical service. The motor
shall be furnished with special moisture protection on windings,
shafts, and bearings. Each motor shall be mounted on an easily
adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
designed specifically for evaporative cooling duty on ____ volt/
___ hertz/ ____ phase electrical service. The motor shall be
furnished with special moisture protection on windings, shafts,
and bearings. Fan motors shall be inverter duty type designed
per NEMA Standard MG1, Section IV, Part 31.
7.0 Access
7.1 Plenum Access: A large, hinged access door shall be
provided on each end wall for access to the prime surface coil,
drift eliminators, and fan plenum section. The water make-up
valve, float ball, and suction strainer shall be easily accessible.
8.0 Sound
the tower operating at full fan speed shall not exceed the sound
levels detailed below.
Location 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
E75
HXV Offers Economic Advantages
HXV First Cost Benefits
Heat rejection equipment must be selected for the
maximum heat load at summer peak air temperatures.
In most climates peak wet-bulb temperatures are
significantly lower than peak dry-bulb temperatures.
Evaporative cooling equipment based on the ambient air
wet-bulb therefore has a greater temperature driving
force, thus allowing the use of lower system
temperatures. This greater driving force also allows the
use of less and thus more cost-effective heat transfer
surface area. Since the HXV concept utilizes evaporative
cooling during peak load operation it inherently benefits from
this advantage. Evaporatively cooled units such as the HXV
have a plan area and fan horsepower advantage over the typical air-cooled arrangement, saving on support
structures and electrical hook-ups. The HXV design also avoids the corrosion and scaling that can be
associated with spraying of standard air-cooled equipment on design days for additional capacity. The lower
process fluid temperatures that can be achieved compared to air-cooled systems and the greatly reduced
fouling factors of closed loop cooling result in lower first cost of process equipment such as chillers or
refrigeration compressors. Lastly, the costs associated with plume abatement are eliminated, as the design
is inherently plume-free.
HXV Operating Cost Benefits
Due to its water saving concept and Combined Flow design, the
HXV offers significant operating cost benefits. Water
consumption is minimized throughout the year. During peak
summer operation a large amount of heat load is already
transferred by the finned coil. As the ambient temperature
and/or heat load drops, the amount of evaporative heat transfer
is further reduced by controlling the flow through the wet coil.
This reduces the evaporation loss and blow-down as well as
water treatment requirements compared to conventional
evaporative cooling equipment. In the adiabatic mode only a
small amount of water is needed to saturate the air and the
amount of blow-down is reduced even further. Finally in the
dry mode no water is used at all (while saving the energy
associated with running the spray pump). With HXV
hybrid units water savings up to 70% or more are possible.
Depending on local water costs and availability, this advantage
alone can pay for the equipment in as little as two years
through cost savings in water use, water treatment chemicals,
and higher system efficiencies. In addition, fouling potential
associated with open circuit cooling towers is eliminated
through both the closed loop cooling system and the Advanced
Coil Technologytm design of the HXV, assuring peak efficiency
and energy savings over time. Finally, the induced draft
propeller fan design results in low fan energy requirements com-
pared to centrifugal fan units.
(
o
F)
Dry-bulb/wet-bulb difference
versus climate zone
Closed Circuit Cooling Systems offer
the lowest fluid temperatures
(
o
F)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Typical annual distribution of
ambient temperature with the
three operating modes
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E76
Location
deflected off surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
CAUTION:
adjacent buildings.
Piping and Valves
Piping must be sized and installed in accordance with good piping practice. All piping should be supported
by pipe hangers or other supports, not by the unit.
Some installations may require flow balancing valves (supplied by others) at the coil inlets to balance the
flow to individual coils and cells. External shutoff valves on the closed circuit loop (supplied by others) may
also be required if the system design necessitates the isolation of individual cells.
Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell closed circuit cooling
towers, the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must be provided
for each cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify make-up and water
treatment see page J16 for details. See page E78 or the appropriate Operating and Maintenance
Instruction Manual for more information on water treatment.
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
E77
Capacity Control
WARNING:
Fan Cycling

Fan System or the independent fan motor option

are available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide substantial energy
savings when compared to simple fan cycling.
WARNING:
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control
often results in short cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump
cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat
exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (Series V Models Only)
On Series V models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide better leaving water
temperature control than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. See page E44 or contact your local BAC
Representative for more details.
interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration.
BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches on all closed circuit cooling tower
models.
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E78
Water Treatment
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilized, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated
as a separate entity, even if the cold water basins are flumed together or equalized.
Manual, available at www.baltimoreaircoil.com
For specific recommendations on water treatment, contact a competent water treatment supplier.
Wet Deck Surface Compatibility (FXV Models Only)
The standard wet deck surface in FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers is constructed of polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) and has a flame spread rating of 5 per ASTM Standard E84. This PVC wet deck surface is
compatible with the water found in most evaporative cooling applications. For applications where the
entering fluid temperature exceeds 120F, contact your local BAC Representative to confirm that the
standard PVC wet deck is acceptable.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data is available for all BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers. When calculating the sound levels
generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Low sound fans and intake and discharge
sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the
Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during
periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling
equipment, see page J20. For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Representative.
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
E79
When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied with
oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. Dry operation with
standard fan motors is acceptable for axial fan units. For remote sump applications, the spray water pump
must be selected for the required flow at a total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply
and suction lines) plus the required pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (2.0 psi for
FXV models; 1.0 psi for Series V models). A valve should always be installed in the discharge line from the
pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet water pressure should be measured by a
pressure gauge installed in the water supply riser at the spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet
pressure. See page J16 for more information.
ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used only on smaller
WARNING:
The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Safety
C
l
o
s
e
d

C
i
r
c
u
i
t

C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r
s
E80
Fluid Compatibility
The fluid to be cooled must be compatible with the coil material (standard serpentine and cleanable header
coils are carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized on the outside only). Fluids not compatible with coil materials
can lead to corrosion and tube failure. Certain fluids may require occasional pressure cleaning or
mechanical cleaning of the inside of coil tubes. In such cases the coil must be designed to provide this
capability (Optional Coil Configurations: for FXV see page E19, for Series V see page E39, and for HXV see
page E63).
Open/Closed System
The standard galvanized steel serpentine and cleanable header serpentine coils are carbon steel,
hot-dip galvanized on the outside only, and are intended for application on closed, pressurized
systems which are not open to the atmosphere. Stainless steel coils or cleanable coil units (with tubes
hot-dip galvanized inside and out) are available to cool corrosive fluids or water and ethylene/propylene
glycol solutions in systems open to the atmosphere (Optional Coil Configurations: for FXV see page E19, for
Series V see page E39, and for HXV see page E63).
Protection Against Coil Freezing
At below freezing ambient conditions, the closed circuit cooling tower can experience heat loss even without
the recirculating spray water pump and fans in operation. Without a heat load on the circulating fluid, coil
freezing can occur even at full flow. Protective means are readily available to avoid potential freeze
problems. Where the system will permit, the best protection against coil freeze-up is the use of an
industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution. When this is not possible, the system must be designed to meet
both of the following conditions:
1. Maintain minimum recommended flow through the coil at all times, as per the table below:
See product sections for
applicable heat loss data:
FXV - page E29
Series V - page E52
HXV - page E72
MODEL MINIMUM FLOW (GPM)
FXV-42X, 43X, 44X 75
FXV-Q44X 150
FXV-64X, 66X 110
FXV-Q64X, Q66X 220
FXV-288-X1X 275
FXV-288-XQX 550
FXV-364-X1X 275
FXV-364-XQX 550
HXV-6XX 110
HXV-Q6XX 220
VFL-012 thru 048 65
VFL-072 thru 096 125
VF1-009 thru 036 50
VF1-048 75
VF1-072 100
VF1-096 thru 144N 125
VF1-192 thru 288N 250
VF1-144 thru 216 200
VF1-288 thru 432 400
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
E81
2. Maintain a heat load on the circulating fluid so that the temperature of the fluid leaving the coil will not be
below 45F (7.2C).
If the process load is extremely light, or if the process is periodically shut off entirely, then an auxiliary heat
load must be applied to the circulating fluid when below freezing ambient temperatures exist to prevent
damage to the coil. Refer to the Heat Loss Data table (for FXV see page E29, for Series V see page E52,
and for HXV see page E72) for the auxiliary heat load requirement. The amount of auxiliary heat necessary
to prevent coil freezing can be further reduced by the use of a positive closure damper hood and insulation.
Draining the coil is not recommended as a normal method of freeze protection. However, draining is
acceptable as an emergency method of freeze protection. Frequent draining can promote corrosion inside
the coil tubes. If the coil is not protected by an industrially inhibited anti-freeze solution, an automatic drain
valve and air vent is recommended to drain the coil if flow stops or fluid temperature drops below 45F
(7.2C) when the ambient temperature is below freezing. Note that cold water basin heaters will not provide
freeze protection for the coil.
Code Requirement
Standard coils are ASME B31.5 compliant and are provided with a Canadian Registration Number (CRN)
when required. State or local codes, or certain applications may require the use of pressure vessels
designed, fabricated, tested and U stamped in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, Division I. In such cases, the optional ASME U Stamp coil must be provided.
Warranties
these products.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F1
Evaporative Condensers
Evaporative condensers provide heat rejection for many types of systems, and the specific application
will largely determine which BAC Evaporative Condenser is best suited for a project. The table on page
F4 is intended as a general guide.
The information contained within this section is geared towards the use of evaporative condensers in
the HVAC and light industrial markets only. Evaporative condensers are used in these markets to
provide lower condensing temperatures and compressor horsepower savings of up to 15 percent when
compared with traditional systems. For technical support with a refrigeration application, contact your
local BAC Refrigeration Sales Representative.
The vapor to be condensed is circulated through a condensing coil, which is continually wetted on the
outside by a recirculating water system. Air is pulled over the coil, causing a small portion of the
recirculating water to evaporate. The evaporation removes heat from the vapor in the coil, causing it to
condense.
Configuration
BAC manufactures two types of evaporative condensers: combined flow and counterflow.
Combined Flow
Combined flow is the use of both a condensing coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in an
evaporative condenser. The addition of wet deck surface to the traditional evaporative condenser design
reduces evaporation in the coil section, reducing the potential for scaling and fouling. BACs combined
flow evaporative condensers utilize parallel flow of air and spray water over the coil, and crossflow
air/water flow through the wet deck surface.
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
F2
In parallel flow, air and water flow over the coil in the same direction. In the wet deck section of BACs
combined flow evaporative condensers, air and water interact in a crossflow configuration: water flows
vertically down the wet deck as air flows horizontally across it.
Counterflow
In a counterflow evaporative condenser design, the flow of the air is in the opposite direction of the spray
water. In BACs counterflow evaporative condensers, air travels vertically up through the unit while the spray
water travels vertically down over the coil.
Combined Flow: Crossflow
configuration over the wet deck
Water Down
Air Across
Combined Flow: Parallel flow of
air and water over the coil
Water Down
Air Up
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F3
Fan System
The flow of air through most factory assembled evaporative
condensers is provided by one or more mechanically driven fans.
The fan(s) may be axial or centrifugal, each type having its own
distinct advantages.
Axial fan units require approximately half the fan motor
horsepower of comparably sized centrifugal fan units, offering
significant life-cycle cost savings.
Centrifugal fan units are capable of overcoming reasonable
amounts of external static pressure ( 0.5), making them
suitable for both indoor and outdoor installations. Centrifugal fans
are also inherently quieter than axial fans, although the difference
is minimal and can often be overcome through the application of
optional low sound fans and/or sound attenuation on axial fan
units.
Induced Draft
The rotating air handling components of induced draft equipment are mounted in the top deck of the
unit, minimizing the impact of fan noise on near-by neighbors and providing maximum protection from
fan icing with units operating in sub-freezing conditions. The use of corrosion resistant materials ensures
long life and minimizes maintenance requirements for the air handling components.
Forced Draft
Rotating air handling components are located on the air inlet face at the base of forced draft units,
facilitating easy access for routine maintenance and service. Additionally, location of these
components in the dry entering air stream extends component life by isolating them from the corrosive
saturated discharge air.
Capacity Range
In the following table, product capacities are called out in nominal ammonia (R-717) or R-22 tons. All
capacities shown are for a single cell; multiple cell units can be applied to achieve larger capacities.
BACs product selection software is available at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
A list of typical applications is provided on page F4 for your reference.
Axial Fan
Centrifugal Fan
O
v
e
r
v
i
e
w
F4
Evaporative Condenser
Product Lines
Principle of
Operation
Configuration Combined Flow Combined Flow
Fan System Axial Fan, Induced Draft Axial Fan, Induced Draft
Small to large HVAC & industrial
applications
Very large industrial refrigeration and process projects
Typical
Applications
Capacity Range 64 to 962 Nominal Ammonia Tons 645 to 1888 Nominal Ammonia Tons
CXV - T CXV
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F5
VC1 VC2 VCL
Counterflow Counterflow Counterflow
Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft Axial Fan, Forced Draft Centrifugal Fan, Forced Draft
Small to medium HVAC systems and
sound-sensitive industrial projects
Medium to large HVAC systems,
industrial projects, and unrestricted
installations
HVAC systems, supermarkets, ice
rinks, and sound-sensitive industrial
projects
Installations with limited plan area Installations with limited plan area
Installations with extremely low height
requirements
Indoor installations Indoor installations
Skid packages
138 to 1914 Nominal R-22 Tons 16 to 299 Nominal R-22 Tons 10 to 1608 Nominal R-22 Tons
Series V
DRIFT
ELIMINATORS
SPRAY PUMP
AIR
INLET
LIQUID
OUT
WARM AIR
OUT
Condensing Coil
VAPOR
IN
Reduces Fouling Tendancy
Advanced coil technology, applied on FXV Closed Circuit
Cooling Towers and CXV Evaporative Condensers, is used to
reduce the tendency to accumulate fouling and scale on the
coils exterior surface. Four facets of the unique product design
contribute to the reduced tendency for fouling:
The Air and Water Flow in a Parallel Path:
Better water coverage over the coil is maintained because the
air and spray water flow in a smooth, parallel, downward path
over the coil. With this parallel flow, the spray water is not
stripped from the underside of the tubes by the upward air flow,
as on other, conventional designs. This eliminates
scale-producing dry spots on the coil.
Increased Water Flow Over the Coil:
The spray water flow rate over the coil plan area is more than
twice that of conventional units. This heavy coverage provides
continuous flooding of the primary heat transfer surface for
decreased fouling potential. Improved spray water coverage is
provided at no increase in pumping horsepower due to the
unique heat transfer system of the design.
Evaporative Cooling Occurs Primarily in the
Wet Deck:
FXV & CXV models incorporate combined flow technology,
using both primary and secondary heat transfer surfaces. The
primary heat transfer surface is the serpentine coil, which is the
most important and expensive component in the unit. In BACs
combined flow design, more than 80% of the latent heat transfer
occurs in the secondary surface, PVC cooling tower wet deck, effectively moving the evaporation process
away from coil. The coil is protected from detrimental fouling and scale since it relies primarily on sensible
conduction/convection heat transfer and, therefore, is less susceptible to scale formation than are other
designs that rely primarily on latent (evaporative) heat transfer.
Colder Spray Water:
Spray water at a colder temperature has a lower propensity to form scale because scale-forming
compounds remain in solution, rather than deposit as solids on the coil exterior surface. Spray water flowing
over the coil is commonly 6F to 8F colder than on other designs due to the addition of the secondary heat
transfer surface. Colder spray water alone typically reduces the scaling potential* by 25% compared to other
designs. This is over and above the fouling reductions achieved by the first three factors described above.
*Using Langelier Index
P
r
o
d
u
c
t

R
e
p
o
r
t
Advanced Coil Technology
F6
PROCESS FLUID OR
REFRIGERANT
Advanced Coil Technology
PROCESS FLUID OR
REFRIGERANT
Conventional Designs
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
Series V
F7
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F8
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F10
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F12
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F14
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F17
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F20
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F30
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F32
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F58
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F8
Single Model Capacity:
10 1,914 Nominal R-22 Tons
(7 1,357 Nominal R-717 Tons)
Series V Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat rejection
and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. VC1 and VCL models can be installed indoors and
minimize sound levels, and low profile models (VCL) are available to accommodate limited ceiling or
enclosure heights. VC1-C models are designed to fit in standard dry van containers to minimize ocean freight
costs. The Series V minimizes installation costs, provides year-round operating reliability, and simplifies
maintenance requirements.
Series V Evaporative Condensers
Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations
(VC1 and VCL models)
Suitable for locations with limited ceiling or
enclosure heights (VCL models)
Low sound (VC1 and VCL models)
Low ocean freight costs (VC1-C models)
Lower HP models (VC2 models)
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
ASME B31.5 compliant coil
Series V
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F9
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F10
Benefits
Indoor Installations Centrifugal fan units
(VC1 and VCL models) can overcome the static
pressure imposed by external ductwork, allowing
these units to be installed indoors.
Low Profile Models The fan section of low
profile units (VCL models) is adjacent to the
casing section to yield models suitable for use in
height sensitive installations. Low profile models
are available in capacities from 16 to 299
nominal R-22 tons (11 to 212 nominal R-717
tons), which correspond to heights of 5 2-1/4
and 8 4-3/4, respectively.
Low Sound
Single Air Inlet Particularly sound-sensitive areas can be accommodated by facing the quiet
Centrifugal Fans Centrifugal fans units (VC1 and VCL models) have inherently low sound
characteristics.
Low Ocean Freight Cost
Size VC1-C models are designed to fit in
standard dry van containers to minimize ocean
freight costs.
Evaporative cooling equipment minimizes the
energy consumption of the entire system
because it provides lower operating temperatures.
The owner saves money while conserving natural
resources and reducing environmental impact.
Evaporative condensers provide lower condensing
temperatures and can offer significant horsepower savings over conventional air-cooled and
water-cooled condensing systems.
Low Profile Series V
VC1-C Model in Dry Van Container
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F11
Low Installed Cost
Modular Design Large models ship in multiple
sections to minimize the size and weight of the
heaviest lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less
costly cranes.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access The interior of the unit is easily
accessible for adjusting the float valve, cleaning the
strainer or flushing the basin.
Drive System The fans, motor, and drive system are
located outside of the moist discharge airstream,
protecting them from moisture condensation and icing.
Backed by a five-year fan drive and motor warranty,
these units are suitable for year-round operation.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available to
meet the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and budgetary
requirements of any project (see page F14 for construction options).
The water level control is easily
Drive System
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F12
Lower Section:
VC1 Models
Lower Section:
VC2 Models
VC2-N Models
Upper Section:
VC1 & VC2 Models
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
8
10
10
11
11
VCL Models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
7
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F13
Heavy Duty Construction
steel panels
Schedule 40 PVC spray branches
Coil
Orders shipping into Canada are supplied
with a CRN
Drift Eliminators
Assembled in easy to handle sections
Fan Drive System
(VC1/VCL Models)
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings
(VC1/VCL Models)
Quiet operation
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pump
Access Door
Strainer (Not Shown)
Anti-vortexing design to prevent air
entrainment
Fan Drive System
(VC2 Models Only)
V-belt drive
Heavy-duty bearings
Extended lubrication lines
Low HP Axial Fan(s)
(VC2 Models)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F14
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the evaporative condenser
A Type 304 stainless steel cold water basin is provided. This option is available on VC1 and VC2
models only. See the Optional Water-Contact Stainless Steel Cold Water Basin for VCL models.
A cost effective alternative to an all stainless steel cold water basin, all critical components in the
cold water basin are provided in Type 304 stainless steel. The remaining components are
Corrosion
Protection System).
A cost effective alternative to all stainless steel construction, all components that are exposed to the
recirculating water are provided in Type 304 stainless steel. The remaining components are
Corrosion
Protection System).
Coil Configurations
The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Optional Extended Surface Coil:
Coils are available with selected rows finned at 5 fins per inch for wet/dry applications. The coil is
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Coils are available in Type 304 stainless steel for specialized applications.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F15
This coil meets the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, and bears the ASME U stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
(HDGAF).
Multiple Refrigerant Circuit Coils:
In general, multiple circuit coils are required primarily on halocarbon refrigerant systems where it is
common practice to maintain individual compressor systems. Also, a circuit can be isolated to provide
cooling of a water or glycol loop for compressor jacket cooling. A wide range of multiple circuit
arrangements are available.
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is
pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant. Orders shipping into
Canada are supplied with a CRN.
for details.
Fan Drive System
The fan drive system provides the cooling air necessary to
reject unwanted heat from the system to the atmosphere.
Dynamically balanced, forwardly curved, centrifugal fans
driven by matched V-belts with taper lock sheaves designed
for not less than 150% of the motor nameplate horsepower
are standard on VC1 and VCL models. Two stage, axial flow
fans are mounted in series in a close-fitting cylinder with a
smooth contoured inlet ring and intermediate guide vanes
to maximize fan efficiency on VC2 models.
Cooling tower duty fan motors, custom engineered for BAC
to provide maximum performance for evaporative cooling
service, are provided and backed by BACs comprehensive
five-year motor and fan drive warranty.
Standard Drive System,
VC1 and VCL models
Standard Drive System, VC2 models
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F16
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System (available on

VC1 and VCL models only) consists of two stan-
dard single-speed fan motor and drive assemblies.
One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load,
and the other is sized approximately 2/3 speed and
consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower. This
configuration allows the system to be operated like
a two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of
a standby motor in the event of failure. As a
minimum, approximately 70% capacity will be
available from the low horsepower motor, even on a
design wet-bulb day. Controls and wiring are the same
as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor.
Significant energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load
and/or low wet-bulb temperatures.
Independent Fan Operation (VC2 Models Only)
VC2 models with multiple fan assemblies are provided with one fan motor driving two fans as standard.
The Independent Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each fan to allow inde-
pendent operation, adding redundancy and an additional step of fan cycling and capacity control.
The low sound levels generated by Series V Evaporative Condensers make them suitable for most
installations. For situations when one direction is particularly sound sensitive, the unit can be oriented
so that the side opposite the air inlet faces the sound-sensitive direction. VC1 and VCL models are also
available with factory designed, tested and rated sound attenuation for both the air inlet and discharge.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F17
Accessories
Ladder, Safety Cage, Gate and Handrails (VC1 and VC2 Models Only)
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to the top of the unit, VC1 and VC2 models can be
furnished with ladders extending from the base of the unit to the top, as well as safety cages, safety
gates and handrail packages. All components are designed to meet OSHA requirements. All access to
the top of the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable governmental occupational
safety standards.
NOTE: When these access options are employed, the condenser must be equipped with steel drift eliminators
External Platform
(Models VC1-386 thru -1608 and VC2-319 thru -1914 Only)
Models VC1-386 thru -1608 and VC2-319 thru -1914 can be provided with an external platform for
easy access to the drift eliminators and spray system of the unit. Safety gates are available for handrail
openings. All components are designed to meet OSHA requirements.
Additional contacts can be provided to activate an alarm.
standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a conductance-actuated level
control mounted in the basin and a solenoid
activated valve in the make-up water line. The
valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Extended lubrication lines with grease fittings located outside the fan section are available for
lubrication of the fan shaft bearings (this option is standard on VC2 models).
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F18
Accessories
Basin Heaters
Units exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent freezing of the
water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory installed heaters, which maintain +40F
(4.4C) water temperature, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such protection.
Heater Sizing Data
VC1-10 thru 25 1 2 1 2
VC1-30 thru 65 1 2 1 2
VC1-72 thru 90 1 2 1 3
VC1-100 thru 135 1 3 1 5
VC1-150 thru 205 1 3 1 5
VC1-N208 thru N230 1 5 1 7. 5
VC1-N243 thru N315 1 5 1 7. 5
VC1-C216 thru C320 1 5 1 7. 5
VC1-N338 thru N470 1 7 1 10
VC1-C334 thru C469 1 5 1 7. 5
VC1-386 thru 516 1 8 1 10
VC1-540 thru 804 1 12 1 16
VC1-772 thru 1032 2 8 2 10
VC1-1158 thru 1608 2 12 2 16
VC2-N138 thru N191 1 5 1 9
VC2-N206 thru N235 1 7 1 10
VC2-N261 thru N301 1 8 1 10
VC2-N356 thru N446 1 12 1 16
VC2-342 thru 626 1 10 1 16
VC2-526 thru 957 1 16 1 20
VC2-N870 thru N1204 2 10 2 16
VC2-684 thru 1252 2 10 2 16
VC2-1052 thru 1914 2 16 2 20
VCL-016 thru 035 1 2 1 2
VCL-038 thru 079 1 3 1 4
VCL-087 thru 120 1 4 1 5
VCL-134 thru 155 1 5 1 7
VCL-167 thru 234 1 7 1 9
VCL-257 thru 299 1 9 1 12
MODEL NUMBERS
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F19
Bottom Screens
Wire mesh screens are available factory-installed over the bottom
openings to prevent unauthorized access.
Capacity Control Dampers (VC1 and VCL Models Only)
Modulating capacity control dampers are available to
provide better leaving water temperature control
than can be obtained from fan cycling alone. A
standard electrical control package for dampers is
available.
Solid Bottom Panels
Factory-installed bottom panels are required when
intake air is ducted to the unit.
Copper Sweat Fittings
Optional copper sweat fittings are available to
simplify field piping.
Subcooling Coils
Subcooling coils are available for those halocarbon refrigerant installations where subcooled refrigerant
is specified, or where the pressure drop or a vertical rise in the liquid line is great enough to cause
excessive flashing. Standard subcooling coil sections provide approximately 10F of subcooling at
standard conditions. Subcooling sections are approximately 7 high and are mounted between the coil
and pan/fan sections. Coils are hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and pneumatically tested at 375 psig.
Solid BottomPanels
For information on other
options and accessories,
please contact your
local BAC Representative.
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F20
VC1 Engineering Data
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal tons using R-22 at a 105F
condensing temperature, a 40F suction temperature, and
a 78F wet-bulb temperature.
2. R-717 tons are at a 96.3F condensing temperature, a 20F
suction temperature, and a 78F wet-bulb temperature.
4. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight of
refrigerant operating charge, and cold water basin filled to the
overflow level.
5. Unless otherwise noted by asterisk, the coil section is the
heaviest section.
6. Standard refrigerant connection sizes are 3-inch BFW inlet and
outlet for VC1-10 through -25, and 4 BFW inlet and outlet for
all other models.
7. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To
determine operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by
1.93. For R-134a, multiply by 1.98.
See page J16
for information on sizing
a remote sump tank.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC1-10 7 1/2 1/3 2,900 1,400 1,270 *1,270 79 1/4" 14 1/4" 19 2
VC1-15 11 1 1/3 3,800 1,600 1,460 *1,460 87 3/4" 22 3/4" 25 2.7
VC1-20 14 1 1/2 1/3 4,400 1,770 1,620 1,000 96 1/4" 31 1/2" 32 3.5
VC1-25 18 3 1/3 5,300 1,820 1,670 1,050 96 1/4" 31 1/4" 34 3.5
VC1-30 21 3 1/2 8,200 2,300 2,010 *2,010 79 1/4" 13 1/4" 35 3.5
VC1-38 27 3 1/2 8,900 2,560 2,240 *2,240 87 3/4" 21 3/4" 45 5.0
VC1-46 33 3 1/2 8,500 2,880 2,540 1,650 96 1/4" 30 1/4" 61 6.5
VC1-52 37 5 1/2 10,200 2,930 2,590 1,700 96 1/4" 30 1/4" 65 6.5
VC1-58 41 5 1/2 9,800 3,230 2,860 1,940 104 3/4" 38 3/4" 76 8.0
VC1-65 46 7 1/2 1/2 11,600 3,300 2,930 2,010 104 3/4" 38 3/4" 80 8.0
VC1-72 51 5 3/4 12,300 4,210 3,510 2,400 99 1/4" 33 1/4" 90 9.6
VC1-80 57 7 1/2 3/4 14,500 4,280 3,580 2,470 99 1/4" 33 1/4" 100 9.6
VC1-90 64 7 1/2 3/4 14,000 4,750 4,000 2,850 108 1/2" 42 1/2" 110 12
VC1-100 71 7 1/2 1 19,600 5,420 4,450 3,060 99 1/4" 33 1/4" 120 13
VC1-110 78 10 1 22,000 5,500 4,530 3,140 99. 1/4" 33 1/4" 130 13
VC1-125 89 10 1 21,000 6,080 5,060 3,640 108 1/2" 42 1/2" 145 16
VC1-135 96 15 1 23,000 6,160 5,180 3,640 108 1/2" 42 1/2" 145 16
VC1-150 106 10 1 1/2 28,200 8,730 7,480 4,920 119 5/8" 33 1/4" 170 18
VC1-165 117 10 1 1/2 27,200 9,680 8,060 5,830 128 7/8" 42 1/2" 210 23
VC1-185 131 15 1 1/2 33,300 9,770 8,170 5,930 128 7/8" 42 1/2" 210 23
VC1-205 145 20 1 1/2 35,800 10,420 8,820 6,580 138 1/8" 51 3/4" 245 27
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
7
(LBS)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
DIMENSIONS MOTOR HP
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F21
2
2
Notes:
condensing temperature, a 40F suction temperature, and a
78F wet-bulb temperature.
4. Operating weight shown is based on total unit weight, weight
of refrigerant operating charge, and cold water basin filled to
the overflow level.
5. The coil section is the heaviest section.
6. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4 BFW
(inlet and outlet).
See page F58
for Engineering
Considerations.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC1-N208 148 15 2 39,650 13,710 10,170 6,580 135 7/8" 33 1/4" 230 25
VC1-N230 163 15 2 38,550 15,000 11,410 8,220 145 1/4" 42 1/2" 245 31
VC1-N243 172 20 3 46,150 15,140 10,720 7,050 153 1/4" 33 1/4" 290 32
VC1-N257 182 25 3 49,700 15,190 10,770 7,050 153 1/4" 33 1/4" 290 32
VC1-N275 195 20 3 44,800 16,700 12,130 8,460 162 3/8" 42 1/2" 360 40
VC1-N301 213 25 3 47,150 18,210 13,580 9,860 171 5/8" 51 3/4" 430 47
VC1-N315 223 30 3 50,100 18,230 13,600 9,860 171 5/8" 51 3/4" 430 47
VC1-N338 240 20 5 60,450 22,360 15,630 10,390 153 1/4" 33 1/4" 435 48
VC1-N357 253 25 5 65,100 22,410 15,680 10,390 153 1/4" 33 1/4" 435 48
VC1-N373 265 30 5 69,200 22,430 15,700 10,390 153 1/4" 33. 1/4" 435 48
VC1-N417 296 30 5 67,200 24,820 17,880 12,570 162 3/8" 42 1/2" 540 59
VC1-N470 333 40 5 72,250 27,410 20,250 14,750 171 5/8" 51 3/4" 645 71
DIMENSIONS MOTOR HP R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
(LBS)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F22
Notes:
condensing temperature, a 40F suction temperature, and a
78F wet-bulb temperature.
overflow level.
5. Unless otherwise noted by asterisk, the coil section is the
heaviest section.
6. Standard refrigerant connection size is 4 BFW (inlet and outlet).
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC1-386 274 30 5 74,250 23,860 15,810 10,300 155 1/" 33 1/4" 445 49
VC1-436 309 30 5 72,050 26,140 17,880 12,370 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 550 60
VC1-467 331 40 5 79,300 26,330 18,070 12,370 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 550 60
VC1-454 322 30 5 70,400 28,430 19,950 14,440 174" 51 3/4" 655 72
VC1-487 345 40 5 77,500 28,620 20,140 14,440 174" 51 3/4" 655 72
VC1-516 366 50 5 83,450 28,660 20,180 14,440 174" 51 3/4" 655 72
VC1-540 383 (2) 15 5 97,250 35,090 22,850 15,170 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 665 72
VC1-579 411 (2) 20 5 107,050 35,110 22,870 15,170 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 665 72
VC1-612 434 (2) 25 5 115,300 35,210 22,970 15,170 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 665 72
VC1-646 458 (2) 20 5 103,900 38,560 25,990 18,290 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 825 90
VC1-683 484 (2) 25 5 111,950 38,660 26,090 18,290 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 825 90
VC1-715 507 (2) 30 5 118,950 38,700 26,130 18,290 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 825 90
VC1-748 530 (2) 30 5 116,200 42,140 29,240 21,400 174" 51 3/4" 990 108
VC1-804 570 (2) 40 5 127,900 42,520 29,620 21,400 174" 51 3/4" 990 108
VC1-772 548 (2) 30 (2) 5 148,500 47,930 31,560 *10,960 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 890 98
VC1-872 618 (2) 30 (2) 5 144,100 52,490 35,700 12,370 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 121
VC1-934 662 (2) 40 (2) 5 158,600 52,870 36,080 12,370 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 121
VC1-908 644 (2) 30 (2) 5 140,800 57,070 39,840 14,440 174" 51 3/4" 1,310 144
VC1-974 691 (2) 40 (2) 5 155,000 57,450 40,220 14,440 174" 51 3/4" 1,310 144
VC1-1032 732 (2) 50 (2) 5 166,900 57,530 40,300 14,440 174" 51 3/4" 1,310 144
VC1-1158 821 (4) 20 (2) 5 214,100 70,450 45,710 *15,340 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 1,330 146
VC1-1224 868 (4) 25 (2) 5 230,600 70,650 45,910 *15,540 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 1,330 146
VC1-1366 969 (4) 25 (2) 5 223,900 77,520 52,120 18,290 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,650 181
VC1-1430 1014 (4) 30 (2) 5 237,900 77,600 52,200 18,290 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,650 181
VC1-1496 1061 (4) 30 (2) 5 232,400 84,480 58,420 21,400 174" 51 3/4" 1,980 216
VC1-1608 1140 (4) 40 (2) 5 255,800 85,240 59,180 21,400 174" 51 3/4" 1,980 216
OPERATING
CHARGE
(LBS)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F23
Designed to minimize ocean freight costs, VC1-C models fit in standard dry van containers.
2 Side Drain
Notes:
condensing temperature, a 40F suction temperature, and a 78F
wet-bulb temperature.
overflow level.
7. Refrigerant charge listed is R-717 operating charge. To determine
operating charge for R-22, multiply charge by 1.93. For R-134a,
multiply by 1.98.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC1-C216 153 15 3 40,060 14,880 10,270 6,680 142 1/4" 33 1/4" 265 29
VC1-C231 164 20 3 44,090 14,890 10,280 6,680 142 1/4" 33 1/4" 265 29
VC1-C242 172 15 3 38,870 16,300 11,560 7,970 151 1/2" 42 1/2" 330 36
VC1-C260 184 20 3 42,790 16,310 11,570 7,970 151 1/2" 42 1/2" 330 36
VC1-C274 194 25 3 46,090 16,360 11,620 7,970 151 1/2" 42 1/2" 330 36
VC1-C286 203 30 3 48,980 16,380 11,640 7,970 151 1/2" 42 1/2" 330 36
VC1-C299 212 30 3 47,830 17,720 12,920 9,250 160 3/4" 51 3/4" 390 43
VC1-C320 227 40 3 52,650 17,910 13,110 9,250 160 3/4" 51 3/4" 390 43
VC1-C339 241 25 5 62,180 22,040 15,050 9,830 142 1/4" 33 1/4" 395 43
VC1-C354 251 30 5 66,080 22,060 15,070 9,830 142 1/4" 33 1/4" 395 43
VC1-C380 269 40 5 72,730 22,250 15,260 9,830 142 1/4" 33 1/4" 395 43
VC1-C396 281 30 5 64,180 24,240 17,050 11,810 151 1/2" 42 1/2" 490 54
VC1-C424 301 40 5 70,640 24,430 17,240 11,810 151 1/2" 42 1/2" 490 54
VC1-C445 316 40 5 69,020 26,630 19,240 13,810 160 3/4" 51 3/4" 590 64
VC1-C469 333 50 5 74,340 26,670 19,280 13,810 160 3/4" 51 3/4" 590 64
OPERATING
CHARGE
(LBS)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
See page F58
for Engineering
Considerations.
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F24
Notes:
overflow level.
multiply by 1.98.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC2-N138 98 5 1 1/2 25,900 8,920 7,130 4,920 131 1/8" 33 1/4" 170 18
VC2-N150 106 7 1/2 1 1/2 28,300 9,010 7,220 5,830 131 1/8" 33 1/4" 190 18
VC2-N170 121 7 1/2 1 1/2 28,000 9,930 8,120 5,930 140 3/8" 42 1/2" 210 23
VC2-N191 135 10 1 1/2 30,100 10,580 8,770 6,580 149 5/8" 51 3/4" 245 27
VC2-N206 146 10 2 39,650 14,950 9,960 6,580 143 1/4" 33 1/4" 230 25
VC2-N215 152 7 1/2 2 35,050 16,180 11,190 7,810 152 3/4" 42 1/2" 290 31
VC2-N235 167 10 2 38,750 16,200 11,210 7,810 152 3/4" 42 1/2" 290 31
VC2-N261 185 10 3 43,400 15,380 11,860 8,460 152 3/4" 42 1/2" 360 40
VC2-N301 213 15 3 48,550 16,970 13,310 9,860 162" 51 3/4" 430 47
VC2-N356 252 15 5 67,650 20,260 15,170 10,390 155 1/2" 33 1/4" 435 48
VC2-N396 281 15 5 65,700 22,650 17,350 12,570 164 3/4" 42 1/2" 540 59
VC2-N416 295 15 5 64,200 25,050 19,530 14,750 174" 51 3/4" 645 71
VC2-N446 316 20 5 70,650 25,060 19,540 14,750 174" 51 3/4" 645 71
DIMENSIONS MOTOR HP
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE (LBS)
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F25
See page F58
for Engineering
Considerations.
-626 -957
Notes:
overflow level.
4. Unless otherwise noted, the coil section is the heaviest section.
multiply by 1.98.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC2-319 226 7.5 5 54,300 24,590 15,240 10,300 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 445 49
VC2-342 243 10 5 59,750 24,640 15,290 10,300 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 445 49
VC2-377 267 15 5 68,400 24,690 15,340 10,300 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 445 49
VC2-420 298 15 5 68,400 26,970 17,410 12,370 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 550 60
VC2-451 320 20 5 73,100 26,980 17,420 12,370 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 550 60
VC2-471 334 20 5 71,400 29,010 19,450 14,400 182" 51 3/4" 675 72
VC2-491 348 25 5 76,950 29,030 19,470 14,400 182" 51 3/4" 675 72
VC2-513 364 30 5 81,750 29,050 19,490 14,400 182" 51 3/4" 675 72
VC2-541 384 30 5 81,500 30,510 20,870 15,780 182" 51 3/4" 750 80
VC2-580 411 40 5 89,700 30,700 21,060 15,780 182" 51 3/4" 750 80
VC2-585 415 30 5 77,040 33,445 22,740 18,205 194 1/4" 61" 875 93
VC2-626 444 40 5 85,200 33,500 22,795 18,205 194 1/4" 61" 875 93
VC2-526 373 10 & 5 5 89,700 36,430 22,220 15,170 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 665 73
VC2-581 412 15 & 7.5 5 102,650 36,540 22,330 15,170 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 665 73
VC2-623 442 20 & 10 5 113,000 36,560 22,350 15,170 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 665 73
VC2-642 455 15 & 7.5 5 99,600 39,990 25,450 18,290 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 825 90
VC2-688 488 20 & 10 5 109,650 40,010 25,470 18,290 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 825 90
VC2-711 504 20 & 10 5 107,150 43,450 28,580 21,400 182" 51 3/4" 990 108
VC2-752 533 25 & 15 5 115,400 43,550 28,680 21,400 182" 51 3/4" 990 108
VC2-785 557 30 & 15 5 122,650 43,570 28,700 21,400 182" 51 3/4" 990 108
VC2-827 587 30 & 15 5 122,200 45,760 30,780 23,480 182" 51 3/4" 1,100 120
VC2-887 629 40 & 20 5 134,500 45,960 30,980 23,480 182" 51 3/4" 1,100 120
VC2-895 635 30 & 15 7.5 115,000 49,895 33,655 27,160 194 1/4" 61" 1,290 140
VC2-957 679 40 & 20 7.5 126,080 50,005 33,765 27,160 194 1/4" 61" 1,290 140
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
MOTOR HP WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE (LBS)
DIMENSIONS
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F26
11'-10"
2" DRAIN
ACCESS
3" OVERFLOW 2" MAKE-UP
3'-0 1/4" 5'-8 1/4"
11'-8 3/4"
BFW REFRIG OUT
BFW REFRIG IN
7

3
/
4
"
H
9
'-
0
"
F
3'-0 1/4"
VC2-N1204
VC2-N870
23'-8 1/2" 2'-0"
M M
2'-3"
Notes:
overflow level.
multiply by 1.98.
Designed to minimize refrigerant piping, these models have coil connections on just one end.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC2-N870 617 (2) 15 (2) 5 132,800 53,195 32,325 23,855 175 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 112
VC2-N932 661 (2) 20 (2) 5 146,200 53,285 32,415 23,855 175 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 112
VC2-N1000 709 (2) 25 (2) 5 163,100 53,595 32,725 23,855 175 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 112
VC2-N1071 760 (2) 30 (2) 5 163,500 58,445 38,595 27,795 185" 51 3/4" 1,350 136
VC2-N1124 797 (2) 30 (2) 5 160,230 61,480 39,610 30,510 185" 51 3/4" 1,510 150
VC2-N1204 854 (2) 40 (2) 5 176,340 61,610 39,740 30,510 185" 51 3/4" 1,510 150
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
(LBS)
MOTOR HP WEIGHT (LBS) DIMENSIONS
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F27
See page F58
for Engineering
Considerations.
11'-10"
2" DRAIN
ACCESS
3" OVERFLOW
2" MAKE-UP
3'-0 1/4" 5'-8 1/4"
11'-8 3/4"
BFW REFRIG OUT
BFW REFRIG IN
4

3
/
4
"
H
9
'-
0
"
F
3'-0 1/4"
VC2-1252
VC2-684
23'-8 1/2" 2'-0"
M M
2'-3"
VC2-1914
VC2-1052
35'-9 1/4" 2'-0"
M M M M
2'-3"
Notes:
overflow level.
multiply by 1.98.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
5
H F
VC2-684 485 (2) 10 (2) 5 119,500 49,580 30,570 10,300 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 890 98
VC2-754 535 (2) 15 (2) 5 136,800 49,680 30,670 10,300 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 890 98
VC2-840 596 (2) 15 (2) 5 132,800 54,240 34,810 12,370 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 121
VC2-902 640 (2) 20 (2) 5 146,200 54,260 34,830 12,370 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,100 121
VC2-942 668 (2) 20 (2) 5 142,800 58,020 38,900 14,400 182" 51 3/4" 1,350 144
VC2-982 696 (2) 25 (2) 5 153,900 58,060 38,940 14,400 182" 51 3/4" 1,350 144
VC2-1026 728 (2) 30 (2) 5 163,500 58,100 38,980 14,400 182" 51 3/4" 1,350 144
VC2-1082 767 (2) 30 (2) 5 160,230 61,020 41,740 15,780 182" 51 3/4" 1,510 160
VC2-1160 823 (2) 40 (2) 5 176,340 61,400 42,120 15,780 182" 51 3/4" 1,510 160
VC2-1170 830 (2) 30 (2) 5 154,080 67,645 45,905 15,780 194 1/4" 61" 1,715 186
VC2-1252 888 (2) 40 (2) 5 170,400 67,755 46,015 15,780 194 1/4" 61" 1,715 186
VC2-1052 746 (2) 10 & (2) 5 (2) 5 179,400 73,170 44,420 15,170 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 1,330 146
VC2-1162 824 (2) 15 & (2) 7 1/2 (2) 5 205,300 73,390 44,640 15,170 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 1,330 146
VC2-1246 884 (2) 20 & (2) 10 (2) 5 226,000 73,430 44,680 15,170 163 1/2" 33 1/4" 1,330 146
VC2-1284 911 (2) 15 & (2) 7 1/2 (2) 5 199,200 80,290 50,880 18,290 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,650 181
VC2-1376 976 (2) 20 & (2) 10 (2) 5 219,300 80,330 50,920 18,290 172 3/4" 42 1/2" 1,650 181
VC2-1422 1,009 (2) 20 & (2) 10 (2) 5 214,300 87,210 57,140 21,400 182" 51 3/4" 1,980 216
VC2-1504 1,067 (2) 25 & (2) 15 (2) 5 230,800 87,410 57,340 21,400 182" 51 3/4" 1,980 216
VC2-1570 1,113 (2) 30 & (2) 15 (2) 5 245,300 87,450 57,380 21,400 182" 51 3/4" 1,980 216
VC2-1654 1,173 (2) 30 & (2) 15 (2) 5 240,400 91,840 61,540 23,480 182" 51 3/4" 2,210 241
VC2-1774 1,258 (2) 40 & (2) 20 (2) 5 264,600 92,240 61,940 23,480 182" 51 3/4" 2,210 241
VC2-1790 1,269 (2) 30 & (2) 15 (2) 7.5 230,000 99,790 67,000 27,160 194 1/4" 61" 2,580 280
VC2-1914 1,357 (2) 40 & (2) 20 (2) 7.5 252,160 100,010 67,220 27,160 194 1/4" 61" 2,580 280
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
(LBS)
MOTOR HP WEIGHT (LBS) DIMENSIONS
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F28
VCL Engineering Data
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F29
Notes:
overflow level.
5. All models ship in one piece.
6. Standard refrigerant connection sizes are 3-inch BFW inlet and
outlet for VCL-016 through -035, and 4 BFW inlet and outlet for
all other models.
multiply by 1.98.
FAN
3
PUMP OPERATING
4
SHIPPING H F
VCL-016 11 1 1/3 7,040 2,210 1,660 62 1/4" 14 1/4" 23 2.5
VCL-019 13 2 1/3 8,310 2,240 1,690 65" 14 1/4" 23 2.5
VCL-024 17 2 1/3 8,010 2,470 1,900 75 3/4" 22 3/4" 34 3.3
VCL-029 21 2 1/3 7,660 2,700 2,120 82" 31 1/4" 44 4.3
VCL-035 25 3 1/3 8,140 2,960 2,360 90 1/2" 39 3/4" 52 5.2
VCL-038 27 3 1/2 12,800 3,530 2,400 62 1/4" 13 1/4" 44 4.4
VCL-044 31 2 1/2 12,620 3,940 2,760 73" 21 3/4" 62 6.3
VCL-048 34 3 1/2 14,250 3,970 2,790 73" 42 1/2" 62 6.3
VCL-054 38 5 1/2 16,150 3,990 2,810 75 3/4" 21 3/4" 62 6.3
VCL-058 41 3 1/2 13,570 4,370 3,180 79 1/4" 30 1/4" 83 8.2
VCL-065 46 5 1/2 15,600 4,390 3,200 79 1/4" 30 1/4" 83 8.2
VCL-073 52 5 1/2 15,150 4,820 3,610 87 3/4" 38 3/4" 101 10
VCL-079 56 7 1/2 1/2 16,690 4,890 3,680 90 1/2" 38 3/4" 101 10
VCL-087 62 5 1 19,280 6,130 4,380 82 1/4" 33 1/4" 122 12
VCL-096 68 7 1/2 1 21,570 6,160 4,410 82 1/4" 33 1/4" 122 12
VCL-102 72 10 1 23,730 6,190 4,440 82 1/4" 33 1/4" 122 12
VCL-108 77 7 1/2 1 21,200 6,770 4,990 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 159 15
VCL-115 82 10 1 22,970 6,800 5,020 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 159 15
VCL-120 85 10 1 22,210 7,440 5,620 100 3/4" 51 3/4" 182 18
VCL-134 95 10 1 1/2 25,130 8,590 6,160 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 203 20
VCL-148 105 15 1 1/2 28,400 8,650 6,220 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 203 20
VCL-155 110 15 1 1/2 28,000 9,450 6,950 100 3/4" 51 3/4" 242 24
VCL-167 118 10 1 1/2 36,870 11,570 8,030 82 1/4" 33 1/4" 244 24
VCL-185 131 15 1 1/2 41,560 11,630 8,090 82 1/4" 33 1/4" 244 24
VCL-209 148 15 1 1/2 40,780 12,870 9,270 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 317 30
VCL-223 158 20 1 1/2 44,290 12,880 9,280 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 317 30
VCL-234 166 20 1 1/2 43,480 14,140 10,460 100 3/4" 51 3/4" 364 35
VCL-257 182 20 2 47,860 16,000 11,080 92 9/16" 42 1/2" 406 40
VCL-271 192 20 2 47,370 17,540 12,480 100 3/4" 51 3/4" 484 47
VCL-286 203 25 2 50,670 17,580 12,520 100 3/4" 51 3/4" 484 47
VCL-299 212 30 2 53,520 17,620 12,560 100 3/4" 51 3/4" 484 47
DIMENSIONS
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
7
(LBS)
INTERNAL
COIL VOLUME
(FT
3
)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
R-717
TONS
2
WEIGHT (LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
MOTOR HP
See page F58
for Engineering
Considerations.
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F30
Structural Support
The recommended support arrangement for the Series V Evaporative Condenser consists of parallel
I-beams running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawings. Besides
providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure
access to the bottom of the unit. To support a Series V Evaporative Condenser in an alternate steel
support arrangement, consult your BAC Representative.
Steel Supports
Steel Supports
VC1 Models
(Also representative of VC2 models)
VCL Models
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F31
Notes:
practice. The maximum allowable deflection of the beams under
the unit shall be as specified in the table above.
package, if required, to be installed between the unit and
supporting steel. When determining the length of steel beams,
allow for the length of vibration isolation rails, as they may be
longer than the unit length shown above.
5. If point vibration isolation is used, the isolators must be located
under the supporting steel, not between the support steel and
the unit.
All VCL Models VC1-10 thru -516, -N208 thru -N315,
& -C216 thru -C320
VC2-319 thru -626 & -N138 thru -N301
VC1-540 thru -1032, -N338 thru -N470,
& -C339 thru -C469
VC2-526 thru -1252 & -N356 thru -N1204
VC1-1158 thru -1608 & VC2-1052 thru -1914
MODEL NUMBER A B
MAXIMUM
DELFECTION
3
VC1-10 thru 25 3 9-3/8 2 5-1/2 3/32
VC1-30 thru 65 3 9-3/8 5 5-1/2 3/16
VC1-72 thru 90 3 9-3/8 8 5-1/4 5/16
VC1-100 thru 135 3 9-3/8 11 5-1/2 3/8
VC1-150 thru 205 4 6-1/4 11 5-1/2 3/8
VC1-N208 thru N315 7 7-5/8 10 7-1/2 3/8
VC1-N338 thru N470 7 7-5/8 16 7-3/4 1/2
VC1-386 thru 516 11 7-1/4 10 7-1/2 3/8
VC1-540 thru 804 11 7-1/4 16 7-3/4 1/2
VC1-772 thru 1032 11 7-1/4 22 8-1/4 1/2
VC1-1158 thru 1608 11 7-1/4 34 8-3/4 1/2
VC1-C216 thru C320 7 1-5/8 10 7-1/2 3/8
VC1-C339 thru C469 7 1-5/8 16 7-3/4 1/2
VC2-N138 thru N191 4 9-1/2 11 5 3/8
VC2-N206 thru N235 6 4-1/4 10 7-1/2 3/8
VC2-N261 thru N301 7 8 10 7-1/2 3/8
VC2-N356 thru N446 7 8 16 7-3/4 1/2
VC2-319 thru 626 11 7-1/4 10 7-1/2 3/8
VC2-526 thru 957 11 7-1/4 16 7-3/4 1/2
VC2-N870 thru N1204 11 7-1/4 22 8-1/4 1/2
VC2-684 thru 1252 11 7-1/4 22 8-1/4 1/2
VC2-1052 thru 1914 11 7-1/4 34 8-3/4 1/2
VCL-016 thru -035 3 11 4 6 1/4
VCL-038 thru -079 3 11 7 11-1/2 3/8
VCL-087 thru -120 3 11 10 11-1/4 1/2
VCL-134 thru -155 3 11 13 11-1/2 1/2
VCL-167 thru -234 7 8-1/4 10 11-1/4 1/2
VCL-257 thru -299 7 8-1/4 13 11-1/2 1/2
S
e
r
i
e
s

V
F32
Part 1: General
A. General: Furnish and install, _____ factory assembled
evaporative condenser(s) of counterflow blow-through design,
with single side entry, conforming in all aspects to the
specifications and schedule as shown on the plans.
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted
by the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____
BTUH heat rejection, operating with ____ refrigerant and ___F
condensing temperature and ___F entering wet-bulb
temperature.
C. Warranty: The manufacturers standard equipment warranty
shall be for a period of one year from the date of startup or
eighteen months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first.
The manufacturer shall, in addition, provide a 5-year mechanical
drive warranty covering the fans, fan shafts, bearings, sheaves,
supports, and fan motors.
D. Factory Testing: Equipment manufacturer shall be capable of
testing the operation of the condenser in the manufacturers own
test facility. Test facilities shall be capable of simulating design
conditions, including but not limited to design wet-bulb, airflow,
refrigerant mass flow rate, refrigerant condensing temperature,
and total heat rejection.
E. Quality Assurance: The manufacture shall have
are not ISO-9001 certified shall provide an additional one-year
warranty to the customer at no additional cost.
Part 2: Products
2.01 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
A. General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be
constructed from heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip
galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating of
zinc-rich compound.
2.02 Coil Casing Assembly
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section
consisting of a refrigerant condensing coil, a spray water
distribution system, and drift eliminators as indicated by the
manufacturer.
1.The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of all
prime surface steel at the manufacturers own facility, and
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be tested at
375 psig (2687 kPa) air pressure under water.
b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for
low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage
of liquid refrigerant.
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be ASME
B31.5 compliant and coils shipping into Canada shall
be supplied with a CRN.
2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a
minimum flow rate of 4.5 gpm/ft2 (3.1 lps/m2) to ensure
complete wetting of the coil at all times by large-diameter,
non-clog, 360plastic distribution nozzles spaced across
the coil face area in Schedule 40 PVC spray branches.
Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage diffusion pattern to
provide overlapping, umbrella spray patterns that create
multiple intersection points with adjacent nozzles.
a. Directional nozzles shall not be acceptable.
b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place
by snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal
of individual nozzles or complete branches for
cleaning or flushing.
c. Nozzles shall have a minimum of 0.25" (6.35 mm)
protrusion inside the spray branches to ensure
unimpeded water flow between regular cleanings of
the water distribution system.
3. Removable PVC drift eliminators shall be positioned to
prevent moisture from leaving the evaporative condenser
and incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air
direction.
2.03 Pan Assembly
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly
consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly and fan
assemblies with single side air inlet and integral air plenum.
1. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out
connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; overflow
connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly.
a. Drain/cleanout connection shall be located in the
cold water basin to allow removal of recirculating
water.
b. Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with
perforated openings sized smaller than the water
distribution nozzle orifices and an integral anti-vortexing
hood to prevent air entrainment.
c. Brass make-up valve shall be supplied with a
large-diameter plastic float arranged for easy
adjustment.
d. Overflow connection shall be provided in the cold
water basin to protect against recirculating water
spillage.
e. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled,
bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a
mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped from
the suction strainer to the water distribution system.
i. The pump shall be installed so that it may drain
freely when the basin is drained.
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral
metering valve and bleed line to control the bleed
rate from the pump discharge to the overflow
connection.
iii. The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan
cooled (TEFC) type suitable for _____ V, ____
phase______ Hz electrical service.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F33
f. On installations requiring a remote sump, the
evaporative condenser shall be modified to
accommodate the use of an independent sump and
pump for recirculating water (by others)
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer,
make-up valve, and integral bleed line assemblies
shall be omitted from the evaporative condenser
scope of supply.
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with
a cold water basin outlet sized and located as
indicated on the drawings for gravity drain to the
remote sump.
iii. The water distribution system shall have an
operating pressure of 2 psig (115 kPa) at the
evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection.
VC2 Models
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the axial fan
assemblies and integral air plenum.
a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering
airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of
maintenance.
b. Fan motors and drives shall be located at the front base
of the unit to facilitate access without requiring access to
the inside of the unit.
c. Fan cylinders shall have curved inlets for efficient
air entry.
d. Each fan assembly shall contain two axial-flow fans
mounted in series on a common shaft with discharge
guide vanes between the fans for increased fan
efficiency.
e. Fans shall be heavy-duty, axial flow type with aluminum
alloy blades driven by a one-piece, multi-groove
neoprene/polyester belt designed for a minimum of 150%
of the motor nameplate horsepower.
i. Fan shafts shall be mounted in heavy-duty,
self-aligning, grease-packed relubricatable ball
bearings with eccentric locking collars, designed for a
minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours.
ii. Bearing lubrication lines shall be extended to the
exterior of the unit.
iii. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from
corrosion-resistant materials.
f. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
type with a 1.15 service factor, suitable for _____ V, ____
phase, ______ Hz electrical service and shall be
mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor base.
Special moisture protection shall be provided on the
windings, shafts and bearings.
g. Integral air plenum shall contain additional guide vanes
to ensure uniform airflow into the coil casing section.
VC1 Models
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the
centrifugal fan assemblies and integral air plenum.
a. Fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering
airstream to provide greater reliability and ease of
maintenance.
b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air
entry and rectangular discharge cowls that extend into
the pan to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from
entering the fans.
c. Fan housings on units more than 8' wide shall be split to
facilitate the removal of the fan shaft.
d. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted
on a steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning,
relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed
for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours.
e. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
Special moisture protection shall be furnished on the
windings, shafts, and bearings.
VCL Models
2. Air shall enter the evaporative condenser through the
centrifugal fan assemblies and integral air plenum.
a. Centrifugal fan assemblies shall be located adjacent to
the casing and the cold water basin to minimize overall
unit height.
b. Fan housings shall have curved inlet rings for efficient air
entry and rectangular discharge cowls which extend into
the pan to increase fan efficiency and prevent water from
entering the fans.
c. Fan housings shall be split to facilitate the removal of
the fan shaft.
d. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, centrifugal flow type mounted
on a steel shaft with heavy-duty, self-aligning,
relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings, designed
for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours.
e. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC)
Special moisture protection shall be provided on the
windings, shafts and bearings.
2.04 Optional Equipment Specifications
A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to
prevent freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the
evaporative condenser is idle.
1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +40F
(4.4C) basin water temperature at a 0F (-17.8C)
ambient temperature and 10 mph (16.1 km/hr) wind
speed.
2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled
by a remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in
the basin water.
3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a factory-installed
low water level cutout switch to prevent heater operation
unless the heater elements are fully submerged.
B. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with dedicated
motors and drives so that each fan can be cycled independently,
and an internal baffle shall be supplied to deter air bypass within
the unit.
C. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
assembled, field-installed external platform with an access ladder
and handrails complying with OSHA standards and regulations to
provide access to the top of the evaporative condenser.
1. External platform shall have a 24" (610 mm) wide
non-skid walking surface and 42" (1220 mm) high
safety railings.
2. Optional ladder/safety cage shall be available to
meet OSHA requirements as necessary.
D. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with the ENERGY-
MISER
Fan System to improve part load efficiency and provide

system redundancy in case of a motor failure.
1. The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System shall include the main

fan motor as listed in the manufacturers published
literature and a pony motor sized for approximately 1/3 of
design horsepower and 2/3 of design fan speed to
optimize energy savings during non-design load
conditions.
L
a
y
o
u
t

G
u
i
d
e
l
i
n
e
s
F34
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
CXV
F35
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F36
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F38
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F40
Custom Features & Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F44
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F47
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F50
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F55
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F56
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F58
C
X
V
F36
Single Model Capacity:
64 1,888 Nominal R-717 Tons
(81 2,390 Nominal R-22 Tons)
CXV Evaporative Condensers deliver fully rated thermal performance over a wide range of heat rejection
and temperature requirements for various refrigerants. Standard design features satisfy todays
environmental concerns, minimize installation costs, maximize year-round operating reliability, and simplify
maintenance requirements.
CXV Evaporative Condensers
Reduced refrigerant charge
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Application flexibility
Long service life
ASME B31.5 compliant coils
CXV
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F37
C
X
V
F38
Benefits
Reduced Refrigerant Charge
Combined flow technology provides maximum
capacity at the lowest refrigerant charge
available in the industry.
Reduced refrigerant charge lowers installation
costs and may help satisfy refrigerant charge
thresholds.
* For more information on combined flow
technology, see pages F1.
and reducing environmental impact. Evaporative condensers provide lower condensing temperatures
and can offer significant horsepower savings over conventional air-cooled and water-cooled
condensing systems.
The CXV provides heat rejection at the lowest possible energy input and maintenance
requirements via:
Patented combined flow technology, which reduces evaporation directly off the coil,
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System available (see page F45 for details)

Low Installed Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel
I-beams and ship complete with motors and
Modular Design Units ship in multiple sections
to minimize the size and weight of the heaviest
lift, allowing for the use of smaller, less
costly cranes.
Coil Connections Fewer coil connections
reduce costs of pipe, valves, purgers, and labor.
CXV
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

C
h
a
r
g
e
Others Others
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F39
Easy Maintenance
Access - Hinged access doors on each end wall provide
easy access to the unit interior. In addition, all single air
inlet models (CXV-64 thru -962 and CXV-N465 thru -N687)
are provided with an internal walkway as standard. An
internal walkway is available as an option on CXV-T
models.
Spacious Interior Provides easy access to the cold
water basin, drift eliminators, fan drive system and
condensing coil.
Access to Spray Distribution Parallel flow of air and
spray water over the coil allows for inspection and access
to the top of the coil during full operation.
Application Flexibility
Replacement applications Single air inlet models are
designed to mount directly on existing support steel of both
crossflow and counterflow units.
Coil configurations Alternate coil configurations and
materials available. ASME U Stamp available (see page
F44 for details).
Highest capacity in the industry CXV-T models
offer the highest single cell capacity of any evaporative
condenser in the industry. Projects benefit from fewer
required cells, lower overall fan horsepower, and fewer
piping connections.
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train Backed by a five-year fan

drive and motor warranty, the BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
utilizes special corrosion-resistant materials of
construction and state-of-the-art technology to ensure
ease of maintenance and reliable year-round performance.
Separate Air Inlet Louvers Reduce the potential for
scale build-up and damaging ice formations at the air/water
interface by providing a line of sight from the outside of the
unit into the fill.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Various materials are available
to meet the corrosion resistance, unit operating life, and
budgetary requirements of any project (see page F44 for
construction options).
Oversized, hinged access door
Drift eliminators can be removed
for additional access to the
condensing coil
Spray distribution system
C
X
V
F40
CXV Models
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F41
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
multi-groove belt
Corrosion resistant cast
aluminum sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Low HP Axial Fan(s)
Quiet operation
water coverage
Coil Section (Not Shown)
with a CRN
BACross

(Not Shown)
Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
Cold Water Basin
Recirculating Spray Water Pump
centrifugal pump
Bleed line with metering valve
installed from pump discharge to overflow
Hinged Access Doors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C
X
V
F42
CXV-T Models
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F43
FRP Casing Panels
Corrosion resistant
Maintenance free
UV resistant finish
BALTIDRIVE
Power Train
Premium quality, solid backed,
multi-groove belt
Corrosion resistant cast
aluminum sheaves
Heavy-duty bearings
Low HP Axial Fan
Quiet operation
water coverage
Coil Sections
with a CRN
BACross

Corrosion resistant
UV resistant finish
Maintenance free
Cold Water Basin
Integral Recirculating Spray
Water Pumps (Not Shown)
Close coupled, bronze fitted centrifugal pumps
Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors
Bleed line with metering valve installed
from pump discharge to overflow
Hinged Access Doors
(Not Shown)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
C
X
V
F44
All Models: All steel panels and structural elements are constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 hot-dip
galvanized steel. Inlet louvers are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
CXV-T Models: Casing panels are constructed of UV-resistant, fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the evaporative condenser (excluding
condensing coil).
Factory Mutual Approval:
All multi-cell units are available with Factory Mutual (FM) Approved construction as an option.
Coil Configurations
The standard condensing coil is constructed of continuous lengths of all prime surface steel,
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (HDGAF).
Coils are available in Type 304 stainless steel for specialized applications.
This coil meets the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, and bears the ASME U stamp. ASME coils are hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication (HDGAF).
All coils are designed for low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage of fluid. Each coil is
pneumatically tested at 375 psig (2586 kPa) and is ASME B31.5 compliant. Orders shipping into
Canada are supplied with a CRN.
for details.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F45
Fan Drive System
atmosphere. The standard fan drive system on all models is the exclusive BALTIDRIVE
Power Train.
This BAC engineered drive system consists of a specially designed powerband and two cast aluminum
sheaves located on minimum shaft centerline distances to maximize belt life. A cooling tower duty fan
motor, custom engineered for BAC to provide maximum performance for evaporative cooling service, is
provided and backed by BACs comprehensive five-year motor and fan drive warranty.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
The ENERGY-MISER

standard single-speed fan motor and drive assemblies.
One drive assembly is sized for full speed and load,
and the other is sized approximately 2/3 speed and
consumes only 1/3 the design horsepower. This
configuration allows the system to be operated like a
two-speed motor, but with the reserve capacity of a
standby motor in the event of failure. As a minimum,
approximately 70% capacity will be available from the
low horsepower motor, even on a design wet-bulb day.
Controls and wiring are the same as those required for a two-speed, two-winding motor. Significant
energy savings are achieved when operating at low speed during periods of reduced load and/or low
wet-bulb temperatures.
Models CXV-103 thru -962 and CXV-N465 thru -N687 are provided with one fan motor driving multiple
fans as standard. The Independent Fan option consists of one fan motor and drive assembly for each
fan to allow independent operation, adding redundancy and an additional step of capacity control.
Low Sound Operation
The low sound levels generated by CXV Evaporative
Condensers make them suitable for installation in most
environments. For very sound sensitive installations, a
low sound fan option is available to significantly reduce
the sound levels generated from the unit with minimal
impact on thermal performance.
For extremely sound sensitive installations, factory
designed, tested and rated sound attenuation is
available for both the air intake and discharge.
ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
Unit with intake and
discharge sound attenuation
C
X
V
F46
Gear Drive System, Externally
Mounted Motor (CXV-T Models Only)
CXV-T Models are available with a gear drive
system with external TEFC motor. A non-corrosive
carbon-fiber composite drive shaft with stainless
steel hubs is selected with a 2.0 service factor. The
motor and drive shaft ship separately for easy field
installation.
Gear Drive System, Close-Coupled
Motor (CXV-T Models Only)
CXV-T Models are available with a close-coupled
gear drive system. Both the gear drive and
couplings are selected with a 2.0 service factor.
Gear construction includes a nickel-alloy steel shaft,
casehardened gears, self lubrication, and a single
piece, gray iron housing. This drive system ships
(CXV-T Models Only)
The basinless unit construction option enables units to be directly
applied to new or existing concrete cold water basins. This
custom feature, available exclusively on BAC CXV-T evaporative
condensers, reduces maintenance costs by eliminating the
integral basin from traditional units. It simplifies piping and
pumping requirements of multi-cell installations and provides a
cost-effective solution for many field-erected replacement
projects.
Gear Drive System,
CXV-T installation on a
concrete basin
Gear Drive System,
Close-Coupled Motor
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F47
Accessories
For external service, louver face and access door
platforms can be added to the unit when purchased
or as an aftermarket item. Safety gates are available
for all handrail openings. All components are
Ladder, Safety Cage, Safety Gate and Handrails (CXV-T Models Only)
In the event the end-user elects to provide access to the fan deck, CXV-T models can be furnished
with ladders extending from the top of the unit to the base, as well as safety cages, safety gates, fan
deck extensions and handrail packages. All components are designed to meet OSHA requirements. All
access to the top of the equipment must be made in accordance with applicable governmental
occupational safety standards.
NOTE: Partial or full grating above the coil air intake is recommended with this option
Internal Ladder
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on models CXV-64 thru -962 and CXV-N465 thru -N687,
an internal ladder is available.
For access to the motor and drive assemblies on
models CXV-196 thru -962, CXV-N465 thru -N687,
and all CXV-T models, an upper service platform
with ladder and handrails is available. Safety gates
are available for handrail openings. All components
are designed to meet OSHA requirements.
Internal ladder and service platform
with ladder and safety cage
C
X
V
F48
Accessories
Additional contacts can be provided to activate an alarm.
Basin Heaters
Evaporative condensers exposed to below freezing ambient temperatures require protection to prevent
freezing of the water in the cold water basin when the unit is idle. Factory-installed heaters, which
maintain +40F (4.4C) water temperature, are a simple and inexpensive way of providing such
protection.
standard mechanical makeup valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This
package consists of a conductance-actuated level
control mounted in the basin and a solenoid
activated valve in the make-up water line. The
valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
CXV-64 thru -95 1 4 1 6
CXV-103 thru -153 1 6 1 8
CXV-160 thru -206 1 8 1 12
CXV-196 thru -305 1 12 1 16
CXV-310 thru -481 1 16 1 21
CXV-N465 thru -N687 2 10 2 15
CXV-420 thru -610 2 12 2 16
CXV-620 thru -962 2 16 2 21
CXV-T645 thru -T792 2 12 2 15
CXV-T791 thru -T944 2 14 2 20
CXV-T1290 thru -T1584 4 12 4 15
CXV-T1654 thru -T1888 4 14 4 20
MODEL NUMBERS
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F49
Extended lubrication lines are available for lubrication of the fan shaft bearings. Grease fittings are
located inside the plenum area next to the access door.
Air Inlet Screens
Wire mesh screens can be factory-installed over the inlet louvers and the spray distribution system to
prevent debris from entering the unit.
Basin sweeper piping provides an effective method of preventing
debris from collecting in the cold water basin of the unit. A
complete piping system, including nozzles, is provided in the
cold water basin for connection to side stream filtration
equipment (by others).
Optional copper sweat fittings are available to simplify
field piping.
C
X
V
F50
Engineering Data
12'1-1/4"
SIDE ELEVATION
1/2" MAKE UP
MODELS
160206
1'8-1/4"
1/2" MAKE UP
MODELS MODELS
103153 6495
9'1-1/4"
SIDE ELEVATION
1'4-1/4"
1/2" MAKE UP
SIDE ELEVATION END ELEVATION
6'1-1/4" 1'3-3/4"
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
8' 5-1/4"
6
"
0
-
3
/
4
"
1
3
'
2
-
3
/
4
"
REFRIG IN
REFRIG OUT
Notes:
1. Model number denotes nominal ammonia capacity in
evaporator tons at a 96.3F condensing temperature, a 20F
2. R-22 tons are at a 105F condensing temperature, a 40F
3. Operating weight is for the unit with the water level in the
cold water basin at the overflow.
4. For R-22 and R-134a, the coil connection quantity will double
(except for the CXV-64 thru -153).
5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge;
R-134a is 1.98 times.
See page J16
for information on sizing
a remote sump tank.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
3
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
CXV-64 81 5 1.5 28,950 7,410 5,020 2,870 51 6.2
CXV-77 97 5 1.5 28,550 7,780 5,340 3,190 67 8.0
CXV-86 109 5 1.5 27,850 8,170 5,680 3,530 84 10
CXV-95 120 7.5 1.5 31,050 8,570 6,030 3,880 101 12
CXV-103 130 10 2 48,650 10,800 7,160 4,240 76 9.2
CXV-119 151 7.5 2 43,650 11,350 7,640 4,720 101 12
CXV-125 158 10 2 48,000 11,360 7,650 4,730 101 12
CXV-134 170 7.5 2 42,550 11,910 8,130 5,210 126 15
CXV-143 181 10 2 45,650 12,480 8,630 5,710 151 18
CXV-153 194 15 2 52,150 12,530 8,680 5,760 151 18
CXV-160 203 10 3 58,750 14,330 9,360 5,720 135 16
CXV-171 216 15 3 67,150 14,380 9,410 5,770 135 16
CXV-179 227 10 3 57,250 15,060 10,010 6,370 168 20
CXV-192 243 15 3 65,450 15,130 10,060 6,420 168 20
CXV-184 233 10 3 55,850 15,830 10,670 7,030 201 24
CXV-206 261 20 3 70,200 15,930 10,770 7,130 201 24
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
5
(LBS)
WEIGHTS (LBS)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
MOTOR HP
NOMINAL
R-22
TONS
2
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F51
REFRIG OUT
REFRIG IN
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS
H
A
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
11'10"
END ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION
1'8-1/4" 12'1-1/4"
1" MAKE UP
MODELS
196305
MODELS
310481
2'0-3/8" 18'1-1/4"
1" MAKE UP
Notes:
2. R-22 tons are at a 105F condensing temperature, a 40F
3. Operating weight is for the unit with the water level in the cold
4. For R-22 and R-134a, the coil connection quantity will double.
See page F58
for Engineering
Considerations.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
3
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
A H
CXV-196 248 10 5 68,160 17,480 10,740 6,580 164 20 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-210 266 15 5 77,900 17,530 10,790 6,630 164 20 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-220 278 20 5 85,650 17,580 10,840 6,680 164 20 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-235 297 10 5 67,200 18,670 11,780 7,620 217 26 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-253 320 15 5 76,800 18,720 11,830 7,670 217 26 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-264 334 10 5 64,930 19,870 12,830 8,670 270 32 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-283 358 15 5 74,200 19,920 12,880 8,720 270 32 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-290 367 15 5 72,700 21,110 13,920 9,760 321 38 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-305 386 20 5 79,950 21,160 13,970 9,810 321 38 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-310 392 15/7.5 7.5 117,900 25,500 15,320 9,500 243 29 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-324 410 10/5 7.5 129,650 25,590 15,410 9,590 243 29 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-337 427 25/15 7.5 139,550 25,690 15,510 9,690 243 29 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-349 442 10/5 7.5 101,760 27,210 16,810 10,990 321 39 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-373 472 15/7.5 7.5 116,300 27,290 16,890 11,070 321 39 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-388 491 10/5 7.5 98,310 29,030 18,400 12,580 401 48 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-398 504 10/5 7.5 96,290 30,830 19,990 14,170 475 57 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-416 527 15/7.5 7.5 112,350 29,110 18,480 12,660 401 48 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-427 541 15/7.5 7.5 110,050 30,910 20,070 14,250 475 57 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-449 568 20/10 7.5 121,050 30,990 20,150 14,330 475 57 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-466 590 25/15 7.5 130,300 31,100 20,260 14,440 475 57 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-481 609 30/15 7.5 138,350 31,120 20,280 14,460 475 57 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
DIMENSIONS
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
5
(LBS)
MOTOR HP WEIGHTS (LBS)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
NOMINAL R-
22 TONS
2
C
X
V
F52
Engineering Data
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS
REFRIG OUT
REFRIG IN
H
A
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
11'10"
END ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION
1'8-1/4"
24 -5"
2-1/2"
1" MAKE UP
MODELS
420610
1'8-1/4"
SIDE ELEVATION
2'0-3/8"
36'5"
2-1/2"
1" MAKE UP 1" MAKE UP
MODELS
620962
2'0-3/8"
Notes:
2. R-22 tons are at a 105F condensing temperature, a 40F suction
temperature, and a 78F wet-bulb temperature.
5. The R-22 operating charge is 1.93 times the ammonia charge; R-
134a is 1.98 times.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
3
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION A H
CXV-420 532 (2) 15 (2) 5 155,800 35,060 21,580 6,630 328 39 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-470 595 (2) 10 (2) 5 134,400 37,340 23,560 7,620 434 51 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-506 641 (2) 15 (2) 5 153,600 37,440 23,660 7,670 434 51 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-528 668 (2) 10 (2) 5 129,860 39,740 25,660 8,670 540 64 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-566 716 (2) 15 (2) 5 148,400 39,840 25,760 8,720 540 64 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-580 734 (2) 15 (2) 5 145,400 42,220 27,840 9,760 642 76 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-610 772 (2) 20 (2) 5 159,900 42,320 27,940 9,810 642 76 8'-8 3/4" 15'-10 3/4"
CXV-620 785 (2)15/(2)7.5 (2) 7.5 235,800 51,000 30,640 9,500 486 58 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-648 820 (2)20/(2)10 (2) 7.5 259,300 51,180 30,820 9,590 486 58 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-674 853 (2)25/(2)15 (2) 7.5 279,100 51,380 31,020 9,690 486 58 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-698 884 (2)10/(2)5 (2) 7.5 203,520 54,400 33,600 11,000 642 77 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-746 944 (2)15/(2)7.5 (2) 7.5 232,600 54,580 33,780 11,070 642 77 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-776 982 (2)10/(2)5 (2) 7.5 196,620 58,040 36,780 12,590 802 96 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-796 1,008 (2)10/(2)5 (2) 7.5 192,580 61,660 39,980 14,180 950 115 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-832 1,053 (2)15/(2)7.5 (2) 7.5 224,700 58,220 36,960 12,660 802 96 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-854 1,081 (2)15/(2)7.5 (2) 7.5 220,100 61,820 40,140 14,250 950 115 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-898 1,137 (2)20/(2)10 (2) 7.5 242,100 61,980 40,300 14,330 950 115 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-932 1,180 (2)25/(2)15 (2) 7.5 260,600 62,200 40,520 14,440 950 115 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
CXV-962 1,218 (2)30/(2)15 (2) 7.5 276,700 62,240 40,560 14,460 950 115 9'-2 1/4" 16'-4 1/4"
MOTOR HP
MODEL
NUMBER
1
NOMINAL
R-22
TONS
2
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
DIMENSIONS
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
5
(LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
WEIGHTS (LBS)
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F53
See page F58 for
engineering
considerations
REFRIG IN
REFRIG OUT
ACCESS DOOR
BOTH ENDS
3" OVERFLOW
2" DRAIN
11'10"
END ELEVATION
9
'
2
-
1
/
4
"
1
6
'
4
-
1
/
4
"
1'8-1/4" 23'6"
SIDE ELEVATION
1" MAKE UP
MODELS
N465N687
1'8-1/4"
Notes:
For ammonia applications above 676 tons, the coil connection
quantity will double.
8. The vertical liquid leg height for models CXV-N465 thru
CXV-N687 should be at least 12 feet for multiple condenser
installations on ammonia applications. Minimum liquid leg height
is subject to overall system piping requirements.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
3
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION
CXV-N465 589 (2) 15 (2) 5 174,270 34,400 20,890 12,750 323 39
CXV-N491 622 (2) 10 (2) 5 149,230 36,590 22,780 14,640 427 51
CXV-N530 671 (2) 15 (2) 5 170,810 36,730 22,920 14,780 427 51
CXV-N559 708 (2) 20 (2) 5 188,430 36,770 22,960 14,820 427 51
CXV-N574 727 (2) 15 (2) 5 169,210 39,110 25,000 16,860 532 63
CXV-N605 766 (2) 20 (2) 5 186,220 39,150 25,040 16,900 532 63
CXV-N636 805 (2) 20 (2) 5 183,020 41,510 27,120 18,980 631 76
CXV-N664 841 (2) 25 (2) 5 197,790 41,610 27,220 19,080 631 76
CXV-N687 870 (2) 30 (2) 5 210,170 41,890 27,500 19,360 631 76
NOMINAL
R-22
TONS
2
MODEL
NUMBER
1
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
5
(LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
Designed to minimize refrigerant piping, these models have coil connections on just one end.
C
X
V
F54
Engineering Data - CXV-T Models
END ELEVATION
SPRAY PUMPS
ACCESS DOORS
BOTH ENDS
REFRIG. IN
REFRIG. OUT
REFRIG. IN
REFRIG. OUT
H
1
0
'
-
4

3
/
4
"
W
CXV
T1290 to T1888
2-1/2"
L
SIDE ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION
CXV
T645 to T944
L
Notes:
4. Coil connections also available on the end. For other refrigerants,
contact your local BAC Representative for the coil connection
quantity.
7. Standard make-up, drain and overflow connections are located on
the bottom of the unit. Make-up connection is 1-1/2 MPT
standpipe, drain is 2 FPT and overflow is 3 FPT.
8. Models shipped with an optional gear drive or low sound fan may
have heights up to 10.5" greater than shown.
FAN PUMP OPERATING
3
SHIPPING
HEAVIEST
SECTION W L H
8
CXV-T645 816 30 (2) 7.5 177,100 42,640 27,710 8,050 656 76 24'-1/2" 11'-11" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T686 868 40 (2) 7.5 195,420 42,780 27,850 8,050 656 76 24'-1/2" 11'-11" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T717 908 50 (2) 7.5 210,980 42,840 27,910 8,050 656 76 24'-1/2" 11'-11" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T729 923 40 (2) 7.5 193,150 45,810 30,610 9,430 780 91 24'-1/2" 11'-11" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T763 966 50 (2) 7.5 208,490 45,870 30,670 9,430 780 91 24'-1/2" 11'-11" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T792 1,003 60 (2) 7.5 221,910 46,030 30,830 9,430 780 91 24'-1/2" 11'-11" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T791 1,001 40 (2) 7.5 225,480 50,070 31,770 9,390 753 89 26'-3 1/2" 13'-11 1/8" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T827 1,047 50 (2) 7.5 245,080 50,130 31,830 9,390 753 89 26'-3 1/2" 13'-11 1/8" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T857 1,085 60 (2) 7.5 260,910 50,290 31,990 9,390 753 89 26'-3 1/2" 13'-11 1/8" 19'-5 7/8"
CXV-T876 1,109 50 (2) 7.5 240,050 53,740 35,110 11,030 903 107 26'-3 1/2" 13'-11 1/8" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T906 1,147 60 (2) 7.5 255,630 53,900 35,270 11,030 903 107 26'-3 1/2" 13'-11 1/8" 19'-5 7/8"
CXV-T944 1,195 75 (2) 7.5 278,020 53,950 35,320 11,030 903 107 26'-3 1/2" 13'-11 1/8" 19'-5 7/8"
CXV-T1290 1,633 (2) 30 (4) 7.5 354,200 85,280 55,420 8,050 1,312 153 24'-1/2" 24'-1/2" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T1372 1,737 (2) 40 (4) 7.5 390,840 85,560 55,700 8,050 1,312 153 24'-1/2" 24'-1/2" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T1434 1,815 (2) 50 (4) 7.5 421,960 85,680 55,820 8,050 1,312 153 24'-1/2" 24'-1/2" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T1458 1,846 (2) 40 (4) 7.5 386,300 91,620 61,220 9,430 1,560 183 24'-1/2" 24'-1/2" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T1526 1,932 (2) 50 (4) 7.5 416,980 91,740 61,340 9,430 1,560 183 24'-1/2" 24'-1/2" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T1584 2,005 (2) 60 (4) 7.5 443,820 92,060 61,660 9,430 1,560 183 24'-1/2" 24'-1/2" 18'-7 7/8"
CXV-T1582 2,003 (2) 40 (4) 7.5 450,960 100,140 63,540 9,390 1,506 179 26'-3 1/2" 28'-3/4" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T1654 2,094 (2) 50 (4) 7.5 490,160 100,260 63,660 9,390 1,506 179 26'-3 1/2" 28'-3/4" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T1714 2,170 (2) 60 (4) 7.5 521,820 100,580 63,980 9,390 1,506 179 26'-3 1/2" 28'-3/4" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T1752 2,218 (2) 50 (4) 7.5 480,100 107,480 70,220 11,030 1,806 214 26'-3 1/2" 28'-3/4" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T1812 2,294 (2) 60 (4) 7.5 511,260 107,800 70,540 11,030 1,806 214 26'-3 1/2" 28'-3/4" 18'-9 7/8"
CXV-T1888 2,390 (2) 75 (4) 7.5 556,040 107,900 70,640 11,030 1,806 214 26'-3 1/2" 28'-3/4" 18'-9 7/8"
INTERNAL
COIL
VOLUME
(FT
3
)
DIMENSIONS R-717
OPERATING
CHARGE
4
(LBS)
AIRFLOW
(CFM)
MODEL
NUMBER
1
NOMINAL
R-22
TONS
2
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F55
The recommended support arrangement for CXV Evaporative Condensers consists of parallel I-beams
positioned as shown in the drawings. Besides providing adequate support, the steel also serves to raise
the unit above any solid foundation to assure access to the bottom of the unit. Alternate steel support
designs include a cantilevered plan as indicated by the optional minimum D dimension in the table below.
When unit is supported with a cantilever plan, the side opposite the air inlet shall be cantilevered. To
support a CXV on columns or in an alternate arrangement not shown here, consult your local BAC
Representative.
Structural Support
AIR
IN
1 1/8" D
STEEL SUPPORT
A
A/2
1 7/16"
AIR
IN
AIR
IN
Notes:
1. Support steel and anchor bolts to be designed and furnished
by others.
practice. Maximum deflection of beam under unit to be 1/360 of
4. If vibration isolation rails are to be used between unit and
those of the unit.
steel and the units.
MODEL NUMBER D
OPTIONAL
MINIMUM D
MAXIMUM
DELFECTION
CXV-64 to 95 8'-3" 6'-0" 3/16"
CXV-103 to 153 8'-3" 6'-0" 5/16"
CXV-160 to 206 8'-3" 6'-0" 3/8"
CXV-196 to 305 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 3/8"
CXV-310 to 481 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 1/2"
CXV-N465 to N687 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 1/2"
CXV-420 to 610 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 3/8"
CXV-620 to 962 11'-7 3/4" 9'-6" 1/2"
MODEL NUMBER A
MAXIMUM
DEFLECTION
CXV-T645 to T792 23'-9 5/8" 1/2"
CXV-T791 to T944 26'- 5/8" 1/2"
CXV-T1290 to T1584 23'-9 5/8" 1/2"
CXV-T1654 to T1888 26'- 5/8" 1/2"
C
X
V
F56
Part 1: General
A. General: Furnish and install ________ factory assembled
evaporative condenser(s) of induced draft design with vertical
discharge, conforming in all aspects to the specifications and
schedules as shown on the plans.
B. Capacity: The evaporative condenser(s) shall be warranted
by the manufacturer to have condensing capacity of _____
BTUH heat rejection, operating with _____ refrigerant at ___F
condensing temperature and ___F entering wet-bulb
temperature.
C. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a five-year
mechanical drive warranty covering the fans, fan shafts, bear-
ings, sheaves, supports, and fan motors. The manufacturers
standard equipment warranty for the balance of the components
shall be for a period of one year from the date of startup or
eighteen months from the date of shipment, whichever ends first.
D. Factory Testing: The manufacturer shall be capable of
testing the operation of the condenser in the manufacturers own
test facility. Test facilities shall be capable of simulating design
conditions, including but not limited to design wet-bulb, airflow,
refrigerant mass flow rate, refrigerant condensing temperature,
and total heat rejection.
E. Quality Assurance: The manufacturer shall have a
complying with the requirements of ISO-9001:2000 to ensure
are not ISO-9001:2000 certified shall provide an additional one
year warranty to the customer at no additional cost.
Part 2: Products
2.01 Evaporative Condenser Materials and Components
A. General: A. General: All steel panels and structural elements
shall be constructed from heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric)
hot-dip galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective
Or, for CXV-T Models
A. General: All steel panels and structural elements shall be
constructed from heavy-gauge, G-235 (Z700 metric), hot-dip
galvanized steel, with cut edges given a protective coating of
zinc-rich compound. Casing panels shall be constructed of
corrosion resistant, fiberglass, reinforced polyester (FRP).
2.02 Coil Casing Assembly
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a coil casing section
consisting of refrigerant condensing coil, spray water distribution
system, drift eliminators, and air plenum with fan assemblies as
indicated by the manufacturer.
1.The refrigerant condensing coil shall be fabricated of
continuous lengths of all prime surface steel at the
manufacturers own facility, and hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication.
a. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be pneumatically
tested at 375 psig (2687 kPa).
b. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be designed for
low pressure drop with sloping tubes for free drainage
of liquid refrigerant.
c. The refrigerant condensing coil shall be ASME B31.5
compliant and coils shipping into Canada shall be
supplied with a CRN.
2. Water shall be distributed evenly over the coil at a
minimum flow rate of 10 gpm/ft
2
(6.8 lps/m
2
) to ensure
complete wetting of the coil at all times. Large-diameter,
non-clog, 360plastic distribution nozzles shall be
spaced across the coil face area in Schedule 40 PVC
spray branches. Nozzles shall utilize a two-stage
diffusion pattern to provide overlapping, umbrella spray
patterns that create multiple intersection points with
adjacent nozzles.
a. Nozzles and spray branches shall be observable and
accessible for cleaning from the outside of the
evaporative condenser during condenser operation
without the removal of other components.
b. Spray branches and nozzles shall be held in place by
snap-in rubber grommets, allowing quick removal of
individual nozzles or complete branches for cleaning
or flushing.
3. Removable PVC drift eliminators shall be positioned to
prevent moisture from entering the air plenum and
incorporate a minimum of three (3) changes in air
direction.
4. Fan(s) shall be heavy-duty, axial type with aluminum
alloy blades driven by a one-piece, multi-groove
neoprene/polyester belt designed for a minimum of 150%
of the motor nameplate horsepower.
a. Fan(s) and shafts shall be supported by heavy-duty,
self aligning, grease-packed ball bearings with
moisture-proof seals and integral sealer rings,
designed for a minimum L10 life of 40,000 hours
(280,000 hours average life).
b. Fan and motor sheaves shall be fabricated from
corrosion resistant materials.
c. Fan motor(s) shall be totally enclosed air over (TEAO)
type with a 1.15 service factor, suitable for ____ volt,
____ phase, ___ Hz electrical service and shall be
mounted on an easily adjusted, heavy-duty motor
base.
d. The motor shall be furnished with double-sealed,
permanently lubricated bearings and special moisture
protection on windings, shafts and bearings.
e. Air plenum shall provide a minimum of 48 (1220 mm)
clearance under the motor base to provide comfortable
working space for service personnel.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F57
2.03 Pan Assembly
A. The evaporative condenser shall include a pan assembly
consisting of cold water basin with pump assembly, heat
transfer section for spray water cooling with integral drift
eliminators, and wide spaced air inlet louvers.
1. The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge
steel panels and structural members. Basin shall include a
depressed section with drain/cleanout connection. The
basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped
toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning.
- OR -
1. The cold water basin shall be constructed of heavy-gauge
Type 304 stainless steel panels and structural members,
with all welded seams. The welded stainless steel basin
shall be leak tested at the factory. Basin shall include a
depressed section with drain/cleanout connection. The
basin area under the wet deck surface shall be sloped
toward the depressed section to facilitate cleaning.
2. The cold water basin shall include: a drain/clean-out
connection; a steel strainer; a brass make-up valve; over
flow connection; and a water recirculation pump assembly.
a. Cold water basin shall be designed so that the strainer,
makeup valve and float, and pump assembly are easily
accessible without removing any of the unit panels or
other components.
b.Lift-out steel strainer shall be supplied with perforated
openings sized smaller than the water distribution nozzle
orifices and an integral anti-vortexing hood to prevent air
entrainment.
c. Water recirculation pump shall be a close-coupled,
bronze-fitted centrifugal pump equipped with a
mechanical seal, mounted on the basin and piped from
the suction strainer to the water distribution system.
i. The pump shall be installed with adequate drains so
that it may drain freely when the basin is drained.
ii. The pump assembly shall include an integral metering
valve and bleed line to control the bleed rate from the
pump discharge to the overflow connection.
iii.The pump motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled
(TEFC) type suitable for _____ volt, ____ phase,
______ Hz electrical service.
d.On installations requiring a remote sump, the evaporative
condenser shall be modified to accommodate the use of
an independent sump and pump for recirculating water
(by others).
i. The recirculating water pump, steel strainer, make-up
valve, and integral bleed line assemblies shall be
omitted from the evaporative condenser scope of
supply.
ii. The evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a
cold water basin outlet sized and located as indicated
on the drawings for gravity drain to the remote sump.
iii.The water distribution system shall have a design
operating pressure of 1 psig (108.25 kPa) at the
evaporative condenser spray water inlet connection.
3. The heat transfer section shall consist of wet deck surface
with integral drift eliminators for cooling the spray water
leaving the coil to optimize the thermal performance of the
evaporative condenser.
a. The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall
be formed from polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
b.The wet deck surface and integral drift eliminators shall
be impervious to rot, decay, fungus, and biological attack.
4. The air inlet louvers shall be manufactured of wave-formed,
fiberglass-reinforced polyester (FRP) widely spaced to
minimize air resistance and prevent water splash-out.
2.04 Optional Equipment Specifications
A. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with basin heaters to
prevent freezing of the recirculating water when the evaporative
condenser is idle.
1. The basin heaters shall be selected to maintain +40F
(4.4C) basin water temperature at a 0F (-17.8C) ambient
temperature and 10 mph (16.1 km/hr) wind speed.
2. Basin heaters shall be electric immersion type controlled by
a remote thermostat with the sensing bulb located in the
basin water.
3. Basin heaters shall be provided with a low water level
cutout switch to prevent heater operation unless the heater
elements are adequately submerged.
B. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with extended
lubri cation lines with standard grease fittings for lubricating the
fan shaft bearings from the outside base of the condenser.
C. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with dedicated
motors and drives so that each fan can be cycled
independently.
D. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
assembled, field-installed external platform with an access
ladder and handrails complying with OSHA standards and
regulations to provide access to the top of the evaporative
condenser.
1. External platform shall have a 24 (610 mm) wide non-skid
walking surface and 42 (1220 mm) high safety railings.
2. Optional ladder safety cage shall be available to meet
OSHA requirements as necessary.
Or, for CXV-T Models
D. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with factory
assembled, field installed perimeter safety railings and walking
surface above coil air intake to provide access to the top of
the evaporative condenser.
E. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a moveable
ladder with fixed ladder supports to provide access to the fan
drive system and coil assembly.
F. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with an internal
walkway at the access door to facilitate servicing the unit.
G. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with a factory
assembled internal working platform with ladder to provide a
permanent working surface for maintenance personnel
(CXV-193 and larger only).
H. Evaporative condenser shall be provided with the ENERGY-
MISER
Fan System, which provides two-single speed fan

motors, one sized for full horsepower and load, the other sized
for 1/3 the full horsepower and approximately 70% full load for
capacity control and stand-by protection from drive or motor
failure.
I. Evaporative condenser shall be supplied with a right angle
gear drive designed specifically for evaporative condenser
service. All gears shall have a minimum service factor of 2.0
based on design fan horsepower. An oil level fill port and sight
glass shall be located on the gear drive to facilitate routine
inspection and maintenance.
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
F58
Location
deflected off of surrounding walls or enclosures and drawn back to the air inlet(s).
CAUTION:
adjacent buildings.
Piping and Valves
Piping should be adequately sized according to standard refrigeration practice and arranged to allow
flexibility for expansion and contraction between component parts of the system. Suitably sized equalizing
lines must be installed between the condenser and high pressure receiver to prevent gas binding and
refrigerant backup in the condenser. Service valves should be installed so that the component parts may be
easily serviced.
On multiple evaporative condenser installations, evaporative condensers in parallel with shell-and-tube
condensers, or single condensers with multiple coils, refrigerant outlet connections must be trapped into the
main liquid refrigerant header. The height of the trapped liquid legs must be sufficient to balance the effect of
the unequal coil pressures without backing up liquid refrigerant into the condensing coil. This type of liquid
line piping permits independent operation of any one of the parallel circuits without manually closing inlet
and outlet valves.
Although equalizing lines can be used to balance water levels between multi-cell evaporative condensers,
the spray water for each cell must be treated separately, and a separate make-up must be provided for each
cell. Note that a common remote sump for multi-cell installations can simplify make-up and water treatment
see page J16 for details. See page F60 or the appropriate Operating and Maintenance Instruction Manual
for more information on water treatment
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F59
Capacity Control
WARNING:
Fan Cycling

Fan System or the independent fan motor option are

available; two-speed motors are available for all products). These options provide substantial energy savings
when compared to simple fan cycling.
WARNING:
Note: Spray water pump cycling should not be used for capacity control. This method of control
often results in short cycling of the pump motor as capacity changes substantially with pump
cycling. In addition, alternate wetting and drying of the coil promotes scaling of the heat
exchanger coil surface.
Capacity Control Dampers (Centrifugal Fans Models Only)
On centrifugal fan models, modulating capacity control dampers are available to provide close control of head
pressure. See page F19 or contact your local BAC Representative for more details.
interrupt power to the fan motor and/or provide an alarm to the operator in the event of excessive vibration.
BAC offers both electronic and mechanical vibration cutout switches on all evaporative condenser models.
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
F60
Water Treatment
Note: Unless a common remote sump is utilized, each cell of a multi-cell installation must be treated
as a separate entity, even if the cold water basins are flumed together or equalized.
Manual, available at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
For specific recommendations on water treatment, contact a competent water treatment
supplier.
Sound Levels
Sound rating data is available for all BAC Evaporative Condensers. When calculating the sound levels
generated by a unit, the designer must take into account the effects of the geometry of the tower as well as
the distance and direction from the unit to noise-sensitive areas. Low-sound fans and intake and discharge
sound attenuation can be supplied on certain models to provide reduced sound characteristics (see the
Custom Features and Options section of the appropriate product line for details). The ENERGY-MISER
Fan System, two-speed motors, or variable frequency drives can also be used to reduce sound during
periods of non-peak thermal loads. For more information on sound and how it relates to evaporative cooling
equipment, see page J20. For detailed low sound selections, please consult your local BAC Representative.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F61
When dry operation is planned for low ambient conditions, centrifugal fan units should be supplied with
oversized fan motors to prevent motor overload when the spray water is not operating. Dry operation with
standard fan motors is acceptable for axial fan units. For remote sump applications, the spray water pump
must be selected for the required flow at a total head which includes the vertical lift, pipe friction (in supply
and suction lines) plus the required pressure at the inlet header of the water distribution system (2.0 psi for
CXV models; 1.0 psi for Series V models). A valve should always be installed in the discharge line from the
pump to permit adjusting flow to the unit requirement. Inlet water pressure should be measured by a pressure
gauge installed in the water supply riser at the spray water inlet, and adjusted to the specified inlet pressure.
See page J17 for more information.
ductwork must be ordered with solid-bottom panels. Generally, intake ducts are used only on smaller
WARNING:
The discharge opening must be positioned to prevent the introduction of discharge air into the fresh air
intakes serving the unit or the ventilation systems of adjacent buildings.
Safety
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
F62
Code Requirement
Standard coils are ASME B31.5 compliant and are provided with a Canadian Registration Number (CRN)
when required. State or local codes, or certain applications may require the use of pressure vessels
designed, fabricated, tested and U stamped in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, Division I. In such cases, the optional ASME U Stamp coil must be provided.
Purging
Air and other non-condensable gases collect in refrigeration systems from several sources: poor evacuation
prior to charging or after repairs; a leak into the system if pressures are below atmospheric; and chemical
breakdown of oil and/or refrigerant. If permitted to accumulate, non-condensables in the system cause high
condensing pressures and, therefore, increased power input to the compressors. Purging can be
accomplished during shut down, from the high point of the system, or during operation, from the top of the
condensing coil outlet and high pressure receiver.
Refer to the BAC Evaporative Condenser Engineering Manual for more detailed recommendations on piping
and purging.
Refrigerant Liquid Subcooling
The pressure at the expansion device feeding the evaporator(s) can be substantially lower than the receiver
pressure due to liquid line pressure losses. If the liquid line is long or the evaporator is above the receiver,
which further reduces the pressure at the expansion device, significant flashing can occur in the liquid line.
To avoid liquid line flashing where the above conditions exist, it is necessary to subcool the liquid refrigerant
after it leaves the receiver. The minimum amount of subcooling required is the temperature difference
between the condensing temperature and the saturation temperature corresponding to the pressure at the
expansion device. To determine the degree of subcooling required, it is necessary to calculate the liquid line
pressure drop including valves, ells, tees, strainers, etc., and add to it the pressure drop equivalent to the
static head loss between the receiver and the expansion device at the evaporator, if the evaporator is locat-
ed above the receiver.
Some compressor manufacturers publish their compressor ratings based on a fixed amount of subcooling at
the expansion device. Subcooled liquid at the expansion device of the evaporator does increase system
capacity since it increases the refrigeration effect per pound of refrigerant circulated. But the increase is
relatively small and seldom justifies the cost of the subcooling device and piping for this reason alone.
However, where compressor ratings based on subcooled liquid are used, the specified amount of subcooling
must be added to that required for liquid line pressure drop and static head loss.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
i
v
e

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
s
F63
One method commonly used for supplying subcooled
liquid for halocarbon systems is to provide a
subcooling coil section in the evaporative condenser,
located below the condensing coil (see Figure 1).
Note: This option is available on Series V
Evaporative Condensers Only. Depending upon the
design wet-bulb temperature, condensing temperature,
and subcooling coil surface, these sections will
normally furnish 10F to 15F (5.6C to 8.3C) of liquid
cooling. However, to be effective, the subcooling coil
must be piped between the receiver and evaporator as
shown in Figure 1.
Note: Increasing the evaporative condenser size over the capacity required for the system will not
produce liquid subcooling. The increased condenser capacity will result only in lower operating
condensing temperatures. The same result will occur if the condensing coil is piped directly to the
subcooling coil.
Low temperature, multistage ammonia (R-717) refrigeration systems often use liquid subcooling between
stages for more economical operation. However, subcooling coils in an evaporative condenser are seldom,
if ever, used with an ammonia refrigeration system for several reasons:
1. Design condensing temperatures are generally lower with ammonia, thus limiting the amount of
subcooling that can be obtained.
2. The density of ammonia liquid is approximately 37 pounds per cubic foot, less than half that of the
normally used halocarbons, and static head losses are proportionately less.
3. The expansion devices and system designs normally used for ammonia systems are less sensitive to
small amounts of flash gas.
4. The high latent heat of ammonia (approximately 480 Btu/lb versus 70 Btu/lb for R-22) results in
comparatively small amounts of flash gas with a liquid line properly sized for low pressure drop.
Warranties
these products.
Figure 1
L
a
y
o
u
t

G
u
i
d
e
l
i
n
e
s
F64
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
ICE CHILLER

G1
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G4
Proven Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G8
Construction Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G12
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G14
Modular Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G15
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G20
Engineering Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G21
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G2
Cooling with ice thermal storage can be the most cost-effective, reliable system approach to cooling offices,
schools, hospitals, malls and other buildings, and provides a steady source of low temperature fluids for
process cooling applications. These systems are environmentally friendly because they help lower energy
consumption and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. With thousands of successful installations worldwide,
BAC is the global leader in the application of ice thermal storage.
Ice Thermal Storage
Lowest first cost
Reduced energy cost
Variable capacity
Improved system reliability
Reduced maintenance
Environmentally friendly
Proven technology
ICE CHILLER

T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G3
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G4
Benefits
Lowest First Cost
Systems with ice thermal storage can be installed at the same or lower first cost than traditional sys-
tems when designed with the colder supply water available from ice. The savings that result from the
use of smaller chillers and cooling towers, reduced pump and pipe sizes and less connected
horsepower, offset the cost of the ice thermal storage equipment. Additional savings can be found
when using lower temperature air distribution, which allows reduced ductwork and fan sizes.
Smaller Chillers and Heat Rejection Equipment: By designing
the system around 24-hour per day chiller operation, the size of
the chillers and cooling towers or air-cooled condensers required
for an ice system is significantly reduced, when compared to
conventional chillers and heat rejection equipment sized for the
instantaneous peak load. A typical thermal storage design
includes chillers that provide 50 to 60% of the peak cooling load.
The balance of the cooling requirement is provided from the ice
storage system.
Reduced Pump and Pipe Sizes: Pump and pipe sizes are also
reduced in a properly designed ice storage system. Substantial
savings in the chilled water distribution loop are realized when the
system design incorporates reduced flow rates that result from
using a larger temperature range in the water loop. Use of a larger
temperature range, for example 18F (10C) instead of the more
traditional 10F (5.5C) temperature range results in a reduction of
pipe size. Condenser water pipe sizes are reduced due to lower
flow requirements for the smaller chiller. Pump savings due to
reduced chilled water and condenser water flow rates are also
realized.
Reduced Cooling Coil and Supply Air Fan Sizes: Cooling coils
sized using lower supply water temperatures and traditional supply
air temperatures are generally smaller due to fewer rows.
The reduction in rows leads to lower supply fan HP (kW).
Reduced Air Handling Equipment: When the air distribution is designed with lower supply air
temperatures, the size of the ductwork, fans and fan motors are reduced.
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G5
Reduced Electrical Distribution: Smaller chillers, heat rejection equipment and pumps
require less horsepower than a traditional system, which results in smaller transformers,
switchgear, wire sizes and starter panels.
Reduced Generator Size: If a facility has a generator for daily or back-up power, the size of the
generator will be significantly reduced when the peak electrical load of the facility is reduced using
ice storage.
Reduced Energy Cost
An ice thermal storage system reduces peak demand, shifts energy usage to non-peak hours, saves
energy, and reduces energy costs.
Reduces Peak Demand and Shifts Energy Usage: With less connected horsepower, ice storage
can lower peak electrical demand for the HVAC or process cooling system by 50% or more. Since
most electrical rates include demand charges during peak demand times and/or higher day versus
night kWh charges, savings on electrical bills can be substantial. Peak electrical demand rates of
$15 to $18 per kW are not uncommon. In areas with real time pricing, where the electric rate
varies hour by hour based on the market price of electricity, day to night kWh costs can vary by
500 to 1000%. The use of electricity at night versus peak daytime hours can lead to large savings
on energy bills.
Saves Energy: In addition, total annual kilowatt-hours used are less when the system is designed
taking advantage of the low supply water temperature available from the ice storage system.
Lower kWh consumption is possible for five reasons:
1. Although making ice requires more energy than producing chilled water, the efficiency
penalty is not as large since the ice is made at night when condensing temperatures are
lower, increasing the efficiency of the chiller.
2. Ice systems typically operate the chiller at full load. Chillers are inefficient when run with
low loads during the spring and fall. A typical chiller will operate at less than 30% capacity
for half the year.
3. Reduced pumping horsepower.
4. Reduced fan horsepower due to lower air pressure drop across the cooling coil. A higher
chilled water temperature differential across the cooling coil usually results in fewer rows
and therefore a lower pressure drop.
5. The ability to recover waste heat from the chiller for heating water both night and day.
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G6
Benefits
Additional kWh savings are possible if the air distribution is
designed to take advantage of the low temperatures
available from the ice storage system. As the electric
industry continues to deregulate, and time-of-use rates, real
time pricing schedules and negotiated power prices become
standard, ice storage can provide even greater future
savings in operating costs.
Variable Capacity
The ice thermal storage system will maintain a constant supply
temperature regardless of the variations in instantaneous
cooling demand. The flow and entering water temperature set
the instantaneous capacity.
Improved System Reliability
Ice storage systems provide the reliability necessary to ensure
air-conditioning is available. With traditional systems, installing multiple chillers provides redundancy. In
the event of a mechanical failure of one chiller, the second chiller provides limited cooling capacity. The
maximum available cooling for the traditional system would only be 50% on a design day.
Most ice storage systems utilize two chillers in addition to the
ice storage equipment. Two chillers are designed to provide
approximately 60% of the required cooling on a design day
while the ice storage provides the remaining 40% of the
cooling capacity. In the event only one chiller is available to
provide cooling during the day, up to 70% of the cooling
capacity is available. The one operable chiller provides 30%
of the cooling requirement while the ice provides up to 40%.
Based on typical HVAC load profiles and ASHRAE weather
data, 70% of the cooling capacity would meet the total daily
cooling requirements 85% of the time.
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G7
Reduced Maintenance
The ice thermal storage coils have no moving parts so very little maintenance is required. Because the
chillers, pumps and heat rejection equipment are smaller, ice storage systems will have less
maintenance than a traditional system. The ice thermal storage system also allows a chiller to undergo
routine maintenance during the day when the ice storage can handle the system load.
Environmentally Friendly
Reducing energy consumption and using electricity at night will reduce global warming. Electricity
generated at night generally has a lower heat rate (lower fuel use per power output), and therefore
lower carbon dioxide and greenhouse gas emissions resulting in less global warming. The California
Energy Commission concluded that the use of electricity at night created a 31% reduction in air
emissions over the use of electricity during the day.
With smaller chillers, an ice thermal storage system reduces the amount of refrigerant in a system. Most
refrigerants in use today are slated to be banned in the future under the Montreal Protocol because they
contribute to global warming. Using smaller amounts of refrigerant helps to save the ozone and reduce
global warming.
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G8
Proven Technology
BAC has successfully applied ice thermal storage technology to thousands of installations worldwide.
BAC has the application and system experience to assist you in the design, installation and operation
of your ice storage system. BAC has supplied ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Products for projects

that range in size from 90 to 125,000 ton-hours (0.3 to 441.3 MWh). Installations include office
buildings, hospitals, manufacturing processes, schools, universities, sports arenas, produce storage
facilities, hotels and district cooling applications.
The ICE CHILLER
Product line includes a variety of factory-assembled units. For large applications,

where space is limited or factory-assembled units are not cost effective, ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Coils are available for installation in field-erected tanks.
The BAC product offering provides system design flexibility. Ice can be built using various refrigerants
or glycols on steel coils and is used to provide either chilled water or glycol to the cooling system. This
flexibility, combined with a broad range of application experiences, allows BAC to provide a
cost-effective product to meet your specific requirements.
Merchandise Mart
In 1986 the Merchandise Mart in Chicago, Illinois installed
26,400 ton-hours (93.2 MWh) of ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Coils in a retrofit of the buildings air-conditioning
system. The Merchandise Mart was built in 1930. The
increased air-conditioning load on the building from
computers, other electrical equipment and increased
people density made the old system too small. Ice thermal
storage with the low temperature water available allowed
the retrofit of the air-conditioning system to go ahead
without replacing piping and ductwork. Increasing the temperature ranges on the piping and air
distribution system allowed the Merchandise Mart to install an ice thermal storage system at a lower
first cost than a conventional system.
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G9
Friendship Annex 3 Office Building
The HVAC renovation of Friendship Annex (FANX) 2 and 3 in Baltimore, MD received the 1994
Outstanding Engineering Achievement of the Year Award from the Engineering Society of Baltimore.
Ice with low temperature air distribution cools these buildings renovated in 1994. To meet federal
guidelines, a comprehensive study of five alternate systems was made using life cycle costing. The
analysis showed ice storage with low temperature chilled water and low temperature air to be the most
economical system. A total of 15,230 ton hours (53.8 MWh) of ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units

were installed for the two buildings.
Johns Hopkins Applied Physics Lab
In 1986, the Johns Hopkins University Applied Physics Lab
in Laurel, MD installed 5,600 ton hours (19.8 MWh) of
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Coils to cool the new

Steven Mueller Building which houses offices, labs and
clean rooms. In 1988 another 2800 ton hours (9.9 MWh) of
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Coils were added to cool

adjacent office and lab buildings. The ice thermal storage
allows the Applied Physics Lab to save over $150,000 per
year on their electric bill.
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G10
Proven Technology
Low Temperature Air
Omni Interlocken Resort
Hotel
The Omni Interlocken Resort Hotel just
outside of Denver, CO was designed
with a low temperature air and water
system using ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Units. The challenge was to
design a high-quality HVAC system
sensitive to building aesthetics, which
would provide good guest comfort, low
operating/maintenance costs and could
be constructed within a tight
construction budget. The first
conceptual design was a four-pipe
fan-coil system for the hotel rooms with air-cooled chillers and rooftop air-handler units for the public
spaces. The final design was a low temperature air system with Modular ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Units. This low temperature air system was $500,000 less than the original conceptual
design. In addition the hotels energy bills are $100,000 less than with a conventional system.
Villa Julie College
Modular ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units were part of an

expansion that doubled the size of this private college in
Baltimore, MD. The new facilities added 135,700 ft
2
(12,620 m
2
)
of space to the campus and include a 400-seat auditorium and
theater, gymnasium with showers and locker rooms, student
center, video center, academic and computer classrooms, kitchen
and administrative offices. The architect designed the new
buildings with the intention that the structure be part of the visual
space. This reduced the space allotted for the mechanical equipment. The engineer designed a low
temperature air system that delivers 45F (7C) air temperature to VAV series fan powered boxes. The
use of smaller piping and ductwork made it possible to avoid architectural changes that would affect
the aesthetics of the design.
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G11
Food Processing
Zippys Restaurant Central Facility
At Zippys in Honolulu, HI, food is cooked in a central
kitchen where it is cooled and packaged for use in local
Zippys restaurants. The FDA requires that the food in the
cooking vessels be cooled to 45F (7C) in less than one
hour to prevent contamination. The cooking vessels in the
kitchen need varying amounts of cooling depending on the
dish that is being prepared, and when it finishes its cooking
cycle. Because of the varying cooling load from day to day
and hour to hour and the need for a quick cool down period,
standard chillers are not a good match for this application. Ice thermal storage with its variable capacity
and low supply temperature is an excellent match for this process cooling application.
Power Generation
Wolverine Power
Wolverine Power, located in central Michigan, is a
generation and transmission electric cooperative. For a new
generating plant with (2) 22-megawatt Rolls Royce turbines,
Wolverine Power elected to use ice storage for their turbine
inlet air cooling. They installed 7,610 ton hours (26.9 MW) of
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units to gererate 40F

(4.4C) chilled water, which provides 55F (13C) inlet air.
The generating plants ice storage capacity can be used over a 16-hour period as partial storage or over
a 4-hour period as full storage, depending on the value of power on the open market. During peak
summer time, the increased power capacity is worth up to $3,500 per hour in electricity sales.
Emergency Cooling
Verizon
Verizon, the provider of telephone service to a large portion
of the east coast, uses an ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage
Unit to provide back-up cooling to one of their computer
centers in Silver Spring, MD. If the chiller that provides
cooling goes down for any reason, power outage or alarm,
the system immediately switches over to the ice thermal
storage system for cooling. The pump on the ice thermal
storage system is on the continuous power back up with the
computers. There is enough ice to provide cooling for 30 minutes. This gives Verizon enough time to
clear the alarm or get the back-up generator running and the chiller back on line.
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G13
Covers
Watertight
G-235 (Z700 Metric) Hot-dip
Insulated with 2 expanded
polystyrene insulation
Coil Support Beams
Prevent contact between coil and
primary liner
Glycol Connections
Victaulic connections
Galvanized Steel Coil
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication
(HDGAF)
Rated for 150 psig operating pressure
Primary Liner
Single piece
48-hour integrity test before shipment
Extruded Polystyrene
Insulation
1.5 thick, installed between primary and
secondary liners
Contributes to total insulating value of R-18
Secondary Liner/Vapor
Barrier
Prevents moisture from penetrating through
the insulation
Wall Panel
Heavy-gauge galvanized steel with double
brake flanges
3 of expanded polystyrene insulation
Contributes to total insulating value of R-18
Sight Tube
Visual indicator of the amount of ice
remaining in unit
Operating Control
(Not Shown)
High-level float switch and low water cutout
mounted on the outside of the tank
Can be provided for one tank (standard) or
all tanks (optional)
Ice Inventory Sensor
(Optional)
Differential pressure transmitter provides an
electrical 4-20 mA output signal which is
proportional to the amount of ice in
inventory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G14
at time of publication, which should be reconfirmed at the time of purchase. Up-to-date engineering data
and more can be found at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Engineering Data
Contact your local BAC Sales
Representative for selection
assistance.
PERCENT ICE BUILD
OVER FLOW
100 %
75 %
50 %
25 %
0 %
Notes:
1. Unit should be continuously supported on a flat level surface.
2. All connections are grooved for mechanical coupling.
MODEL
NUMBER OPERATING SHIPPING TANK WATER COIL GLYCOL L W
TSU-237M 39,100 9,750 2,990 260 10' 7-5/8" 7' 10-3/8" 2"
TSU-476M 73,900 16,750 5,840 495 19' 10-1/4" 7' 10-3/8" 3"
TSU-594M 93,100 20,200 7,460 610 19' 10-1/4" 9' 9-1/4" 3"
TSU-761M 113,800 24,000 9,150 790 19' 10-1/4" 11' 9-3/4" 3"
CONNECTION
SIZE
WEIGHTS (lbs) DIMENSIONS VOLUMES (lbs)
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G15
Custom Coils
BAC will manufacture custom ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Coils to meet project specific

requirements. BAC has done extensive research and testing on the build and melt characteristics of ice
storage. This research and testing has resulted in selection capabilities unmatched by any other
company in the industry.
BAC can predict the temperatures required on an hour by hour basis for building ice on custom coils,
over a variety of conditions and build times. The physical space available, load profile, discharge
temperatures, chiller capacity and operating sequences can be evaluated to find the design that best
meets the application.
The ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Coils are constructed of continuous 1.05" O.D. all prime surface
serpentine steel tubing, with no intermediate butt welds. The coils are assembled in a structural steel
frame designed to support the weight of the coil stack with a full ice build. After fabrication the coils are
tested for leaks using 375 psig air pressure under water, then hot-dip galvanized for corrosion
protection.
For glycol applications the coils are configured to provide countercurrent glycol flow in adjacent circuits
for maximum storage capacity.
Individual coils are factory-assembled into modules of two (2) coils. Glycol manifolds are coated with
zinc-rich, cold galvanizing finish at the factory. Necessary support steel and lifting lugs are provided on
the modules to allow for lifting into and final positioning within the storage tank.
Note: Engineering data continued on next page.
Installation of coil module at Oriole Park at Camden Yards, Baltimore, MD
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G16
The modular ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit can operate in any of five distinct operating modes.
These modes of operation provide the flexibility required by building operators to meet their daily HVAC
cooling requirements.
Ice Build
In this operating mode, ice is built by circulating a 25% solution (by weight) of inhibited ethylene/
propylene glycol through the coils contained in the ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit. Figure 1

illustrates typical chiller supply temperatures for 8, 10 and 12 hour build cycles. For a typical 10hour
build time, the supply glycol temperature is never lower than 22F (-5.6C). As the graph illustrates, for
build times exceeding 10 hours, the minimum glycol temperature is greater than 22F (-5.6C). For
build times less than 10 hours, the minimum glycol temperature will be lower than 22F (-5.6C) at the
end of the build cycle. This performance is based on a chiller flow rate associated with a 5F (-15C)
range. When a larger temperature range is the basis of the chiller selection, the chiller supply
temperatures will be lower than shown in Figure 1.
Engineering Data:
Modes of Operation
Figure 1
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G17
Ice Build with Cooling
When cooling loads exist during the ice build period, some of the cold glycol used to build ice is divert-
ed to the cooling load to provide the required cooling. The amount of glycol diverted is determined by
the building loop set point temperature. BAC recommends that this mode of operation be applied on
systems using primary/secondary pumping. This reduces the possibility of damaging the cooling coil or
heat exchanger by pumping cold glycol, lower than 32F (0C), to this equipment.
Cooling Ice Only
In this operating mode the chiller is off. The warm return glycol solution is cooled to the desired set
point temperature by melting ice stored in the modular ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit.

Cooling Chiller Only
In this operating mode the chiller supplies all the building cooling requirements. Glycol flow is diverted
around the thermal storage equipment to allow the cold supply glycol to flow directly to the cooling
load. Temperature set points are maintained by the chiller.
Cooling Ice with Chiller
In this operating mode, cooling is provided by the combined operation of the chiller and thermal storage
equipment. The glycol chiller precools the warm return glycol. The partially cooled glycol solution then
passes through the ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit where it is cooled by the ice to the design

temperature.
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G18
Engineering Data:
System Schematics
Two basic flow schematics are applied to select
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units. Figure 2

illustrates a single piping loop with the chiller
installed upstream of the thermal storage
equipment. This design allows the thermal
storage system to operate in four of the five
possible operating modes. They are Ice Build,
Cooling-Ice Only, Cooling-Chiller Only and
CoolingIce with Chiller.
For this figure 2 the following control logic is applied:
Valve V-1 modulates in response to temperature sensor, TS-1. Valve V-2 could be positioned to either
maintain a constant flow, less than P-1, or modulate in response to the return glycol temperature from
the cooling load.
When the building loop contains chilled water, a heat exchanger must be installed to separate the
glycol loop from the buildings chilled water loop. On applications where an existing water chiller is
available, it can be installed in the chilled water loop to reduce the load on the thermal storage system.
This design should not be used when there is a requirement to build ice and provide cooling.
This would require the cold return glycol from the thermal storage equipment be pumped to the cooling
load or heat exchanger. Since the glycol temperature is below 32F (0C), the cooling coil or heat
exchanger is subject to freezing. The flow schematic illustrated in Figure 3 details a primary/
secondary pumping loop with the chiller located upstream of the thermal storage equipment. This
design allows the system to operate in all five operating modes.
Figure 2
MODE CHILLER P-1 V-1 V-2
Ice Build On On A-B A-B
Cooling Ice Only Off On Modulate A-C
Cooling Chiller Only On On A-C A-C
Cooling Ice With Chiller On On Modulate A-C
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G19
For this figure 3 the following control logic is applied:
Valve V-1 and Valve V-2 modulate, depending on the operating mode, in response to temperature
sensor, TS-1. The benefit provided by the primary/secondary pumping loop is that the system can build
ice and provide cooling without fear of freezing a cooling coil or heat exchanger. This system design
also allows for different flow rates in each of the pumping loops. When the flow rates in the pumping
loops are different, the glycol flow rate in the primary loop should be greater than or equal to the glycol
flow rate in the secondary loop. As in the single loop schematic, a heat exchanger and a base water
chiller can be added to the system schematic.
Variations to these schematics are possible but these are the most common for thermal storage
systems. One variation positions the chiller downstream of the thermal storage equipment. By
positioning the chiller downstream of the ice, the chiller is used to maintain the required supply
temperature. In Figures 2 and 3, the chiller is installed upstream of the ice. This offers two significant
advantages compared to system designs that locate the chiller downstream of the ice. First, the chiller
operates at higher glycol temperatures to precool the return glycol. This enables the chiller to operate at
a higher capacity which reduces the amount of ice required. Second, since the chiller is operating at
higher evaporator temperatures, the efficiency (kw/TR) of the chiller is improved.
MODE CHILLER P-1 P-2 V-1
Ice Build On On Off A-B
Ice Build With Cooling On On On A-B
Cooling Ice Only Off On On Modulate
Cooling Chiller Only On On On A-C
Cooling Ice With Chiller On On On Modulate
Figure 3
I
C
E

C
H
I
L
L
E
R
G20
The ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit(s) shall be Baltimore

Aircoil Model TSU-______. Each unit shall have a latent ton-hour
storage capacity of _______ ton-hours to be generated in
____ hours when supplied with _______ US gpm (lps) of a 25%
(by weight) solution of industrially inhibited ethylene/propylene
glycol. The minimum glycol temperature required during the ice
build operating mode shall be _______ F(C). Rated system
performance shall be provided in the format recommended by
the Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Guideline T.
The thermal storage units shall be modular in design. Unit
design shall allow units of different sizes to be installed in order
to optimize unit selection and minimize space requirements.
Tanks sizes can be mixed due to internal piping arrangements
that create a balanced flow due to uniform pressure drop through
the coil circuits.
The tank shall be constructed of heavy-gauge galvanized steel
panels and include double brake flanges for structural strength.
The tank walls shall be supplied with a minimum of 4-1/2" of
insulation that provides a total insulating value of R-18. The tank
design shall utilize multiple liners. The primary liner, which forms
the interior of the unit, shall be of single piece construction and
be suitable for low temperature applications. The secondary
liner/vapor barrier shall be separated from the primary liner by
1-1/2" of extruded polystyrene insulation. The tank bottom shall
be insulated with 2" of expanded polystyrene insulation and 1" of
extruded polystyrene insulation.
The ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit shall be provided with

watertight, sectional covers constructed of hot-dip galvanized
steel. The covers shall be insulated with a minimum of 2" of
expanded polystyrene insulation.
Contained within the tank shall be a steel heat exchanger that is
constructed of 1.05" O.D., all prime surface serpentine steel
tubing encased in a steel framework. The coil, which is hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication, shall be pneumatically tested at 190
psig and rated for 150 psig operating pressure. The coil circuits
are configured to provide maximum storage capacity. The coil
connections on the unit are galvanized steel and are grooved for
mechanical coupling.
Each ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit shall be provided with

a sight tube. The sight tube, which shall be fabricated from clear
plastic pipe, shall display the tank water level and corresponding
ice inventory.
Operating controls, consisting of two float switches, shall be
mounted on the outside of the tank. The high level float switch
terminates the build cycle when the tank water level reaches the
100% ice build level. The high level switch shall also prevent
re-initiation of the build cycle until approximately 15% of the ice
has been discharged. The second float switch is a low water
cutout. The cutout requires that the water level in the ICE
CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit be at or above the 0% ice build

level before the ice build cycle can begin. Operating control
quantities vary based on project requirements. An optional
differential pressure transmitter shall be available to supply an
electrical output signal proportional to the amount of ice in
inventory.
The heat transfer fluid shall be an industrially inhibited, 25% by
weight, ethylene/propylene glycol solution specifically designed
for HVAC applications. The 25% (by weight) solution is designed
to provide freeze/burst and corrosion protection as well as
efficient heat transfer in water based, closed loop systems.
Corrosion inhibitors shall be provided to keep pipes free of
corrosion without fouling. DOWTHERM
SR-1 and
UCARTHERM
are acceptable fluids.

Overall unit dimensions shall not exceed approximately _____ ft
(m) by ____ ft (m) with an overall height not exceeding ____ ft
(m). The operating weight shall not exceed _______ lbs (kg).
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G21
ICE CHILLER

Installation
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units are designed to be installed

outdoors. The units must be installed on a continuous flat level surface.
The pitch of the slab must not exceed 1/8" over a 10foot span. Figure
1 details ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit layout guidelines. The

units should be positioned so there is sufficient clearance between units
and adjacent walls to allow easy access. When multiple units are
installed, a minimum of 18" is recommended side-to-side and 3'-0"
end-to-end for access to the operating controls.
When installed indoors, the access and slab requirements described
above also apply. The units should be placed close to a floor drain in
the event they need to be drained. The minimum height requirement
above the tank for proper pipe installation is 3 feet. Figure 2 illustrates
the recommended overhead clearance for ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Units.
For large tonhour applications, BAC will provide ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Coils for installation in

field fabricated concrete tanks. When coils are required, BACs manufacturing capabilities allow coils to be
manufactured in the size and configuration necessary to meet specific site and performance requirements.
The concrete tank design is to be completed by a qualified structural engineer. Figure 3 illustrates the ICE
CHILLER
Thermal Storage Coil layout guidelines. For large projects that require ICE CHILLER
Coils,
contact your local BAC Representative for selection and dimensional information.
Figure 1
Figure 3 Figure 2
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
G22
Unit Piping
Piping to the ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit should follow established piping guidelines. The coil
connections on the unit are galvanized steel and are grooved for mechanical coupling.
For single tank applications, each pair of manifolded
coil connections should include a shut off valve so
the unit can be isolated from the system. Figure 4
illustrates the valve arrangement for a single unit. It is
recommended that the piping include a bypass circuit
to allow operation of the system without the ICE
CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit in the piping loop.

This bypass can be incorporated into the piping
design by installing a three way/modulating valve.
This valve can also be used to control the leaving
glycol temperature from the thermal storage unit.
Temperature and pressure taps should be installed to
allow for easier flow balancing and system
troubleshooting. A relief valve, set at a maximum of 150 psi, must be installed between the shut off
valves and the coil connections to protect the coils from excessive pressures due to hydraulic
expansion. The relief valve should be vented to a portion of the system which can accommodate
expansion.
CAUTION:
The system must include an expansion tank to accommodate changes in fluid volume.
Adequately sized air vents must be installed at the high points in the piping loop to remove
trapped air from the system.
Figure 5 illustrates reverse return piping for multiple units installed in parallel. The use of reverse return
piping is recommended to ensure balanced flow to
each unit. Shut off valves at each unit can be used
as balancing valves.
When large quantities of ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Units are installed, the system should be
divided into groups of units. Then, balancing of each
unit can be eliminated and a common balancing
valve for each group of units installed. Shut off valves
for isolating individual units should be installed but
not used for balancing glycol flow to the unit.
Figure 4
Figure 5
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G23
Controls
To ensure efficient operation of the ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units, each system is provided with

factory installed Operating Controls. A brief description of the controls follow.
Once the ice build cycle has been initiated, the glycol chiller should run at full capacity without cycling or
unloading until the ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units are fully charged. When the units are fully
charged, the chiller should be turned off and not allowed to re-start until cooling is required. The ice build
cycle is terminated by the Operating Control Assembly. This assembly includes a low water cutout and a
shut-off switch. The low water cutout prevents the ice build mode from starting if there is insufficient water in
the tank. The shutoff switch will terminate the build cycle when the units are fully charged and will prevent
the next ice build mode from starting until 15% of the ice has melted.
Note: Multiple Operating Control Assemblies must be wired in series so that a full build signal from
any one tank will terminate the ice build cyle.
An inventory control that provides a 4 - 20 mA signal is available. This control should be used for
determining the amount of ice in inventory but not to terminate the ice build cycle. Complete operating
control details are provided in the Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Glycol
ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Units typically use a 25% (by weight) solution of industrially inhibited
ethylene/propylene glycol for both corrosion protection and freeze protection. Industrial grade inhibited glycol
is specifically designed to prevent corrosion in HVAC and heat transfer equipment. Inhibitors are used to
prevent the ethylene glycol from becoming acidic and to protect the metal components in the thermal
storage system. The systems lowest operating temperature should be 5F to 7F (2.8C to 3.9C) above the
glycol freeze point. The freeze point for a system with 25% by weight ethylene glycol is 13F (10.6C); the
freeze point for a system with 25% by weight propylene glycol is 15F (9.4C).
Acceptable industrial grade inhibited glycol solutions are DOWTHERM
SR1, DOWFROST
HD and
UCARTHERM
. Use of other brands of glycol in ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Products should be

approved by BAC.
DOWTHERM
SR-1, DOWFROST
and UCARTHERM
are registered trademarks of The Dow Chemical Company or its

subsidaries.
CAUTION:
Uninhibited glycol and automotive antifreeze solutions are NOT to be used on thermal storage
applications.
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
G24
Water Treatment
In the near freezing temperatures of the ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit, scale and corrosion are

naturally minimized. Therefore, water treatment for these two conditions may not be required or may require
minimal attention unless the water is corrosive in nature. To control biological growth, a biocide may be
needed to prevent the spread of iron bacteria or other organisms. For specific recommendations, consult a
reputable local water treatment company and follow the guidelines below:
Note:
1. A water pH of 8.3 or higher will require periodic passivation of the galvanized steel to prevent
white rust, the accumulation of white, waxy, nonprotective zinc corrosion products on
galvanized steel surfaces.
If water treatment is implemented to the system, to assure full capacity of the ICE CHILLER
Thermal
Storage Unit, the water treatment should not alter the freeze point of water.
Winterization
CAUTION:
Precautions must be taken to protect the unit and associated piping from freezing conditions. Heat
tracing and insulation should be installed on all piping connected to the unit. The sight tube,
operating controls and optional inventory sensor must be protected if the units are installed
outdoors and exposed to sub-freezing ambient conditions.
For this purpose, BAC can provide an optional heated enclosure, complete with a 100 W heater.
Otherwise, the sight tube, operating controls and optional inventory sensor must be heat traced and
insulated. It is not necessary to drain the unit during cold weather.
PROPERTY OF WATER RANGE
pH 7.0 to 9.0
1
Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 500 ppm
Alkalinity as CaCO3 500 ppm maximum
Total Dissolved Solids 625 ppm maximum
Maximum Conductivity 1000 micromhos/cm @ 32F
Chlorides 125 ppm maximum as Cl
Sulfates 125 ppm maximum
T
h
e
r
m
a
l

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

P
r
o
d
u
c
t
s
G25
Pressure Drop
The ICE CHILLER
Thermal Storage Unit is designed for low pressure drop. Figure 6 shows the pressure
drop associated with each unit for a 25% solution of industrially inhibited ethylene glycol. Data for flow rates
not shown should not be extrapolated from the performance curve. Pressure drops for flow rates not
presented in this table and for alternative fluids, are available by contacting the local BAC Representative.
Warranties
these products.
Figure 6
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
s
RS
Remote Sump Tanks
H1
Product Detail
Product Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H2
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H3
Custom Features and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H4
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H4
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H5
Structural Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H6
Engineering Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H7
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
s
H2
RS Remote Sump Tanks
Single Tank Capacity:
94 1,390 US Gallons (Maximum Storage Volume)
Remote sump tanks can be added to cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower, or evaporative condenser
systems. Remote sumps are often installed indoors in a heated space to prevent freezing of the recirculating
water during cold weather operation. Because the recirculating water is quickly drained from the unit when the
pump is shut off, the indoor remote sump tank eliminates the need for other methods of freeze protection such
as cold water basin heaters, hot water coils, or steam coils. Remote sump tanks are also used to simplify water
treatment for multiple cell installations by providing a single location for monitoring water quality. Remote sump
tanks also facilitate dry operation of closed circuit cooling towers and evaporative condensers by eliminating
the need to drain the cold water basin when switching from wet to dry operation. BACs RS Remote Sump
Tanks are available in a variety of sizes in galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System.

RS Remote Sump Tanks
Eliminate the need for other methods of freeze protection
Simplify water treatment
Facilitate dry operation
Low installed cost
Easy maintenance
Long service life
R
S
H3
Benefits
Low First Cost
Support All models mount directly on parallel I-beams.
Easy Maintenance
Internal Access - The interior of the unit is easily accessible for adjusting the float valve, cleaning
the strainer or flushing the remote sump tank.
Freeze Protection For reliable year-round operation, the remote sump tank offers freeze protection
when installed indoors in a heated area, eliminating the need to install and wire cold water basin
heaters.
Long Service Life
Materials of Construction Available in galvanized steel or the BALTIBOND
System (see next page for construction options).
The water level control is easily reached from outside the unit.
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
s
H4
Optional BALTIBOND

The BALTIBOND

life, is applied to all hot-dip galvanized steel components of the remote sump tank.
Hot Well/Cold Well Arrangement
A water tight center baffle is provided, along with additional suction & drain connections and strainer, for
separate storage of hot and cold water. This arrangement is provided with a single make-up assembly.
The hot well/cold well arrangement is frequently used with highly variable loads to even out the load put
on the evaporative cooling equipment.
standard mechanical make-up valve when a more
precise water level control is required. This package
consists of a conductance-actuated level control and
a solenoid activated valve in the make-up water line.
The valve is slow closing to minimize water hammer.
Tank Covers
Covers with lifting handles are available.
Accessories
R
S
H5
Engineering Data
See page J12 for information on how to
size a remote sump tank for an open
cooling tower; page J16 for a closed
circuit cooling tower or
evaporative condenser
Notes:
1. Maximum weight is for tank filled with water to overflow.
2. Minimum operating level X is measured from inside bottom of tank.
W L A B
RS-94 240 1,070 94 8 1/2" 72 22 1/2" 36 1/8" 8" 11 1/4" 4"
RS-212 350 2,220 212 8 1/2" 163 46 3/8" 36 1/8" 8" 23 3/16" 4"
RS-335 470 3,410 335 8 1/2" 257 46 3/8" 54 1/8" 8" 23 3/16" 4"
RS-457 610 4,630 457 8 1/2" 351 46 3/8" 72" 9 1/8" 23 3/16" 6"
RS-702 800 6,970 702 8 1/2" 539 46 3/8" 107 7/8" 9 1/8" 23 3/16" 6"
RS-946 1,030 9,340 946 8 1/2" 727 46 3/8" 143 3/4" 9 1/8" 23 3/16" 6"
RS-1390 1,260 13,470 1,390 8 1/2" 1,068 66 1/2" 143 3/4" 9 1/8" 33 1/4" 6"
SUCTION
MPT
DIMENSIONS
MODEL
NUMBER
SHIPPING
WEIGHT
(LBS)
MAXIMUM
WEIGHT
(LBS)
1
MAXIMUM
STORAGE
VOLUME
(GAL)
"X" MINIMUM
OPERATING
LEVEL
NET
AVAILABLE
VOLUME
(GAL)
*5/8 diameter mounting holes
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
s
H6
Structural Support
Notes:
1. Support beams and anchor bolts are to be selected and installed by others.
3. Beams must be selected in accordance with accepted structural practice. The maximum allowable deflection of beams under unit shall be
1/360 of unit length, not to exceed the value specified in the table above.
The recommended support arrangement for the RS Remote Sump Tank consists of parallel I-beams
running the full length of the unit, spaced as shown in the following drawings. Besides providing
adequate support, the steel also serves to raise the unit above any solid foundation to ensure access to
the bottom of the unit. To support a RS Remote Sump Tank in an alternate steel support arrangement,
consult your BAC Representative.
RS-94 RS-212 thru -946
RS-1390
MODEL
NUMBER C
MAXIMUM
DEFLECTION
RS-94 N/A 3/32
RS-212 2 7-7/8 3/32
RS-335 4 1-7/8 1/8
RS-457 5 7-3/4 3/16
RS-702 8 7-5/8 9/32
RS-946 11 7-1/2 3/8
RS-1390 N/A 3/8
R
S
H7
1.0 Construction
1.1 Corrosion Resistant Construction (standard): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural members
shall be constructed of heavy-gauge G-235 (Z700 metric) hot-dip galvanized steel with all edges given a protective coating of zinc-rich
compound. Panel design shall be flanged and gasketed.
(Alternate 1.1) Corrosion Resistant Construction (optional): Unless otherwise noted in this specification, all steel panels and structural
members shall be protected with the BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235 (Z700 metric)
hot-dip galvanized steel prepared in a four-step (clean, pre-treat, rinse, dry) process with an electrostatically sprayed, thermosetting
hybrid polymer fuse-bonded to the substrate during a thermally activated curing stage and monitored by a 23-step quality assurance
program. Panel design shall be flanged and gasketed.
2.1 Strainer: A large area, lift-out, hot-dip galvanized steel strainer with perforated openings and an integral anti-vortexing hood to
prevent air treatment shall be provided.
2.2 Make-up Assembly: A brass make-up valve with a large diameter, unsinkable plastic float arranged for easy adjustment shall
be provided.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
Technical Resources
J1
Connection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J2
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J4
Selection Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J6
CTI Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J8
The Value of Standards and Independent Certification Programs . .J10
Selection of a Remote Sump Tank for an Open Cooling Tower . . . . .J12
Selection of a Remote Sump Tank for a Closed Circuit
Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J16
Fundamentals of Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J20
Piping Considerations - Maximum Fluid Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J55
Cooling Tower Pumping & Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J56
Friction Loss Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J101
Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J102
Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J113
Formulas & Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J114
Psychrometric Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J115
Temperature Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J118
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J119
Water Quality Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J120
Maintenance Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J122
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .J125
Resources Index
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

G
u
i
d
e
J2
Connection Guide
A summary of connection types used by BAC follows. The specific connection type for a particular BAC
model can be found on the unit print drawing (available on BACs website) or from your local BAC
Representative.
Beveled for Welding (BFW):
This connection type is a pipe stub with a
beveled edge. The bevel allows for
easier welding in the field and a full
penetration weld. Weld materials fill the
trimmed area between two beveled edges
as shown here.
Grooved to Suit a Mechanical Coupling:
This connection type is a pipe stub with a groove to accept
a mechanical pipe coupler.
BFW/Grooved:
Many of BACs connections are both beveled for weld and
grooved to suit a mechanical coupling. Either method of
fastening to field-fabricated piping can be used when this
connection type is provided.
ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange:
This connection type is a standard bolt and hole
pattern at the point of connection to mate to an
ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange. When BAC
provides this connection type to a hot water basin,
mounting bolts are permanently fastened to the
connection plate. When BAC provides this connec-
tion type from a cold water basin, a back-up ring
and neoprene washers are provided. All other
components (piping, nuts, bolts, flatwashers, etc.)
are provided by others unless otherwise specified.
Weld Details
BFW/Grooved Connection
Beveled edge of
field-installed piping
Beveled edge of
BAC connection
Beveled edge
Grooved for
mechanical coupling
Weld Material
An ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange pattern is
shown on this cold water basin panel
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J3
An ASME Class 150 Flat Face Flange pattern with mounting bolts is
shown on this hot water basin panel
Male Pipe Thread (MPT):
This connection type is a threaded pipe
stub connection designed to mate with
a Female Pipe Thread (FPT) fitting.
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box:
This option is offered to facilitate
horizontal piping below the cold water
basin of a unit, and is a compact
alternative to using an elbow in the
piping arrangement, saving installation
time and cost.
MPT Connection
Side Outlet Depressed Sump Box
M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

o
f

C
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
J4
Materials of Construction
Operating environment, desired life expectancy, and budget all influence the materials of construction
selected for an evaporative cooling unit. BAC products are available in a variety of materials and BAC
designs focus on long life and easy maintenance. As a result, owners can maximize their operational goals.
This section describes the materials of construction available for BAC products. To determine the best
material options for your specific project, consult your local BAC Representative.
Galvanized Steel
G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel is the heaviest commercially available galvanized steel, universally
recognized for its strength and corrosion resistance. To assure long-life, G-235 hot-dip galvanized steel is
used as the base material for all steel products and parts, and all exposed cut edges are protected with a
zinc-rich coating after fabrication. With good maintenance and proper water treatment, G-235 galvanized
steel products will provide excellent service life under the operating conditions normally encountered in
comfort cooling and industrial applications.
BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System

The BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System is a unique system approach to evaporative cooling

equipment protection. A special hybrid polymer, formulated for tenacious bonding, toughness, and
impermeability to fluids, is applied by electrostatic spray to G-235 hot dip galvanized steel surfaces. The
polymer undergoes a heat-activated, thermosetting cure process, fuse-bonding it to the galvanized steel
substrate.
The BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System can extend the service life of equipment and alleviates
concerns with white rust, virtually eliminating the need for periodic passivation of galvanized steel
components.
Fused Bonded Thermosetting Polymer
Zinc
Steel
Zinc
Fused Bonded Thermosetting Polymer
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J5
Stainless Steel
Type 304 stainless steel is the industrys traditional alternative to galvanized steel when elevated levels of
corrosion resistance are required. It is the most widely used and accepted type of stainless steel available on
the market today. Type 304 stainless steel materials can be provided in lieu of standard materials for unit
structure, as well as many auxiliary components.
Component Construction
In addition to the various materials available for the structure of its units, BAC carefully selects the materials
used for all components of its products. Additional materials such as corrosion resistant fiberglass reinforced
polyester (FRP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), aluminum and copper are used for components when necessary to
provide the corrosion resistance required of a unit providing evaporative cooling service.
Which material option is right for my project?
Included within the product section of each open cooling tower, closed circuit cooling tower and evaporative
condenser in this catalog is a discussion on construction options. These sections define the availability of
certain materials and combinations of materials for each product. Refer to these sections for specific product
information. Your local BAC Sales Representative can guide you on the proper unit construction for your
specific project.
HXV shown with optional BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System

Series V Closed Ciruit Cooling Tower shown
with the optional BALTIBOND
Corrosion
Protection System
S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

S
o
f
t
w
a
r
e
J6
Selection Software
Easy-To-Use Selection Software
BAC offers free, easy-to-use selection software to assist you in the selection and evaluation of evaporative
cooling products. In addition to catalog models, CTI certified alternate-horsepower selections are also
available from the selection software. The program provides equipment specifications, engineering data,
performance curves, layout recommendations, sound data and other information to aid in selecting the best
BAC product for your application.
Cooling Tower Selections
All cooling tower models in the selection program are
included in the CTI thermal performance certification
program. The selection program also provides the ability
to make selections outside the scope of CTI thermal
performance certification program criteria. BAC warrants
the thermal performance of all cooling tower selections
made by the selection program, whether or not under the
scope of the certification program.
Product selections often contain reserve capacity at the
design conditions. The selection program can optimize the performance of a unit at specified conditions.
Select a unit for design conditions, and then you can maximize flow rate, hot and cold water temperatures,
wet bulb temperature or approach.
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Selections
The closed circuit cooling tower selection program provides equipment selections for applications utilizing
water, aqueous ethylene glycol or aqueous propylene glycol as the process fluid. As with open circuit cooling
towers, all models are CTI Certified.
Evaporative Condenser Selections
The evaporative condenser selection program provides equipment selections for applications utilizing R-717
(ammonia), R-22, and R-134a.
Accessories
The selection program evaluates the use of accessories that may impact capacity (i.e., low-sound fans,
sound attenuation, etc.)
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J7
Alternative Motors
Standard selections utilize a standard horsepower motor to meet the full load performance required for the
project. Alternative selections based on a reduced speed provided by the ENERGY-MISER
Fan System, a
2-speed motor or a variable frequency drive are also available.
Performance Curves
The selection program generates performance curves
based on flow rates ranging from 80% to 120% of the
design flow rate. Performance curves are a graphical
representation of the leaving water temperature versus the
entering wet-bulb temperature, and are typically evaluated
at a number of ranges.
Sound Data
The selection program provides sound ratings for standard selections at 5 and 50-foot distances for your
reference. For extremely sound sensitive installations, sound ratings are also available for units with
low sound fans and sound attenuation.
Website
The BAC selection software is available from our website,
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com. Direct links to the website
within the program provide users of the selection program
with additional information pertaining to Unit Engineering
Data, Certified Unit Drawings, Layout Guidelines and
Specifications. Consult your local BAC Representative for
additional application assistance.
Performance curves from the Cooling
Tower Selection Program
C
T
I
C
e
r
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
J8
Cooling Technology Institute
(CTI) Certification
Independent Assurance of Thermal
Performance In Advance
For over two decades, cooling tower owners, operators, design
engineers and installing contractors have relied upon CTI certification of
cooling tower thermal performance in accordance with CTI Standard
STD-201. CTI Certification provides independent assurance, prior to
shipment and installation, that a specific cooling tower will perform in
accordance with the manufacturers published thermal performance data.
Having CTI certification in advance eliminates the need for costly onsite
field tests and ensures system performance will meet design objectives.
BAC Commitment to CTI Certification
BAC is committed to providing independent thermal performance verification for all its products. Starting with
the FXT Cooling Tower line in 1981, every factory assembled BAC cooling tower line since (including the
Series 3000 in 1984, the Series V in 1986, the Low Profile Series V in 1988, and the Series 1500 in 1994)
has achieved CTI certification.
CTI Certification For Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
More recently, CTI Standard STD-201 was expanded to include closed circuit cooling towers. Once again
BAC has led the industry, certifying the thermal performance of the FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Tower line in
1998 and the Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Tower line in 2000. Dual air inlet FXV models were added in
2003, with the largest capacity of any factory-assembled closed circuit cooling tower cell in the industry. BAC
Closed Circuit Cooling Towers can be specified with the same assurance of thermal performance as our
open circuit cooling towers.
Why is CTI Certification Important to You?
Equipment Owners and Operators
Independent certification of cooling tower thermal performance assures owners and operators that they will
receive full value from their investment. It eliminates the potential for years of excessive operating costs due
to deficient equipment and provides this benefit at no cost to the project. In fact, performance certification
can actually reduce first cost by eliminating the need for safety factors when sizing the equipment and the
cost of a field acceptance test to verify performance.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J9
Design Engineers
By specifying CTI certification of thermal performance, a design engineer can protect the owner and ensure
that his or her client receives the performance paid for. CTI performance certification provides a responsible
basis for design and complements codes and standards used to control other systems and products. Many
industry organizations are working to include certification in their standards. For instance, California Title 24
will require CTI certification of all cooling towers starting in 2005. CTI certification complies with these codes,
prevents involvement in contractual misunderstandings, and eliminates disputes over deficient performance
after installation.
Installing Contractors
Independent certification of cooling tower thermal performance assures the installing contractor that all
certified cooling tower proposals are based on the same level of thermal performance. This not only
eliminates the potential for costly callbacks due to deficient thermal performance but also maintains a
responsible basis of design for design/build, design/assist, or value-engineered projects.
The Cost of Cooling Tower Deficiency
While sometimes hard to detect, a deficient cooling tower forces other system components to work harder to
make up for its shortcomings. In an air conditioning application, this burden is imposed upon the chiller. If the
cooling tower cannot reject the required load at the lowest possible temperatures, the chiller is forced to
operate against a condensing pressure higher than necessary, thereby consuming considerably more energy.
This may not affect building comfort levels except at peak conditions, but it will increase operating costs
year-round. A tower that is 20% underrated will cost the owner three to four times the original price of the
tower in added energy costs! Why take a chance insist on CTI certified performance!
Specify CTI Certification for ALL of
Your Cooling Tower Needs
The equipment sections of this catalog include
suggested specifications for each product. When
adding verbiage to an existing specification,
suggested wording is as follows:
The thermal performance shall be certified by the
Cooling Technology Institute in accordance with CTI
Standard STD-201 or, lacking such certification, a
field acceptance test shall be conducted within the
warranty period in accordance with CTI Acceptance
Test Code ATC-105, by the Cooling Technology
Institute, or other qualified independent third-party
testing agency, licensed by CTI. Tests performed by
the manufacturers personnel will not be acceptable.
Performance testing in BACs R&D facility
T
h
e

V
a
l
u
e

o
f

S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
J10
The Value of Standards and
Independent Certification Programs
Baltimore Aircoil Company strongly believes in the value of standards and independent certification
programs. Through this philosophy, customers can be assured of a consistent level of performance and
quality when using BAC products and services. These standards and certification programs cover many
diverse areas, ranging from how product improvements are implemented in BACs factories to how BAC
products are rated for thermal performance.
This fundamental belief is demonstrated first and foremost by ISO 9001:2000 Certification of BACs design,
engineering, and manufacturing of evaporative cooling products. Compliance with ISO 9001:2000
standards offers BAC customers better, more consistent quality, reliable
performance, and confidence that the product can be delivered on time
and per the specifications. Consistent quality also reduces the potential
for installation and operational problems. Any problems reported from
the field receive swift corrective and preventative actions to prevent
reoccurrence. This level of performance is assured through frequent
internal training and audits, backed by rigorous external audits by an
independent, ISO-accredited Registrar. ISO 9001:2000 also requires demonstrating continuous
improvement of products, processes, and systems over time, benefiting both BAC and its many customers.
BAC is also fervently committed to providing independent thermal
performance verification for all its products. BAC leads the industry with
nine product lines, including both open and closed circuit cooling towers,
currently registered with the Cooling Technology Institute (CTI), more than
any other manufacturer. Independent certification by the CTI assures
owners, operators, consulting engineers, and installing contractors that
BAC units will perform in accordance with published thermal performance
ratings.
Owners and operators can realize the full value of their investment in their cooling system, and avoid the
operating cost penalties associated with a deficient tower. System design engineers can reduce or eliminate
safety factors and avoid the need to specify costly field performance tests, while minimizing their liability.
Contractors can compare equipment based on features and benefits, rather than questioning whether all the
proposals are based on the same true level of thermal performance. CTI certification also reduces the
potential for costly callbacks due to deficient performance. Leveling the playing field also advances the
state of the industry: manufacturers must devote their energies towards product improvement to gain true
competitive advantage. Users of evaporative cooling equipment benefit from this true competition with
innovative new products, features, and service options.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J11
The design of BAC products is also influenced by many other standards. Examples include the following:
All access platforms, ladder systems, and handrail packages are designed and manufactured to meet
or exceed OSHA standards.
Evaporative cooling equipment with Factory Mutual (FM) Approval is available where required to help
reduce insurance premiums and potentially eliminate the need for fire suppression sprinkler systems.
The standard heat transfer coils used in BAC evaporative condensers and closed circuit cooling towers
comply with the ASME B31.5 Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Component Standard. This
standard assures the user of the pressure integrity, material composition, engineering design, and
fabrication techniques used for the heat exchange coils. When required by local codes or the specific
needs of a project, BAC can also produce coils with the ASME U stamp per Section VIII, Division 1 of
the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code.
Compliance with these codes and standards help to assure BAC customers that the unit they purchase is
suitable for the duty required.
Besides supporting these standards, BAC actively works with industry organizations, such as ASHRAE,
ASME, ARI, CTI, and FM to improve their standards, or develop standards where none currently exist. For
instance, BAC led the industry by working with CTI to update the certification standard in the early 1980s,
and led the way by certifying the first factory assembled cooling tower product line under this updated
standard. BAC is also currently working with both CTI and ARI on developing standards for evaporative
condenser thermal performance, as well as keeping current standards up-to-date. Additionally, BAC actively
participated on the ASME B31.5 Piping Committee to integrate heat transfer components, such as
evaporative condensers and closed circuit cooling towers, within the standard.
BAC strongly encourages our customers, suppliers, and
competitors to join us in developing and supporting these
standards and certification programs for the benefit of the
industry and society as a whole. BAC welcomes feedback on
this subject, which can be sent to info@baltimoreaircoil.com.
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
-

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

J12
Selection of a Remote Sump Tank for an
Open Cooling Tower
Note: This section provides a simplified method for the selection of a remote sump tank for an open cooling
tower only. For information on sizing a remote sump tank for a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative
condenser, see page J16.
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze
protection during cold weather operation. The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor
space, and may preclude the need to winterize the evaporative cooling equipment. A remote sump tank
must provide sufficient storage volume to accommodate all the water that will drain back to it during cooling
system shutdown, including:
The total volume of water contained within the cooling tower during operation (cooling tower volume).
The volume of water contained in all system piping located above the operating water level of the
remote sump tank (system piping volume).
The volume of water contained within any heat exchanger, or other equipment located above the
operating water level of the remote sump tank that will drain to the tank when the cooling system is
shut down (system components volume).
The maximum volume of water contained within the cooling tower is the volume of water to the overflow
level. Besides the water in the cold water basin during operation, this volume will take into consideration
water in the distribution system, water in suspension in the wet deck, plus an allowance for the external
pulldown from piping and other equipment. This simplified method is a conservative approach as it will not
consider any volume reductions based on flow rates. For specific information for your application, contact
Cold water basin volumes at the overflow level are given in Tables 1 through 4. Table 5 provides pipe
capacities (gallons per linear foot) for common Schedule 40 nominal pipe sizes, useful when determining
system piping volume.
Safety Factor
When selecting a remote sump tank, select a model with a net available volume that is 5% greater than the
total volume required. The net available volume is the volume between the operating level and the overflow
level in the remote sump tank. See page H5 for engineering data (including net available volume) on BACs
RS Remote Sump Tanks. The minimum operating level must be maintained in the remote sump tank to
prevent vortexing of air through the tank's suction connection.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J13
Table 1. Series 3000 - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow
Table 2. Series 1500 - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow
Model Number Overflow Volume (gallons)
3240A thru 3290A 958
3333A thru 3379A 1,019
3412A thru 3436A 1,219
3455A thru 3527A 1,289
3473A thru 3501A 1,549
3552A thru 3672A 1,787
3728A thru 3828A 2,196
3872A thru 3970A 2,465
3985A thru 31056A 2,674
3583A thru 3725A 2,237
31132A 2,963
31213A thru 31301A 3,211
Model
Number
Flow Range
(gpm)
Overflow Volume
(gallons)
up to 440 425
441-600 450
601-745 475
up to 480 425
481-650 450
651-815 475
up to 530 425
531-710 450
711-895 475
up to 490 450
491-650 485
651-805 530
up to 535 470
536-710 497
711-880 530
up to 605 480
606-800 500
801-1000 530
up to 660 485
661-870 510
871-1085 530
up to 600 540
601-780 630
781-960 725
up to 685 560
686-885 645
886-1085 725
up to 750 580
751-970 655
971-1190 725
up to 645 575
646-840 700
841-1035 815
up to 735 605
736-960 710
961-1180 815
15227
15250
15214
15245
15177
15201
15219
15200
15146
15160
15176
15162
Model
Number
Flow Range
(gpm)
Overflow Volume
(gallons)
up to 810 625
811-1050 720
1051-1295 815
up to 850 640
851-1100 725
1101-1350 815
up to 890 755
891-1160 890
1161-1425 1,050
up to 975 755
976-1270 905
1271-1560 1,050
up to 1050 790
1051-1360 925
1361-1675 1,050
up to 1105 805
1106-1435 930
1436-1760 1,050
up to 960 790
931-1215 990
1216-1500 1,200
up to 1020 820
1021-1335 1,010
1336-1645 1,200
up to 1095 840
1096-1430 1,020
1431-1760 1,200
up to 1155 855
1156-1505 1,025
1506-1855 1,200
up to 1275 890
1276-1660 1,045
1661-2045 1,200
15270
15282
15296
15325
15365
15385
15425
15350
15368
15310
15340
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
-

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

J14
Table 3. FXT - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow
FXT-6 thru FXT-7.5 63
FXT-11 98
FXT-16 thru FXT-20 73
VTL-016-E thru VTL-039-H 72
VTL-045-H thru VTL- 079-K 146
VTL-082-K thru VTL-095-K 215
VTL-103-K thru VTL-137-M 287
VTL-152-M thru VTL- 227-O 432
VTL-245-P thru VTL- 272-P 574
VT0-12-E thru VT0-28-H 26
VT0-32-H thru VT0-57-K 55
VT0-65-J thru VT0-88-L 85
VT0-102-L thru VT0-116-M 114
VT0-132-L thru VT0-176-O 153
VT1-N209-P thru VT1-N270-Q 488
VT1-N301-Q thru VT1-N395-R 742
VT1-N418-P thru VT1-N540-Q 994
VT1-275-P thru VT1-415-R 900
VT1-416-O thru VT1-600-P 1,367
VT1-550-P thru VT1-830-R 1,832
VT1-825-P thru VT1-1335-S 2,764
Table 4. Series V - Cold Water Basin Volume at Overflow
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J15
Example
A VTL-059-H will be installed on a cooling tower/heat exchanger system that will also utilize an RS Remote
Sump Tank. The tower side volume contained in the heat exchanger is 25 gallons. The system has been
designed with 35 feet of 4 inch pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank. What is
the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection?
Solution:
From Table 4, the cold water basin volume at overflow for the VTL-059-H is 146 gallons.
From Table 5, the 4 pipe will contain 0.662 gallons of water per linear foot. The total volume contained in the
4 pipe is 23 gallons.
The tower side volume of the heat exchanger is 25 gallons.
The total volume required is:
Cooling Tower Volume at Overflow (146 gallons)
+ System Piping Volume (23 gallons)
+ System Components Volume (25 gallons)
= Total Volume 194 gallons
194 gallons x 1.05 (safety factor) = 204 gallons required.
From the engineering data on page H5, the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection is an RS-335, which
has a net available volume of 257 gallons.
Nominal Pipe Size Gallons Per Linear Foot
2 0.174
3 0.384
4 0.662
6 1.503
8 2.603
10 4.101
12 5.822
14 7.04
16 9.193
18 11.636
20 14.461
24 20.916
Table 5. Schedule 40 Pipe Capacities*
* Not applicable for other types of piping.
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
-

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

J16
Selection and Application of a Remote
Sump Tank for a Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower or Evaporative Condenser
Note: This section provides instruction in the selection of a remote sump tank for a closed circuit cooling
tower or evaporative condenser only. For information on sizing a remote sump tank for an open cooling
tower, see page J12.
Remote sump tanks are used on evaporative cooling systems to provide a means of cold water basin freeze
protection during cold weather operation. When the recirculating pump of a closed circuit cooling tower or
evaporative condenser is not operating, all of the recirculating water drains by gravity to the remote sump.
The remote sump tank is usually located in a heated, indoor space, and may preclude the need to winterize
the cold water basin.
The remote sump must be sized to accommodate the suction head for the pump plus a surge volume to
hold all the water that will drain back to the tank when the pump is shut down. This surge volume (also
called drain down volume) includes water in the evaporative cooling equipment and water held in the piping
between the unit and the remote sump. The volume of water in the evaporative equipment includes the
water in suspension (water within the spray distribution system and falling through the heat transfer section)
and water in the cold water basin during normal operation. Tables 1 through 4 provide the volume of water
in suspension plus the water in the cold water basin, labeled as "spray water volume." Table 5 can be used
to calculate the volume of water in the piping between the unit and the remote sump (includes riser and
drain piping) for applications where piping is Schedule 40.
To select a remote sump tank for a particular application, determine the total volume (spray water volume
plus piping volume) and select a remote sump tank with a net available volume that is 5% greater than
required. See page H5 for RS Remote Sump Tank Engineering Data.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J17
Application Notes
The standard close-coupled centrifugal pump normally furnished with BAC units is designed and selected
specifically for the pump head and flow rate required when the pump is mounted on the unit. This pump
cannot be used for remote sump applications and is therefore omitted. The following factors should be
considered when selecting remote pumps:
Total static head from the remote sump tank operating level to the inlet of the evaporative equipment.
Pipe and valve friction losses.
For FXV & HXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and CXV Evaporative Condensers, 1.0 psig water
pressure is required at the inlet of the water distribution system. For Series V Closed Circuit Cooling
Towers and Evaporative Condensers, 2.0 psig water pressure is required at the inlet of the water
distribution system.
Required flow rate as shown in Tables 1 through 4.
A valve should always be installed in the pump discharge line so that the water flow can be adjusted
to the proper flow rate and pressure. Inlet water pressure should be measured with a pressure gauge
installed in the water supply riser near the equipment inlet. The valve should be adjusted to permit the
specified inlet pressure, which results in the design water flow rate.
Accurate inlet water pressure and flow rate are important for proper evaporative equipment operation.
Higher pressure (in excess of 10 psig) can cause leaks in the spray distribution system. Lower pressure or
low flow may cause improper wetting of the coils, which will negatively affect thermal performance, promote
scaling, and may also cause excessive drift.
On remote sump applications, the standard float valve(s) and strainer(s) are omitted from the cold water
basin and a properly sized outlet connection is added. Tables 1 through 4 include the proper outlet size for
each model. The remote sump outlet connection is located on the bottom of most units. On smaller Series V
units, the connection is located on the end of the unit. To clarify the location of the remote sump outlet
connection, refer to the appropriate unit print, available from your local BAC Representative or at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Another effect of using a remote sump is that the operating weight of the evaporative unit is reduced (design
changes, the omission of the integral spray pump, and/or changes in cold water basin volume can contribute
to this deduct). Please refer to the tables below for the operating weight deduct associated with a remote
sump application.
R
e
m
o
t
e

S
u
m
p

T
a
n
k
-

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n

J18
Table 1. FXV/CXV Remote Sump Data
Table 2. Low Profile Series V (VFL/VCL) Remote Sump Data
Table 3. Series V Centrifugal Fan (VF1/VC1) Remote Sump Data
Closed Circuit Cooling
Tower Model
Model
Spray Water
Volume
1,2
(Gallons)
Required
Flow Rate
(GPM)
Outlet
Size
3
(in)
Weight
Deduct
(lbs)
FXV-42X CXV-64 thru 95 270 190 6 290
FXV-43X CXV-103 thru 153 290 290 6 330
FXV-44X CXV-160 thru 206 550 500 8 560
FXV-64X CXV-196 thru 305 600 715 10 560
FXV-66X CXV-310 thru 481 750 900 10 560
N/A CXV-420 thru 610 1,200 1,430 (2) 10 1,120
N/A CXV-620 thru 962 1,500 1,800 (2) 10 1,120
FXV-288-X CXV-T645 thru T792 1,625 1,720 12 1,400
FXV-364-X CXV-T791 thru T944 2,000 1,720 12 1,400
N/A CXV-T1290 thru T1584 3,250 3,440 (2) 12 2,800
N/A CXV-T1582 thru T1888 4,000 3,440 (2) 12 2,800
Tower Model
Evaporative
Condenser Model
Spray Water
Volume
1,2
(Gallons)
Required Flow
Rate (GPM)
Outlet Size
3
(in)
Weight
Deduct
(lbs)
VFL-012-X VCL-016 thru 035 40 45 3 350
VFL-024-X VCL-038 thru 079 95 94 4 550
VFL-036-X VCL-087 thru 120 200 142 4 290
VFL-048-X VCL-134 thru 155 250 192 6 600
VFL-072-X VCL-167 thru 234 385 284 6 720
VFL-096-X VCL-257 thru 299 405 384 8 1,740
Tower Model
Evaporative
Condenser Model
Spray Water
Volume
1,2
(Gallons)
Required Flow
Rate (GPM)
Outlet Size
3
(in)
Weight
Deduct
(lbs)
VF1-009-X VC1-10 thru 25 25* 35 2 1/2 180
VF1-018-X VC1-30 thru 65 50* 75 3 310
VF1-027-X VC1-72 thru 90 75* 115 4 440
VF1-036-X VC1-100 thru 135 105* 150 4 590
VF1-048-X VC1-150 thru 205 140* 220 6 850
VF1-072-X VC1-N208 thru N230 360* 305 6 2,250
VF1-096-X VC1-N243 thru N315 360* 385 6 2,100
VF1-144N-X VC1-N338 thru N470 520* 580 6 3,250
VF1-192-X N/A 720* 770 (2) 6 4,200
VF1-288N-X N/A 1,040* 1,160 (2) 6 6,500
VF1-144-X VC1-386 thru 516 600 585 8 4,510
VF1-216-X VC1-540 thru 804 710 835 10 6,560
VF1-288-X VC1-772 thru 1032 1,360 1,170 10 8,170
VF1-432-X VC1-1158 thru 1608 2,090 1,670 12 13,270
N/A VC1-C216 thru C321 360* 385 6 2,100
N/A VC1-C339 thru C469 520* 580 6 3,250
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J19
Example
An FXV-421 will be installed on a system that will also utilize an RS Remote Sump Tank. The system has
been designed with 40 feet of 6-inch pipe that will be above the operating level of the remote sump tank.
What is the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection?
Solution:
From Table 1, the spray water volume for an FXV-421 is 270 gallons.
From Table 5, the 6-inch pipe will contain 1.503 gallons of water per linear foot. The total volume contained
in the 6-inch pipe is 40 feet x 1.503 gallons/foot = 60 gallons.
The total volume required is:
Spray Water Volume (270 gallons)
+ System Piping Volume (60 gallons)
= Total Volume 330 gallons
330 gallons x 1.05 (safety factor) = 347 gallons required.
From the engineering data on page H5, the correct RS Remote Sump Tank selection is an RS-457, which
has a net available volume of 351 gallons.
Notes Tables 1 - 4:
1. The spray water volume is
based on the maximum
operating water level in the cold
water basin with no net drop leg
included in the piping system
below the unit outlet.
2. All remote sump unit volumes
are based on bottom outlets
sized as noted, except those
models with an asterisk, which
are based on an end outlet
sized as noted.
3. Drain connection size is for
remote sump applications only.
Evaporative
Condenser Model
Spray Water
Volume
1,2
(Gallons)
Required Flow
Rate (GPM)
Outlet Size
3
(in)
Weight
Deduct
(lbs)
VC2-N138 thru N191 270* 220 6 1,310
VC2-N206 thru N235 430* 305 6 2,260
VC2-N261 thru N301 480* 385 8 1,960
VC2-N356 thru N446 820* 580 10 3,010
VC2-319 thru 626 480 585 8 5,040
VC2-526 thru 957 670 835 10 7,380
VC2-N870 thru N1204 1,440 1,170 10 10,260
VC2-684 thru 1252 1,440 1,170 10 10,260
VC2-1052 thru 1914 2,220 1,670 12 14,930
Table 4. Series V Axial Fan (VC2) Remote Sump Data
Table 5. Schedule 40 Pipe Capacities*
* Not applicable for types of piping.
Nominal Pipe Size Gallons Per Linear Foot
2 0.174
3 0.384
4 0.662
6 1.503
8 2.603
10 4.101
12 5.822
14 7.040
16 9.193
18 11.636
20 14.461
24 20.916
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J20
Sound is an important consideration in the selection of mechanical equipment. The purpose of this article is
to present a procedure for evaluating the sound levels created by evaporative cooling equipment to
determine if these levels will be acceptable to the neighbors* who live or work near the installation. In
addition, sound levels must comply with local code requirements. While most often these levels are found to
be acceptable, certain situations may call for sound levels lower than those produced by the equipment. It is
then the task of the manufacturer, engineer, and owner to determine the best way to decrease the sound
levels for the particular installation. This article presents a means for assessing the impact of the
evaporative cooling equipments sound on a neighbor and possible means to reduce that impact should it be
a potential problem.
The procedure consists of three steps, followed by a fourth step if necessary:
1. Establish the noise criterion for the equipment: i.e., determine the sound levels that will be considered
acceptable by the neighbors who will be exposed to them. Also consult local codes for appropriate
sound levels. For a general idea of how sound levels produced by a cooling tower compare to sound
from other common sound sources, see the graph below.
2. Estimate the sound levels that will be produced by the equipment, taking into account the effects of
equipment geometry, the installation, and the distance from the equipment to the neighbor.*
3. Compare the noise criterion with the expected sound levels to determine if the sound levels from the
equipment will be acceptable.
4. In the event that the equipment sound levels are excessive for the particular site conditions, a method
should be determined to modify the neighbors perception of the sound. There are three ways to
change the effects that any undesirable sound has on the receiver of that sound:
Modify the source of the sound
Control the path of the sound
Adjust the receivers expectation or satisfaction, keeping in mind that sound can be very
subjective and is highly dependent on perception
*In this article, the term neighbor is used to denote the person or group of persons to be protected against excessive
sound levels created by the evaporative cooling equipment. It is intended that this include not only the occupants of
other buildings, but also the occupants of the building served by the equipment.
Fundamentals of Sound
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J21
Some ways that sound from BAC equipment can be adjusted for a more favorable impact on the receiver
include:
Modify equipment location or position
If possible, simply do not run the equipment at the critical time (at night for residential areas and during
the day for office parks)
Install a second motor, two-speed motor, or VFD so that the unit can run at lower speeds when the full
capacity is not required
Use a low sound fan
Oversize the equipment and run the fan at lower speed and power level
Construct sound barriers (sound walls, etc.) or use existing barriers (trees, other buildings, etc.) when
planning the location of the equipment
Install sound attenuation (available on the air intake and air discharge of the equipment)
The article also includes several appendices to lend assistance in understanding and performing some
aspects of a sound analysis. Contact your local BAC Representative with questions on sound analysis or
sound issues specific to your installation.
Receiver
Path
Terminology and Units of Measurement
The following terms and units of measure are used in this article, in accordance with accepted
U.S. Standards:
Decibel (dB) the unit of measurement used in sound control (dimensionless, used to express
logarithmically the ratio of a sound level to a reference level).
dB(A) the A-weighted sound pressure level.
Evaporative cooling equipment used in this article to represent all BAC product lines in the sound
analysis (includes open cooling towers, closed circuit cooling towers, and evaporative condensers).
Frequency the number of repetitions per unit time (the unit for frequency is the Hertz (1 cycle/s)).
Hertz abbreviated Hz, is the unit of frequency, defined as cycles per second.
Noise unwanted sound.
Source
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J22
At the beginning of any sound analysis, it is necessary to establish the sound level at a particular site that
would be considered acceptable by those who might be affected. This acceptable sound level is called the
noise criterion for that situation, and it is important to realize that it may vary widely for different situations.
The procedure for developing the noise criterion involves consideration of the following:
1. The type of activity of those people in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling equipment who will be
affected
2. The amount of attenuation from acoustic barriers or walls that lie between the equipment and the
people who may hear it
3. The outdoor background noise that might help mask the sound from the equipment
From these factors, we can arrive at the final noise criterion for the particular installation.
Establishing the Noise Criterion
Noise Criteria the maximum allowable sound pressure level(s) (Lp) at a specific location. Criteria may be
expressed as a single overall value or in individual octave bands. The NC values and curves are further
explained throughout this article.
Octave Band a range of sound frequencies with an upper limit twice its lower limit. The bands are
identified by their center frequencies (identifying frequencies), which is the square root of the product of the
upper and lower cutoff frequencies of a pass band. These center frequencies and band widths are shown
on page J23. In some sound data tables, these eight octave bands are also called by their Band
Numbers; hence, the Band Numbers are also listed as such in this article, in addition to the BAC Sound
Rating Program and BAC Selection Software.
Sound the sensation of hearing; rapid, small fluctuations to which our ears are more or less sensitive;
small perturbation of the ambient state of a medium (ambient air in most cases) that propagate at a speed
characteristic of the medium.
Sound Pressure Level (Lp) in dB a ratio of a sound pressure to a reference pressure and is defined as:
Lp = 20LogP/0.002(dB), reference 0.0002 microbar.
The reference pressure used in this article is the long-used and accepted value of 0.0002 microbar. Another
way to describe the same value, which may be used in other publications, is the value of 20 x 10
-6
Pascals
(N/m
2
).
Sound Power Level (Lw) in dB the measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a given source and
is defined by:
Lw = 10Log (W/10
-12
)dB, reference 10
-12
.
The standard reference power used in the BAC literature is 10
-12
watt. To eliminate any possible confusion,
the reference power should always be quoted, as in a sound power level of 94 dB reference 10
-12
watt.
Unit a single cell of evaporate cooling equipment.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J23
The noise that humans hear covers a frequency range of about 20 Hz to about 20,000 Hz. Of course, there
are exceptions to this, but this range has come to be accepted for most practical purposes. Furthermore, for
most engineering applications, most of this audio range is subdivided into eight frequency bands called
octave bands which cover the range of frequency somewhat as the octaves on a piano cover the range of
pitch. The eight octave bands used in this article have the following identifying center frequencies and
ranges:
When sound levels are plotted on a graph, they are most often divided into these eight octave bands. In this
way it is possible to observe the variation of a sound level with change in frequency. This variation is
important in any situation since humans display a different sensitivity and a different response to low
frequency sounds as compared with high frequency sounds. In addition, engineering solutions for low
frequency sound issues differ markedly from those for high frequency sound issues.
Band
Number
Identifying
Frequency (Hz)
Aprox. Frequency
Range (Hz)
1 63 44-88
2 125 88-176
3 250 176-353
4 500 353-707
5 1000 707-1414
6 2000 1414-2828
7 4000 2828-5656
8 8000 5656-11312
Indoor Neighbor Activity
From earlier studies of real-life situations where people have judged sounds all the way from comfortable to
acceptable to disturbing and even to unacceptable for various indoor working or living activities, a series
of Noise Criterion Curves (NC curves) has been developed. Figure 1 is a graph of these NC curves.
Each curve represents an acceptable balance of low frequency to high frequency sound levels for particular
situations, and is keyed into the listening conditions associated with the sound. The lower NC curves
describe sound levels that are quiet enough for resting or sleeping or for excellent listening conditions, while
the upper NC curves describe rather noisy work areas when even conversation becomes difficult and
restricted. These curves may be used to set desired sound level goals for almost all typical indoor functional
areas where some acoustic need must be served.
Note that the curves of Figure 1 have as their x-axis the eight octave frequency bands; and as their y-axis,
sound pressure levels given in decibels (dB) relative to the standard reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar.
For convenience, Table 1 lists the sound pressure levels at each octave band center frequency, for each
Noise Criterion.
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J24
Table 1 - Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (dB re 0.0002 microbar) of Indoor Noise Criterion
(NC) Curves of Figure 1
Figure 1 - Noise criterion NC Curves. The octave band sound pressure levels associated with the
noise criterion conditions of Table 2
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
NC-15 47 36 29 22 17 14 12 11
NC-20 51 40 33 26 22 19 17 16
NC-25 54 44 37 31 27 24 22 21
NC-30 57 48 41 35 31 29 28 27
NC-35 60 52 45 40 36 34 33 32
NC-40 64 56 50 45 41 39 38 37
NC-45 67 60 54 49 46 44 43 42
NC-50 71 64 58 54 51 49 48 47
NC-55 74 67 62 58 56 54 53 52
NC-60 77 71 67 63 61 59 58 57
NC-65 80 75 71 68 66 64 63 62
Noise
Criterion
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J25
Table 2 is used with the NC curves and lists some typical activities that require indoor background sound
levels in range of NC-15 to NC-55. Certain unusual acoustical requirements may not easily fall into one of
the Table 2 groups. It may be necessary to apply specific criteria for those special situations or to assign a
criterion based in similarity to one of the criterion given in the table.
It is emphasized that the NC curves are based on, and should be used only for, indoor activity.
The first step in the development of the evaporative cooling equipments noise criterion is to select from Table
2 the particular activity that best describes what the indoor neighbors in the vicinity of the equipment will be
doing when the equipment is operating. Where two or more neighbor conditions may be applicable, the one
having the lowest NC value should be selected. The corresponding NC values of Figure 1 or Table 1 give the
eight octave band sound pressure levels, in decibels, for that selection. The goal is to keep the sound heard
by the neighbor, inside his home or building, at or below these sound pressure levels.
Table 2 - Suggested Schedule of Noise Criteria for Indoor Neighbor Activities
* The ASHRAE Guide usually lists a 10 dB range of NC values for each situation leaving it to the option of
the user to select the specific NC value for his own need. In the interest of more assuredly achieving
satisfactory neighbor conditions, Table 2 listings are the more conservative lower 5 dB range of the ASHRAE
value.
ACTIVITY
Sleeping, Resting, Relaxing
Homes, apartments, hotels, hospitals, etc.
Suburban and rural NC-20 to NC-25
Urban NC-25 to NC30
Excellent Listening Conditions Required
Concert halls, recording studios, etc. NC-15 to NC-20
Very Good Listening Conditions Required
Auditoriums, theaters NC-20 to NC-25
Large meeting and conference rooms NC-25 to NC-30
Good Listening Conditions Required
Private offices, school classrooms, libraries, small confrence rooms, radio and
television listening in the home, etc.
NC-30 to NC-35
Fair Listening Conditions Desired
Large offices, restaurants, retail shops, and stores, etc. NC-35 to NC-40
Moderately Fair Listening Conditions Acceptable
Business machine areas, lobbies, cafeterias, laboratory work areas, drafting
rooms, satisfactory telephone use, etc.
NC-40 to NC-45
Acceptable Working Conditions with Minimum Speech Interference
Light to heavy machinery spaces, industrial areas, commercial areas such as
garages, kitchens, laundries, etc.
NC-45 to NC-55
SUGGESTED RANGE OF
NOISE CRITERIA
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J26
Sound Reduction Provided by Building Construction
Neighbors who are either indoors in their own building or outdoors on their property may hear sound from
outdoor equipment. If they are outdoors, they may judge the sound against the more-or-less steady
background sounds in the area. If they are indoors, they may tend to judge the sound by whether it is
audible or identifiable or intrusive into the surroundings.
When outdoor sound passes into a building, it suffers some reduction, even if the building has open
windows. The actual amount of sound reduction depends on building construction, orientation, wall area,
window area, open window area, interior acoustic absorption, and possibly some other factors. The
approximate sound reduction values provided by several typical building constructions are given in Table 3.
For convenience in identification, the listed wall constructions are labeled with letters A through G and are
described in the notes under Table 3. Note that A represents no wall, hence no sound reduction, and the
use of A indicates that the selected NC curve would actually apply in this special case to an outdoor activity,
such as for a screened-in porch, an outdoor restaurant, or an outdoor terrace.
By selecting the wall construction in Table 3 which most nearly represents that of the building containing the
neighbor activity, and adding the amounts of sound reduction from Table 3 to the indoor NC curves,
band-by-band, the outdoor sound pressure levels that would yield the desired indoor NC values when the
equipment sound passes through the wall and comes inside, are obtained. This second step, then, provides
a tentative outdoor noise criterion based on hearing the sound indoors in the neighbors building.
Table 3 - Approximate Sound Reduction (in dB) Provided by Typical Exterior Wall Construction
A: No wall; outside conditions
B: Any typical wall construction, with open windows covering about 5% of exterior wall area
C: Any typical wall construction, with small open-air vents of about 1% of exterior wall area, all windows closed
D: Any typical wall construction, with closed but operable windows covering about 10%-20% of exterior wall area
E: Sealed glass wall construction, 1/4 inch thickness over approximately 50% of exterior wall area
F: Approximately 20 lb/sq foot solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings
G: Approximately 50 lb/sq foot solid wall construction with no windows and no cracks or openings
Octave
Frequency
Band
(Hz) A B C D E F G
63 0 10 13 19 14 24 32
125 0 10 14 20 20 25 34
250 0 10 15 22 26 27 36
500 0 10 16 24 28 30 38
1000 0 10 17 26 29 33 42
2000 0 10 18 28 30 38 48
4000 0 10 19 30 31 43 53
8000 0 10 20 30 33 48 58
Wall Type (See Notes Below)
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J27
Outdoor Background Sound
In a relative noisy outdoor area, it is possible that the outdoor background sound is even higher than the
tentative outdoor noise criterion. In this case, the steady background sound in the area may mask the
sound from the evaporative cooling equipment and take over as the controlling outdoor noise criterion.
Determining whether or not this situation does exist is the third step in developing the noise criterion.
The best way to judge this is to take a few sound pressure level measurements to get the average minimum
background level during the quietest intervals in which the equipment is expected to operate, or during the
intervals when noise complaints are most likely to be caused; for example, at night in residential areas where
cooling equipment is operating at night, or during the day in office areas exposed to daytime cooling
equipment sound.
In the event that background sound measurements cannot be made, Tables 4 and 5, and Figure 2 may be
used to estimate the approximate outdoor background noise. In Table 4, the condition should be determined
that most nearly describes the community area or the traffic activity in the vicinity of the evaporative cooling
equipment during the quietest time that the equipment will operate. For the condition selected, there is a
curve in Figure 2 that gives an estimate of the average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels.
The sound pressure levels of the Figure 2 curves are also listed in Table 5.
It is cautioned that these estimates should be used only as approximations of background sounds, and that
local conditions can give rise to a wide range of actual sound levels.
Table 4 - Estimate of Outdoor Background Sounds Based on General Type of Community Area and
Nearby Automotive Traffic Activity
(Determine the appropriate conditions that seem to best describe the area in question during the time interval that is most critical, i.e.,
day or night. Then refer to corresponding Curve No. in Figure 2 or Table 5 for average minimum background sound levels to be used in
sound analysis. Use lowest Curve No. where several conditions are found to be reasonably appropriate.)
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
3
4
5
6
4
6
5
7
4
5
5
6
2
3
3
4
23. 2000 to 4000 ft from intermittent light traffic
24. 2000 to 4000 ft from continuous light traffic
25. 2000 to 4000 ft from continuous medium-density traffic
22. 1000 to 2000 ft from continuous heavy-density traffic
18. 300 to 1000 ft from continuous heavy-density traffic
11. Within 300 ft of intermittent light traffic
12. Within 300 ft of continuous light traffic
13. Within 300 ft of continuous medium-density traffic
14. Within 300 ft of continuous heavy-density traffic
7. Nighttime, business or commercial area
8. Daytime, business or commercial area
9. Nighttime, industrial or manufacturing area
10. Daytime, industrial or manufacturing area
3. Nighttime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern
4. Daytime, suburban; no nearby traffic of concern
5. Nighttime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern
6. Daytime, urban; no nearby traffic of concern
CONDITION CURVE No. in FIGURE 2 or TABLE 5
1. Nighttime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern
2. Daytime, rural; no nearby traffic of concern
1
2
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J28
Figure 2 -Approximate average minimum outdoor background sound pressure levels associated with the
conditions of Table 4
Table 5 - Octave Band Sound Pressure Levels (in dB) of Outdoor Background Noise Curves of Figure 2
Final Noise Criterion
The measured or estimated average minimum background sound levels should now be compared,
band-by-band, with the tentative outdoor noise criterion determined previously. The larger of these values,
in each frequency band, now becomes the octave band sound pressure levels that comprise the final
outdoor noise criterion for the equipment installation.
Any new intruding sound is generally judged in comparison with the background sound that was already
there. If the new sound stands out loudly above the existing sound, the neighbors will notice it, be disturbed
by it, and object to it. On the other hand, if the new sound can hardly be heard in the presence of the old
sound, it will pass relatively unnoticed. Therefore, if the sound coming from the equipment is below or just
equal to the final noise criterion, it will not be noticed and our objectives will have been satisfied.
If there are two or more different criterion for a particular installation, the analysis should be carried out for
each situation and the lowest final criterion should be used.
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1 40 37 32 27 22 18 14 12
2 45 42 37 32 27 23 19 17
3 50 47 42 37 32 28 24 22
4 55 52 47 42 37 33 29 27
5 60 57 52 47 42 38 34 32
6 65 62 57 52 47 43 39 37
7 70 67 62 57 52 48 44 42
CURVE No. In
FIGURE 2
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY In Hz
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J29
Municipal Codes and Ordinances
Where local sound codes or ordinances exist, it is necessary to check the expected sound levels of the unit
to be installed, including any sound control treatments, to determine if they comply with the code
requirements. Depending on the form and language of the code, it may be necessary to introduce the code
sound levels into the noise criterion analysis.
Example
To summarize this procedure, consider a cooling tower installation located near the edge of a college
campus, approximately 300 feet (91.44 m) from a classroom building. The college is located within a large
city, and two main streets pass by one corner of the campus about 1500 feet (457.20 m) from the classroom
building. The cooling tower will be used both day and night during warm weather. The classroom must rely
on open windows for air circulation. Determine the noise criterion for the cooling tower.
The steps for this example are given in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, included as
Appendix D in this article.
Step 1 Determine the neighbor activity condition from Table 2. For good listening conditions inside a typical
classroom, select NC-30 as the noise criterion.
Step 2 In the indicated spaces under Item 2 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet, enter the sound pressure
levels for the octave frequency bands of the NC-30 curve as taken from Figure 1 or Table 1.
Step 3 Determine the wall condition of Table 3 that best describes the exterior wall of the classroom. Wall B
can be selected for normally open windows during the summer time. Insert the Wall B values in the Item 3
spaces.
Step 4 Add the values of Steps 2 and 3 together and insert the sums in the Item 4 spaces. This is the
tentative outdoor noise criterion.
Step 5 In the Item 5 spaces, enter either the measured average minimum background sound pressure levels
or the estimated background levels obtained from the use of Figure 2 and Tables 4 and 5. In this example,
we estimate that the traffic activity is best represented by 1000-2000 feet (304.8-609.6 m) from continuous
heavy-density traffic. This leads to Curve 5 of Figure 2 and Table 5, whose values are then inserted in the
Item 5 spaces.
Step 6 In the Item 6 spaces insert the higher value, in each frequency band, of either the Item 4 or Item 5
values. This is the final noise criterion.
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J30
In this example, note that the Item 4 values are equal to or higher than the Item 5 values in all bands. Thus,
the final noise criterion is based essentially on the classroom noise criterion and the wall condition.
However, the outdoor background noise estimate equals the tentative outdoor noise criterion in the 250
and 500 Hz bands. If they had been higher, in this example, those higher values would have been used in
setting the final noise criterion in those bands.
We will attempt to keep all octave band sound pressure levels of the selected cooling tower equal to, or
below, the values of Step 6. Should a sound code exist, this would be an appropriate point in the analysis to
check agreement between the code and the Step 6 final outdoor noise criterion. If the criterion developed
here is lower than the sound code levels at the specified distance, the sound analysis will yield results that
will comply with the code.
The remaining steps of this sound evaluation example are explained in later sections of this article as we
progress with the entire sound evaluation procedure.
Sound Levels for Evaporative Cooling
Equipment
Now that we have established an acceptable noise criterion, the next step is to study the source of the
sound and develop equipment sound levels at the neighbor location, in the same sound pressure level terms
used to express the noise criterion. It will be the aim of this section to discuss the actual sound pressure
levels of BAC evaporative cooling equipment, and to show how these levels can be corrected for various
distances and certain geometric arrangements.
The orientation of the equipment and distance from the equipment to the most critical neighbor will be our
primary concern. Where possible, the distance from the equipment to the neighbor should be kept as large
as possible, and the equipment should be oriented so that its lowest sound levels are radiated toward the
neighbor.
Evaporative cooling equipment sound ratings can be stated in terms of both sound pressure levels and
sound power levels, and both may be necessary to permit thorough sound analysis in a given situation.
However, in any sound evaluation, octave band sound pressure levels for the proposed equipment are
essential, and it is important to have a fairly accurate indication of the directivity characteristics of the
equipments sound.
For general use, sound pressure levels measured in the four different horizontal directions (one from each
side) of the unit, plus the vertical direction above, will yield the desired directivity data. The primary
requirements for obtaining the outdoor equipments sound levels are:
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J31
1. Accurate calibrated sound measurement equipment should be used.
2. Octave band sound pressure levels are mandatory.
3. The sound level data should indicate the true directivity effects of the units sound (there should be no
nearby buildings or obstructions to distort the true radiation pattern of the unit test).
4. The measurement distance should be specified.
Some equipment is rated in terms of the total sound power radiated, expressed as sound power level. Sound
power level is a valid index for comparing the sum of sounds radiated by evaporative cooling equipment, but
has the serious disadvantage of not revealing the directivity effects of the radiated sounds. Where only
sound power level data are given, the resulting conversion to sound pressure level at a particular location will
give less accurate results than if directional sound pressure level data are used. Sound generated by
evaporative cooling equipment is directional, and sound pressure level ratings are necessary in order to
determine the actual sound in any direction around the installation.
Single Number Rating System
Many attempts have been made to express the frequency content and pressure level (intensity) of sounds
using a single number system. The most common method used is the A-B-C weighting network of sound
level meters.
Sound meters with A-B-C weighting networks attempt to simulate the ears response to sound at different
pressure intensities. At a relatively low sound pressure level, the human ear is considerably more sensitive
to high frequency than to low frequency sounds. This difference, however, becomes less noticeable at higher
sound levels where the ear approaches more nearly equal sensitivity for low frequency and high frequency
sounds.
The A-scale weighting network is designed to simulate the ears response for low pressure sounds (below
about 55 dB). The B-scale weighting is designated to simulate the ears response for medium pressure
sounds (about 55 dB to 85 dB). The C-scale weighting tends to provide nearly equal response in all
frequencies and is used to approximate the ears response at higher sound pressure levels (above about
85 dB).
A-B-C scale ratings have been used in some sound ordinances and equipment sound ratings because of
their simplicity of statement. They may have value in some sound comparison situations, but such data are
of little value in making an engineering evaluation of a sound issue caused by evaporative cooling equipment,
because no indication of the frequency content of the sound is apparent. For example, two different types of
cooling towers could have the same A scale rating, but one could have most of its energy in the low
frequency bands while the other could have its energy concentrated in the high frequency bands. A single
number rating will give no indication of this and its use could lead to less than optimal and sometimes costly
decisions.
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J32
Comparison of Evaporative Cooling Equipment employing a Centrifugal
Fan versus an Axial Fan
Based on extensive studies of field data from several cooling tower installations, it has been found that
overall sound pressure levels of centrifugal fan cooling towers are about 5 to 7 dB lower than those of axial
fan cooling towers for the same cooling capacity even though the axial towers use about half the
horsepower. As a comparison, this means that an axial fan cooling tower would have to be twice as far
away from the neighbors as a centrifugal fan tower in order to be just as quiet (6 dB reduction for each
doubling of distance, see Table 6). The frequency distribution and the radiation patterns also differ for these
two types of units. For any specific comparison of cooling towers, the manufacturers actual measured data
should be used.
BAC Sound Ratings
BAC has measured the sound levels radiated by its products at 5-foot (1.52 m) and 50-foot (15.24 m)
distances for the five principle directions, (four horizontal and one vertical). The sample sound rating data
sheet shown on page J33 indicates the five principle directions and the type of sound data available for a
BAC cooling tower. As the data sheet suggests, the data given in the five blocks pertain to the sound pres-
sure levels measured at 5-foot and 50-foot distances from the five principle directions of the cooling tower.
Where it might be desired to estimate the sound pressure levels at some intermediate direction, such as
halfway between the right end and the air inlet, levels can be averaged or interpolated from the data actually
presented.
In addition to the five sets of sound pressure levels at each of the two distances, the data sheets contain the
calculated sound power level values for the reference power level 10
-12
watt. Current sound data for all BAC
equipment is available from BAC Representatives and from the BAC Selection Program, available at
www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
Since sound power levels are being mentioned here, it is appropriate at this point to note that Appendices A,
B, and C are given at the end of this article to supply basic information related to sound power levels and to
other calculations that may be required from time to time in a sound evaluation. Appendix A describes a
simplified method for calculating the sound power level of a unit where the five sets of sound pressure level
readings are known. Appendix B gives a procedure for calculating the average sound pressure level at a
given distance if the sound power level is known. Appendix C gives a simple procedure for adding decibel
values. This is required, for example, in converting sound pressure levels into sound power levels, or in
calculating an overall sound pressure level from the eight individual octave band levels, or in adding two or
more sound sources.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J33
Sound Rating Program, 11/21/2003 Release, 06/20/2002 Data
Series 3000
Top Lp
Sound Pressure (dB)
Distance
0clave
8ard 5 ft 50 ft
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
60
78
85
79
81
82
79
75
51
57
63
65
68
68
65
66
Model : 3299A
No. of Fans: (1) 7.5 ft. Diameter Fan Per Cell
Fan Type: Standard
Motor HP: 20 HP per fan
Octave band and A-weighted sound pressure levels (Lp) are expressed in decibels (dB)
reference 0.0002 microbar. Sound power levels (Lw) are expressed in decibels (dB)
reference one picowatt. Octave band 1 has a center frequency of 63 Hertz.
A-Wld 87 74
Air Inlet Lp
Sound Pressure (dB)
End Lp
Sound Pressure (dB)
Distance Distance
0clave
8ard 5 ft 50 ft
0clave
8ard 5 ft 50 ft
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
61
70
73
76
79
78
71
66
46
53
61
61
64
64
57
54
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
68
68
73
73
75
72
65
59
56
60
63
59
65
61
54
53
A-Wld 83 69 A-Wld 78 68
End Lp
Sound Pressure (dB)
Air Inlet Lp
Sound Pressure (dB)
Distance Distance
0clave
8ard 5 ft 50 ft
0clave
8ard 5 ft 50 ft
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
68
68
73
73
75
72
65
59
56
60
63
59
65
61
54
53
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
61
70
73
76
79
78
71
66
46
53
61
61
64
64
57
54
A-Wld 78 68 A-Wld 83 69
Sound Power (dB)
0clave
8ard
Cerler Frequercy
(lerlz) Lw
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
85
90
94
94
97
96
92
92
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J34
Effect of Distance Beyond 50 feet (15.24 m)
In any actual situation, it is usually necessary to determine the sound pressure levels of the equipment at
some distance other than the 5-foot (1.52 m) and 50-foot (15.24 m) distances given in the BAC rating
sheets. In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels at distances
beyond 50 feet.
For distances that are large compared to the dimensions of the unit, the inverse square law holds for
sound reduction with distance: i.e., for each doubling of distance from the unit, the sound pressure level
decreases 6 dB. Thus, for distances beyond 50 feet the inverse square law applies and the distance
correction is quite straightforward. Table 6 presents the reduction of sound pressure level for distances from
50 feet out to 2500 feet (762 m). The values given in Table 6 are to be subtracted from the sound pressure
levels at the given distance of 50 feet in order to arrive at the sound pressure levels at the distance of
interest.
For relatively short distances (less than 100 feet (30.5 m)), the same correction value applies to all eight
frequency bands. For the larger distances (greater than 100 feet), high frequency sound energy is absorbed
in the air and the correction terms have larger values in the high frequency bands. For distances greater
than about 500 feet, wind and temperature of the air may further influence sound propagation; but because
these are variables, they are not considered in this article and the correction figures of Table 6 represent
more or less average sound propagation conditions.
If the critical distance falls between the specific distances given in the left-hand column of Table 6,
interpolate the sound reduction value to the nearest 1 dB. Do not attempt to use fractions of decibels.
Table 6 - Reduction of Sound Pressure Level (in dB) for Distances beyond 50 feet
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
63 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
80 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
100 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7
125 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10
160 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 12
200 12 12 12 12 12 13 14 15
250 14 14 14 14 14 15 16 18
320 16 16 16 16 16 17 18 21
400 18 18 18 18 19 19 21 24
500 20 20 20 20 21 22 24 27
630 22 22 22 22 23 24 27 31
800 24 24 24 25 25 26 30 35
1000 26 26 26 27 27 29 34 40
1250 28 28 28 29 30 32 38 46
1600 30 30 30 31 32 35 43 53
2000 32 32 32 33 35 38 47 61
2500 34 34 34 36 38 42 53 70
Distance
(ft)
Octave Band Center Frequency in Hz
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J35
Effect of Distance Between 5 feet (1.52 m) and 50 feet (15.24 m)
In this section, distance corrections are given for estimating sound pressure levels in the close-in range of 5
feet (1.52 m) to 50 feet (15.24 m). When the distance from a sound source is small or comparable to the
dimensions of the source, the inverse square law does not necessarily hold true for variations of sound level
with distance. So, for the relatively short distances of 5 feet to 50 feet, it might be necessary to accept some
sound pressure level variations, which do not follow the straightforward trends that hold for distances beyond
50 feet. Table 7 permits us to estimate the sound pressure levels at these close-in distances, provided the
5-foot and 50-foot sound pressure levels are known.
To illustrate the use of Table 7, suppose the sound pressure level of a unit in a particular frequency band is
68 dB at 5 feet and 54 dB at 50 feet distance. The difference between these two values is 14 dB. In Table 7,
we find the column of values under the heading If the difference between the 5-foot and 50-foot levels is 13
15 dB. The numbers in this column are the values (in decibels) to be added to the 50-foot sound pressure
level of 54 dB to obtain the sound pressure level at some desired shorter distance. If, for instance, we wish
to know the sound pressure level of this unit at 15 feet, we find that we must add 8 dB to the 50-foot level of
54 dB to get 62 dB as the sound pressure level at the desired distance of 15 feet.
Now, for these close distances, the difference values between the 5-foot and 50-foot sound pressure levels
may not be constant for all frequency bands so it is necessary to follow this procedure for each octave band.
For example, in one frequency band the difference may be 12 dB but in another band it may be 15 or 16 dB.
Close-in interpolation of sound pressure levels is inherently somewhat unreliable; so do not be surprised if
some oddities or discrepancies in the data begin to appear at very close distances. The method used here at
least gives some fairly usable data to work with.
Table 7 - Interpolation Terms for Obtaining Sound Pressure Levels (in dB) Between 5 feet and 50 feet
* This column of values is based on the "Inverse Square Law" variation with distance from 50 feet all the way in to 5 feet.
All other columns represent variations with distances that do not follow the "Inverse Square Law."
4-6 dB 7-9 dB 10-12 dB 13-15 dB 16-18 dB 19-21 dB* 22-24 dB
50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
45 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
40 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
35 1 1 2 3 3 3 3
30 2 2 3 4 4 4 5
25 2 3 4 5 5 6 7
20 2 4 5 6 7 8 9
15 3 5 6 8 9 10 12
10 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
5 5 8 11 14 17 20 23
Distance at
which SPL is
desired(ft)
If the difference between the 5 ft and 50 ft levels is:
Add the following value to the 50-ft. sound level to obtain sound level at desired distance:
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J36
Reflecting Walls and Enclosures
Discussion so far has been concerned with what might be considered simple installations from an acoustic
point of view, where only distance to the neighbor and relative orientation of the unit have been required
points of consideration.
Frequently, the geometry of an installation involves some nearby reflecting walls or buildings, which adds to
the acoustic complexity of the site. Let us consider this for three typical situations:
Cases in which reflecting walls modify the radiation pattern of the sound from the unit to the neighbor
Cases in which close-in walls confine the unit and cause a build-up of close-in sound levels
Cases in which the unit is located in a well and all the sound radiates from the top of the wall
1. Effect of Reflecting Walls
Several factors that influence the amount of reflected sound are the following:
1) The sound radiation pattern (directivity) of the equipment
2) The radiating area of the equipment
3) The orientation of the equipment
4) The distance of the unit to the neighbors
5) The distance of the equipment to the reflecting wall
6) The area of the reflecting wall
7) Various angles of incidence and reflection between the equipment, the wall, and the neighbors
Because so many variables are involved, we will not attempt to develop a rigorous procedure for estimating
the influence of a reflecting wall. Rather, we caution that if a large reflecting surface is located near the
equipment, it should be considered as a potential reflector of sound. If the equipment is oriented such that
its loudest side is already facing toward the neighbor, the influence of the reflecting wall can be ignored!
However, if this is not the case, these conditions must be met for the reflected sound to be of concern:
1) The area of the reflecting wall is at least three times the area of the side of the equipment that faces
that wall
2) The distance from the unit to the reflecting wall is less than half the distance from the equipment to
the neighbor
3) If a simple optical ray diagram is drawn from the center of each unit to all parts of the reflecting wall
and the reflecting rays are then drawn away from the wall, the neighbor is located within the angular
range of the reflected rays (see sketch below)
If each of these three conditions is met, then the sound pressure levels at the neighbor may be higher than
if the wall were not there.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J37
Neighbor Area Influenced by the Reflecting Wall
In Figures 3 and 4, a few representative reflecting walls are shown for various orientations, and approximate
sound pressure level adjustments are suggested for A, B, C, and D directions away from the equipment.
These adjustments should be made using the 50-foot (15.24 m) levels. Figure 3 applies to units having one
air intake, while Figure 4 applies to units having two air intakes.
As an example, for Case 1, if the neighbor is located off the A side of the unit, apply the A adjustment to the
A side 50-foot sound pressure level rating of the unit and then correct as necessary to the neighbors
distance. If the situation is that of Case 9 and the neighbor is located in the direction D, then the D
adjustment would be utilized to arrive at a 50-foot sound pressure level for the unit.
Figure 3: For Single Air Inlet Units

A
B
C
D
CASE 1
A
B
C
D
CASE 2
A. Use average of A and C levels
B. Use average of B and C levels
C. Not applicable
D. Use average of D and C levels
A. Not applicable
B. Use greater of B level or average of B and A levels
C. No change to C levels
D. Use greater of D level or average of D and A levels
C
C
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J38
A
B
C
D
CASE 3
A. Use greater of A level or average of A
and B levels
B. Not applicable
D. Add 2 dB to D levels
A. Use average of A and C levels
B. Not applicable
C. Not applicable
D. Use average of D and C levels
A. Not applicable
B. Not applicable
D. Use average of A, C, D levels
For sound levels out the open end of a 3-sided
enclosure, add 3 dB to the sound pressure levels of
the air intake side of the unit.
CASE 4
A
B
C
D
CASE 5
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
CASE 6
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J39
A
B
C
D
CASE 7
A. Add 2 dB to A levels
B. Use average of B and C levels
C. Not applicable
D. Use average of C and D levels
A
B
C
D
CASE 8
A
B
C
D CASE 9
A. No change to A levels
B. Not applicable
A. Not applicable
B. Not applicable
C. Add 2 dB to C levels
A
B
C
D
CASE 10
Figure 4: For dual air inlet units
These figures and their associated adjustment values are to be used to correct base 50 ft sound pressure
level ratings in the neighbor direction for the effect of the reflecting surface conditions shown. Instructions on
when and how to do so are presented on page J36.
For sound levels out the open end of a
3-sided enclosure, add 3 dB to the sound
pressure levels of the air intake side(s)
of the unit.
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J40
2. Build-Up of Close-In Sound Levels
Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located very close to a building wall, inside a court formed by
two or three surrounding walls, or even in a specially provided room or space in the mechanical equipment
area inside a building. In these installations, the principal concern may be the sound in the immediate
vicinity (within 5-10 feet) of the unit(s), rather than the sound levels radiated and reflected away to some
neighbor location.
For these situations, we may use Table 7 to determine approximately the sound pressure levels for the
close-in distances of interest, and then add an increment to account for the build-up of sound levels. Here
also, the geometry of the layout controls the problem and it is not possible to give a general solution that will
cover the multitude of possible layouts. As an approximate acknowledgement of this situation, we suggest
that the close-in sound pressure levels be increased by 5 dB, recognizing that the range of increase could
be as little as 2 or 3 dB (in a fairly open courtyard) and as much as 10 to 15 dB (in a fairly confined
mechanical room enclosure). This adjustment should be applied to all eight-octave band readings.
3. Sound Radiation from a Four-Sided Enclosure or Well
Evaporative cooling equipment is sometimes located inside a four-sided enclosure or well, where all the
sound radiates more-or-less vertically out the top of the well and then spills over the sidewalls of the well.
A simple generalized solution to this problem is not possible, but a reasonable approximation can be made.
While the sidewalls serve as barrier walls against normal sound radiation in horizontal directions, the
four-sided enclosure tends to average-out any free-field directional characteristics of the unit and causes
an average sound pressure level to be radiated from the top of the well in all directions in which sound is
free to radiate per the geometry of the situation. Appendix B provides a procedure for calculating sound
pressure levels for a given sound power level, at various distances and with several radiation patterns.
In the typical case illustrated, where the sound from the well radiates over a hemisphere, the sound
pressure levels of the unit at a 50-foot distance would be determined by subtracting 32 dB from the sound
power levels of the unit.
It should be recognized that this method of sound evaluation is an approximation. Actual sound levels may
be somewhat lower in the higher frequency bands, and could be slightly lower in the lower frequency range
depending upon the neighbor location relative to the equipment. If the sidewall of the well clearly serves as
a barrier wall for the radiated sound, barrier wall attenuation values can be applied to the problem in the
same manner as the sound evaluation procedure of this article subsequently permits for the non-well type
installation.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J41
Example Continued
Let us now summarize Step 2 in the sound evaluation process, looking at the source of sound and correcting
it for distance and path. This will yield equipment sound pressure levels for the same point, which the final
noise criterion was calculated in the earlier example.
We are now interested in Items 7-11 in the sample Sound Evaluation Work Sheet (see Appendix D) which
pertain to the cooling tower sound pressure levels as extrapolated to the 300-foot distance. We continue the
step-by-step procedure on the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet where we left off earlier.
Step 7 Decide on the preferred orientation of the cooling tower at the site. From the BAC Sound Rating
Data Sheet (page J33 shows a sample), determine the sound pressure levels at the 50-foot distance for the
side of the cooling tower facing the college classroom. Assume one of the end sides here (the blank-off
sides), since they are the quietest. Insert these sound pressure level values in the Item 7 spaces of the
Sound Evaluation Work Sheet.
Step 8 Insert the distance 300 feet in the appropriate space under Item 8 and refer to Table 6 for the
distance correction values corresponding to 300 feet. Insert these values in eight spaces of Item 8.
Step 9 The sound pressure levels at 300 feet will be lower than at 50 feet, hence subtract the Item 8 values
from the Item 7 values and insert the remainder in the Item 9 spaces. These then are the sound pressure
levels that will exist just outside the college classroom, 300 feet from the cooling tower.
Step 10 Had there been a sound increase due to the presence of a reflecting wall that met one of the
conditions illustrated by Figures 3 or 4, corrections would be inserted now in the Item 10 spaces. Had this
been a close-in problem involving a build-up of sound levels due to some nearby enclosing walls around the
tower, +5 dB would have been inserted in the Item 10 spaces. Since neither of these conditions applied in
this example, we insert 0 in each of the Item 10 spaces.
Step 11 Item 11 is the sum of Items 9 and 10. This is the sound pressure level of the cooling tower at the
300-foot distance.
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J42
Example Continued
From the material given in the two preceding sections, it is now possible to determine if a particular cooling
tower will be satisfactory (from a sound point-of-view) in a given location for a given set of circumstances.
The analysis now consists of comparing the estimated cooling tower sound levels with the noise criterion
developed for the neighbor situation. The comparison may be made by plotting the sound levels and the
noise criterion on a graph, as show in Figure 5, or merely by comparing the two groups of values on a
band-by-band basis. We are now interested in Items 12-13.
Step 12 Merely as a means of simplifying the next step, copy in the Item 12 spaces the values taken from
Item 6, which was the Final Noise Criterion.
Step 13 By subtracting the Final Noise Criterion (Item 12) from the Resultant Cooling Tower Sound Pressure
Levels (Item 11), we determine if there is any excess of cooling tower sound above the criterion. Any
positive-valued remainder represents sound excess above the criterion. Any negative-valued remainder
means that the cooling tower level is below the criterion and no sound reduction is required in the frequency
bank; hence, 0 is inserted in that space.
If the cooling tower levels in all eight octave bands are below the criterion values, there should be no sound
problem. If two or three of the cooling tower levels exceed the criterion values by only 1 or 2 or 3 dB, there
will probably be no sound problem. If several octave band sound levels exceed the criterion by 5 to 10 dB,
or more, a sound problem should be anticipated the higher the sound excess the more assured is the
problem if suitable measures are not taken.
Figure 5 - Comparison of Final Noise Criterion and Equipment Sound Levels
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Octave Band Center Frequency - Hz
S
o
u
n
d

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

L
e
v
e
l

d
B

R
E

0
.
0
0
0
2

m
i
c
r
o
b
a
r
Final noise criterion (see line 6 & 12 of wksheet) Noise from unit at neighbor location (line 11)
Comparison of Noise Criteria and Evaporative
Cooling Equipment Sound Levels
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J43
Judgment Factor
At this point, some remarks should be made on the overall reliability of this approach, and an opportunity
should be provided for inserting a judgment factor. In as much as the original criterion selection was based
mostly on lower range NC values for the various environments considered, the derivation presented here
may be somewhat conservative. Because of this, decisions based on this approach will usually lead to
acceptance of the sound from the equipment. As explained throughout the procedure, several
approximations are made (such as for the sound reduction of various general types of walls, and the sound
estimates of community or traffic background sounds, and others). These approximations may lead to some
variability from one installation to the next, although it is believed that a small amount of variability can be
accommodated by the procedure without changing the results unreasonably.
Experience shows that where the criterion is based on sleeping at night, the criterion should not be
exceeded, and therefore, the conclusions reached by this procedure should be followed. However, where the
criterion is based on somewhat less critical daytime activities, and the background sound frequently ranges
considerably above the average minimum conditions used here, then the risk is not too great if the criterion is
exceeded by about 5 dB. In such cases the criterion should not be exceeded by more than 5 dB for fear of
serious objections. If it is decided to permit the sound to exceed the criterion by as much as 10 dB or more,
sound reduction steps should be considered for future addition to the installation, even though they may not
be included in the initial installation.
In view of the above, if the equipments owner, architect or engineer chooses to follow a conservative
approach or even to allow for some excess sound on a particular project (that is, permit the equipments
sound to exceed the background sounds slightly and thus be identifiable and possibly disturbing to the
neighbors), this opportunity is afforded in Items 14 and 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet.
Step 14 Insert the cooling tower owners Judgment Factor. For a conservative approach insert 0 dB in the
Item 14 spaces of the Work Sheet. To purposely allow the cooling tower sound to exceed the acceptable
levels slightly, insert 5 dB in the Item 14 spaces.
Step 15 The Final Sound Reduction Requirement for the cooling tower is the difference, in each band,
obtained by subtracting Item 14 from Item 13. These are the attenuation values in each octave band
necessary to reduce the cooling tower sound to an acceptable level. A brief discussion of sound control for
evaporative cooling equipment is given in the next section.
Step 16 Sound reduction can be accomplished in several ways, and quantitative values for possible sound
reduction steps are discussed in the next section. Step 16 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet should
include the attenuation obtained from the use of two-speed fan motors, ENERGY-MISER
Fan System, VFD,

low sound fans, barrier walls, and from any special acoustic treatments to be provided. Other situations that
may apply are oversizing the equipment and utilizing strategic layout.
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J44
The sound reduction required for evaporative cooling equipment is simply the excess of the equipments
sound pressure levels over the applicable noise criterion levels. This is shown numerically by the dB values
found in Item 15 of the Sound Evaluation Work Sheet when the particular calculation is carried out. The
clue as to whether it will be a simple or complex sound reduction problem lies largely in the amount and
frequency distribution of the required sound reduction.
Job conditions may allow some quieting to be obtained by strategically positioning the equipment, controlling
the fan motor, installing a low sound fan option, or constructing barrier walls located between the equipment
and neighbor. Additional sound reduction needs may be met with packaged attenuators or other acoustic
treatments, which, in general, can achieve high frequency noise reduction rather easily but usually involve
larger weight and space requirements to accomplish low frequency quieting.
Strategic Positioning
The first and most economical strategy in reducing sound pressure levels from evaporative cooling
equipment involves considering the layout of the equipment. Strategic Positioning includes two aspects.
First, make sure to position the quietest side of the equipment towards the sound sensitive direction. This
option should always be a first consideration with single side air inlet products. Next, take advantage of any
existing sound barriers that may aid in muffling the sound from the equipment to the neighbor. For example,
if a building or shed exists on the job site, position the equipment so that the structure blocks the direct path
between the equipment and the neighbor, thus acting as a sound barrier. Trees and bushes are also good
examples of barriers that greatly reduce sound exposure at neighboring properties.
Fan Motor Control
Operating the equipment at various speeds by utilizing a VFD, ENERGY-MISER
Fan System or a
two-speed motor is a practical option of sound control if reduced equipment loads can be made to coincide
with periods when low sound pressure levels are required. This is a normal nighttime situation for many air
conditioning installations.
An 1800-900 rpm fan motor operating at 900 rpm would provide about 60% of full-load capacity on a BAC
unit and would give approximately the following octave band dB noise reductions:
Evaporative Cooling Equipment
Sound Control
FREQUENCY BAND Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4 6 8 10 8 8 6 4
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J45
In as much as these are average dB reductions that can be anticipated for half-speed operation, these
figures can apply to both sound power and sound pressure levels. Also, these approximations are sufficiently
accurate to be used for both centrifugal and axial fan towers.
In addition to running the equipment at a lower speed during noise-critical hours, it is beneficial to investigate
whether or not the equipment could be turned off completely during these hours. This would completely
negate any sound created by the unit; however, the system and its loads must be researched to understand if
this option is feasible.
In some cases what people find objectionable is not the steady sound of the equipment, it is the abrupt
stopping and starting of the fan system. Properly setting the tower control sequence to avoid excessive
cycling of fan motors is important in this regard, as well as to protect the motor from overheating. VFDs
solve this issue by allowing for a soft start of the fans, followed by a gentle ramping up and down of the fan
speed in line with the load requirement. Simply stated, VFD's allow the fan motor to run at the speed
required to meet leaving water temperature requirements rather than running at full speed all the time.
Decreasing the motor speed, and therefore the fan rpm, can decrease sound levels significantly. VFD's also
minimize harsh sounding on-off cycles by providing a gradual start.
Figure 6 - BAC axial fan cooling tower utilizing the ENERGY-MISER
Fan System
Figure 7 - If applicable, turn towers off at night to eliminate sound
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J46
Figure 8 - VFD with Integrated Bypass
Oversizing the Equipment
If space and budget allow, it may be beneficial to oversize the equipment and run the larger capacity
equipment at a lower fan speed rated for the specific job. As discussed in the previous section, reducing the
motor speed reduces the fan speed and because fan speed is directly proportional to sound, reduces sound.
Low Sound Fans
Another option for reducing the sound that
the equipment produces is to select a low
sound fan. Low sound fans provide
greater solidity than regular fans and so
are able to move the same amount of air,
while operating at a slower speed.
Barrier Walls
Barrier walls can be used to provide sound
attenuation. In some cases barrier walls may exist due to the architectural treatment of the site, while at
other times they are constructed specifically to provide needed sound reduction.
Taking the first case, a wall used to shield a unit from view can also act to reduce the sound radiated by the
tower, particularly high frequency sound (broadly considered here as the upper four octave frequency
bands). However, such barrier walls must cover by line-of-sight the entire sound source as observed from
the neighbors position. Louvered, latticed or slotted openings will render negligible the attenuation abilities
of a barrier wall. A solid wall of height equal to a unit and located close to it will provide the following
approximate attenuation:
Figure 9 - Axial Fans
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J47
When greater attenuation is required, a larger specially constructed barrier wall may be designed and
installed. Care must be taken, though, in locating the wall because of the many geometric and material
considerations involved.
As an example, a barrier wall that (1) extends at least 3 to 5 feet (.9 to 1.5m) beyond the line-of-sight in both
the horizontal and vertical directions, (2) that is located within 5 to 8 feet (1.5 to 2.4m) of the cooling tower
and (3) that is made of a solid impervious material having a surface weight of at least 2 lb per sq foot will
have approximately the following attenuation:
A still larger and heavier barrier wall will provide still greater attenuation. To be most effective, however, a
barrier wall must be located as close as possible to the sound source and there must be no reflecting
surfaces in the area that can reflect sound around the barrier.
Design details of barrier walls and other acoustic treatment such as customengineered plenum chambers
and acoustic mufflers are best left to acoustical engineers or consultants and acoustical treatment
manufacturers.
Figure 10 - Architectural walls being constructed around FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
FREQUENCY BAND Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4 5 5 5 5 6 7 8
FREQUENCY BAND Hz
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
5 5 6 8 10 12 14 16
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J48
Sound Attenuation
A significant feature of both axial and centrifugal fan equipment is that its noise, if it is a problem at all, can
be treated with relatively simple package attenuation. Figure 11 is a photograph of a BAC Series 3000
Cooling Tower (axial fan), with sound attenuation on both the intake and discharge of the unit. The fan
intake attenuator is an array of parallel baffles and the discharge treatment is a lined plenum chamber.
Lined plenum chambers, to be effective, (1) must be fairly large, (2) should contain a thick absorbent lining,
and (3) should be arranged such that the sound path through the plenum includes does not allow line-of-
sight. Depending on the degree to which the plenum chamber conforms to these three requirements, its
sound reduction may range in the order of 5 to 10 dB for low frequency noise up to 10 to 20 dB for high
frequency noise.
Some BAC attenuation packages provide a sound reduction in the horizontal direction of about 12 to 17 dB
in the high frequency bands. The attenuation is less in the low frequency bands. Such accessory-type
attenuation can provide an economical solution to most sound problems. Exact values of the attenuation of
these factory-available units can be obtained from BAC Representatives.
Figure 11 - Intake and discharge sound attenuation on a BAC
Series 3000 Cooling Tower
Effects of Sound Reduction Options on
Equipment Performance
The cost of sound attenuation, including the effect on performance, must be evaluated versus simpler
methods such as oversizing the unit(s) to meet the sound criteria for a project. Note that with either low
sound fans or add-on attenuation, lower sound levels often come at the expense of lower airflow. The
system designer must ensure that the manufacturers ratings are adjusted to account for any decrease in
thermal performance from this reduction in airflow.
Another caution is for the use of sound barrier walls. It is necessary for barrier walls to be far enough away
from the tower so as to prevent recirculation of the moist discharge air. If this practice is not followed, the
warm air can be introduced to the air intake, increasing the wet bulb temperature of the unit, and in turn
decreasing the cooling capacity of the tower.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J49
Summary
Appendix A
This article provides a simple and direct evaluation method for determining whether or not a given
evaporative cooling equipment installation is producing, or will produce, excess sound. It also offers some
general information on methods that can be used to reduce the sound.
BAC can provide reliable sound level data on its open cooling towers, closed-circuit cooling towers, and
evaporative condensers through their representatives. Consult your local BAC Representative for specific
project applications.
Acknowledgement:
BAC extends its sincere appreciation to Mark E. Schaeffer, P.E. (President of Schaffer
Acoustics Inc. of Pacific Palisades, CA) for his contributions to this article.
The Calculation of Sound Power Level (Lw) From Measured Sound
Pressure Levels (Lp)
Sound power is a measure of the total acoustic power radiated by a sound source. Sound power level is
the sound power, expressed in decibels, relative to the reference power quantity 10
-12
watt.
Sound power is not directly measured as such. Instead, it is a calculated quantity and is obtained from the
measurement of sound pressure levels at a suitable number of measurement positions. Even in indoor
testing with reverberant or semi-reverberant rooms and a standard reference sound source, sound power
level is calculated from sound pressure level measurements. In this discussion, no technical detail is given for
the derivation of sound power level; instead, a very simple procedure is provided for establishing the
approximate sound power level of evaporative cooling equipment for the case in which the sound pressure
level is measured at four horizontal positions (each position at a specific distance from each of the four sides)
plus one vertical position above the unit. The measurement positions may be at any distance between 2 and
4 times the units largest dimension, which is usually its length.
The measured sound pressure levels must be obtained with accurate, calibrated equipment, and the sound
data must be in the conventional eight octave bands of frequency. The measurements should be made
under essentially free-field conditions: i.e., outside in an area free of any nearby reflecting surfaces. The unit
is assumed to be located on the ground or on a platform reasonably close to ground level.
The approximate sound power level in each of the eight octave bands is the sum, by decibel addition, of the
individual five sound pressure level readings in each octave band plus a correction term (K) which is a
function of the number of measurements positions, the measurement distance and the reference power. In
equation form, this can be expressed as
Lw= Lp + K
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J50
The decibel summation of a number of sound pressure levels is determined from the material given in
Appendix C and the correction terms are given below in Table A for the appropriate conditions. The use of
the five measurement positions and the decibel addition of the five readings automatically introduce the
directivity characteristics of the unit into the calculated sound power level. No further provision for directivity
is required in this simplified method.
To illustrate this procedure, suppose we wish to estimate the sound power level (Lw) in one octave band for
the case of the five-position measurements 50 feet (15.24 m) from a cooling tower. Assume the five sound
pressure levels measured in the particular frequency band are 56, 53, 59, 53 and 47 dB (re 0.0002
microbar).
By the decibel addition method shown in Appendix C we find that the decibel sum of these five sound
pressure levels is 62 dB. From Table A we then find that for the 50-foot measurement distance, the
correction term is 25 dB re 10
-12
watt. For this example,
Lw = Lp + K
= 62 + 25
= 87 dB
The same procedure could be followed for all octave bands to get the complete Lw of the cooling tower.
The procedure given here is for the specific five measurement positions noted and may not be applicable
generally to other situations. The procedure is not accurate to less than 1 dB, so fractional values of
decibels should not be used or relied upon.
Table A
Correction term K to be used in converting Sound Pressure Levels (Lp) into Sound Power Level (Lw) for
special five-position procedure given
Measurement Distance
(to Acoustic Center) (ft)
Correction Term K for
Lw re 10
-12
Watt (dB)
25 19
30 20
35 21
40 23
45 24
50 25
60 26
70 27
80 29
90 30
100 31
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J51
The Calculation of Average Sound Pressure Level (Lp) For A Given Sound
Power Level (Lw)
For comparative purposes it may occasionally be necessary to estimate the approximate average sound
pressure level radiated by a unit for which only the sound power level is given. There are also some
applications that are best appraised by converting sound power back to average sound pressure levels. The
procedure outlined in this Appendix will provide this estimate.
It is important to realize that the resulting value is an average sound pressure level that theoretically would be
radiated the same in all directions from the unit. In practice, the unit probably would not radiate the same
levels in all directions; but, when only the sound power level is given it is not possible to know the directivity
characteristics of the unit.
The average sound pressure level at a desired distance is obtained by subtracting from the sound power
level in any given octave frequency band the appropriate correction term (C) from Table B. In equation form,
this relationship is expressed as
Lp
Avg.
= Lw C
As an illustration, suppose we wish to know the average sound pressure at a 50-foot (15.24 m) distance for a
cooling tower that is stated to have a sound power level 87 dB re 10
-12
watt. (Note that this is the
counterpart of the example given in Appendix A.) From Table B, for a 50-foot distance, we see that the
correction term is 32 dB.
Lp
Avg.
= Lw C
= 87 32
= 55 dB
By comparing this value with the five levels fed into the illustration in Appendix A, we see that although this is
an average value, it actually does not equal any of the levels from the five measured directions. Note again
that the average value does not pretend to show the directivity characteristics of the sound source.
If two competitive cooling towers are being compared for a particular site condition, a comparison of the
sound power level or the average sound pressure level may be a general clue to the relative sound from the
two units, but a more careful comparison should take into account the actual sound levels to be radiated in
the particular critical direction(s).
Appendix B
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J52
Table B
Correction terms C to be used in converting Sound Power Level into average Sound Pressure Level
for special five-position procedure given.
Note: The correction term C is based on the sound radiating uniformly over a hemisphere. This would apply
for a typical ground level installation or for a unit located on a large roof. If there are conditions such that
the sound will radiate over a large angle, say a 3/4 sphere, add 3 dB to the above C. Subtract 3 dB from
the above C for a 1/4 sphere radiation.
For distance beyond 100 feet (30.48 m) calculate the average Lp for 50 feet (15.24 m) using the method
here; then extrapolate to the desired distance using the Lp reduction values of Table 6 on page J34.
Measurement Distance
(to Acoustic Center) (ft)
Correction Term K for
Lw re 10
-12
Watt (dB)
25 26
30 27
35 28
40 30
45 31
50 32
60 33
70 34
80 36
90 37
100 38
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J53
Addition of Decibels
Since decibels are logarithmic values it is not proper to add them by normal algebraic addition. For example,
63 dB plus 63 dB does not equal 126 dB but only 66 dB.
A very simple, but adequate schedule for adding decibels is as follows:
When several decibel values are to be added, perform the above operation on any two numbers at a time,
the order does not matter. Continue the process until only a single value remains.
As an illustration let us add the five sound levels used in the example of Appendix B.
Or, suppose we arrange the same numbers in a different order, as in:
Sometimes, using different orders of adding may yield sums that might differ by 1 dB, but this is not too
significant a difference in acoustics. In general, the above simplified summation procedure will yield accurate
sums to the nearest 1 dB. This degree of accuracy is considered acceptable in the material given in this
article.
Appendix C
1 dB
When two decibel
values differ by:
9 dB or more 0 dB
Add the following amount
to the higher value
0 or 1 dB
2 or 3 dB
4 to 8 dB
3 dB
2 dB
= 58
= 60
= 60
= 62
= 54
= 61
= 57
= 62
56
53
56
59
59
53
47
47
53
53
dB
dB
F
u
n
d
a
m
e
n
t
a
l
s

o
f

S
o
u
n
d
J54
BAC Sound Evaluation Worksheet
Job Name______________________________ Date_____________________________________
Address _______________________________ Engineer ________________________________
Architect ______________________________ BAC Unit_________________________________
Appendix D
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
C
o
m
p
a
r
i
s
o
n
,

C
r
i
t
e
r
i
a

v
s

L
e
v
e
l
s
3. Tabulate sound reduction provided by wall
construction. (Obtain Values from Table 3)
N
o
i
s
e

C
r
i
t
e
r
i
o
n
6. Set final outdoor background Noise Criterion. (high
value, by octave band, of Items 4 and 5)
7. Enter unit sound pressure level rating at 50 ft.
8. Insert distance correction to adjust unit ratings to
distance of ____ ft in direction toward critical neighbor.
(For distances greater than 50 ft use Table 6; for
distances less than 50 ft use Table 7)
S
o
u
n
d

L
e
v
e
l
s
1. Determine appropriate "NC" Criterion for neighbor
activity from ASHRAE Handbook or Table 2 of this article.
4. Establish tentative outdoor Noise Criterion for the unit.
(Item 2 plus Item 3)
5. List average minimum outdoor background sound
levels. (measured, or estimated from Figure 2 and Tables
4, 5)
2. Insert sound pressure levels (Lp) for selected "NC"
Criterion. (Obtain values from Figure 1 or Table 1)
Center Frequency-Hz
NC=
9. Establish outdoor unit Lp at neighbor location. (Item 7
minus Item 8 for distances greater than 50 ft. Item 7 plus
Item 8 for distances less than 50 ft.)
10. Apply reflection adjustment to meet condition existing
at unit site. Refer to Figures 3 and 4 for effect of reflecting
walls; or add 5 dB for close-in build up of noise; 0 dB if no
reflection effects.
16. Indicate estimated or rated attenuation of all sound
reduction treatment if used. (Should at least equal Item
15)
14. Apply judgment factor. (For conservative approach,
use "0" in all bands. To permit unit noise to exceed
background levels slightly, insert "5")
11. Tabulate resultant unit Lp at critical neighbor location.
(Item 9 plus Item 10)
12. Copy Item 6 levels from above. This is the outdoor
noise criterion for the critical neighbor.
13. Ascertain tentative sound reduction required for unit.
(Item 11 minus Item 12. Insert "0" for negative values).
15. Tabulate final sound reduction requirement for the
job. (Item 13 minus Item 14)
Items Steps
P
i
p
i
n
g

C
o
n
s
i
d
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
J55
Piping Considerations
Maximum Fluid Velocity
BAC designs its standard evaporative cooling products to limit fluid velocities to approximately 10 feet per
second (fps) through all piping connection points. This generally accepted piping practice is recommended
for a variety of reasons:
Friction Loss: Higher fluid velocities increase friction losses (commonly referred to as pressure drop),
resulting in increased pump energy costs.
Noise and Vibration: Systems designed to current codes minimize excessive noise or vibration
when the fluid velocity is held to 10 fps.
Erosion / Corrosion: Fluids have a greater propensity to damage the inside walls of pipe at high
velocities. The effect of velocity is increased with chemically aggressive fluids or fluids with a high amount of
solids entrained in the fluid stream.
Hydraulic Shock: Also known as water hammer, hydraulic shock can cause excessive damage
when a line is shut down suddenly. Maintaining a low fluid velocity will substantially reduce the impact of
hydraulic shock.
BAC Standard Connection Sizes
GPM = (U.S.) Gallons Per Minute
BACs Closed Circuit Cooling Tower selection software is programmed to automatically select the appropriate
quantity and size of entering and leaving process fluid connections, to maintain the limits listed above. Only
by specific customer request and acceptance will BAC provide evaporative cooling products designed for
higher velocities. Fewer connection points and smaller pipe sizes associated with high fluid velocities may
reduce installation costs, but the customer must also consider the increased operating costs and equipment
maintenance concerns. Successful operation of BACs equipment in the system is based on established
industry principles.
Connection
Diameter
Maximum Flow
Max. Fluid
Velocity
Connection
Diameter
Maximum
Flow
Max. Fluid
Velocity
3 225 GPM 10.2 fps 10 2,300 GPM 9.4 fps
4 400 GPM 10.2 fps 12 3,200 GPM 9.1 fps
6 900 GPM 10.2 fps 14 3,700 GPM 7.8 fps
8 1,600 GPM 10.2 fps 16 4,650 GPM 6.7 fps
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J56
This section courtesy of ITT Industries, Inc.
COPYRIGHT 2003 ITT INDUSTRIES, INC.

Tower Pumping
Tower pumping does not present great difficulty in terms of good pump application. Troubles do occur
occasionally, however, and these troubles can be classified as caused by:
1. Incorrect pump head estimation.
2. Pump cavitation and loss of pumping ability, as caused by inadequate pump suction pressure.
3. Air in pump suction; as caused by tower pan vortex, pan drain-down or faulty bypass.
4. Unstable pump operational points as caused by:
(a) Improper application of tower bypass controls.
(b) High pressure drop tower spray nozzles in combination with tower bypass.
5. Inadequate maintenance procedures causing:
(a) Plugged suction strainer.
(b) Lack of tower treatment with consequent fouling of the condenser.
It is intended that each potential trouble source be evaluated so that the necessary design safeguards
can be erected against operational problems.
Open Tower System Pump Head Requirements
The pumping head determination procedure for the open tower piping loop differs from the
conventional closed loop piping circuit used for most Hydronic (Heat-Cool) applications. The
difference concerns consideration of open loop static heads. The closed loop circuit has no need for
consideration of static heads for pump selection because of a balance or cancellation of static heads
between the supply and return risers. Static head lost by water flow to any height in the supply piping is
cancelled by a static head regain as water flows down the return piping. The only pump head
requirement for the closed loop is that due to flow-friction pressure drop; static heights are not
considered.
Cooling Tower Pumping
and Piping
Reprinted with permission from ITT Industries, Inc. Copyright 2003.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J57
The open or tower circuit is different
from the closed loop circuit. The
difference is that all static heads are
not cancelable. In the open piping
circuit, the pump must raise fluid from a
low reference level to a higher level;
this requires pump work and open
statics becomes an important
consideration for pump selection.
In Figure 2, the required pump head
will be the pipe flow-friction loss from
A to D plus the energy head (H
s
)
required to raise water from the lower to
higher level.
The cooling tower circuit differs slightly from the basic open circuit in that the discharge piping is
seldom connected directly to a discharge tank. The tower discharge is generally to atmosphere and
then into a distribution pan.
FIGURE 1. STATIC HEIGHT (H) NOT CONSIDERED FOR
PUMP SELECTION IN CLOSED LOOP
FIGURE 2. OPEN PIPING CIRCUIT
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J58
For the tower piping circuit, the pump
must overcome the piping flow friction
loss; piping, condenser, valves, etc. It
must also provide the energy head
necessary to raise water from a low to a
higher static head level.
Most discussions concerning tower
and/or open piping circuits would simply
define the required pump static energy
head as H
o
(in Figure 3); the open
height of the piping circuit. This is,
however, an over-simplified assumption
which may or may not be true
depending on whether or not a siphon
draw is established in the downcomer
return piping DE.
The nature of the downcomer siphon draw and its limitations should be evaluated.
Downcomer Siphon Draw
In Figure 3, water is being discharged at E to atmosphere. Pressure at D must be equal to exit loss
plus flow-friction loss DE and minus the static pressure reduction caused by downcomer return static
height H
r
.
Pressure reduction to D as caused by static height H
r
will generally, but not always, permit cancellation
of height H
r
as a part of the required pump head. This is because of a resultant siphon draw action in
the downcomer.
Given that the siphon draw does indeed occur, the required pump head will become:
PUMP HEAD = H
o
+ h (AE)
The pump head selection statement shown above is commonly accepted as a truism. It has
limitations, however, and will not apply under certain circumstances. These circumstances should be
understood if unnecessary cost and embarrassment are to be avoided by the consultant.
Exit loss and flow-friction loss in the downcomer will generally be less than the downcomer height H
r
.
For this circumstance the downcomer must operate at sub-atmospheric pressure when the siphon draw
is established. If the downcomer vacuum is broken, the expected siphon draw will not occur and the
estimated pump head may be inadequate.
FIGURE 3. TYPICAL OPEN TOWER PIPING CIRCUIT
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J59
The expected downcomer return siphon draw vacuum can be broken by any of three basic application
circumstances:
1. Top vented downcomer.
2. Inadequate downcomer flow rates; bottom vented downcomer.
3. Fluid vapor pressure or flash considerations.
Top Vented Downcomer
A downcomer vent will break the siphon draw vacuum. The vent may be a simple loose pipe connection
- or it may be a mechanical vent purposefully applied at the downcomer return high point.
Vents are sometimes applied to establish known reference pumping conditions when downcomer return
siphon draw conditions propose stability problems; as with a very high downcomer, when fluid boiling is
a probability or when start-up downcomer flow rates are anticipated as inadequate for the siphon draw.
Given a top vented downcomer, it will be seen that the pump must raise water from the pump suction
pan water level to the highest vented point in the downcomer.
Considering this point to occur at D in Figure 3, the required pump static head will become:
H
o
+ H
r
= H
s
The total pumping head to point D will become H
s
plus the flow-friction loss h (AD). Separate
consideration must now be given to the downcomer return.
Since the pump has raised water to level D, it will have provided a fluid head equal to H
r
to overcome
flow-friction loss in the downcomer. There are two different pumping possibilities; fluid head H
r
greater
than downcomer flow-friction loss (h DE) and the reverse: H
r
less than h (DE).
The usual pumping circumstance will be the condition of H
r
greater than h (DE). This is because the
available fluid head H
r
is the equivalent of 100 ft / 100 ft pipe friction loss rate. Downcomer piping
flow-friction loss will generally be to the order of 4 ft /100 ft. Since the pump has already provided the
necessary fluid head to flow the downcomer, H
r
> h (DE); flow loss in the downcomer is not a part of
the required pump head and total pump head becomes:
PUMP HEAD; H
r
> h (DE) = H
s
+ h (AD)
High downcomer pressure drops can be caused by control valves or tower spray nozzles. When this
pressure drop plus the downcomer pipe flow-friction loss exceeds fluid head H
r
, the pump head must be
increased by the difference h (DE) minus H
r
. Total pump head then becomes:
PUMP HEAD; h (DE) > H
r
= H
s
+ h (AD) + [h (DE) H
r
]
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J60
Bottom Vented Downcomer; Inadequate Flow Rates
Downcomer flow rates can be so low, relative to pipe size, as to allow air to enter at the pipe discharge.
This circumstance will cause the downcomer to become vented and will prevent formation of the
necessary siphon draw vacuum.
Tests conducted at ITT Bell & Gossett indicate that the siphon draw will not be established when the
actual flow-friction loss rate is less than the order of 1 ft /100 ft based on clean pipe pressure drop
evaluation.
Pump head requirements for the bottom vented downcomer will be as previously noted for the top
vented circumstance.
An unfortunate operational sequence can occur during pump start-up when the pump energy head is
devoted towards simply raising water from the low level pan to the highest part of the system.
During this start-up period, flow rates can be so low as to cause bottom venting and prevent
(sometimes forever) formation of siphon draw circumstances and full design flow rates. A water legged
discharge or discharge reducer will provide automatic siphon, draw establishment so long as minimum
start-up flow velocity in the downcomer is to the order of 1 ft/s.
In Figure 4, air entry into the pipe
discharge is prevented. The minimum
flow velocity pulls air bubbles down
the piping, finally evacuating the
downcomer of air and establishing the
siphon draw condition; downcomer
pipe full of water and operating at
subatmospheric pressure.
Unusual application circumstances
will sometimes establish such a low
start-up flow rate (less than 1 ft/s
velocity) that air bubbles are not
carried down the piping. The
downcomer cannot then be emptied of
air and expected siphon draw will never occur.
FIGURE 4. WATER LEG OR REDUCER HELP ESTABLISH
SIPHON DRAW IN DOWNCOMER ON START-UP
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J61
For this circumstance it is necessary
to separately fill the downcomer with
water. This can be accomplished by
valve closure at the piping exit in
combination with a top vent. During
start-up, the exit valve is closed and
the vent opened. After the piping is
filled, the vent is closed and the exit
valve opened.
Siphon Draw Limitation Due to Vapor Pressure; Fluid Boiling
Given sufficiently low subatmospheric pressure, any fluid will flash or boil. Fluid pressure in the
downcomer piping cannot be less than the pressure at which the fluid boils. Fluid vapor pressure thus
provides a siphon draw limitation.
Theoretical cancelable downcomer return static height (due to subatmospheric siphon draw) will vary
dependent on fluid vapor or boiling pressure and on atmospheric pressure as this changes from sea
level. The variation for water as affected by water temperature and height above sea level is shown in
Table 1.
TABLE 1*
Maximum theoretical downcomer return cancelable static height because of siphon draw; water only.
*Figures shown correspond to available fluid head over and above vapor pressure for the water temperature shown.
Cold 105 120 140 160 180 200
0 34.0 31.8 30.0 27.6 23.4 17.0 7.7
1,000 32.8 30.1 29.0 26.4 22.2 15.8 6.4
2,000 31.6 29.1 28.0 25.3 21.0 14.6 5.2
3,000 30.2 28.2 26.8 24.1 19.9 13.5 4.03
4,000 29.2 27.0 25.6 23.0 18.7 12.2 2.82
5,000 28.0 25.6 24.4 21.8 17.5 11.1 1.61
6,000 26.9 24.6 23.2 20.6 16.4 10.0 0.48
7,000 25.8 23.4 22.2 19.4 15.2 8.8 --
8,000 24.6 22.2 21.0 18.2 14.0 7.6 --
9,000 23.4 21.1 19.8 17.1 12.9 6.4 --
10,000 22.2 19.9 18.6 15.9 11.7 5.2 --
Water Temperature (Degrees Fahrenheit)
Height Above
Sea Level (ft)
FIGURE 5. EXIT VALVE & VENT PERMIT START-UP
FILL OF DOWNCOMER PIPING
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J62
Figure 6 illustrates an example tower
schematic for an installation located at
6,000 ft elevation. The tower is to be used
to dissipate heat from 180F water; what is
required pump head?
Reference to Table 1 shows that the
cancelable siphon draw height for 6,000 ft
elevation and 180F water is only 10 ft,
while downcomer return static height is
30 ft.
If conventional pump selection practice were to be followed, the pump selection would be:
WRONG PUMP HEAD = h (AE) + H
o
= 30 ft + 10 ft = 40 ft
It will be noted that this pump selection provides a perfect example of low start-up flow rates; the pump
head will just be enough to raise water to the system top. Start-up flow rate will be insignificant.
Even given the special application precautions previously stated, however, the pump selection would
not work. This is because water flash in the downcomer will prevent establishment of the presumed 30
ft siphon draw head. In this instance, water would flash because the downcomer return static height
exceeds the cancelable siphon draw head (see Table 1; 6,000 ft at 180F = 10 ft).
When downcomer return height exceeds cancelable siphon draw head, it is necessary to separately
evaluate downcomer needs. For these circumstances:
The summation of cancelable siphon draw static height plus downcomer return flow friction loss
must exceed downcomer return height; the excess providing anti-flash pressurization.
The necessary downcomer flow-friction loss would generally be established by a balance valve
positioned close to the outlet (E). This valve will now provide the necessary back pressure to
maintain downcomer fluid pressure at above its boiling or vaporization point.
FIGURE 6. EXAMPLE PROBLEM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J63
For the particular example, a valve pressure drop equal to the order of 23 ft would establish an overall
downcomer return flow-friction loss of 25 ft (23 + 2 = 25).
A 25 ft downcomer flow-friction loss added to the theoretical cancelable height of 10 ft will establish a
pressure over and above boiling of 5 ft at D.
25 ft + 10 ft = 35 ft; 5 ft over static height H
r
= 30 ft
The correct pump head selection now becomes:
PUMP HEAD = h (AD) + h (DE) + h (Valve) + H
o
= 28 ft + 2 ft + 23 ft + 10 ft
= 63 ft
For this particular example, a simpler solution could apply an open vent at D, eliminating need for the
downcomer balance valve and its setting*. Required pump head would then become:
PUMP HEAD = h (AD) + H
o
+ H
r
= 28 ft + 10 ft + 30 ft
= 68 ft
Either correct solution will provide required design flow rates. Design flow rates would not and could not
be established by the conventional head selection of 40 ft.
Pump Piping Basics
In order for a pump to fulfill its fluid flow function, it must be provided with a solid stream of fluid. The
Centrifugal Pump cannot pump fluid and vapor or fluid and air and still provide flow in accordance with
its published curve
1. The pump suction must be under enough pressure so that vapor flash pressure within the pump
(cavitation) is prevented.
2. The pump cannot be expected to provide design flow when large quantities of air are drawn into
the pump suction; as by tower pan vortex, pan draw-down or bypass vacuum.
*In this case, the pump provides an available head at D of 30 ft. This fluid head is available for
downcomer flow and is greater than flow-friction loss in the downcomer (h DE) of 2 ft. Downcomer
return flow friction loss can then be neglected since downcomer fluid will be in free fall.
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J64
In addition to flow capacity reduction, the pump will often be mechanically damaged by shock loads
applied to the impeller or its shaft because of cavitation or air in the suction line.
Large quantities of air in the suction line will break pump shafts in remarkably short order. This is
because the pump impeller alternates between virtually no load when an air gob enters the impeller
casing and an instantaneous shock load of very high order when it slugs against suddenly introduced
water.
There are three basic ways for air to be drawn into the suction piping:
1. Tower bypass into pump suction line.
2. Pan drain-down on start-up.
3. Tower vortex.
Improperly applied tower bypass lines connected directly to the pump suction line can cause
introduction of large amounts of air into the pump. Air can be drawn into the pump suction when
subatmospheric pressures exist at the
bypass and discharge line connections.
When the tower illustrated in Figure 7 is in
full bypass, pressure at B will be above
atmospheric pressure by an amount stated
by static height H
1
. Pressure at C can
become subatmospheric, causing air
suction unless static pressure reduction
caused by height H
2
is counter-balanced
by an equal to or greater flow-friction loss
in the bypass line.
The bypass control valve and bypass
piping should be designed for sufficient
pressure drop to prevent subatmospheric
pressure at C and to cause water to rise
into the water leg when the tower is in bypass.
The desired result will generally be obtained by use of a bypass balance valve with the valve so set
that at full tower bypass, bypass back pressure causes water to rise into the water leg to some set
point as established by a pet cock design observation point.
FIGURE 7. TOWER BYPASS CAN INTRODUCE AIR
INTO PUMP SUCTION ON FULL BYPASS
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J65
It should be noted that tower bypass directly
into the tower pan eliminates any possibility of
air suction into the pump because of bypass
operation and is generally preferred.
Tower pans typically have sufficient water
volume to fill condenser water piping (this
volume is known as pulldown volume and is
available from the tower manufacturer) while
maintaining minimum operating levels in the
pan. If not, however, the pump can drain the
pan dry on pump start-up, or lower pan water
level to the point of starting a vortex. In either
event, air will be drawn into the pump suction,
usually with disastrous results.
Right and wrong applications are (figures 10
and 11) shown concerning the pan drain-down
problem.
In Figure 10, the pump must fill the condenser,
and all return piping each time it starts. In
addition to a non-flooded condenser on start-up,
the pipe and condenser water fill requirement
will almost assure pan drain-down and
consequent suction line air problems.
FIGURE 8. PROPERLY SET BALANCE VALVE
PREVENTS AIR SUCTION INTO PUMP
FIGURE 9. BYPASS TO TOWER PREFERRED
FIGURE 10. WRONG - TOWER PIPING AND
CONDENSER DRAINS INTO AND OVERFLOWS
PAN ON PUMP SHUT-DOWN
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J66
In Figure 11, the check valve prevents
back drainage of the vertical tower
piping, while the water leg prevents
drainage of the inside horizontal
return piping.
As a general rule, tower piping systems
should be fitted with a piping fill line
located at the check valve discharge. The
fill line will provide two functions:
1. It permits filling of the condenser
piping independent of the tower
pan and pump. The hazards
of pan drain-down on initial pump
start-up can be avoided.
2. It is important on chiller start-up that the condenser be flooded on the tower side. Many
condensers are located above the tower pan water level and additional insurance as to a
flooded condenser under these conditions can be provided by use of an automatic fill or
Pressure Reducing Valve. This valve would be set to maintain fill to just below the topmost
piping point. Use of the Pressure Reducing Valve also guards against back drainage problems
as caused by a leaking check valve.
In Figure 11, it will be noted that the manual bleed blow-down valve is located in the top horizontal
return piping run. Bleed will only occur during pump operation. The top or outside horizontal return
piping will always drain to the tower and location of bleed blow-down in this line is to be recommended.
Tower Vortexing; Excessive Exit Velocities
Solution of the back drainage problem does not necessarily solve all pump suction line air problems.
Tower vortexing may still occur when tower pan water level over the pan outlet is insufficient for the
flow rate (outlet or exit velocity) actually taking place.
Tower manufacturers often provide vortex breakers in the tower pans and would generally be able to
guarantee non-vortex operation up to some stated flow rate for a particular tower, its pan and pan exit
pipe size.
FIGURE 11. RIGHT - CHECK, WATER LEG & FILL
PREVENT PIPING TO TOWER DRAINAGE
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J67
In some cases, pump suction line pipe size may be less than pan exit size. Given a bushed down pan
exit, exit velocities may become so high as to cause vortex. Tower exit pipe size should conform to pan
exit size for the order of 10 pipe diameters before reducing to the smaller pump suction line size in order
to insure that intended tower exit velocities are not exceeded.
It would seem important that the engineer state, as a part of his tower specification, that tower be able
to operate without vortex to the design flow rate plus some reasonable increment. It would then be the
engineer's responsibility to provide a pump and piping system combination that establishes some
reasonable facsimile of design flow; at least not to exceed tower manufacturer's requirements.
There are several problems:
1. The initial pump selection head may be overestimated; the less than estimated head causing a
flow increase. In this case, use of the throttle or balance valve illustrated in Figure 11 is
highly recommended.
2. Improper application of tower bypass controls can cause highly variable pumping points and
flow increase possibilities.
Uncontrollable flow increases cannot only cause tower vortex problems, but are also a trouble source
concerning pump cavitation.
Design application points concerning stable pump operation will be evaluated after consideration of the
suction line pressure drop or cavitation problem.
NPSH; Cavitation
It is well known that fluids boil at defined temperature-pressure relationships. For any given fluid at a
given temperature, pressure reduction to some stated value will cause boiling or vaporization.
A pumped fluid can vaporize or flash within the pump itself because of inadequate pressurization. Fluid
vaporization within the pump is generally defined as cavitation and can cause trouble as follows:
1. Pump impeller damage will occur. This is because low pressures in the impeller eye will
cause vapor bubble formation. The vapor bubbles then collapse or implode because of the
pressure increase as the bubbles move into higher pressure areas inside the impeller. These
hammer-like blows against the impeller can cause physical destruction within a short time.
2. The pump curve will change drastically and in an unpredictable manner. Flow can
virtually cease or slug because the pump cannot readily deliver both fluid and vapor.
3. Pump shafts can be broken because of slugging of the impeller against alternate bodies of fluid,
vapor and air.
4. Mechanical pump seal failure can occur because the mechanical seal is asked to work under
intolerable conditions; vapor flash around the seal causes dry operation and rapid wear
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J68
It is most important to successful pump application that adequate (above vaporization) pressures be
maintained within the pump.
The engineering tool used to insure adequate anti-flash pressurization is a term defined as Net
Positive Suction Head (NPSH). NPSH is a rather abstract term which has been subject to much
misunderstanding. Before defining NPSH, it will be worthwhile to establish why the term is necessary.
All pumps operate at a lower pressure in the impeller eye and inlet to the impeller vanes than the
pressure existing at the pump suction flange. Even though pressure at the pump suction flange is
measured and known to be above the flash or vaporization point, the pump can still cavitate because
of the pressure reduction that exists from the suction flange to the pump interior.
Internal pump pressure drop occurs because of greatly increased fluid velocities from the pump suction
flange to and through the impeller eye and because of turbulence, vane entrance friction losses, etc. In
order to prevent cavitation, then, the application engineer must know how much internal pump pressure
drop will occur for his design circumstances and for any of a number of specific pump selection
possibilities.
The pump manufacturers measure of this pressure reduction is called Required NPSH.
Test procedures for establishing Required
NPSH have been standardized and are
carefully followed by pump manufacturers
so as to obtain as true an estimation of
internal pump pressure drop as possible.
Required NPSH is illustrated on pump
curves by several different methods.
Figure 13 shows a separate curve plot of
Required NPSH. This type of illustration
is used when only a single pump capacity
curve is shown.
Regardless of the illustration method,
Required NPSH is not a constant value
for any pump. Similar to valve pressure
drop, Required NPSH will increase with
flow increase.
FIGURE 12. REQUIRED NPSH IS MEASURE
OF PUMP PRESSURE DROP
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J69
Again, referencing to valves, it is well
known that for a given flow rate, a large
valve will cause less pressure drop than a
smaller valve. In a similar manner, pumps
can be considered as small or large by
reference to impeller eye diameter for
intended pumped flow rate. For the same
pumped flow rate, a small pump (small
impeller eye diameter) will have a much
higher Required NPSH than a larger
pump.
Figure 14 provides some important basic
pump application points.
1. Pumps selected to the end of the
capacity curve (Ft Hd vs. GPM)
are being driven to maximum
capability and are the smallest
pump that can provide design flow
rate. The pump is small however,
and establishes a maximum
Required NPSH (pump
pressure drop).
While generally lowest cost,
because of minimum size, the
selection establishes maximum
trouble potential.
2. Pumps selected to the midpoint area of the capacity curve are larger; impeller eye velocity is
reduced and the pump internal pressure drop must be lower.
The pump so selected will cost more than the minimal end of curve selection but will reduce
trouble potential when NPSH or cavitational problems are a consideration.
It should be noted, in passing, that many potential pump application problems other than cavitation are
reduced by midpoint selection: flow balance, noise, etc.
FIGURE 13. REQUIRED NPSH INCREASES AS
FLOW INCREASES THROUGH PUMP
FIGURE 14. DIFFERENCE IN REQUIRED NPSH
FOR SAME FLOW MOST OFTEN DETERMINED
BY PUMP SIZE
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J70
We have thus far established a basic point; that Required NPSH is a description of a specific pumps
internal pressure drop as flow rate through the pump changes. How is knowledge of Required NPSH
used for specific pump application problems?
The fundamental manner in which NPSH is used is simple and direct. An assessment is made by the
application engineer as to the pressure that will be available at the pump suction flange for the given
fluid at design flow rate.
The fluid temperature is also known, and vapor pressure tables define the pressure at which the fluid
will boil.
The difference between the available suction flange pressure and the fluid boiling point is then
determined and defined as Available NPSH. Available NPSH is then the available suction flange
pressure over and above the fluid boiling point pressure.
What this means is that fluid will not flash or cavitate inside the pump so long as the internal pump
pressure drop (Required NPSH) is less than available NPSH.
As an example, a system under design is intended to pump 212F water. The application engineer
states his conclusion, after calculation, that the pump suction flange will be at 12 PSIG pressure during
operation. What is the Available NPSH?
Since 212F water boils at 0 PSIG, the Available NPSH must be 12 PSI; the pump suction flange
pressure will be 12 PSI above the fluid boiling point.
Given that the pump internal pressure drop (Required NPSH) is only 8 PSI, it will be known that the
lowest possible internal pump pressure will still be 4 PSI over the boiling point; the pump will not
cavitate because Available NPSH is greater than Required NPSH.
Suppose, for this example, that a pump is inadvertently selected which has a Required NPSH of 14
PSI at design flow rate. This condition immediately establishes that the internal pump pressure will be
below the boiling point; 12 - 14 = - 2 PSI. The internal pump pressure drop (Required NPSH) is
greater than Available NPSH; pump cavitation will and must occur.
The example illustrates the fundamental reasoning behind NPSH evaluation procedure. It will be noted,
however, that the example has stated NPSH as PSI. This has been done only to clarify fundamental
usage of the terms. NPSH, whether available or required, is never expressed in PSI terms... it is
always stated in terms of ft fluid head.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J71
The reason NPSH is stated in terms of ft fluid head is because of the need for generalization. It would
not be feasible to publish a different pump capacity curve and NPSH curve for an infinite variety of fluids
and, in addition, to provide separate NPSH and capacity curves for all temperature variations with each
separate fluid. This would be needed if pump curves and NPSH data were expressed in terms of PSI.
Pump curves and NPSH data are illustrated as ft head versus GPM because ft fluid head means
differential energy per unit weight of fluid. A pound of water at 85F weighs as much as a pound of
water at 200F or a pound of gasoline at 60F. Pump curves and NPSH data expressed as ft head
versus GPM is then generalized and the pump data established by water test at 85F applies
without change* to water at 200F or 45F, and to gasoline or to a huge variety of fluids within broad
temperature and viscosity ranges.
A typical pump curve, illustrating capacity and Required NPSH is shown as Figure 15.
The need for an ability to apply the developed pump curves to a wide variety of fluids is neatly solved by
use of the term ft head. The solution to the one problem causes other difficulties; especially in NPSH
application. The difficulty has to do with abstract considerations of the term ft head as classically applied
to NPSH evaluations.
NPSH must finally be defined in terms of
ft fluid head. Since this is true, the
classical methods for application of
NPSH data for pump selection is to
convert all pressures to ft fluid head
including vapor pressure and
atmospheric pressure. It is difficult to
picture sea level atmospheric pressure
as equivalent to 34 ft of 60F water head
or to 68 ft of fluid at a fluid specific
gravity of 0.5. The statements of
atmospheric pressure related to ft fluid
head are abstract engineering truths
not concrete, easily visualized truths that
can be mentally referenced to gauge
pressure readings.
*Pumping horsepower will change with fluid density, of course.
FIGURE 15. CAPACITY AND NPSH PUMP CURVE
PLOT APPLIES TO ALL FLUIDS WITHIN BROAD
VISCOSITY RANGE
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J72
Conventional NPSH design evaluations will be avoided in this discussion. This is because of its very
abstract nature. Conventional NPSH evaluation can be a very confusing, time consuming procedure for
the majority of engineers whose NPSH evaluation needs are generally sporadic.
The B&G NPSH evaluation procedure is as theoretically correct as the conventional. It differs in that
the calculation reference is to pump suction, flange pressure expressed in terms of PSIG; gauge
pressure - not absolute.
The reference, or start point for the evaluation is atmospheric pressure at the pump suction supply
level. Simple calculations are then made to determine pump suction flange gauge pressures during
operation. An example problem is illustrated in Figure 16; for 85F tower water.
At sea level, the atmospheric pressure on water at the suction pan will be 0 PSIG.
With tower water at a specific gravity of 1, each 2.3 ft of fluid head = 1 PSI.
For these circumstances, and starting with atmospheric pressure at 0 PSIG; a static fluid head of 2.3 ft
would cause + 1 PSIG to be registered at gauge A. A suction pipe flow-friction loss of 4.6 ft is
equivalent to 2 PSI pressure drop.
FIGURE 16. EXAMPLE PROBLEM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J73
The calculated pump suction gauge pressure reading would then be:
0 + 1 - 2 = -1 PSIG*
The B&G NPSH Chart (Figure 17) is entered at a calculated pump suction gauge pressure of -1 PSIG.
A line is then run vertically to interception with the fluid vapor pressure; for 85F water, this is the order
of 0.6 PSIA.
From this interception point (1) a line is run horizontally to interception with the fluid specific gravity line
as at point (2). (In this case specific gravity = 1). Available NPSH is read at point (2); in this case @ 31 ft.
What has the NPSH Chart
accomplished?
The NPSH Chart has simply taken available
suction pressure and deducted fluid vapor
pressure to establish available pressure over
and above the fluid boiling point. This
available pressure has then been converted
to ft fluid head at the fluid specific gravity.
This is fluid pressure-head over and above
the fluid boiling point and is defined in
conventional pumping terms as Available
NPSH.
*It will be noted that velocity head static pressure reduction (h = V
2
/2g) has not been taken
into account.
Velocity head is a point of concern for the pump manufacturer in his development of Required
NPSH. The pump test engineer reads pump suction gauge pressure, converts this to ft fluid head
and adds velocity head to obtain pump suction pressure as an absolute fluid energy head
statement.
The pump application engineer is not concerned with velocity head in his Available NPSH
calculation, however. This is because he is not working with an actual gauge reading. His
calculation establishes absolute fluid energy head available at the pump suction only when velocity
head is not considered.
Velocity head is only considered for NPSH when an actual gauge reading is used. Velocity head
will also be considered when a suction static pressure calculation is made for fluid flash possibility
in the suction line; but without NPSH reference.
FIGURE 17
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J74
Our example problem now states that we have 31 ft available NPSH. In order for fluid to flash or
cavitate inside the pump, the pump internal pressure drop (Required NPSH) must exceed 31 ft.
To provide a satisfactory pumping system, we need only provide a pump which has a Required NPSH
of less than 31 ft.
This will be a simple proposition since only a remarkably bad end of the curve pump selection would
reach this order of Required NPSH.
The preceding example has important application points as it applies to tower pumping. Before
discussing tower pump suction application requirements, however, use of the B&G NPSH Chart for
fluids other than water and at elevations above sea level should be pointed out.
When any fluid is to be pumped, the engineer will know its specific gravity and its vapor pressure at the
pumping temperature. This data is tabulated in handbooks or is available from the fluid manufacturer.
As an example, an exotic fluid is to be
pumped from an open tank in Denver.
The fluid manufacturer states that at
its pumping temperature, the fluid has
a vapor pressure (boiling pressure) of
5 PSIA and that its specific gravity will
be 0.6. Determine Available NPSH for
the pumping situation illustrated in
Figure 18.
It will be useful to tabulate changes in atmospheric
pressure with elevation above sea level. It will be
noted that atmospheric pressure decreases about
1/2 PSI for every 1,000 ft elevation above sea level.
Elevation (ft) Atmospheric Pressure (PSIG)
0 0
1,000 -0.5
2,000 -1
3,000 -1.5
4,000 -2
5,000 -2.5
6,000 -3
7,000 -3.5
8,000 -4
9,000 -4.5
10,000 -5
FIGURE 18. PUMPING DIAGRAM; EXAMPLE PROBLEM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J75
It will also be useful to tabulate head to PSI relationships for various specific gravities.
The example diagram pump suction pressure would then be established as in Figure 19.
In Figure 19, atmospheric pressure at -2.5
PSIG is unaffected by fluid weight. 10 ft of
fluid head at 0.6 specific gravity will cause
10/3.85 or about 2.6 PSI pressure. Gauge
A must then read 2.6 PSI over
atmospheric pressure or + 0.1 PSIG. The
fluid flow friction loss of 4 ft; (4/3.85) = 1.04
PSI pressure drop so the pump suction
pressure will then read -0.94 PSIG or the
order of -1 PSIG:
(Atmospheric) Static Friction Loss
-2.5 + 2.6 - 1.04 = -0.94 or about -1 PSIG
The B&G NPSH Chart is then entered at -1 PSIG. The next step is to proceed upward to an intersection
with 5 PSIA vapor pressure. A horizontal line drawn from this intersection to a 0.6 specific gravity
establishes that the pump will have an available NPSH of 35 ft.
A pump is then selected which has a Required NPSH of less than 35 ft at the design flow rate.
The B&G NPSH Chart is generalized and can be used for analysis of pump suction requirements for
any fluid and for any piping system; open or closed. It is not limited to cooling tower application.
It would seem that the previous tower NPSH evaluation points out that very simple application rules will
eliminate the need for actual evaluation of NPSH requirements for tower systems.
Fluid Specific Gravity Ft Fluid Head Equal to 1 PSI
1.5 1.5
1.4 1.64
1.3 1.75
1.2 1.9
1.1 2.1
1.0 Usual Water Reference 2.3
0.9 2.6
0.8 2.85
0.7 3.3
0.6 3.85
0.5 4.5
FIGURE 19. PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE; EXAMPLE
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J76
The Tower Pump and Its Suction Line
It is the unusual tower system that has pump suction troubles. Trouble can be experienced, however,
when relatively simple application rules are not followed.
The first pump suction application rule is:
1. LEAVE THE SUCTION LINE ALONE!
So long as the suction line is only pipe and the pump is below the tower pan water level, the available
NPSH will be at least to the order of 30 ft. Any pump selected to a reasonable point on its curve will
work.
High pressure drop units in the pump suction line are generally installed by the amateur in the wreck it
your self approach.
Tower bypass valve, checks, balance valves and fine mesh strainers can almost always be installed in
the pump discharge - and should be.
If it becomes absolutely necessary to install a strainer or check in the suction line, a strong
specification should be stated with respect to minimizing allowable pressure drops.
The second application rule is:
2. PLACE THE PUMP BELOW TOWER PAN WATER LEVEL!
FIGURE 20. RIGHT - LEAVE SUCTION LINE ALONE
FIGURE 21. WRONG - HIGH PRESSURE DROP STRAINER, CHECK,
CONTROL AND BALANCE VALVE IN SUCTION LINE
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J77
In Figure 22, the pan water level is
shown above the pump for both
illustrations. This insures a flooded
pump on start-up. It is best to maximize
H if possible as in b, though even a
minimum H of the order of several
feet static height will still provide a very
high available NPSH (generally above
30 ft) provided the suction line is left
alone, and does not exceed the order
of 5 ft friction-flow loss.
In Figure 23, the pump will not be flooded
on start-up and will, therefore, require
the fill as illustrated. A check valve must
be provided in the suction line to
prevent suction line drainage.
Available NPSH has now been reduced
because the pump is above pan water
level and because a suction line check
or foot valve has become necessary.
The diagramed situation can usually be avoided. If unavoidable, however, a careful NPSH evaluation
should be made and strong specifications made concerning allowable check valve pressure drop.
A third suction line application point is:
3. AVOID ABOVE THE PUMP AIR TRAPS IN THE SUCTION LINE!
Installations as in Figure 24 should,
and usually can be avoided. When
absolutely unavoidable, the
modifications shown in Figure 25 will
prove of help.
FIGURE 22. RIGHT - PUMP BELOW PAN WATER LEVEL
FIGURE 23. PUMP ABOVE PAN WATER LEVEL -
AVOID IF POSSIBLE
FIGURE 24. WRONG - SUCTION LINE AIR TRAPPED
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J78
While the air trapped suction is still not
recommended, the modifications
illustrated in Figure 25 will help alleviate
the otherwise intolerable operating
conditions established in Figure 24.
Careful evaluations as to available
pump suction pressures will have to be
made and strong specifications stated
to allowable check valve pressure drop.
A fourth suction line application point
concerns:
SUCTION LINE STRAINERS
The application point is:
4. AVOID FINE MESH HIGH PRESSURE DROP STRAINERS IN THE SUCTION LINE!
Pump suction line strainers are apparently one of those peculiar be darned if you do and darned if you
dont propositions. There are two conflicting needs.
1. Protection of the system; pumps, valves, condenser, spray nozzles, etc. against dirt and debris.
2. The fact of placing a fine mesh strainer in the suction piping will make a mockery of the most
careful pump suction pressure evaluation. This is because an uncontrollable variable has been
introduced; once the strainer gets clogged cavitation will occur.
The problem is not unsolvable, however, once it is understood that the Centrifugal Pump will pass fairly
large objects. This means that strainer mesh openings from 3/16 to 1/4 can be used if the only
function of the strainer is to protect the pump.
Tower pans are usually provided with an exit strainer (at tower outlet to suction piping) of this mesh
order. Such tower strainers should be specified since they can be watched and are easily cleaned
without piping drainage.
When tower pan strainers cannot be provided, a large mesh low pressure drop strainer can be placed
in the suction line. Such strainers should be strongly specified both as to mesh size (3/16 min.) and
pressure drop.
FIGURE 25. IMPROVED SUCTION LINE
AIR TRAP INSTALLATION
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J79
Fine mesh strainers are often needed for protection of the condenser, its valves and/or spray nozzles.
The fine mesh strainer should be placed at the pump discharge; usually between pump discharge and
the pump check valve. This location will often simplify the work of the operator in removal and cleaning
of the easily clogged basket.
Strainer clog always has and will continue to present operating problems; old newspapers, cottonwood
seeds, tree leaves, etc. seem to find their way with an unerring directional sense to the tower - and
ultimately to the tower strainers.
FIGURE 26. WRONG - FINE MESH
STRAINER IN PUMP SUCTION LINE
FIGURE 27. RIGHT - TOWER
STRAINER PROTECTS PUMP; FINE
MESH PROTECTS CONDENSER,
ETC.
FIGURE 28. RIGHT - LARGE MESH
STRAINER PROTECTS PUMP; FINE
MESH PROTECTS CONDENSER, ETC.
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J80
Several protective measures are available. In addition to locating the tower away from trees and other
potential sources of debris when possible, the tower itself can be screened and a tower overflow can
be used (in place of bleed blow-down) to float off leaves and other debris to drain before they get into
the piping strainers.
The importance of a well designed tower pan strainer and proper maintenance should again be
emphasized.
Given even the best preventative measures, strainers will still become clogged, however, and the
operator should be given simple working tools to determine when strainers need cleaning.
A differential gauge can be placed across the strainer. This can often be set to trigger an alarm under
high pressure differential (clogged strainer) conditions. This is illustrated in Figure 29, together with a
manual differential read-out method.
Predicting Pump Operating Points: The System Curve
Actual pump operating points considerably beyond that stated in the pump specification should be
guarded against. The more than predicted flow rates can cause tower air vortexing and will increase
pump cavitation probability. Increases in system flow rate will decrease available pump suction
pressure and, at the same time, state a need for increased suction pressures.
System curve analysis will be used to point out the importance of the initial specification points; the
importance of balance or throttle valves and the importance of stable operating points. This is because
system operating characteristics may be affected by tower bypass control and other factors.
FIGURE 29. READING STRAINER
PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J81
The closed loop system curve analysis considers only flow-friction loss. Static head losses do not occur
in the closed loop piping circuit.
A closed loop piping circuit is illustrated in Figure 30. The flow-friction or energy head loss is calculated
at 40 ft at a flow rate of 300 GPM.
It should be apparent, for Figure 30, that if
only 150 GPM flow rate occurred, the
flow-friction loss will be less. This is so,
and the change in energy head required to
drive 150 GPM, rather than 300, through
the piping circuit is defined by the basic
flow-friction loss relationship which states:
Friction loss changes as the square of the
flow change.
In other words, a reduction of flow to one half that initially stated means a friction or head loss reduction
to (1/2)
2
or 1/4 that required for design flow conditions. If we reduce flow to 150 GPM, from 300 GPM,
the friction loss for Figure 30 will only be 10 ft (40 x (1/2)
2
= 40 x 1/4 = 10 ft).
This relationship can be set up on a programmable calculator, computer, or the B&G System Syzer,
available at www.bellgossett.com.
Considered in isolation, the changes in system fricton loss can be stated as Ft Head versus GPM in the
tables as below.
The above figures can be plotted on a Ft Head versus GPM chart as in Figure 31 and will illustrate the
piping circuit flow-friction loss or head relationship for the closed loop piping circuit shown in Figure 30.
Design
Flow (GPM) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Ft Head 0 1.1 4.4 10 17.5 27.5 40 54 70
FIGURE 30. FLOW-FRICTON LOSS IN CLOSED
PIPING CIRCUIT DETERMINES REQUIRED PUMP
HEAD; HEIGHT (H) NOT CONSIDERED
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J82
The First Law of Thermodynamics
expressly establishes that:
ENERGY IN EQUALS ENERGY
OUT.
It must then follow the plotting of a
pump curve across the system
curve establishes the point of
operation for that particular pump
when applied to the particular
piping system stated for Figure 30.
The pumping point must be at the
intersection of the pump curve with
the system curve; as illustrated in
Figure 32.
A great many application
observations could be made
concerning closed loop pumping
as shown in Figure 30. Our present
concern, however, is not with the
closed loop but is with the open
loop; in particular the tower piping
circuit. The difference is that we
must take into account the open
or static pumping head.
Supposing now, that we establish
the same flow-friction loss; 40 ft at
300 GPM, as for our previous example - but state this to a tower pumping example with a static or
open circuit pumping head requirement of 13 ft.
FIGURE 31. PLOT OF FLOW-FRICTION LOSS OR
SYSTEM CURVE FOR FIGURE 30
FIGURE 32. INTERSECTION OF SYSTEM CURVE WITH
PUMP CURVE WITH PUMP CURVE IS PUMPING POINT
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J83
Reference should be made to previous discussion concerning determination of open piping circuit
pump head requirements (page J56 to J63).
Given, however, that the flow-friction loss is 40 ft at 300 GPM, we would set up a table exactly as Table
2 for the closed piping circuit analysis. This would describe the flow-friction loss relationship in the piping
circuit shown in Figure 33.
TABLE 3 (Flow-Friction Loss; Figure 33)
It will be apparent, from Figure 33, that water flow cannot occur, until the pump has raised water from
level A to level E; a height of 13 ft.
The open pipe circuit system curve differs from closed loop in that static head loss must be introduced
into the problem.
Static head losses are added to the flow-friction losses to establish total head requirement at various
flow rates. This is illustrated in Table 4 for Figure 33.
TABLE 4
Plotting of total head loss versus GPM establishes then, the open system curve for the piping circuit
defined in Figure 33. The pump curve intersection with the system curve so described illustrates the
actual pumping point. This is again defined by the First Law.
Design
Flow (GPM) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Friction Loss (Ft Head) 0 1.1 4.4 10 17.5 27.5 40 54 70
Flow (GPM) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Friction Loss (Ft Head) 0 1.1 4.4 10 17.5 27.5 40 54 70
Static Head (Ft Head) 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
Total Head Loss (Ft Head) 13 14.1 17.4 23 30.5 40.5 53 70 83
FIGURE 33. TOWER EXAMPLE:
h (AE) = 40 FT; H
o
= 13 FT
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J84
System curve analysis will be of value
in evaluating:
1. Pump operating point shift
due to less than
anticipated flow-friction
loss in the piping circuit.
2. Unstable pump operation
as caused by:
(a) Incorrect tower bypass
arrangements.
(b) Tower bypass with high pressure
drop spray nozzles.
Pump operating points should be stable and as close to that specified as possible in order to set up
design safeguards against tower vortexing and pump suction problems.
Non Bypassed Tower Pump Operating Shift
While tower pump static heads can be easily defined, the flow-friction heads will often be less
determinate.
Installed condenser pressure drop may be less than specified and the pipe friction loss less than
anticipated.
The piping friction loss is often based on a pipe age factor, based on possible interior pipe fouling due
to aerated tower water. The rate of fouling is a relative unknown, leading to divergent engineering
practice.
1. Some engineers design to clean pipe; Hydraulic Institute or B&G System Syzer. The opinion
being that the tower must be treated in order to insure condenser performance and that
chemical treatment will provide against the pipe fouling problem.
2. Others engineers provide an age factor for pipe pressure drop ranging from 50% over clean
data to 100% or twice that used for the closed loop system. Pipe pressure drop data for 15
year old pipe is stated to the order of twice that used for clean pipe.*
* The B&G System Syzer can be used for either clean or aged conditions. When used for 15 year
old pipe, the illustrated friction loss is simply multiplied by 2.
FIGURE 34. OPEN SYSTEM PUMPING POINT
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J85
Unlike the closed loop heat-cool Hydronic System, it does not generally make a great deal of difference
as to whether clean or 15 year old pipe friction loss data is used for the tower system. This is
because pipe friction loss is usually only a small part of the total pump head; system statics and the
condenser providing the major part.
As an illustrative example, a proposed tower system is composed of the following elements concerning
pump head.
Static or Open Head 12
Condenser 25
Valves, Strainer, etc. 7
100 Piping @ 15 Year Old 6
TOTAL HEAD 50
The actual clean pipe pressure drop is only 3 ft, so that the true initial head is 47 ft rather than 50 ft.
The difference (system curve not shown) would cause an increase in flow rate of some 4%; an
insignificant change.
Much more significant and bothersome change can be caused by substitution of a low pressure drop
condenser when the pump head estimate is based on the highest pressure drop condenser unit
expected to be bid.
The same tower system will be evaluated; estimated head will be compared with actual head loss.
Estimated Head Loss Actual Head Loss
Condenser 25 8
Valves, Strainer, etc. 7 7
150 Piping @ 15 Year Old 6 3
Total Flow-Friction 38 18
Static or Open + 12 + 12
TOTAL PUMP HEAD 50 30
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J86
The pump is specified at design flow for 50 ft while the true head loss is only 30 ft. Assuming a design
flow rate of 300 GPM, what will the actual flow be?
A system curve table plot is made following procedures previously provided.
The system curve plot is then as illustrated as
Figure 35.
The pump point shift has increased flow over
design to the order of 45%. Cavitational and/or
tower vortex can occur unless corrective
measures are applied.
The pump impeller diameter could, and should
be cut down to match the pump to the system.
It is more usual, however, to simply throttle the
pump discharge. This leads to a very important
tower application point:
THROTTLE OR BALANCE VALVES SHOULD NOT ONLY BE INSTALLED AT THE PUMP
DISCHARGE; THEY SHOULD BE USED!
Flow (GPM) 0 250 300 350 400 450
Actual Flow-Friction (Ft Head) 0 12.5 18 24.5 32 41
Statics (Ft Head) 12 12 12 12 12 12
Total Head (Ft Head) 12 24.5 30 36.5 44 53
FIGURE 35. EXAMPLE SYSTEM CURVE;
LESS THAN ANTICIPATED PUMP HEAD
FIGURE 36. USE OF THE BALANCE VALVE WILL OFTEN
PREVENT AIR VORTEX AND SUCTION PRESSURE PROBLEMS
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J87
Flow through the tower system can be measured by any of several methods:
1. Pump differential pressure (based on pump curve).
2. Condenser differential pressure (based on manufacturers data).
3. Triple Duty Valve (combination check and throttle) differential pressure (Based on calibrated C
v
data for various valve openings).
Given a stable pumping arrangement, a properly set balance valve will help protect the pump against
many operating problems.
The unstable tower pumping system will be aided by use of the balance valve - but problems may still
occur because of improper tower bypass applications.
Tower Bypass - General Methods
Improperly applied tower bypass control arrangements can cause unstable pump operation and large
volume flow changes through the condenser. Condenser flow change can cause chilled water
temperature control instability, especially for absorption machines, and will greatly increase pump
trouble probability.
There are two basic methods for tower bypass:
1. Bypass to tower pan.
2. Bypass to suction piping.
Bypass to the tower pan will generally be
preferred because of greater flow stability and
because the possibility of air suction into the
pump is greatly reduced (See page J64).
Bypass control valves that are used are:
1. Three way diverting or bypass.
2. Two linked two way valves (usually
butterfly valves) acting as a three way
diverting valve.
3. A single two way butterfly valve placed in the bypass line.
It should be particularly noted that three way mix valves should not be applied to tower bypass control.
Figure 37
FIGURE 37. BASIC TOWER BYPASS METHODS
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J88
The three way mix valve (two inlets; one outlet) should not be used for tower bypass application
because it must be placed in the pump suction line and can cause pump suction pressure problems.
The three way mix valve application is inviting in the sense that the mix valve costs less and is more
readily available than the diverting three way valve. Its actual application is only an invitation to trouble,
however.
Three way diverting (one inlet; two outlets) application is much preferred since this valve will be placed
in the condenser return line (pump discharge) where its operation will not effect pump suction
pressures.
Relatively high cost and limited availability generally confines use of the actual three way diverting
valve to sizes in the general order of 4 inches or less.
For pipe sizes beyond the order of 4 inches or larger, linked butterfly valves are usually provided to
serve the same function.
The single two way butterfly valve is also used for tower bypass; two generalized application
possibilities are shown with the valve installed in the bypass line.
FIGURE 38. THREE WAY MIX - DO NOT USE
FIGURE 39. USE DIVERTING VALVES NOT THREE WAY MIX
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J89
Basic conceptual patterns and valve bypass arrangement possibilities have been presented. The
problem now is to establish application considerations that will eliminate pump instability when bypass
actually occurs. Three working tools are needed:
1. Tower circuit pump head
requirements; static and flow-friction.
These considerations have
already been presented
(page J56 to J63).
2. Tower system curve analysis
methods. This has been illustrated
(page J80 to J84).
3. Knowledge of valve operational
patterns; flow-friction loss as related
to size and valve opening.
This has not been shown.
Bypass Valve Operational Characteristics; Valve Coefficeint (C
v
)
Valve C
v
is a statement of the flow rate necessary to cause a pressure drop of 1 PSI across the valve.
While the pressure drop at C
v
flow rate is
conventionally defined as 1 PSI, it is better for
general system application to consider this in
terms of ft fluid head equivalent. For Hydronic
System work then:
C
v
= GPM FLOW RATE AT 2.3 FT HEAD FRICTION LOSS ACROSS THE VALVE
FIGURE 40. SINGLE BUTTERFLY ALSO
USED FOR BYPASS
FIGURE 41. C
v
RELATIONSHIP
C
v
= Flow rate that causes 1 PSI pressure drop
or
C
v
= Flow rate GPM that causes 2.3 Hd. friction loss
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J90
As with the system curve previously described, a change in flow rate will cause a change in head loss.
Head loss will change as a squared function of flow rate. The tabulated change can be plotted as in
Table 5 for a valve; C
v
=10.
TABLE 5
The points shown in Table 5 can be plotted on a Ft Head versus GPM chart to illustrate the complete
flow-friction loss relationship defined by the specific C
v
= 10.
The curve illustrates that at a flow rate of
20 GPM a pressure drop of 9.3 ft will occur
through a valve rated at 10 C
v
. Curve plots
are generally not necessary, since the B&G
System Syzer will provide this same
information in a single simple setting.
As an example in use of C
v
, a valve is to be
installed for bypass, and application
considerations require that a 20 ft head be
developed across the valve at 300 GPM
design flow rate.
From the B&G System Syzer;
20 ft at 300 GPM = C
v
of 100.
A valve selection for C
v
= 100 will meet requirements.
Valve C
v
information is provided by control valve manufacturers in either tabulated or chart form.
Figure 43 shows a possible plot of C
v
for a line of butterfly valves, 2 inches to 12 inches in size. This
plot illustrates changes in valve C
v
from wide open (90) through various degrees of closure. It should
be understood that this plot simply illustrates the general order of C
v
relationship for butterflies and
should not be used for actual design.
Cv
Flow (GPM) 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Ft Head 0 0.58 2.3 5.2 9.3 14.3 20.5 28 37
FIGURE 42. VALVE FLOW-FRICTION LOSS
RELATIONSHIP DESCRIBED BY C
v
=10
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J91
For a C
v
selection of 100, the following valve sizes can be used:
Actual valve selection would be left to control
people. It is of interest to note, however, that
300 GPM dictates a pipe size of 5 while
valve selection possibilities range down to
the order of 2-1/2; with an increased control
range (movement) for the smaller valve.
This will usually mean more control
precision.
It should be noted that for two way
modulating valves, C
v
changes as the valve
moves from open to closed. This is not true
for a conventional three way valve applied to
modulating service.
Three way valves are designed to a comparatively constant C
v
factor. That is to say; at a constant
differential head a constant total flow will occur through the valve; whether through a single port or
through any combination of port openings.
Directly linked butterfly valves acting as a
three way will not necessarily establish this
same correlation, however. This will be seen
from examination of Figure 43.
A 3 valve at C
v
= 120 will be set for the
order of 60open. This would be the setting
for both the tower valve and its linked bypass
valve when either is open with the other
closed.
Valve Size Cv = 100 @ Approximate Open
5" 34
4" 42
3" 53
2.5" 68
FIGURE 43. APPROXIMATE BUTTERFLY C
v
AS RELATED TO OPEN
FIGURE 44. THREE WAY VALVES ARE
DESIGNED TO CONSTANT C
v
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J92
At 50% position, each valve is positioned at 30and the direct link would state that each valve would
have a C
v
to the order of 30; with a total linked C
v
of 60.
This means, unless precautions are taken, that the linked valves will provide a rising pressure drop
characteristic on bypass. For the example; pressure drop at a 50% open condition for both valves
would be the order of four times that when one valve is open and the other closed.
In terms of tower bypass control, the above means that condenser flow can be reduced when bypass
occurs. The precautions taken are:
1. Use of three way diverting valves when size availability and cost permits.
2. When linked butterfly valves are applied, generally in sizes 4 and above, the valves should
be selected for low pressure drop characteristics at design flow. This will minimize condenser
flow reduction on bypass.
3. Knowledgeable control people will often avoid a single operator with directly linked butterfly
valves. They often prefer individual valve operators with lead-lag operation to reduce C
v
change on bypass.
4. It should be noted that the peculiar characteristic of butterfly valves is sometimes of benefit;
reference page J98.
FIGURE 45. DIRECTLY LINKED BUTTERFLIES CAN REDUCE CONSENSER FLOW WHEN IN
PARTIAL BYPASS AND WHEN VALVES ARE SELECTED TO HIGH P.D.
FIGURE 46. INDIVIDUAL OPERATORS IN LEAD-LAG SEQUENCE HELPS SOLVE
PROBLEM AS DOES LOW P.D. SELECTION
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J93
Tower Bypass; Design for Flow Stability
Working tools have now been provided for analysis of various tower bypass arrangements as they affect
pumping stability. It will again be noted that pumping instability can affect chilled water temperature
control and greatly increases pump trouble potential.
A. BYPASS TO PUMP SUCTION; BYPASS AND CONDENSER BELOW TOWER; TOWER WITH
SPLASH BASIN
A proposed floor below condenser installation is
shown in Figure 47. Bypass is to the pump
suction and it will be noted that the usual check
valve in the tower suction line (AB
1
) has been
omitted for discussional reasons.
PUMP HEAD SELECTION = H
o
+ h (AB
1
) + h (B
1
F) + h (FE)
= 12 + 1 + 27 + 2 = 42 ft
Assume now that the bypass valve is 5 butterfly (selected at line size for 300 GPM) and has not yet
been set by the control contractor; the valve swings to wide open at C
v
= 830 (See Figure 43).
At 830 C
v
and at 300 GPM, the bypass valve would develop only 0.3 ft head resistance and because of
this, trouble could develop.
It will be noted for this example; and for all tower bypass to the pump suction, that complete bypass will
cause the following changes to occur:
1. Tower suction line friction loss will be eliminated because of no flow.
2. Tower discharge line friction loss will be eliminated.
3. Static head will be lost.
FIGURE 47. TOWER BYPASS EXAMPLE
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J94
Pump static head will be lost if bypass valve back-pressure to point F (Figure 47) is insufficient to
maintain a full column of water in the tower line. For our example the levels would change as illustrated
in the following diagrams in which gauge readings are stated in Ft Head.
The pumped piping circuit on bypass has now become a closed loop since all statics have been lost.
FIGURE 47A. PUMP OFF (For Figure 47)
FIGURE 47B. PUMP ON; BYPASS CLOSED (For Figure 47)
FIGURE 47C. PUMP ON; BYPASS OPEN IN VALVE C
v
=830
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J95
The comparative system curves, full tower versus full bypass, can now be illustrated.
SYSTEM CURVE TABLES
1. Full Tower Flow
2. Full Bypass Flow
*Complete loss of all static head as caused by full
bypass operation will cause a shift in pump
operational point as described in Figure 49.
The pumping point shift can be virtually eliminated
with reduced system cost and improved
controllability by proper sizing and setting of the
bypass valve.
Design
GPM 0 100 200 300 350 400
Friction Loss 0 3.4 13.1 30 41 53
Static Loss 12 12 12 12 12 12
TOTAL HEAD 12 15.4 25.1 42 53 65
Design
GPM 0 100 200 300 350 400
Friction Loss 0 3 12 27.3 37 47
Static Loss * 0 0 0 0 0 0
TOTAL HEAD 0 3 12 27.3 37 47
FIGURE 48. TOWER IN TOTAL BYPASS ESTABLISHES
CLOSED LOOP OPERATION; NO STATICS
FIGURE 49. PUMP OPERATING SHIFT
CAUSED BY LOSS OF STATIC HEAD
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J96
When the bypass is to pump suction and is below tower pan level, the following application point
should be observed:
The valve should be selected for design flow at a head approximately equal to system static
pump-height H
o
.
This is the height from tower pan water level to the topmost tower discharge piping. For the example,
described in Figure 47, H
o
is 12 ft. At a design flow rate of 300 GPM, the valve selection point would
be at C
v
= 130.
Reference to Figure 43 illustrates that a 3 valve at 60open will satisfy the requirement. Final
selection should be left to the control engineer, since it is finally and ultimately his responsibility to both
select and set the valve.
It should be pointed out that the valve will often be much smaller than conventional line size. The valve
must remain as the control element in the bypass line, however, and the bypass would be pipe sized to
usual criteria (in this case 5) except for the order of 5 valve size pipe diameters up and downstream of
the valve, which would be valve size.
Given proper bypass valve sizing and setting, the operating pump shift will disappear because the lost
static head is replaced by an introduced flow-friction head.
B. OTHER BYPASS APPLICATION PROBLEMS
1. High System Static Head Requirement
It will be noted that as system static pump
head (H
o
) increases, an intolerable valve
pressure drop situation can be created. This
would be especially true for a winterized
penthouse tower draining into a basement
receiving tank.
The application solution to Figure 50 is a
bypass to the tower sump pan, or to the
gravity drain line at a point directly below
the tower.
FIGURE 50. WRONG - INTOLERABLE VALVE
SIZING SITUATION BECAUSE OF HIGH STATIC H
o
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J97
It will be noted that bypass could be installed as shown in Figure 50 given a reasonable H
o
; a
reasonable valve selection head. This will be defined by the control valve manufacturer and would
generally not exceed the order of 25 ft.
2. High Pressure Drop Spray Nozzle Tower with Bypass
The bypass arrangement in Figure 52 can propose almost insurmountable pumping problems because
of changes in pumping head as bypass occurs.
Pump head requirements for full tower flow will be:
PUMP HEAD = H
o
+ Nozzle h + Friction h
= 10 + 25 + 30 = 65 ft
During bypass, static head H
o
will be lost, as will flow-friction head through the spray nozzles, discharge
piping h (ED) and suction piping h (AB). The only pumping head that will remain will be flow-friction in
the condenser and bypass loop.
FIGURE 51. BYPASS TO TOWER SOLVES
HIGH STATIC HEAD BYPASS PROBLEM
FIGURE 52. BYPASS TO SUCTION WITH HIG
PRESSURE DROP SPRAY NOZZLE; CAN
ESTABLISH INTOLERABLE FLOW INSTABILITY
FIGURE 53. OPEN BYPASS VALVE
ESTABLISHES CLOSED LOOP PUMPING
CIRCUIT WITH LOST STATICS AND LOST
FLOW-FRICTION HEAD THROUGH TOWER
NOZZLES, SUCTION AND DISCHARGE
PIPING
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J98
Given a line sized bypass valve at wide open setting, the new pump head will only be:
PUMP HEAD = 27 + 0.3 = 27.3 ft @ 300 GPM
Pump head has now dropped from 65 ft to the
order of 27 ft at design flow. This will result in
a remarkable flow change as the bypass valve
opens and closes; from a design 300 GPM
with bypass closed to the order of 500 GPM
with an open bypass.
Location of the bypass valve at a high point in
the tower discharge line establishes that the
pump static head H
o
will be a constant factor
and is not lost as in Figure 52.
Linked butterfly valves are illustrated in Figure
54 rather than the conventional diverting valve.
This is because of a previously mentioned characteristic of linked butterflies that will, in this case, aid in
providing flow stability. The characteristic is that linked butterflies will increase flow-friction head
resistance as the valves move from one side open to a modulating or each valve 50% open
position. The characteristic combination valve head increase at 50%, will be to the order of four times
that for only one side open.
When the valves move to a 50% bypass flow, flow-friction head through the spray nozzles will reduce
from 25 ft to the order of 6 ft (50% flow = 25% head). The butterfly valves can now provide the lost
head difference of 19 ft (25 6).
Since the lost spray nozzle head of 19 ft is to be provided at a 50% valve open condition; and since
combined valve resistance head is 4 times that at a one side open condition valve selection will be
to design flow and to lost spray nozzle head divided by four. In this case:
Valve Selection Head = 19/4 = 4.7 ft; say 5 ft
Assuming a design flow of 300 GPM, the example valve selection will be 300 GPM @ 5 ft or C
v
= 200.
This would be line sized butterflies (5) at 50open.
FIGURE 54. BYPASS TO TOWER WITH LINKED
BUTTERFLIES AND BALANCE VALVE PROVIDES
SOLUTION TO FLOW INSTABILITY PROBLEM
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J99
The balance valve illustrated in Figure 54 serves the same function as bypass balance on a
conventional Hydronic three way controlled coil; in this case it is set to spray nozzle pressure drop at
design flow.
The tower piping arrangement is now basically stabilized in terms of pumping flow rates.
(a) Full Tower Flow Pump Head:
Pump Head = H
o
+ h (AD) + Valve h + Spray h
= 10 + 30 + 5 + 25 = 70 ft
(b) Tower @ 50% Bypass
Pump Head = H
o
+ h (AD) + Valve h + Spray h
= 10 + 30 + 20 + 6 = 66 ft
It will be noted that pump head has only decreased from 70 ft to 66 ft. This is tolerable since flow
changes will be insignificant; 300 GPM to 310.
(c) Tower @ 100% Bypass
Pump Head = H
o
+ h (AD) + Valve h + Balance h
= 10 + 30 + 5 + 25 = 70 ft
3. Bypass to Suction; Condenser Above Tower Pan
Severe operating problems can be caused with pump
suction bypass as illustrated in Figure 55. Improper
valve setting will cause air to be introduced into the
pump suction, causing pump air binding and
mechanical pump troubles. These problems have
been described on page J64. Lost statics will cause
further troubles.
The balance valve, when set, minimizes static head
loss problem possibilities. The tower bypass
eliminates any possibility of air draw into the pump
suction as caused by bypass.
4. Condenser Above Tower
FIGURE 55. POSSIBLE PROBLEM
INSTALLATION; BYPASS TO SUCTION
FIGURE 56. BYPASS TO TOWER ELIMINATES
SUCTION AIR DRAW POSSIBILITY AND
REDUCES PUMP HEAD CHANGE
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

P
u
m
p
i
n
g

&
P
i
p
i
n
g
J100
Bypass to the tower should always be
employed when the condenser is located above
the tower.
Given the downcomer return height H
r
is
greater than cancellable siphon return statics,
balance valve #1 would be set in terms of
previous design procedure (page J58).
Balance valve #2 is set for open system height
H
o
; valve pressure drop = H
o
ft for full bypass
flow rate.
The linked butterfly valves would be selected for a low order of pressure drop at full design flow rate in
order to minimize valve pressure drop change effect on total pumping head during partial bypass.
It will be noted that high pressure drop diverting three way valve application may be preferable. The
valves can be much smaller since there is no real concern regarding changed pressure drop on
bypass. Use of a high pressure drop diverting valve would often eliminate the need for balance valve
#1 as shown on Figure 57.
FIGURE 57. OVERHEAD CONDENSER; BYPASS
TO TOWER WITH LINKED BUTTERFLY
Notes for table, opposite page:
Friction Loss
Friction loss can be easily calculated for any length of pipe, as the relationship between friction loss and
length of pipe is proportional. For 200 feet of pipe, for example, the pressure drop is approximately twice
the value given in the table (table values are based on 100 feet lengths of pipe).
Velocity
Velocity will be constant regardless of pipe length, as it is a function of the pipe diameter.
F
r
i
c
t
i
o
n

L
o
s
s

T
a
b
l
e
J101
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
Vel.
Ft. per
Sec.
Loss
in
Feet
2 2.10 7.4 1.20 1.9 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2
4 4.21 27.0 2.41 7.0 1.49 2.14 .86 .57 .63 .26 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4
6 6.31 57.0 3.61 14.7 2.23 4.55 1.29 1.20 .94 .56 .61 .20 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 6
8 8.42 98.0 4.81 25.0 2.98 7.8 1.72 2.03 1.26 .95 .82 .33 .52 .11 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8
10 10.52 147.0 6.02 38.0 3.72 11.7 2.14 3.05 1.57 1.43 1.02 .50 .65 .71 .45 .07 .. .. .. .. .. .. 10
12 .. .. 7.22 53.0 4.46 16.4 2.57 4.3 1.89 2.01 1.23 .79 .78 .23 .54 .10 .. .. .. .. .. .. 12
15 .. .. 9.02 80.0 5.60 25.0 3.21 6.5 2.36 3.00 1.53 1.08 .98 .36 .68 .15 .. .. .. .. .. .. 15
18 .. .. 10.84 108.2 6.69 35.0 3.86 9.1 2.83 4.24 1.84 1.49 1.18 .50 .82 .21 .. .. .. .. .. .. 18
20 .. .. 12.03 136.0 7.44 42.0 4.29 11.1 3.15 5.20 2.04 1.82 1.31 .61 .91 .25 .51 .06 .. .. .. .. 20
25 .. .. .. .. 9.30 64.0 5.36 16.6 3.80 7.30 2.55 2.73 1.63 .92 1.13 .38 .64 .09 .. .. .. .. 25
30 .. .. .. .. 11.15 89.0 6.43 23.0 4.72 11.0 3.06 3.84 1.96 1.29 1.36 .54 .77 .13 .49 .04 .. .. 30
35 .. .. .. .. 13.02 119.0 7.51 31.2 5.51 14.7 3.57 5.10 2.29 1.72 1.59 .71 .89 .17 .57 .06 .. .. 35
40 .. .. .. .. 14.88 152.0 8.58 40.0 6.30 18.8 4.08 6.6 2.61 2.20 1.82 .91 1.02 .22 .65 .08 .. .. 40
45 .. .. .. .. .. .. 9.65 50.0 7.08 23.2 4.60 8.2 2.94 2.80 2.04 1.15 1.15 .28 .73 .09 .. .. 45
50 .. .. .. .. .. .. 10.72 60.0 7.87 28.4 5.11 9.9 3.27 3.32 2.27 1.38 1.28 .34 .82 .11 .57 .04 50
55 .. .. .. .. .. .. 11.78 72.0 8.66 34.0 5.62 11.8 3.59 4.01 2.45 1.58 1.41 .41 .90 .14 .62 .05 55
60 .. .. .. .. .. .. 12.87 85.0 9.44 39.6 6.13 13.9 3.92 4.65 2.72 1.92 1.53 .47 .98 .16 .68 .06 60
65 .. .. .. .. .. .. 13.92 99.7 10.23 45.9 6.64 16.1 4.24 5.4 2.89 2.16 1.66 .53 1.06 .19 .74 .076 65
70 .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.01 113.0 11.02 53.0 7.15 18.4 4.58 6.2 3.18 2.57 1.79 .63 1.14 .21 .79 .08 70
75 .. .. .. .. .. .. 16.06 129.0 11.80 60.0 7.66 20.9 4.91 7.1 3.33 3.00 1.91 .73 1.22 .24 .85 .10 75
80 .. .. .. .. .. .. 17.16 145.0 12.59 68.0 8.17 23.7 5.23 7.9 3.63 3.28 2.04 .81 1.31 .27 .91 .11 80
85 .. .. .. .. .. .. 18.21 163.8 13.38 75.0 8.68 26.6 5.56 8.1 3.78 3.54 2.17 .91 1.39 .31 .96 .12 85
90 .. .. .. .. .. .. 19.30 180.0 14.71 84.0 9.19 29.4 5.88 9.8 4.09 4.08 2.30 1.00 1.47 .34 1.02 .14 90
95 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14.95 93.0 9.70 32.6 6.21 10.8 4.22 4.33 2.42 1.12 1.55 .38 1.08 .15 95
100 .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.74 102.0 10.21 35.8 6.54 12.0 4.54 4.96 2.55 1.22 1.63 .41 1.13 .17 100
110 .. .. .. .. .. .. 17.31 122.0 11.23 42.9 7.18 14.5 5.00 6.0 2.81 1.46 1.79 .49 1.25 .21 110
120 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18.89 143.0 12.25 50.0 7.84 16.8 5.45 7.0 3.06 1.17 1.96 .58 1.36 .24 120
130 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20.46 166.0 13.28 58.0 8.48 18.7 5.91 8.1 3.31 1.97 2.12 .67 1.47 .27 130
140 .90 .08 .. .. .. .. .. .. 22.04 190.0 14.30 67.0 9.15 22.3 6.35 9.2 3.57 2.28 2.29 .76 1.59 .32 140
150 .96 .09 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.32 76.0 9.81 25.5 6.82 10.5 3.82 2.62 2.45 .88 1.70 .36 150
160 1.02 .10 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16.34 86.0 10.46 29.0 7.26 11.8 4.08 2.91 2.61 .98 1.82 .40 160
170 1.08 .11 .. .. .. .. .. .. 17.36 96.0 11.11 34.1 7.71 13.3 4.33 3.26 2.77 1.08 1.92 .45 170
180 1.15 .13 .. .. .. .. .. .. 18.38 107.0 11.76 35.7 8.17 14.0 4.60 3.61 2.94 1.22 2.04 .50 180
190 1.21 .14 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19.40 118.0 12.42 39.6 8.63 15.5 4.84 4.01 3.10 1.35 2.16 .55 190
200 1.28 .15 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20.42 129.0 13.07 43.1 9.08 17.8 5.11 4.4 3.27 1.48 2.27 .62 200
220 1.40 .18 .90 .06 .. .. .. .. .. .. 22.47 154.0 14.38 52.0 9.99 21.3 5.62 5.2 3.59 1.77 2.50 .73 220
240 1.53 .22 .98 .07 .. .. .. .. .. .. 24.51 182.0 15.69 61.0 10.89 25.1 6.13 6.2 3.92 2.08 2.72 .87 240
260 1.66 .25 1.06 .08 .. .. .. .. .. .. 26.55 211.0 16.99 70.0 11.80 29.1 6.64 7.2 4.25 2.41 2.95 1.00 260
280 1.79 .28 1.15 .09 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18.30 81.0 12.71 33.4 7.15 8.2 4.58 2.77 3.18 1.14 280
300 1.91 .32 1.22 .11 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19.61 92.0 13.62 38.0 7.66 9.3 4.90 3.14 3.40 1.32 300
320 2.05 .37 1.31 .12 .. .. .. .. .. .. 20.92 103.0 14.52 42.8 8.17 10.5 5.23 3.54 3.64 1.47 320
340 2.18 .41 1.39 .14 .. .. .. .. .. .. 22.22 116.0 15.43 47.9 8.68 11.7 5.54 3.97 3.84 1.62 340
360 2.30 .45 1.47 .15 .. .. .. .. .. .. 23.53 128.0 16.34 53.0 9.19 13.1 5.87 4.41 4.08 1.83 360
380 2.43 .50 1.55 .17 1.08 .069 .. .. .. .. 24.84 142.0 17.25 59.0 9.69 14.0 6.19 4.86 4.31 2.00 380
400 2.60 .54 1.63 .19 1.14 .075 .. .. .. .. .. .. 26.14 156.0 18.16 65.0 10.21 16.0 6.54 5.4 4.55 2.20 400
450 2.92 .68 1.84 .23 1.28 .95 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20.40 78.0 11.49 19.8 7.35 6.7 5.11 2.74 450
500 3.19 .82 2.04 .28 1.42 .113 1.04 .06 .. .. .. .. .. .. 22.70 98.0 12.77 24.0 8.17 8.1 5.68 2.90 500
550 3.52 .97 2.24 .33 1.56 .135 1.15 .07 .. .. .. .. .. .. 24.96 117.0 14.04 28.7 8.99 9.6 6.25 3.96 550
600 3.84 1.14 2.45 .39 1.70 .159 1.25 .08 .. .. .. .. .. .. 27.23 137.0 15.32 33.7 9.80 11.3 6.81 4.65 600
650 4.16 1.34 2.65 .45 1.84 .19 1.37 .09 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16.59 39.0 10.62 13.2 7.38 5.40 650
700 4.46 1.54 2.86 .52 1.99 .22 1.46 .10 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 17.87 44.9 11.44 15.1 7.95 6.21 700
750 4.80 1.74 3.06 .59 2.13 .24 1.58 .11 .. .. .. .. .. .. 19.15 51.0 12.26 17.2 8.50 7.12 750
800 5.10 1.90 3.26 .66 2.27 .27 1.67 .13 .. .. .. .. .. .. 20.42 57.0 13.07 19.4 9.08 7.96 800
850 5.48 2.20 3.47 .75 2.41 .31 1.79 .14 1.36 .08 .. .. .. .. .. .. 21.70 64.0 13.89 21.7 9.65 8.95 850
900 5.75 2.46 3.67 .83 2.56 .34 1.88 .16 1.44 .084 .. .. .. .. 22.98 71.0 14.71 24.0 10.20 10.11 900
950 6.06 2.87 3.88 .91 2.70 .38 2.00 .18 1.52 .095 .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.52 26.7 10.77 11.20 950
1000 6.38 2.97 4.08 1.03 2.84 .41 2.10 .19 1.60 .10 1.02 .04 .. .. .. .. .. .. 16.34 29.2 11.34 12.04 1000
1100 7.03 3.52 4.49 1.19 3.13 .49 2.31 .23 1.76 .12 1.12 .04 .. .. .. .. .. .. 17.97 34.9 12.48 14.55 1100
1200 7.66 4.17 4.90 1.40 3.41 .58 2.52 .27 1.92 .14 1.23 .05 .. .. .. .. .. .. 19.61 40.9 13.61 17.10 1200
1300 8.30 4.85 5.31 1.62 3.69 .67 2.71 .32 2.08 .17 1.33 .06 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14.72 18.4 1300
1400 8.95 5.50 5.71 1.87 3.98 .78 2.92 .36 2.24 .19 1.43 .06 .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.90 22.60 1400
1500 9.58 6.24 6.12 2.13 4.26 .89 3.15 .41 2.39 .21 1.53 .07 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 17.02 25.60 1500
1600 10.21 7.00 6.53 2.39 4.55 .98 3.34 .47 2.56 .24 1.63 .08 .. .. .. .. .. .. 18.10 26.90 1600
1800 11.50 8.78 7.35 2.95 5.11 1.21 3.75 .58 2.87 .30 1.84 .10 1.28 .04 .. .. .. .. .. . 1800
2000 12.78 10.71 8.16 3.59 5.68 1.49 4.17 .71 3.19 .37 2.04 .12 1.42 .05 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2000
2200 14.05 12.78 8.98 4.24 6.25 1.81 4.59 .84 3.51 .44 2.25 .15 1.56 .06 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 2200
2400 15.32 14.2 9.80 5.04 6.81 2.08 5.00 0.99 3.83 .52 2.45 .17 1.70 .07 1.09 .020 .. .. .. .. .. .. 2400
2600 .. .. 10.61 5.81 7.38 2.43 5.47 1.17 4.15 .60 2.66 .20 1.84 .08 1.16 .027 .. .. .. .. .. .. 2600
2800 .. .. 11.41 6.70 7.95 2.75 5.84 1.32 4.47 .68 2.86 .23 1.98 .09 1.27 .030 .. .. .. .. .. .. 2800
3000 .. .. 12.24 7.62 8.52 3.15 6.01 1.49 4.79 .78 3.08 .27 2.13 .10 1.37 .037 .. .. .. .. .. .. 3000
3200 .. .. 13.05 7.80 9.10 3.51 6.68 1.67 5.12 .88 3.27 .30 2.26 .12 1.46 .041 .. .. .. .. .. .. 3200
3500 .. .. 14.30 10.08 9.95 4.16 7.30 1.97 5.59 1.04 3.59 .35 2.49 .14 1.56 .047 .. .. .. .. .. .. 3500
3800 .. .. 15.51 13.4 10.80 4.90 7.98 2.36 6.07 1.20 3.88 .41 2.69 .17 1.73 .05 .. .. .. .. .. .. 3800
4200 .. .. .. .. 11.92 5.88 8.76 2.77 6.70 1.44 4.29 .49 2.99 .20 1.91 .07 .. .. .. .. .. .. 4200
4500 .. .. .. .. 12.78 6.90 9.45 3.22 7.18 1.64 4.60 .56 3.20 .22 2.04 .08 .. .. .. .. .. .. 4500
5000 .. .. .. .. 14.20 8.40 10.50 3.92 8.01 2.03 5.13 .68 3.54 .27 2.26 .09 .. .. .. .. .. .. 5000
5500 .. .. .. .. .. .. 11.55 4.65 8.78 2.39 5.64 .82 3.90 .33 2.50 .11 .. .. .. .. .. .. 5500
6000 .. .. .. .. .. .. 12.60 5.50 9.58 2.79 6.13 .94 4.25 .38 2.73 .13 .. .. .. .. .. .. 6000
6500 .. .. .. .. .. .. 13.65 6.45 10.39 3.32 6.64 1.10 4.61 .45 2.96 .15 .. .. .. .. .. .. 6500
7000 .. .. .. .. .. .. 14.60 7.08 11.18 3.70 7.15 1.25 4.97 .52 3.18 .17 .. .. .. .. .. .. 7000
8000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 12.78 4.74 8.17 1.61 5.68 .66 3.64 .23 .. .. .. .. .. .. 8000
9000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14.37 5.90 9.20 2.01 6.35 .81 4.08 .28 .. .. .. .. .. .. 9000
10000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15.96 7.19 10.20 2.44 7.07 .98 4.54 .33 .. .. .. .. .. .. 10000
12000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 12.25 3.41 8.50 1.40 5.46 .48 .. .. .. .. .. .. 12000
14000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14.30 4.54 9.95 1.87 6.37 .63 .. .. .. .. .. .. 14000
16000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11.38 2.40 7.28 .81 .. .. .. .. .. .. 16000
18000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 12.76 2.97 8.18 1.02 .. .. .. .. .. .. 18000
20000 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14.20 3.60 9.10 1.23 .. .. .. .. .. .. 20000
U. S.
Gals.
per min.
1 1/4" Pipe
8" PIPE
3" Pipe 4" Pipe
FRICTION LOSS OF WATER IN FEET PER 100 FEET LENGTH OF SCHEDULE 40 PIPE, BASED ON
WILLIAMS & HAZEN FORMULA USING CONSTANT 100. SIZES OF STANDARD PIPE IN INCHES
1/2" Pipe 3/4" Pipe 1" Pipe 1 1/2" Pipe 2" Pipe 2 1/2" Pipe 5" Pipe 6" Pipe
U.S.
Gals.
per min.
20" PIPE
24" PIPE
30" PIPE
10" PIPE
12" PIPE
14" PIPE
16" PIPE
Friction Loss of Water In Ft Per 100
Ft Length (Schedule 40 Pipe)
W
e
t
-
B
u
l
b

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
J102
Reprinted with permission from 2001 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals. Copyright 2001.
This section contains tables that are commonly used for the design and sizing of evaporative cooling
equipment, reproduced from chapter 27 of the 2001 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals.
The data presented in the tables represents different climatic conditions throughout North America. Dry-bulb
temperature data represents the sensible component of outdoor air, whereas wet-bulb temperature data
represents the amount of moisture that the air can evaporate. Evaporative cooling equipment selection is
based on wet-bulb temperature, as units rely on the process of evaporation to reject heat.
Columns in the table are organized to present dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures corresponding to 0.4%,
1% and 2% annual cumulative frequency of occurrence. Each temperature in a column represents the value
that is exceeded by the indicated percentage of hours in a year (8,760). For instance, according to Table 1B,
the wet-bulb temperature in Anniston, Alabama will exceed 79F on average 35 hours (0.4%) in any given
year. As cooling systems must be designed to meet the peak cooling load, most comfort cooling and light
industrial application designs are based on 0.4% annual cumulative frequency of occurrence. This
corresponds to the data found in Column 3a of Tables 1B (United States) and 2B (Canada).
Pages J103 to J112 are Copyright 2001, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc. (www.ashrae.org). Reprinted by permission from 2001 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals.
This text may not be copied nor distributed in either paper or digital form without ASHRAE's permission.
Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J103
Wet-Bulb Data
W
e
t
-
B
u
l
b

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
J104
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J105
W
e
t
-
B
u
l
b

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
J106
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J107
W
e
t
-
B
u
l
b

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
J108
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J109
W
e
t
-
B
u
l
b

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
J110
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J111
W
e
t
-
B
u
l
b

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
J112
C
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n

F
a
c
t
o
r
s
J113
CONVERSION FACTORS
Multiply By To Obtain Multiply By To Obtain
acre 43,560 square feet (ft
2
) joule (J) 9.47810
4
Btu
ampere-hr (A-hr) 3,600 coulomb (C) J 0.7376 ft-lbf
ngstrm () 110
10
meter (m) J 1 newtonm (Nm)
atmosphere (atm) 76.0 cm, mercury (Hg) J/s 1 watt (W)
atm, std 29.92 in, mercury (Hg)
atm, std 14.70 lbf/in
2
abs (psia) kilogram (kg) 2.205 pound (lbm)
atm, std 33.90 ft, water kgf 9.8066 newton (N)
atm, std 1.01310
5
pascal (Pa) kilometer (km) 3,281 feet (ft)
km/hr 0.621 mph
bar 110
5
Pa kilopascal (kPa) 0.145 lbf/in
2
(psi)
barrelsoil 42 gallonsoil kilowatt (kW) 1.341 horsepower (hp)
Btu 1,055 joule (J) kW 3,413 Btu/hr
Btu 2.92810
4
kilowatt-hr (kWh) kW 737.6 (ft-lbf )/sec
Btu 778 ft-lbf kW-hour (kWh) 3,413 Btu
Btu/hr 3.93010
4
horsepower (hp) kWh 1.341 hp-hr
Btu/hr 0.293 watt (W) kWh 3.610
6
joule (J)
Btu/hr 0.216 ft-lbf/sec kip (K) 1,000 lbf
K 4,448 newton (N)
calorie (g-cal) 3.96810
3
Btu
cal 1.56010
6
hp-hr liter (L) 61.02 in
3

cal 4.186 joule (J) L 0.264 gal (US Liq)
cal/sec 4.186 watt (W) L 10
3
m
3
centimeter (cm) 3.28110
2
foot (ft) L/second (L/s) 2.119 ft
3
/min (cfm)
cm 0.394 inch (in) L/s 15.85 gal (US)/min (gpm)
centipoise (cP) 0.001 pascalsec (Pas)
centistokes (cSt) 110
6
m
2
/sec (m
2
/s) meter (m) 3.281 feet (ft)
cubic feet/second (cfs) 0.646317 million gallons/day
(mgd)
m 1.094 yard
cubic foot (ft
3
) 7.481 gallon m/second (m/s) 196.8 feet/min (ft/min)
cubic meters (m
3
) 1,000 Liters mile (statute) 5,280 feet (ft)
electronvolt (eV) 1.60210
19
joule (J) mile (statute) 1.609 kilometer (km)
mile/hour (mph) 88.0 ft/min (fpm)
foot (ft) 30.48 cm mph 1.609 km/h
ft 0.3048 meter (m) mm of Hg 1.31610
3
atm
ft-pound (ft-lbf) 1.28510
3
Btu mm of H2O 9.67810
5
atm
ft-lbf 3.76610
7
kilowatt-hr (kWh)
ft-lbf 0.324 calorie (g-cal) newton (N) 0.225 lbf
ft-lbf 1.356 joule (J) Nm 0.7376 ft-lbf
ft-lbf/sec 1.81810
3
horsepower (hp) Nm 1 joule (J)

gallon (US Liq) 3.785 liter (L) pascal (Pa) 9.86910
6
atmosphere (atm)
gallon (US Liq) 0.134 ft
3
Pa 1 newton/m
2
(N/m
2
)
gallons of water 8.3453 pounds of water Pasec (Pas) 10 poise (P)
gamma (, ) 110
9
tesla (T) pound (lbm,avdp) 0.454 kilogram (kg)
gauss 110
4
T lbf 4.448 N
gram (g) 2.20510
3
pound (lbm) lbf-ft 1.356 Nm
lbf/in
2
(psi) 0.068 atm
hectare 110
4
square meters (m
2
) psi 2.307 ft of H2O
hectare 2.47104 acres psi 2.036 in of Hg
horsepower (hp) 42.4 Btu/min psi 6,895 Pa
hp 745.7 watt (W)
hp 33,000 (ft-lbf)/min radian 180/ degree
hp 550 (ft-lbf)/sec
hp-hr 2,544 Btu stokes 110
4
m
2
/s
hp-hr 1.9810
6
ft-lbf
hp-hr 2.6810
6
joule (J) therm 110
5
Btu
hp-hr 0.746 kWh
watt (W) 3.413 Btu/hr
inch (in) 2.540 centimeter (cm) W 1.34110
3
horsepower (hp)
in of Hg 0.0334 atm W 1 joule/sec (J/s)
in of Hg 13.60 in of H2O weber/m
2
(Wb/m
2
) 10,000 gauss
in of H2O 0.0361 lbf/in
2
(psi)
in of H2O 0.002458 atm
Reprinted with permission from Fundamentals of Engineering (FE) Supplied-Reference Handbook, 6th Edition, Copyright 2003.
F
o
r
m
u
l
a
s

&
T
a
b
l
e
s
J114
Formulas and Tables
Fan Laws:
The fan laws can be used to predict the performance of a tower with a non-standard motor.
X
2
= X
1
* (HP
2
/HP
1
)
1/3
X = GPM, Tons, RPM, or CFM
Formulas
Range = Entering Water Temp - Leaving Water Temp
Approach = Leaving Water Temp - AmbientWB
Heat Rejected by a Cooling Tower:
BTUH = (Flow) X (Range) X 500 X (SG) X (SH)
Note: SG =SH = 1 for water
Refrigeration Tons:
Tons =
Cooling Tower Tons:
Tons =
Basic Electrical:
E= I x R
P = I x E
where: E = voltage (volts) I = current (amps) R = resistance (ohms) P = power (watts)
BTUH
12,000
BTUH
15,000
Did you know?
Cooling tower tons account for the heat of
compression imposed by the chiller in addition to the
building load. The heat of compression is typically
assumed to be a 25% addition, or 3,000 BTUH per ton.
Psychrometric Chart
The psychrometric chart is a graphical representation of the thermodynamic
properties of moist air. It can be used to determine various properties of air,
given just two of the following:
Wet-bulb temperature
Dry-bulb temperature
Dew-point temperature
Relative humidity
Humidity ratio
Specific volume
Enthalpy
The enclosed chart is for sea level and represents normal HVAC temperature
conditions. Psychrometric charts for various altitudes and temperature
conditions are available through the ASHRAE Bookstore at www.ashrae.org.
J115
See www.BaltimoreAircoil.com for an electronic copy of this
psychrometric chart and more:
Up-to-date Product Information and Engineering Data
Product Selection Software (for details, see page J6)
Product Layout Guidelines
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Rigging and Installation Manuals
Press Releases
List of BAC Sales Representatives
Web Downloads
J116
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J117
Temperature Conversions
Fahrenheit to Celcius: Temp
C
= 5/9 (Temp
F
32)
Celcius to Fahrenheit: Temp
F
= 9/5 (Temp
C
) +32
Steel Gauge Thickness
For quick temperature
conversion, see next page.
Gauge Inches
8 0.165
9 0.15
10 0.135
11 0.12
12 0.105
13 0.09
14 0.075
15 0.067
16 0.059
SH
SG
SH
SG
10% 0.957 1.015 0.981 1.009
20% 0.924 1.03 0.96 1.019
30% 0.887 1.045 0.934 1.027
40% 0.849 1.058 0.904 1.034
50% 0.809 1.071 0.868 1.04
Ethylene Glycol Propylene Glycol
Specific Heat and Specific Gravity of Glycol
Water Quality Guidelines
In order to control the cycles of concentration such that BAC water quality guidelines* are maintained, it
will be necessary to bleed or blowdown a small amount of recirculating water from the system. This
bleed water is replenished with fresh make-up water, thereby limiting the build-up of impurities.
The required continuous bleed rate can be calculated using the following formula:
Bleed Rate = Evaporation Rate
Number of Cycles of Concentration -1
Where:
Evaporation Rate = (Flow) * (Range) * 0.001
The evaporation rate can also be estimated as:
2 GPM per 1 million BTU/HR of heat rejection
3 GPM per 100 tons of refrigeration
Water Make-Up Rate = Bleed Rate + Evaporation Rate
* Note: BAC water quality guidelines are available in the applicable Operating and Maintenance
Instructions manual, downloadable from www.BaltimoreAircoil.com.
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n

C
h
a
r
t
J118
In the center column, find the number which corresponds to the base temperature to be converted. The
Celsius equivalent temperature to a Fahrenheit base temperature is in the left column. The Fahrenheit
equivalent temperature to a Celsius base temperature is in the right column.
Temperature Conversion Chart
C
Base
Temperature
(C or F) F C
Base
Temperature
(C or F) F C
Base
Temperature
(C or F) F C
Base
Temperature
(C or F) F
-40 -40 -40.0 -4.4 24 75.2 31.1 88 190.4 66.7 152 305.6
-39.4 -39 -38.2 -3.9 25 77.0 31.7 89 192.2 67.2 153 307.4
-38.9 -38 -36.4 -3.3 26 78.8 32.2 90 194.0 67.8 154 309.2
-38.3 -37 -34.6 -2.8 27 80.6 32.8 91 195.8 68.3 155 311.0
-37.8 -36 -32.8 -2.2 28 82.4 33.3 92 197.6 68.9 156 312.8
-37.2 -35 -31.0 -1.7 29 84.2 33.9 93 199.4 69.4 157 314.6
-36.7 -34 -29.2 -1.1 30 86.0 34.4 94 201.2 70.0 158 316.4
-36.1 -33 -27.4 -0.6 31 87.8 35.0 95 203.0 70.6 159 318.2
-35.6 -32 -25.6 0.0 32 89.6 35.6 96 204.8 71.1 160 320.0
-35.0 -31 -23.8 0.6 33 91.4 36.1 97 206.6 71.7 161 321.8
-34.4 -30 -22.0 1.1 34 93.2 36.7 98 208.4 72.2 162 323.6
-33.9 -29 -20.2 1.7 35 95.0 37.2 99 210.2 72.8 163 325.4
-33.3 -28 -18.4 2.2 36 96.8 37.8 100 212.0 73.3 164 327.2
-32.8 -27 -16.6 2.8 37 98.6 38.3 101 213.8 73.9 165 329.0
-32.2 -26 -14.8 3.3 38 100.4 38.9 102 215.6 74.4 166 330.8
-31.7 -25 -13.0 3.9 39 102.2 39.4 103 217.4 75.0 167 332.6
-31.1 -24 -11.2 4.4 40 104.0 40.0 104 219.2 75.6 168 334.4
-30.6 -23 -9.4 5.0 41 105.8 40.6 105 221.0 76.1 169 336.2
-30.0 -22 -7.6 5.6 42 107.6 41.1 106 222.8 76.7 170 338.0
-29.4 -21 -5.8 6.1 43 109.4 41.7 107 224.6 77.2 171 339.8
-28.9 -20 -4.0 6.7 44 111.2 42.2 108 226.4 77.8 172 341.6
-28.3 -19 -2.2 7.2 45 113.0 42.8 109 228.2 78.3 173 343.4
-27.8 -18 -0.4 7.8 46 114.8 43.3 110 230.0 78.9 174 345.2
-27.2 -17 1.4 8.3 47 116.6 43.9 111 231.8 79.4 175 347.0
-26.7 -16 3.2 8.9 48 118.4 44.4 112 233.6 80.0 176 348.8
-26.1 -15 5.0 9.4 49 120.2 45.0 113 235.4 80.6 177 350.6
-25.6 -14 6.8 10.0 50 122.0 45.6 114 237.2 81.1 178 352.4
-25.0 -13 8.6 10.6 51 123.8 46.1 115 239.0 81.7 179 354.2
-24.4 -12 10.4 11.1 52 125.6 46.7 116 240.8 82.2 180 356.0
-23.9 -11 12.2 11.7 53 127.4 47.2 117 242.6 82.8 181 357.8
-23.3 -10 14.0 12.2 54 129.2 47.8 118 244.4 83.3 182 359.6
-22.8 -9 15.8 12.8 55 131.0 48.3 119 246.2 83.9 183 361.4
-22.2 -8 17.6 13.3 56 132.8 48.9 120 248.0 84.4 184 363.2
-21.7 -7 19.4 13.9 57 134.6 49.4 121 249.8 85.0 185 365.0
-21.1 -6 21.2 14.4 58 136.4 50.0 122 251.6 85.6 186 366.8
-20.6 -5 23.0 15.0 59 138.2 50.6 123 253.4 86.1 187 368.6
-20.0 -4 24.8 15.6 60 140.0 51.1 124 255.2 86.7 188 370.4
-19.4 -3 26.6 16.1 61 141.8 51.7 125 257.0 87.2 189 372.2
-18.9 -2 28.4 16.7 62 143.6 52.2 126 258.8 87.8 190 374.0
-18.3 -1 30.2 17.2 63 145.4 52.8 127 260.6 88.3 191 375.8
-17.8 0 32.0 17.8 64 147.2 53.3 128 262.4 88.9 192 377.6
-17.2 1 33.8 18.3 65 149.0 53.9 129 264.2 89.4 193 379.4
-16.7 2 35.6 18.9 66 150.8 54.4 130 266.0 90.0 194 381.2
-16.1 3 37.4 19.4 67 152.6 55.0 131 267.8 90.6 195 383.0
-15.6 4 39.2 20.0 68 154.4 55.6 132 269.6 91.1 196 384.8
-15.0 5 41.0 20.6 69 156.2 56.1 133 271.4 91.7 197 386.6
-14.4 6 42.8 21.1 70 158.0 56.7 134 273.2 92.2 198 388.4
-13.9 7 44.6 21.7 71 159.8 57.2 135 275.0 92.8 199 390.2
-13.3 8 46.4 22.2 72 161.6 57.8 136 276.8 93.3 200 392.0
-12.8 9 48.2 22.8 73 163.4 58.3 137 278.6 93.9 201 393.8
-12.2 10 50.0 23.3 74 165.2 58.9 138 280.4 94.4 202 395.6
-11.7 11 51.8 23.9 75 167.0 59.4 139 282.2 95.0 203 397.4
-11.1 12 53.6 24.4 76 168.8 60.0 140 284.0 95.6 204 399.2
-10.6 13 55.4 25.0 77 170.6 60.6 141 285.8 96.1 205 401.0
-10.0 14 57.2 25.6 78 172.4 61.1 142 287.6 96.7 206 402.8
-9.4 15 59.0 26.1 79 174.2 61.7 143 289.4 97.2 207 404.6
-8.9 16 60.8 26.7 80 176.0 62.2 144 291.2 97.8 208 406.4
-8.3 17 62.6 27.2 81 177.8 62.8 145 293.0 98.3 209 408.2
-7.8 18 64.4 27.8 82 179.6 63.3 146 294.8 98.9 210 410.0
-7.2 19 66.2 28.3 83 181.4 63.9 147 296.6 99.4 211 411.8
-6.7 20 68.0 28.9 84 183.2 64.4 148 298.4 100.0 212 413.6
-6.1 21 69.8 29.4 85 185.0 65.0 149 300.2
-5.6 22 71.6 30.0 86 186.8 65.6 150 302.0
-5.0 23 73.4 30.6 87 188.6 66.1 151 303.8
S
p
a
r
e

P
a
r
t
s
J119
BAC parts are the Perfect Fit for your cooling tower. These parts are specifically designed, engineered
and manufactured to work in a cooling tower environment. They are the right parts, at competitive pricing
levels, and BAC offers the best deliveries in the industry.
BAC stocks most common repair and retrofit parts in our Central Parts Distribution Center and can ship
other parts, often overnight, from any of three manufacturing facilities strategically located in California,
Delaware, and Illinois. In addition, most BAC Representatives maintain a local inventory of commonly
used parts.
Even with this fast delivery capability, it is still recommended that certain essential, emergency repair parts
be maintained in your local inventory, to minimize any potential downtime.
Basic Recommended Spare Parts
Bearing set
Float valve or repair kit
Float ball
Solenoid valve (if unit equipped with electronic water level control)
Powerband or set of belts
Spray nozzle kit with grommets
Sump heater and low water cut-out
Door gasket
Strainer (inlet and suction)
Fan and drive bushings
Parts to Consider if Extended Downtime is a Concern
Spray pump for coil products
Fan or fan wheels
Fan shaft
Drive sheaves
Fan motor
Replacement Spare Parts
W
a
t
e
r

Q
u
a
l
i
t
y
G
u
i
d
e
l
i
n
e
s
J120
A proper water treatment program, administered under the
supervision of a competent water treatment specialist, is an
essential part of routine maintenance to ensure the safe operation
and longevity of evaporative cooling equipment, as well as other
system components.
In evaporative cooling products, cooling is accomplished by
evaporating a small portion of the recirculating water as it flows
through the unit. As this water evaporates, the dissolved solids
originally present in the water remain behind and, if not controlled,
their concentration will increase rapidly. This can lead to
corrosion, scale or biological fouling which may negatively affect
heat transfer as well as the longevity of the unit and other system
components.
Corrosion Red rust on steel components and white
rust on galvanized surfaces will affect the longevity of the
unit.
Scale formation Scale not only reduces heat transfer and
system efficiency, but may lead to under deposit
corrosion.
Biological Fouling Slime and algae formations may
reduce heat transfer, promote corrosion, and harbor
pathogens such as Legionella.
Each of these aspects of water quality is discussed in greater
detail below. Since the quality of the ambient air and make-up
water varies significantly from job site to job site,
BAC strongly recommends obtaining the services of a
competent water treatment agency prior to the initial start-up
of the evaporative cooling equipment. Additionally, to
protect against the risk of Legionella contamination, the
cooling equipment should never be operated without
adequate biological control.
Corrosion and Scale Control
To control corrosion and scale, the water chemistry of the
recirculating water must be maintained within certain parameters.
The specific measures required vary from system to system and
are dependent on the chemistry of the make-up water, the
metallurgy of the piping and heat transfer devices exposed to the
recirculating water, and the temperatures at which the system will
be operating. Bleed/blowdown, the continuous flow of a small
portion of the recirculating water to a drain, is used to control the
concentration of dissolved solids. On rare occasions this may be
adequate to control scale and corrosion. More often, however,
chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors are necessary, which raise
the allowable level of dissolved solids without the risk of scale and
corrosion.
Chemically treated water should be kept within the guidelines
given in Table 1, or within the limits provided by your water
treatment specialist. In cases where bleed/blowdown alone is
being employed for corrosion and scale control, without chemical
treatment, your water treatment specialist may recommend more
conservative limits than those shown in Table 1.
Chemical treatment programs must
meet the following requirements:
1. The chemicals must be compatible with the unit materials
of construction as well as other materials used in the system
(pipe, heat exchanger, etc.)
2. Chemical scale and corrosion inhibitors, and particularly acid (if
used) should be introduced into the circulating water through
automatic feeders at a point in the system where total mixing and
dilution occur before reaching the evaporative cooling
equipment. The preferred injection point for chemical scale and
corrosion inhibitors is on the discharge side of the system
circulating pump(s). These chemicals should not be batch fed
directly into the units cold water basin or water distribution
system, as this can severely damage areas directly
contacted.
3. When chlorine is added to the system, free residual should
not exceed 1 ppm. Exceeding this limit may accelerate
corrosion.
4. Closed Circuit Cooling Towers and Condensers Only: Unless a
common remote sump is utilized, each cell of a multi-cell coil
product must be treated as a separate entity, even if the cold
water basins are flumed together or equalized.
* Galvanized steel surfaces must be passivated before
operating at pH levels of 8.3 and higher. See Passivation
on next page for details.
Table 1 - Circulating Water Quality Guidelines
for Chemically Treated Water
Water Quality Guidelines
PROPERTY OF WATER RANGE
pH 6.5 to 9.0*
Hardness as CaCO3 30 to 750 ppm
Alkalinity as CaCO3 500 ppm maximum
Total Dissolved Solids 1500 ppm maximum
Conductivity 2400 micromhos
250 ppm maximum as Cl
410 ppm maximum as NaCl
Sulfates 250 ppm maximum
Silica 150 ppm maximum
Chlorides
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J121
Passivation
When new systems are first commissioned, special measures
should be taken to ensure that galvanized steel surfaces are
properly passivated to provide maximum protection from
corrosion. Passivation is the formation of a protective, passive,
oxide layer on galvanized steel surfaces. To ensure the galvanized
steel surfaces are passivated, the pH of circulating water should
be kept between 7.0 and 8.2 for four to eight weeks after start-up,
or until new zinc surfaces turn dull gray in color. If white deposits
form on galvanized steel surfaces after the pH is returned to
normal service levels, it may be necessary to repeat the
passivation process.
Note: Stainless steel units and units protected by the
BALTIBOND
Corrosion Protection System do not require

passivation.
Biological Control
The warm, oxygen and nutrient rich environment inside
evaporative cooling equipment provides an ideal environment
conducive to the growth of algae, slime, and other
micro-organisms. Uncontrolled, this can reduce heat transfer,
promote corrosion, and promote the growth of potentially harmful
organisms such as Legionella. To avoid biological
contamination and minimize the risk of Legionella, a biocide
treatment program should be initiated at start-up, and
administered on a regular basis thereafter in accordance with
the treatment suppliers instructions. Bleed/ blowdown or
chemical treatment used for corrosion and scale control
alone is not adequate for control of biological contamination.
Solid or granular biocides should be introduced through a
chemical "pot" feeder inst-alled in parallel with the system
circulating pump(s). Dilute liquid biocides may be added directly to
the cold water basin. If ozone water treatment is used, ozone
concentrations should not exceed 0.5 ppm.
Start-up, Initial and Following a
Shut-down Period
To minimize the risk of biological contamination during a
shut-down period of three days or more, it is recommended that
the entire system (evaporative cooling equipment, system piping,
heat exchangers, etc.) be drained. To resume operation of a
drained system and at initial start-up, clean all debris from the
cold water basin and fill the system with fresh water. Then execute
one of the following biocide treatment programs while operating
the circulating pump(s) and prior to operating the unit fans:
1. Resume treatment with the biocide that was used prior to
shut-down. Then run the pump only while maintaining the
maximum recommended biocide residual for a sufficient period of
time (residual and time will vary with the biocide) as
recommended by the water treatment supplier. Only after this
treatment period is completed should the fan(s) be started.
2. Check the pH of the circulating water and, if necessary, adjust it
to 7.0 to 7.6. Then, running the pump only, treat the system with
sodium hypochlorite to maintain a level of 4 to 5 mg/l (ppm) free
chlorine (as Cl2) over a six (6) hour period. Test kits that can be
used to measure the free residual of chlorine are commercially
available. Only after this treatment period is completed should the
fan(s) be started.
When it is not practical to drain the system during shutdown
periods, a by-pass line with shut-off valves should be installed to
permit the recirculating water to be circulated throughout the
system, including the unit basin, while bypassing the fill section of
the evaporative cooling equipment (fans should remain off). The
system should be treated per one of the two methods described
above prior to restarting the unit.
System Cleaning for Coil Products
This section is applicable to BAC Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
and Evaporative Condens-ers only.
The outside surface of the heat exchanger coil may require
occasional cleaning. The chemicals used for cleaning must be
compatible with the materials being treated (the outside of a
standard coil is galvanized steel). For specific recommendations
on coil cleaning, consult a qualified water treatment specialist.
When the following precautions are taken, an alkaline solution
used to clean condenser water systems prior to start-up may be
circulated through the coil of a closed circuit cooling tower.
1. Limit the duration of the cleaning to one day.
2. The temperature of the solution should nev-er exceed 100F.
3. The maximum concentration of chemicals in the circulation
solution should not exceed any of the following:
5% Sodium Hydroxide
5% Sodium Metasilicate
2% Sodium Carbonate
2% Tetra Sodium Pyrophosphate
0.5% Trisodium Phosphate
0.5% Sodium Nitrite
10% Butyl Cellosolve
The installation and manufacturing processes commonly used for
field-assembled steel-piped refrigeration systems leave weld
byproducts inside coils and connecting piping. It is common
practice to install filters and/or strainers that remove contaminants
during initial system operation. Shortly after system startup, the
filters and/or strainers should be cleaned or replaced.
M
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

C
h
e
c
k

L
i
s
t
J122
QUICK REFERENCE
Maintenance
Check List
COOLING TOWERS
CLOSED CIRCUIT COOLING TOWERS
EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Check fan bearings and lubricate,
if necessary.
Check tightness and adjustment of
thrust collars on sleeve bearing units
and locking collars on ball bearing units.
Check belt tension and adjust
if necessary. For gear drive units, check
oil level.
Clean strainer (if atmosphere is
extremely dirty, it may be necessary to
clean strainer weekly).
Check for biological growth in basin.
Consult water treatment specialist if
such growth is not under control.
Clean and flush basin.
Check spray distribution system. Check
spray branches and clean as necessary.
Check and re-position nozzles, if necessary.
Check operating water level in the basin
and adjust float valve, if required.
Check bleed rate and adjust
if necessary.
Check fans and air inlet screens
and remove any dirt or debris.
Type of Service: JAN. FEB. MAR. APR. MAY JUN. JUL. AUG. SEPT. OCT. NOV. DEC.
Once a Year: Inspect and clean protective finish inside and out. Look particularly for any signs of
spot corrosion. Clean and refinish any damaged protective coating.
Before undertaking start-up procedures or performing inspection or maintenance of BAC equipment, make certain the power has
been disconnected. Refer to appropriate operating and maintenance manuals and comply with all caution label instructions.
See our website at www.BaltimoreAircoil.com for an electronic copy of the
Quick Reference Maintenance Check List.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J123
Suggestions for Spring Start-Up of
Your Evaporative Cooling Equipment
1. Inspect the Unit.
a. Check position of strainer screens and air inlet screens to be
sure screens have not shifted during shutdown.
b. Check fans, bearings, fan motors, and pumps (if applicable) for
lubrication. See item 5.
c. Rotate all fan shafts by hand to make sure they turn freely.
d. Check fan motors for proper rotation. Directional arrows on fan
cowls or housings indicate correct rotation.
e. Clear fans of any trash or debris that may have accumulated
during shutdown.
f. Check make-up valve for shut-off ability. Check float ball for buoyancy.
g. Check spray nozzles for proper distribution.
h. Check surface for scale, sludge or debris and clean if necessary.
i. Check access door gaskets and replace, if necessary.
j. Check the condition of the cooling tower fill. If it is clogged or
deteriorated, replace it with Factory Authorized Replacement Fill.
2. Inspection of Casing.
a. While the unit is still drained, thoroughly inspect the unit casing.
Clean and touch-up any areas showing signs of deterioration.
For galvanized steel construction units, any damaged area
should be cleaned to bare metal and refinished with Zinc-Rich
Compound (ZRC). This is also the time when any casing joint
leaks can be easily repaired.
b. Remove any deposits that have built up and were not cleared by
flushing the basin. Touch up the area beneath deposits as required.
3. Fill the Cold Water Basin withFresh Water to the
Overflow level.
a. At initial start-up or before restart-up where the basin was
completely drained; the initial biocide treatment should be
applied at this time (see Water Treatment section of the
appropriate maintenance manual).
b. Following a shut-down period, where the basin was not
completely drained: It is recommended that an initial shock
treatment of appropriate biocides be administered at restart-up
to eliminate accumulated biological contaminants.
4. Fill Basin with Water and Check Float
Valve Level.
After the unit has been in operation under load for several days,
operating water level should be checked. Check the Operating and
Maintenance Manual to determine the proper operating water level.
5. Adjust Belt Tension of Fan Motors.
Proper belt tension is determined by pressing against a single belt
midway between sheaves with one finger, which should deflect the
belt 1/2 with moderate pressure. To adjust belts, loosen locknut on
the motor base and rotate the exterior nut as necessary. Re-tighten
locknut and recheck tension.
6. Lubricate Bearings.
a. Sleeve Bearings: Use the BAC oil that was shipped with the unit.
During the first week of operation, refill each bearing cup several
times to saturate the felt wick in the bearing cartridge. DO NOT
USE OILS CONTAINING DETERGENTS FOR LUBRICATION.
b. Ball Bearings: Purge bearings with new grease.
c. Fan Motors/Pumps (If applicable): Lubrication should be in
accordance with motor manufacturers recommendations.
Suggestions for Winterizing
Your Evaporative Cooling Equipment
Provision must be made to protect the water in the basin from
1. freezing when the unit is idle. This can be accomplished by using
a remote sump installed in a heated space or installing steam/hot
water coils or electric immersion heaters in the
tower basin.
All outdoor water lines, including the make-up water line to the
2. unit and drain lines from the unit should be traced with heater
cable and insulated.
During operation, frequent visual inspections of the unit must
3. be performed regularly to:
a. Insure all operating controls are properly set and functioning
normally.
b. Insure the method of freeze prevention is effective.
c. Discover any icing conditions before they develop to the point
where the unit is damaged or system performance is impaired.
A regular preventive maintenance program must be established
4. and carried out despite adverse weather conditions. Items
covered should include:
a. Regular lubrication of moving parts.
b. Regular checking of the make-up value and cleaning of
strainers to prevent high water levels in basin.
c. Regular checking and cleaning of hot water distribution system
to assure uniform flow over unit.
Coil Protection for Closed Circuit
Cooling Towers
Charge the coil with ethylene glycol to prevent the system fluid
1. from freezing. The percentage of ethylene glycol should be
determined based upon the conditions in your area.
If no ethylene glycol is used, adequate* flow through the coil must
2. be maintained so that the temperature of the circulating fluid is
never less than 45F.
During light load periods, artificial heat should be applied
3. directly to the circulating fluid.
A vacuum breaker or air vent should be installed at the high point
4. of the system and an adequately sized drain should be installed
at the low point to permit emergency drainage of the coil.
All outdoor water lines and the spray pump body should be
5. traced with heating cable and insulated.
*See appropriate product information for details.
We would like to emphasize again the importance of frequent, regular
visual inspection of the units while in operation during the winter
months. Early detection of a potential cold weather problem can often
result in a simple, inexpensive remedy now, rather than a major repair
and inconvenience later.
PROPER MAINTENANCE Proper winterizing, Spring start-up procedures, and scheduled periodic maintenance will prolong the life of
the equipment, and ensure the trouble-free performance for which the unit was designed. Detailed instructions for maintenance are given
in the BAC Operating and Maintenance Manual, which is included with every unit shipped. This manual should be read and kept in a
safe place. Additional copies are available from your local BAC Representative.
L
a
y
o
u
t

G
u
i
d
e
l
i
n
e
s
J124
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J125
Air-Conditioning: The control of the temperature, humidity, cleanliness (quality) and movement of air in a confined space.
Airflow: The distribution or movement of air through a space; generally measured in cubic feet per minute (cfm).
Air Handling Unit: The central component of an HVAC system that distributes conditioned air to a variety of destinations.
Algae: Small, usually aquatic plants which require light to grow.
Ambient: The surrounding atmosphere.
Ambient Air Temperature: The surrounding air temperature, such as the outdoor air temperature around a building.
Approach: The difference between the leaving water temperature and the ambient wet-bulb temperature.
ARI: Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
ASHRAE: American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
Biocide: A chemical capable of killing living microorganisms.
Biological Contaminants: Living organisms or agents derived from those organisms (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi, and
mammal and bird antigens) that can be inhaled and can cause many types of health effects including allergicreactions, respiratory
disorders, hypersensitivity diseases, and infectious diseases. Also referred to as "microbiologicals" or "microbials.
Bleed: Water deliberately removed from evaporative cooling equipment to control the concentration of dissolved solids in the
system.
BTU (British Thermal Unit): The amount of heat required to raise or lower the temperature of one pound of water one
degree Fahrenheit.
BTUH (British Thermal Unit Per Hour): Establishes a time reference to BTU input or output. A BTUH is how
many BTUs are used per hour.
Bypass Connection: An inlet connection provided in the cold water basin of a unit that allows recirculating water to bypass
the heat transfer media when system pumps are running but evaporative cooling is not required.
Capacity: The output or producing ability of a piece of equipment. Evaporative cooling capacity is normally referred to in
BTUHs; the capacity at a standard set of conditions is often referred to as "tons of cooling."
Carryover: Excessive drift.
Casing: The exterior panels of an evaporative cooling unit.
Cell: The smallest subdivision of a unit that can operate independently; often multiple cells are used together to form one unit of
a greater capacity.
Celsius (C): A temperature scale based on the freezing (0 degrees) and boiling (100 degrees) points of water. Also known as
Centigrade. Conversion to Fahrenheit: F = 1.8(C) + 32
CFM (Cubic Feet per Minute): A standard measurement of airflow that indicates how many cubic feet of air pass by a
stationary point in one minute.
Charge: The amount of refrigerant placed in a refrigeration unit.
Chiller: A device that produces chilled water to provide cooling for HVAC and industrial applications.
Circulating Water: See Reirculating Water.
Cogeneration: Simultaneous production of two or more forms of useable energy from a single fuel source, e.g., heat energy
and electrical or mechanical power, in the same facility.
Glossary
G
l
o
s
s
a
r
y
J126
Coil: A tube, often including fins, through which gas or liquid is passed, exchanging thermal energy with air or water surrounding it
for heating or cooling purposes.
Cold Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the cold water processed by the evaporative cooling unit.
Combined Flow: The use of both a coil and wet deck surface for heat transfer in a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative
condeser. Combined flow designs reduce evaporation in the coil section.
Comfort Cooling: The process of treating air to control its temperature to meet the comfort requirements of the occupants of
a conditioned space.
Commercial: The commercial sector is generally defined as non-manufacturing business establishments; this classification
includes hotels, restaurants, office buildings, retail stores, educational institutions, etc.
Commissioning: The start-up of a building that includes testing and adjusting HVAC, electrical, plumbing, and other systems
to assure proper functioning and adherence to design criteria. Commissioning also includes the instruction of operating personnel in
the use of the building systems.
Compressor: The pump of a refrigerating mechanism that draws a low-pressure gas on the cooling side of the refrigerant
cycle and compresses the gas into the high-pressure side of the cycle. The compressor maintains adequate pressure to cause
refrigerant to flow in sufficient quantities to meet the cooling requirements of the system.
Conduction: The transfer of heat through a solid material. The transfer of heat energy through a material (solid,
liquid or gas) by the motion of adjacent atoms and molecules without gross displacement of the particles.
Contactor: A switch used to make or break an electrical circuit.
Convection: The movement of heat by airflow.
Cooling Tower: Any device in which atmospheric air and water are distributed together over a heat transfer medium in order
to lower the temperature of the water through evaporative cooling.
Corrosion Inhibitors: Chemicals designed to prevent or slow down the waterside corrosion of metals.
Counterflow: The flow of air is in the opposite direction of the flow of water.
CRN: Canadian Registration Number. This registration is sometimes required on coils shipping into Canada.
Crossflow: The flow of air is at a right angle to the direction of the flow of water.
CTI: The Cooling Technology Institute (CTI) is an organization comprised of evaporative cooling equipment owners and operators,
equipment manufacturers and component suppliers, and water treatment specialists, which advocates and promotes the use of envi-
ronmentally responsible Evaporative Heat Transfer Systems for the benefit of the public through education, research, standards
development, government relations, and technical information exchange.
Current: A flow of electrons in an electrical conductor. The strength or rate of flow is generally measured in amperes.
Damper: A series of movable plates that can be opened or closed to control the flow of air through a space.
Decibel (dB): A decibel describes the relative loudness of a sound. The dimensionless unit of measurement used in noise
control. Logarithmically expresses the ratio of sound level to a reference level (0.0002 microbar).
Defrost Cycle: The process of removing ice or frost buildup from a piece of equipment during the winter months.
Delta (or Delta T or T): A difference in temperature. Often used in the context of the difference between the entering
water temperature and the leaving water temperature of a cooling tower or closed circuit cooling tower.
Demand (Utility): The rate at which electricity or natural gas is delivered to or by a system, part of a system, or piece of
equipment at a given instant or averaged over any designated period of time. Electricity demand is typically expressed in kilowatts.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J127
Demand Billing: The electric capacity requirement for which a large user pays. It may be based on the customer's peak
demand during the contract year, on a previous maximum or on an agreed minimum. Measured in kilowatts.
Demand Charge: The sum to be paid by a large electricity consumer for its peak usage level.
Design Conditions: A set of conditions specific to the local climate and expected building usage, used to calculate the
cooling load for a building.
Dewpoint: The temperature at which air becomes saturated with water and begins to condense, forming a dew.
Drift: The water aerosol carried out of an evaporative cooling unit by the discharge air.
Drift eliminator: A component of most evaporative cooling units that is designed to remove water droplets from the air
passing through it.
Dry-Bulb Temperature (DB): The temperature measured by a standard thermometer. A measure of the sensible tem-
perature of air.
Efficiency: The ratio of the output to the input of any system.
Electric Resistance Heater: A device that produces heat through electric resistance.
Energy: Broadly defined, energy is the capability of doing work. In the electric power industry, energy is more narrowly defined
as electricity supplied over time, generally expressed in kilowatts.
Energy Management System: A control system designed to regulate the energy consumption of a building by
controlling the operation of energy consuming systems, such as the heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), lighting and
water heating systems.
Entering Water Temperature (EWT): The temperature of the fluid as it returns to the evaporative cooling
equipment from the system heat source.
Enthalpy: A thermodynamic function of a system, equivalent to the sum of the internal energy of the system plus the product
of its volume multiplied by the pressure exerted on it by its surroundings.
Equalizer Connection: A connection in the cold water basin of a unit that allows piping (the piping is called an equalizer
line) to be run from that unit to the basin of another unit; equalizer lines serve to correct any difference in water levels that may
develop during operation.
Evaporative Cooling: Cooling accomplished through the exchange of latent heat in the form of evaporation.
External Pulldown Volume: The volume of water in any external piping and heat exchangers that will drain back to the
unit when the pump is shut down, which is equal to the total pulldown volume minus the water suspended in the unit and its
distribution system.
External Static Pressure: The pressure imposed on cooling equipment by external sources such as ductwork and sound
attenuation.
Fahrenheit (F): A temperature scale in which the boiling point of water is 212 degrees and its freezing point is 32 degrees at
normal atmospheric pressure. Conversion to Celsius: C = (F 32)/1.8
Fan, Axial: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades oriented around a central shaft, usually with an aerodynamic
inlet housing; axial fans typically move large volumes of air at low pressures as compared to centrifugal fans for the same fan
horsepower.
Fan, Centrifugal: An air moving device consisting of impeller blades radially oriented parallel to a central shaft, bound with
a rim and hub; centrifugal fans typically move smaller volumes of air than axial fans but at a higher pressure for the same fan
horsepower.
G
l
o
s
s
a
r
y
J128
Fan Coil Unit: A terminal unit that delivers conditioned air directly to the occupied space.
Fan Deck: The finished surface adjacent to a horizontally mounted axial fan, sometimes used as a working surface to perform
maintenance when the proper safety precautions are taken (handrails, ladder, etc.).
Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP): A non-corrosive composite material comprised of a plastic resin matrix,
glass fiber reinforcement and other additives.
Fill: See Wet Deck.
Filtration: The process of separating solids from a liquid by means of a filter media through which only the liquid passes.
Flume Box: A short channel that runs between two cooling towers, allowing water to flow from one cold water basin to another;
a flume box serves to correct any difference in water levels that may develop during operation and generally has a greater capacity
of water flow than an equalizer line.
Forced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On forced draft equipment, the fans are
located at the air inlets to force or push air through the unit.
Fouling: Organic growth or other deposits on heat transfer surfaces causing loss of efficiency.
Frequency: The number of cycles that an alternating current moves through in each second. Standard electric utility frequency
in the United States is 60 cycles per second (60 Hertz).
Full Load Amps (FLA): The current draw of a motor under full load.
GPM: Measure of liquid flow rate (Gallons Per Minute). Typically based on U.S. gallons, sometimes clarified as USGPM.
Heat Exchanger: A device for the transfer of heat energy from the source to the conveying medium.
Heat Pump: A device that is capable of both heating and cooling space, depending on user comfort requirements. Heat
pumps are generally individually controlled and therefore a heat pump in one room may be heating, while a heat pump in an
adjacent room may be cooling.
Heat Transfer: Moving heat from one location to another.
Hertz (Hz): A unit of electromagnetic wave frequency that is equal to one cycle per second.
Horsepower (HP): A unit for measuring the rate of doing work. One horsepower equals approximately 746 watts.
Hot Water Basin: The collection pan that houses the hot water in an evaporative cooling unit with a gravity distribution
system.
Humidity: The amount of moisture in the air.
HVAC: Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
Induced Draft: Refers to the location of the fan(s) on evaporative cooling equipment. On induced draft equipment, the fans
are located on the air discharge side of the equipment to induce air through the unit.
Industrial: The industrial sector is generally defined as manufacturing, construction, mining, agriculture, fishing, and forestry
establishments (Standard Industrial Classification [SIC] codes 01-39).
Interference: The reintroduction of warm discharge air from one evaporative cooling unit into the air inlet of an adjacent unit.
To avoid interference, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed.
Inverter: See Variable Frequency Drive.
ISO 9001: A comprehensive, internationally recognized standard which is concerned with all aspects of quality management in
the design, engineering and manufacturing of a product.
T
e
c
h
n
i
c
a
l

R
e
s
o
u
r
c
e
s
J129
Latent Heat: Heat that causes a change in state when added or removed, but does not cause a change in temperature. For
example, heat that evaporates a substance from a liquid to a vapor but does not increase its temperature.
Leaving Water Temperature (LWT): The temperature of the fluid as it leaves the evaporative cooling equipment to
return to the system heat source.
Legionella: A genus of bacteria; most species of this genus are capable of causing disease in humans. LD, Legionnaires
Disease, is a pneumonia like disease caused by one genus of Legionella.
Life-Cycle Cost: The amount of money required to own, operate and maintain a piece of equipment over its useful life.
Load: The demand for services or performance made on a machine or system, i.e. amount of heat rejection required by the
evaporative cooling equipment
Louver: A series of sloping vanes that allow the entrance of air but prevent the escape of water droplets.
Make-Up Water: Water added to the recirculating water to compensate for losses from evaporation and bleed.
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturing Association.
Nominal Cooling Tower Ton: Defined as 3 gpm of water cooled from a 95F (35C) entering water temperature to an
85F (29.4C) leaving water temperature at a 78F (25.6C) entering wet-bulb temperature.
Nozzle: A device used for regulating and directing the flow of a fluid.
Parts Per Million (PPM): A unit which represents a comparison of mass to mass, volume to volume, mass to volume,
etc.; commonly used to represent the concentration of dissolved solids in the recirculating water of evaporative cooling equipment.
Plenum: The open area of a crossflow evaporative cooling unit through which air is pulled before being discharged to the
atmosphere.
Plume: Saturated discharge air that forms a visible cloud over evaporative cooling equipment under certain
temperature and humidity conditions.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): A polymer of vinyl chloride often used for a heat transfer media surface (film) and piping on
factory-assembled evaporative cooling equipment.
Power: The rate at which energy is transferred. Electricity for use as energy is also referred to as power.
Preventive Maintenance: Regular maintenance implemented to reduce the possibility of sudden or unexpected
equipment failures.
PSI: Pounds per square inch.
PSIA: Pounds per square inch, absolute.
PSIG: Pounds per square inch, gauge.
Pulldown: Water that collects in the cold water basin of a unit when the system pumps shut off.
Pump, Spray: A water moving device on a closed circuit cooling tower or evaporative condenser for transporting the spray
water from the basin to the water distribution system in order to wet the heat transfer surface.
Pump, System: A flow moving device for transporting the fluid to be cooled (water in a cooling tower; water, glycol, or other
fluid in the case of a closed circuit cooling tower) to the tower and back to the system in a continuous loop.
Range: The difference between the entering water temperature and leaving water temperature of an evaporative
cooling unit. See also Delta.
Recirculating Water: The water being circulated over the coil or fill in an evaporative cooling unit.
Recirculation: Situation that occurs when the warm discharge air flows back into the air inlets of the evaporative cooling
equipment. To avoid recirculation, layout guidelines provided by equipment manufacturers should be closely followed.
G
l
o
s
s
a
r
y
J130
Reclaiming: Processing or returning used refrigerant to the manufacturer or processor for disposal or reuse.
Refrigerant: A chemical that condenses from a vapor to liquid and, in the process, decreases in temperature.
Refrigerant Charge: The amount of refrigerant in a system.
Retrofit: Broad term that applies to any change after the original purchase, such as adding equipment or accessories to an
existing installation.
Saturation Temperature: Also referred to as the boiling point or the condensing temperature. This is the temperature at
which a refrigerant will change state from a liquid to a vapor or vice versa.
Scale: The accumulation of solids from the minerals contained in water, most often referred to as hardness deposits, i.e. calcium
and magnesium.
Scale Inhibitor: Chemical added to water to inhibit formation of scale.
Sensible Heat: Heat that causes a change in temperature when added or removed, but does not cause a change in state.
Separator: A device which uses centrifugal force to separate particles from a suspension; used to remove sediment from
evaporative cooling systems.
Setpoint: The temperature to which a thermostat is set to result in a desired heated space temperature.
Sound Attenuator: Component used on the air inlet or air discharge of an evaporative cooling unit to reduce airborne noise.
Specific Heat: In English units, the quantity of heat, in BTU, needed to raise the temperature of one pound of material one
degree Fahrenheit.
Strainer: A filter used to remove large, suspended solids from a liquid.
Subcooled Liquid: Liquid refrigerant that is cooled below its saturation temperature.
Suction Connection: The outlet connection through which leaving water is pumped back to the chiller.
Sump: The cold water basin of the evaporative cooling equipment.
Superheated Vapor: Refrigerant vapor that is heated above its saturation temperature.
Thermal (Energy) Storage: A technology that lowers the amount of electricity needed for comfort conditioning during util-
ity peak load periods. A buildings thermal energy storage system might, for example, use off-peak power to make ice at night, then
use the ice for cooling during the day.
Thermostat: A temperature control device that consists of a series of sensors and relays that monitor and control the functions
of a heating and cooling system.
Ton: A unit of measurement used for determining cooling capacity. One ton of refrigeration is the equivalent of 12,000 BTUs per
hour, or the amount of heat absorbed by melting one ton of ice in twenty-four hours. One cooling tower ton takes the heat of c
ompression into account and is therefore the equivalent of 15,000 BTUs per hour.
Total Pulldown Volume: The sum of the water suspended within the unit and its distribution system during operation, plus
the water in any external piping and heat exchangers draining back to the unit when the pump is shut down.
Valve: Any device used to control the flow of a fluid through piping.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): An electronic device that controls the speed of a motor by controlling the frequency
of the voltage supplied to that motor. Also known as an inverter.
Wet-Bulb Temperature (WB): The temperature at which water, by evaporating into air, can bring the air to
saturation at the same temperature.
Wet Deck: A heat transfer surface where air and water interface; also known as fill.
I
n
d
e
x
K1
A1 Table of Contents
B1 Baltimore Aircoil Company
C1 Introduction to Evaporative Cooling Products
D1 Open Cooling Tower Overview
D7 Series 3000 Cooling Tower Product Report
D8 Series 3000 Open Cooling Towers
D9 Product Introduction
D11 Benefits
D13 Construction Details
D15 Custom Features & Options
D18 Accessories
D21 Engineering Data
D29 Structural Support
D31 Engineering Specifications
D34 Series 1500 Open Cooling Towers
D37 Benefits
D43 Accessories
D52 FXT Open Cooling Towers
D55 Benefits
D59 Accessories
D64 Series V Open Cooling Towers
D67 Benefits
D73 Accessories
D85 Engineering Considerations,
Open Cooling Towers
E1 Closed Circuit Cooling Tower Overview
E7 Advantages of Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
E10 FXV Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
E11 Product Introduction
E13 Benefits
E15 Construction Details
E19 Custom Features & Options
E23 Accessories
E26 Structural Support
E27 Engineering Data
E30 Engineering Specifications
E32 Series V Closed Circuit Cooling Towers
E35 Benefits
E42 Accessories
E56 HXV Closed Circuit Hybrid Cooling Towers
E59 Benefits
E66 Accessories
E76 Engineering Considerations,
F1 Evaporative Condenser Overview
F6 Coil Technology Product Report
F7 Series V Evaporative Condensers
F8 Product Introduction
F10 Benefits
F12 Construction Details
F14 Custom Features & Options
F17 Accessories
F20 Engineering Data
F30 Structural Support
F32 Engineering Specifications
Catalog Index by Page Number
I
n
d
e
x
K2
F35 CXV Evaporative Condensers
F36 Product Introduction
F38 Benefits
F40 Construction Details
F44 Custom Features & Options
F47 Accessories
F50 Engineering Data
F55 Structural Support
F56 Engineering Specifications
F58 Engineering Considerations,
G1 ICE CHILLER

G2 Product Introduction
G4 Benefits
G8 Proven Technology
G12 Construction Details
G14 Engineering Data
G15 Modular Coils
G20 Engineering Specifications
G21 Engineering Considerations, ICE
CHILLER

H1 RS Remote Sump Tanks
H2 Product Introduction
H3 Benefits
H4 Custom Features & Options
H5 Engineering Data
H6 Structural Support
H7 Engineering Specifications
J1 Technical Resources Table of Contents
J2 Connection Guide
J4 Materials of Construction
J6 Selection Software
J8 Cooling Technology Institute
(CTI) Certification
J10 The Value of Standards and Independent
Certification Programs
J12 Selection of a Remote Sump Tank for an
Open Cooling Tower
J16 Selection of a Remote Sump Tank for a
Closed Circuit Cooling Tower or
J20 Fundamentals of Sound
J21 Terminology and Units of Measurement
J22 Establishing the Noise Criterion
J30 Sound Levels for Evaporative
Cooling Equipment
J42 Comparison of Noise Criteria and
Evaporative Cooling Equipment
Sound Levels
J44 Evaporative Cooling Equipment
Sound Control
J55 Piping Considerations Maximum
Fluid Velocity
J56 Cooling Tower Pumping and Piping
J101 Friction Loss Table
J102 Wet-Bulb Temperature Selection
J103 ASHRAE Climatic Design Information,
Table 1B, United States
J111 ASHRAE Climatic Design Information,
Table 1B, Canada
J113 Conversion Factors
J114 Formulas and Tables
J115 Psychrometric Chart
J118 Temperature Conversion Chart
J119 Spare Parts
J120 Water Quality Guidelines
J122 Maintenance Check List
J125 Glossary
Catalog Index by Page Number
P.O. Box 7322, Baltimore, MD 21227 USA Phone: 410.799.6200 Fax: 410.799.6416
Web: www.BaltimoreAircoil.com
P.O. Box 7322, Baltimore, MD 21227 USA Phone: 410.799.6200 Fax: 410.799.6416
Web: www.BaltimoreAircoil.com

BAC Product & Application Handbook Vol 1 - 2005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAC Product & Application Handbook Vol 1 - 2005

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAC Product & Application Handbook Vol 1 - 2005

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What products does Baltimore Aircoil Company provide?

What products does Baltimore Aircoil Company provide?

What are the main sections/chapters covered in the handbook?

What are the main sections/chapters covered in the handbook?

Product & Application Handbook

Thermal Storage Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .G1

Thermal Storage Products

BAC Selection Software

Rigging and Installation Manuals

Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN

Chamber design incorporates a

Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at

Fan System available (see page D16 for details)

Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN

Piping Arrangement with BALANCE CLEAN

Power Train utilizes special

Wet Deck Surface

Corrosion Protection System:

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment

Construction is backed by a comprehensive

Fan Systemconsists of two

Piping Arrangement with

Piping Arrangement with

Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235

Construction: All steel

Piping Arrangement with BALANCE

Chamber (optional): Each tower cell shall be furnished

Fan System (optional): Two-single speed

Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at

Fan System available (see page D42 for details)

Power Train Backed by a five-year fan drive

Power Train utilizes

Wet Deck Surface

Corrosion Protection System:

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment

Power Train. This BAC engineered drive system

Power Train System

Fan Systemconsists of two

Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235

Fan System (optional): Two single-speed

Wet Deck, which provides maximum air/water contact time at

Corrosion Protection System:

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment

Corrosion Protection System:

Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235

Wet Deck Surface

Corrosion Protection System:

Corrosion Protection System, a hybrid polymer coating used to extend equipment

Corrosion Protection System).

Fan System consists of two

Fan System, or two-speed motors are recommended.

Corrosion Protection System. The system shall consist of G-235

Fan System (optional): Two-single speed

Fan System, the independent fan motor option, or two-speed fan

Fan System or the independent fan motor option are

Fan System, two-speed

Fan System available (see page E20 for details)

Power Train Backed by a five-year fan drive and

Power Train utilizes special

Wet Deck Surface